 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| PIC18F85J90 Family Data Sheet 64/80-Pin, High-Performance Microcontrollers with LCD Driver and nanoWatt Technology (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: * * Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip's Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as "unbreakable." * * * Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip's code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer's risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, microID, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PRO MATE, PowerSmart, rfPIC, and SmartShunt are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. AmpLab, FilterLab, Linear Active Thermistor, Migratable Memory, MXDEV, MXLAB, PS logo, SEEVAL, SmartSensor and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, FlexROM, fuzzyLAB, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, PICkit, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICLAB, PICtail, PowerCal, PowerInfo, PowerMate, PowerTool, REAL ICE, rfLAB, rfPICDEM, Select Mode, Smart Serial, SmartTel, Total Endurance, UNI/O, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. (c) 2007, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona, Gresham, Oregon and Mountain View, California. The Company's quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC(R) MCUs and dsPIC(R) DSCs, KEELOQ(R) code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip's quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. DS39770B-page ii Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 64/80-Pin, High-Performance Microcontrollers with LCD Driver and nanoWatt Technology LCD Driver Module Features: * Direct LCD Panel Drive Capability: - Can drive LCD panel while in Sleep mode * Up to 48 Segments and 192 Pixels; Software Selectable * Programmable LCD Timing module: - Multiple LCD timing sources available - Up to 4 commons: static, 1/2, 1/3 or 1/4 multiplex - Static, 1/2 or 1/3 Bias configuration * Integrated Charge-Pump Module with Voltage Boost Low-Power Features: * * * * * * Power-Managed modes: Run, Idle, Sleep Run current down to 9 A, typical Idle current down to 2.5 A, typical Sleep current down to 0.1 A, typical Fast INTOSC startup from SLEEP Two-Speed Oscillator Start-up reduces crystal stabilization wait time Peripheral Highlights: * High-Current Sink/Source: 25 mA/25 mA (PORTB and PORTC) * Sleep current as low as 100nA * Up to Four External Interrupts * Four 8-Bit/16-Bit Timer/Counter modules - Uses Timer1 * Two Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) modules: - Capture is 16-bit, max. resolution 6.25 ns (TCY/16) - Compare is 16-bit, max. resolution 100 ns (TCY) - PWM output: PWM resolution is up to 10-bit * Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) module with two modes of Operation: - 3-wire/4-wire SPI (supports all 4 SPI modes) - I2CTM Master and Slave mode * One Addressable USART module * One Enhanced USART module: - Supports LIN 1.2 - Auto-wake-up on Start bit and Break character - Auto-Baud Detect * 10-Bit, up to 12-Channel A/D Converter: - Auto-acquisition - Conversion available during Sleep * Two Analog Comparators * Programmable Reference Voltage for Comparators Comparators 2 2 2 2 2 2 Special Microcontroller Features: * 1000 Erase/Write Cycle Flash Program Memory, typical * Flash Retention: 20 Years Minimum * Self-Programmable under Software Control * Priority Levels for Interrupts * 8 x 8 Single-Cycle Hardware Multiplier * Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT): - Programmable period from 4 ms to 131s * In-Circuit Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM) via two pins * In-Circuit Debug with 3 Breakpoints via two pins * Operating Voltage Range: 2.0V to 3.6V * On-Chip 2.5V Regulator Flexible Oscillator Structure: * Two Crystal modes, 4-25 MHz * Two External Clock modes, up to 40 MHz * Internal Oscillator Block: - 8 user-selectable frequencies from 31.25 kHz to 8 MHz * Secondary Oscillator using Timer1 @ 32 kHz * Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: - Allows for safe shutdown if peripheral clock fails Program Memory Device Flash # Single-Word (bytes) Instructions 8K 16K 32K 8K 16K 32K 4096 8192 16384 4096 8192 16384 SRAM Data Memory (bytes) 1024 1024 2048 1024 1024 2048 EUSART/ AUSART MSSP Timers 8/16-Bit I/O LCD (Pixels) CCP SPI Y Y Y Y Y Y Master I2CTM Y Y Y Y Y Y 10-Bit A/D (ch) 12 12 12 12 12 12 BOR/ LVD PIC18F63J90 PIC18F64J90 PIC18F65J90 PIC18F83J90 PIC18F84J90 PIC18F85J90 51 51 51 67 67 67 132 132 132 192 192 192 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 Y Y Y Y Y Y (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 1 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY Pin Diagrams 64-Pin TQFP RE7/CCP2(1)/SEG31 RE3/COM0 RE4/COM1 RE5/COM2 RE6/COM3 RD0/SEG0 RD1/SEG1 RD2/SEG2 RD3/SEG3 RD4/SEG4 RD5/SEG5 RD6/SEG6 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 RD7/SEG7 LCDBIAS3 VDD VSS RE1/LCDBIAS2 RE0/LCDBIAS1 RG0/LCDBIAS0 RG1/TX2/CK2 RG2/RX2/DT2/VLCAP1 RG3/VLCAP2 MCLR RG4/SEG26 VSS VDDCORE/VCAP RF7/AN5/SS/SEG25 RF6/AN11/SEG24 RF5/AN10/CVREF/SEG23 RF4/AN9/SEG22 RF3/AN8/SEG21 RF2/AN7/C1OUT/SEG20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 RB0/INT0/SEG30 RB1/INT1/SEG8 RB2/INT2/SEG9 RB3/INT3/SEG10 RB4/KBI0/SEG11 RB5/KBI1/SEG29 RB6/KBI2/PGC VSS OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 VDD RB7/KBI3/PGD RC5/SDO/SEG12 RC4/SDI/SDA/SEG16 RC3/SCK/SCL/SEG17 RC2/CCP1/SEG13 PIC18F63J90 PIC18F64J90 PIC18F65J90 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 RF1/AN6/C2OUT/SEG19 ENVREG RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI AVSS RA3/AN3/VREF+ RA2/AN2/VREF- RA4/T0CKI/SEG14 RC1/T1OSI/CCP2(1)/SEG32 RC6/TX1/CK1/SEG27 RA5/AN4/SEG15 Note 1: The CCP2 pin placement depends on the CCP2MX bit setting. DS39770B-page 2 Preliminary RC7/RX1/DT1/SEG28 RA1/AN1/SEG18 RA0/AN0 AVDD VSS VDD (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY Pin Diagrams (Continued) 80-Pin TQFP RE7/CCP2(1)/SEG31 RD0/SEG0 RH1/SEG46 RH0/SEG47 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 RH2/SEG45 RH3/SEG44 RE1/LCDBIAS2 RE0/LCDBIAS1 RG0/LCDBIAS0 RG1/TX2/CK2 RG2/RX2/DT2/VLCAP1 RG3/VLCAP2 MCLR RG4/SEG26 VSS VDDCORE/VCAP RF7/AN5/SS/SEG25 RF6/AN11/SEG24 RF5/AN10/CVREF/SEG23 RF4/AN9/SEG22 RF3/AN8/SEG21 RF2/AN7/C1OUT/SEG20 RH7/SEG43 RH6/SEG42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 RJ2/SEG34 RJ3/SEG35 RB0/INT0/SEG30 RB1/INT1/SEG8 RB2/INT2/SEG9 RB3/INT3/SEG10 RB4/KBI0/SEG11 RB5/KBI1/SEG29 RB6/KBI2/PGC VSS OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 VDD RB7/KBI3/PGD RC5/SDO/SEG12 RC4/SDI/SDA/SEG16 RC3/SCK/SCL/SEG17 RC2/CCP1/SEG13 RJ7/SEG36 RJ6/SEG37 PIC18F83J90 PIC18F84J90 PIC18F85J90 AVSS RA3/AN3/VREF+ VSS RA1/AN1/SEG18 RA5/AN4/SEG15 RA2/AN2/VREF- RC6/TX1/CK1/SEG27 RA4/T0CKI/SEG14 RC1/T1OSI/CCP2(1)I/SEG32 RC7/RX1/DT1/SEG28 RH5/SEG41 RH4/SEG40 RA0/AN0 RJ4/SEG39 RF1/AN6/C2OUT/SEG19 Note 1: The CCP2 pin placement depends on the CCP2MX bit setting. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI RJ5/SEG38 AVDD ENVREG VDD RJ1/SEG33 RE3/COM0 RE4/COM1 RE5/COM2 RE6/COM3 RD1/SEG1 RD2/SEG2 RD3/SEG3 RD4/SEG4 RD5/SEG5 RD6/SEG6 RD7/SEG7 LCDBIAS3 VDD RJ0 VSS DS39770B-page 3 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY Table of Contents 1.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7 2.0 Oscillator Configurations ............................................................................................................................................................ 29 3.0 Power-Managed Modes ............................................................................................................................................................. 37 4.0 Reset .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 45 5.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 57 6.0 Flash Program Memory .............................................................................................................................................................. 81 7.0 8 x 8 Hardware Multiplier............................................................................................................................................................ 91 8.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 93 9.0 I/O Ports ................................................................................................................................................................................... 109 10.0 Timer0 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 131 11.0 Timer1 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 135 12.0 Timer2 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 141 13.0 Timer3 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 143 14.0 Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) Modules ................................................................................................................................. 147 15.0 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Driver Module ............................................................................................................................. 157 16.0 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) Module .................................................................................................................... 185 17.0 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) ............................................................... 229 18.0 Addressable Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (AUSART) ........................................................... 249 19.0 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D) Module ...................................................................................................................... 263 20.0 Comparator Module.................................................................................................................................................................. 273 21.0 Comparator Voltage Reference Module ................................................................................................................................... 279 22.0 Special Features of the CPU .................................................................................................................................................... 283 23.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 295 24.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 345 25.0 Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................................................................................................... 349 26.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables ....................................................................................................................... 387 27.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 389 Appendix A: Revision History............................................................................................................................................................. 393 Appendix B: Migration Between High-End Device Families............................................................................................................... 393 Index .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 397 The Microchip Web Site ..................................................................................................................................................................... 407 Customer Change Notification Service .............................................................................................................................................. 407 Customer Support .............................................................................................................................................................................. 407 Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 408 Product Identification System............................................................................................................................................................. 409 DS39770B-page 4 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at docerrors@microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: * Microchip's Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com * Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 5 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 6 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW This document contains device specific information for the following devices: * PIC18F63J90 * PIC18F64J90 * PIC18F65J90 * PIC18F83J90 * PIC18F84J90 * PIC18F85J90 The internal oscillator block provides a stable reference source that gives the family additional features for robust operation: * Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: This option constantly monitors the main clock source against a reference signal provided by the internal oscillator. If a clock failure occurs, the controller is switched to the internal oscillator, allowing for continued low-speed operation or a safe application shutdown. * Two-Speed Start-up: This option allows the internal oscillator to serve as the clock source from Power-on Reset, or wake-up from Sleep mode, until the primary clock source is available. This family combines the traditional advantages of all PIC18 microcontrollers - namely, high computational performance and a rich feature set - with a versatile on-chip LCD driver, while maintaining an extremely competitive price point. These features make the PIC18F85J90 family a logical choice for many high-performance applications where price is a primary consideration. 1.1.3 MEMORY OPTIONS 1.1 1.1.1 Core Features nanoWatt TECHNOLOGY All of the devices in the PIC18F85J90 family incorporate a range of features that can significantly reduce power consumption during operation. Key items include: * Alternate Run Modes: By clocking the controller from the Timer1 source or the internal RC oscillator, power consumption during code execution can be reduced by as much as 90%. * Multiple Idle Modes: The controller can also run with its CPU core disabled but the peripherals still active. In these states, power consumption can be reduced even further, to as little as 4% of normal operation requirements. * On-the-Fly Mode Switching: The power-managed modes are invoked by user code during operation, allowing the user to incorporate power-saving ideas into their application's software design. The PIC18F85J90 family provides a range of program memory options, from 8 Kbytes to 32 Kbytes of code space. The Flash cells for program memory are rated to last up to 1000 erase/write cycles. Data retention without refresh is conservatively estimated to be greater than 20 years. The PIC18F85J90 family also provides plenty of room for dynamic application data, with up to 2048 bytes of data RAM. 1.1.4 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET The PIC18F85J90 family implements the optional extension to the PIC18 instruction set, adding 8 new instructions and an Indexed Addressing mode. Enabled as a device configuration option, the extension has been specifically designed to optimize re-entrant application code originally developed in high-level languages, such as `C'. 1.1.5 EASY MIGRATION 1.1.2 OSCILLATOR OPTIONS AND FEATURES Regardless of the memory size, all devices share the same rich set of peripherals, allowing for a smooth migration path as applications grow and evolve. The consistent pinout scheme used throughout the entire family also aids in migrating to the next larger device. This is true when moving between the 64-pin members, between the 80-pin members, or even jumping from 64-pin to 80-pin devices. The PIC18F85J90 family is also largely pin compatible with other PIC18 families, such as the PIC18F8720 and PIC18F8722, as well as the PIC18F8490 family of microcontrollers with LCD drivers. This allows a new dimension to the evolution of applications, allowing developers to select different price points within Microchip's PIC18 portfolio, while maintaining a similar feature set. All of the devices in the PIC18F85J90 family offer six different oscillator options, allowing users a range of choices in developing application hardware. These include: * Two Crystal modes, using crystals or ceramic resonators. * Two External Clock modes, offering the option of a divide-by-4 clock output. * A Phase Lock Loop (PLL) frequency multiplier, available to the External Oscillator modes which allows clock speeds of up to 40 MHz. * An internal oscillator block which provides an 8 MHz clock (2% accuracy) and an INTRC source (approximately 31 kHz, stable over temperature and VDD), as well as a range of six user-selectable clock frequencies, between 125 kHz to 4 MHz, for a total of eight clock frequencies. This option frees the two oscillator pins for use as additional general purpose I/O. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 7 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 1.2 LCD Driver 1.4 The on-chip LCD driver includes many features that make the integration of displays in low-power applications easier. These include an integrated voltage regulator with charge pump that allows contrast control in software and display operation above device VDD. Details on Individual Family Members Devices in the PIC18F85J90 family are available in 64-pin and 80-pin packages. Block diagrams for the two groups are shown in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2. The devices are differentiated from each other in four ways: 1. Flash program memory (three sizes, ranging from 8 Kbytes for PIC18FX3J90 devices to 32 Kbytes for PIC18FX5J90 devices). Data RAM (1024 bytes for PIC18FX3J90 and PIC18FX4J90 devices, 2048 bytes for PIC18FX5J90 devices). I/O ports (7 bidirectional ports on 64-pin devices, 9 bidirectional ports on 80-pin devices). LCD Pixels: 132 pixels (33 SEGs x 4 COMs) can be driven by 64-pin devices; 192 pixels (48 SEGs x 4 COMs) can be driven by 80-pin devices. 1.3 Other Special Features * Communications: The PIC18F85J90 family incorporates a range of serial communication peripherals, including an Addressable USART, a separate Enhanced USART that supports LIN specification 1.2, and one Master SSP module capable of both SPI and I2CTM (Master and Slave) modes of operation. * CCP Modules: All devices in the family incorporate two Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) modules. Up to four different time bases may be used to perform several different operations at once. * 10-Bit A/D Converter: This module incorporates programmable acquisition time, allowing for a channel to be selected and a conversion to be initiated without waiting for a sampling period and thus, reducing code overhead. * Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT): This enhanced version incorporates a 16-bit prescaler, allowing an extended time-out range that is stable across operating voltage and temperature. See Section 25.0 "Electrical Characteristics" for time-out periods. 2. 3. 4. All other features for devices in this family are identical. These are summarized in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2. The pinouts for all devices are listed in Table 1-3 and Table 1-4. DS39770B-page 8 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-1: DEVICE FEATURES FOR THE PIC18F85J90 FAMILY (64-PIN DEVICES) Features Operating Frequency Program Memory (Bytes) Program Memory (Instructions) Data Memory (Bytes) Interrupt Sources I/O Ports LCD Driver (available pixels to drive) Timers Capture/Compare/PWM Modules Serial Communications 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Module Resets (and Delays) Instruction Set Packages 8K 4096 1024 PIC18F63J90 PIC18F64J90 DC - 40 MHz 16K 8192 1024 27 Ports A, B, C, D, E, F, G 132 (33 SEGs x 4 COMs) 4 2 MSSP, Addressable USART, Enhanced USART 12 Input Channels POR, BOR, RESET Instruction, Stack Full, Stack Underflow, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) 75 Instructions, 83 with Extended Instruction Set enabled 64-pin TQFP 32K 16384 2048 PIC18F65J90 TABLE 1-2: DEVICE FEATURES FOR THE PIC18F85J90 FAMILY (80-PIN DEVICES) Features PIC18F83J90 PIC18F84J90 DC - 40 MHz 8K 4096 1024 16K 8192 1024 27 Ports A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J 192 (48 SEGs x 4 COMs) 4 2 MSSP, Addressable USART, Enhanced USART 12 Input Channels POR, BOR, RESET Instruction, Stack Full, Stack Underflow, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) 75 Instructions, 83 with Extended Instruction Set enabled 80-pin TQFP 32K 16384 2048 PIC18F85J90 Operating Frequency Program Memory (Bytes) Program Memory (Instructions) Data Memory (Bytes) Interrupt Sources I/O Ports LCD Driver (available pixels to drive) Timers Capture/Compare/PWM Modules Serial Communications 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Module Resets (and Delays) Instruction Set Packages (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 9 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 1-1: PIC18F6XJ90 (64-PIN) BLOCK DIAGRAM Table Pointer<21> inc/dec logic 21 20 PCU PCH PCL Program Counter 8 PCLATU PCLATH Data Bus<8> Data Latch Data Memory (2.0, 3.9 Kbytes) Address Latch 12 Data Address<12> 4 BSR 12 FSR0 FSR1 FSR2 inc/dec logic 4 Access Bank 12 PORTC RC0:RC7(1) PORTB RB0:RB7(1) PORTA RA0:RA7(1,2) 8 31 Level Stack Address Latch Program Memory (96 Kbytes) Data Latch 8 Table Latch STKPTR ROM Latch Instruction Bus <16> IR Address Decode PORTD RD0:RD7(1) 8 Instruction Decode and Control State Machine Control Signals PRODH PRODL 3 BITOP 8 8 ALU<8> 8 8 x 8 Multiply 8 W 8 8 PORTF RF1:RF7(1) PORTE RE0:RE1, RE3:RE7(1) OSC2/CLKO OSC1/CLKI Timing Generation INTRC Oscillator 8 MHz Oscillator Precision Band Gap Reference Power-up Timer Oscillator Start-up Timer Power-on Reset Watchdog Timer BOR and LVD(3) 8 ENVREG Voltage Regulator PORTG RG0:RG4(1) VDDCORE/VCAP VDD, VSS MCLR Timer0 Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 ADC 10-bit Comparators CCP1 CCP2 AUSART EUSART MSSP LCD Driver Note 1: 2: 3: See Table 1-3 for I/O port pin descriptions. RA6 and RA7 are only available as digital I/O in select oscillator modes. See Section 2.0 "Oscillator Configurations" for more information Brown-out Reset and Low-Voltage Detect functions are provided when the on-board voltage regulator is enabled. DS39770B-page 10 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 1-2: PIC18F8XJ90 (80-PIN) BLOCK DIAGRAM Table Pointer<21> inc/dec logic 21 20 PCU PCH PCL Program Counter 8 PCLATU PCLATH Data Bus<8> Data Latch Data Memory (2.0, 3.9 Kbytes) Address Latch 12 Data Address<12> 4 BSR 12 FSR0 FSR1 FSR2 inc/dec logic 4 Access Bank 12 PORTA RA0:RA7(1,2) 8 PORTB RB0:RB7(1) 31 Level Stack Address Latch Program Memory (96 Kbytes) Data Latch 8 Table Latch PORTC RC0:RC7(1) STKPTR PORTD RD0:RD7(1) ROM Latch Instruction Bus <16> IR Address Decode PORTE RE0:RE1, RE3:RE7(1) 8 State Machine Control Signals PRODH PRODL 3 BITOP 8 8 ALU<8> 8 8 x 8 Multiply 8 W 8 8 PORTG RG0:RG4(1) 8 PORTH RH0:RH7(1) Instruction Decode and Control PORTF RF1:RF7(1) OSC2/CLKO OSC1/CLKI Timing Generation INTRC Oscillator 8 MHz Oscillator Precision Band Gap Reference Power-up Timer Oscillator Start-up Timer Power-on Reset Watchdog Timer BOR and LVD(3) ENVREG Voltage Regulator PORTJ VDDCORE/VCAP VDD,VSS MCLR RJ0:RJ7(1) Timer0 Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 ADC 10-bit Comparators CCP1 CCP2 AUSART EUSART MSSP LCD Driver Note 1: 2: 3: See Table 1-3 for I/O port pin descriptions. RA6 and RA7 are only available as digital I/O in select oscillator modes. See Section 2.0 "Oscillator Configurations" for more information. Brown-out Reset and Low-Voltage Detect functions are provided when the on-board voltage regulator is enabled. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 11 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Number Pin Name TQFP MCLR OSC1/CLKI/RA7 OSC1 CLKI 7 39 I I CMOS CMOS Pin Buffer Type Type I ST Description Master Clear (input) or programming voltage (input). This pin is an active-low Reset to the device. Oscillator crystal or external clock input. Oscillator crystal input. External clock source input. Always associated with pin function OSC1. (See related OSC1/CLKI, OSC2/CLKO pins.) General purpose I/O pin. Oscillator crystal or clock output. Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. In EC modes, OSC2 pin outputs CLKO, which has 1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction cycle rate. General purpose I/O pin. PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port. RA0/AN0 RA0 AN0 RA1/AN1/SEG18 RA1 AN1 SEG18 RA2/AN2/VREFRA2 AN2 VREFRA3/AN3/VREF+ RA3 AN3 VREF+ RA4/T0CKI/SEG14 RA4 T0CKI SEG14 RA5/AN4/SEG15 RA5 AN4 SEG15 RA6 RA7 24 I/O I 23 I/O I O 22 I/O I I 21 I/O I I 28 I/O I O 27 I/O I O TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 4. SEG15 output for LCD. See the OSC2/CLKO/RA6 pin. See the OSC1/CLKI/RA7 pin. ST/OD ST Analog Digital I/O. Open-drain when configured as output. Timer0 external clock input. SEG14 output for LCD. TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 3. A/D reference voltage (High) input. TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 2. A/D reference voltage (Low) input. TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 1. SEG18 output for LCD. TTL Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 0. RA7 OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC2 CLKO 40 I/O O O TTL -- -- RA6 I/O TTL Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. DS39770B-page 12 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. PORTB can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs. RB0/INT0/SEG30 RB0 INT0 SEG30 RB1/INT1/SEG8 RB1 INT1 SEG8 RB2/INT2/SEG9 RB2 INT2 SEG9 RB3/INT3/SEG10 RB3 INT3 SEG10 RB4/KBI0/SEG11 RB4 KBI0 SEG11 RB5/KBI1/SEG29 RB5 KBI1 SEG29 RB6/KBI2/PGC RB6 KBI2 PGC RB7/KBI3/PGD RB7 KBI3 PGD 48 I/O I O 47 I/O I O 46 I/O I O 45 I/O I O 44 I/O I O 43 I/O I O 42 I/O I I/O 37 I/O I I/O TTL TTL ST Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming data pin. TTL TTL ST Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSPTM programming clock pin. TTL TTL Analog Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. SEG29 output for LCD. TTL TTL Analog Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. SEG11 output for LCD. TTL ST Analog Digital I/O. External interrupt 3. SEG10 output for LCD. TTL ST Analog Digital I/O. External interrupt 2. SEG9 output for LCD. TTL ST Analog Digital I/O. External interrupt 1. SEG8 output for LCD. TTL ST Analog Digital I/O. External interrupt 0. SEG30 output for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 13 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port. RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI RC0 T1OSO T13CKI RC1/T1OSI/CCP2/SEG32 RC1 T1OSI CCP2(1) SEG32 RC2/CCP1/SEG13 RC2 CCP1 SEG13 RC3/SCK/SCL/SEG17 RC3 SCK SCL SEG17 RC4/SDI/SDA/SEG16 RC4 SDI SDA SEG16 RC5/SDO/SEG12 RC5 SDO SEG12 RC6/TX1/CK1/SEG27 RC6 TX1 CK1 SEG27 RC7/RX1/DT1/SEG28 RC7 RX1 DT1 SEG28 30 I/O O I 29 I/O I I/O O 33 I/O I/O O 34 I/O I/O I/O O 35 I/O I I/O O 36 I/O O O 31 I/O O I/O O 32 I/O I I/O O ST ST ST Analog Digital I/O. EUSART asynchronous receive. EUSART synchronous data (see related TX1/CK1). SEG28 output for LCD. ST -- ST Analog Digital I/O. EUSART asynchronous transmit. EUSART synchronous clock (see related RX1/DT1). SEG27 output for LCD. ST -- Analog Digital I/O. SPI data out. SEG12 output for LCD. ST ST ST Analog Digital I/O. SPI data in. I2C data I/O. SEG16 output for LCD. ST ST ST Analog Digital I/O. Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode. Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2CTM mode. SEG17 output for LCD. ST ST Analog Digital I/O. Capture1 input/Compare1 output/PWM1 output. SEG13 output for LCD. ST CMOS ST Analog Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator input. Capture2 input/Compare2 output/PWM2 output. SEG32 output for LCD. ST -- ST Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator output. Timer1/Timer3 external clock input. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. DS39770B-page 14 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port. RD0/SEG0 RD0 SEG0 RD1/SEG1 RD1 SEG1 RD2/SEG2 RD2 SEG2 RD3/SEG3 RD3 SEG3 RD4/SEG4 RD4 SEG4 RD5/SEG5 RD5 SEG5 RD6/SEG6 RD6 SEG6 RD7/SEG7 RD7 SEG7 58 I/O O 55 I/O O 54 I/O O 53 I/O O 52 I/O O 51 I/O O 50 I/O O 49 I/O O ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG7 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG6 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG5 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG4 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG3 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG2 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG1 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG0 output for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 15 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port. RE0/LCDBIAS1 RE0 LCDBIAS1 RE1/LCDBIAS2 RE1 LCDBIAS2 LCDBIAS3 RE3/COM0 RE3 COM0 RE4/COM1 RE4 COM1 RE5/COM2 RE5 COM2 RE6/COM3 RE6 COM3 RE7/CCP2/SEG31 RE7 CCP2(2) SEG31 2 I/O I 1 I/O I 64 63 I/O O 62 I/O O 61 I/O O 60 I/O O 59 I/O I/O O ST ST Analog Digital I/O. Capture 2 input/Compare 2 output/PWM 2 output. SEG31 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. COM3 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. COM2 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. COM1 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. COM0 output for LCD. I ST Analog Analog Digital I/O. BIAS2 input for LCD. BIAS3 input for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. BIAS1 input for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. DS39770B-page 16 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port. RF1/AN6/C2OUT/SEG19 RF1 AN6 C2OUT SEG19 RF2/AN7/C1OUT/SEG20 RF2 AN7 C1OUT SEG20 RF3/AN8/SEG21 RF3 AN8 SEG21 RF4/AN9/SEG22 RF4 AN9 SEG22 RF5/AN10/CVREF/SEG23 RF5 AN10 CVREF SEG23 RF6/AN11/SEG24 RF6 AN11 SEG24 RF7/AN5/SS/SEG25 RF7 AN5 SS SEG25 17 I/O I O O 16 I/O I O O 15 I/O I O 14 I/O I O 13 I/O I O O 12 I/O I O 11 I/O O I O ST Analog TTL Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 5. SPI slave select input. SEG25 output for LCD. ST Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 11. SEG24 output for LCD. ST Analog Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 10. Comparator reference voltage output. SEG23 output for LCD. ST Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 9. SEG22 output for LCD. ST Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 8. SEG21 output for LCD. ST Analog -- Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 7. Comparator 1 output. SEG20 output for LCD. ST Analog -- Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 6. Comparator 2 output. SEG19 output for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 17 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTG is a bidirectional I/O port. RG0/LCDBIAS0 RG0 LCDBIAS0 RG1/TX2/CK2 RG1 TX2 CK2 RG2/RX2/DT2/VLCAP1 RG2 RX2 DT2 VLCAP1 RG3/VLCAP2 RG3 VLCAP2 RG4/SEG26 RG4 SEG26 VSS VDD AVSS AVDD ENVREG VDDCORE/VCAP VDDCORE VCAP 3 I/O I 4 I/O O I/O 5 I/O I I/O I 6 I/O I 8 I/O O 9, 25, 41, 56 26, 38, 57 20 19 18 10 P P -- -- P P P P I ST Analog -- -- -- -- ST Digital I/O. SEG26 output for LCD. Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. Positive supply for logic and I/O pins. Ground reference for analog modules. Positive supply for analog modules. Enable for on-chip voltage regulator. Core logic power or external filter capacitor connection. Positive supply for microcontroller core logic (regulator disabled). External filter capacitor connection (regulator enabled). ST Analog Digital I/O. LCD charge pump capacitor input. ST ST ST Analog Digital I/O. AUSART asynchronous receive. AUSART synchronous data (see related TX2/CK2). LCD charge pump capacitor input. ST -- ST Digital I/O. AUSART asynchronous transmit. AUSART synchronous clock (see related RX2/DT2). ST Analog Digital I/O. BIAS0 input for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. DS39770B-page 18 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Number Pin Name TQFP MCLR OSC1/CLKI/RA7 OSC1 CLKI 9 49 I I CMOS CMOS Pin Buffer Type Type I ST Description Master Clear (input) or programming voltage (input). This pin is an active-low Reset to the device. Oscillator crystal or external clock input. Oscillator crystal input. External clock source input. Always associated with pin function OSC1. (See related OSC1/CLKI, OSC2/CLKO pins.) General purpose I/O pin. Oscillator crystal or clock output. Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. In EC modes, OSC2 pin outputs CLKO, which has 1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction cycle rate. General purpose I/O pin. PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port. RA0/AN0 RA0 AN0 RA1/AN1/SEG18 RA1 AN1 SEG18 RA2/AN2/VREFRA2 AN2 VREFRA3/AN3/VREF+ RA3 AN3 VREF+ RA4/T0CKI/SEG14 RA4 T0CKI SEG14 RA5/AN4/SEG15 RA5 AN4 SEG15 RA6 RA7 30 I/O I 29 I/O I O 28 I/O I I 27 I/O I I 34 I/O I O 33 I/O I O TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 4. SEG15 output for LCD. See the OSC2/CLKO/RA6 pin. See the OSC1/CLKI/RA7 pin. ST/OD ST Analog Digital I/O. Open-drain when configured as output. Timer0 external clock input. SEG14 output for LCD. TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 3. A/D reference voltage (High) input. TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 2. A/D reference voltage (Low) input. TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 1. SEG18 output for LCD. TTL Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 0. RA7 OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC2 CLKO 50 I/O O O TTL -- -- RA6 I/O TTL Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 19 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. PORTB can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs. RB0/INT0/SEG30 RB0 INT0 SEG30 RB1/INT1/SEG8 RB1 INT1 SEG8 RB2/INT2/SEG9 RB2 INT2 SEG9 RB3/INT3/SEG10 RB3 INT3 SEG10 RB4/KBI0/SEG11 RB4 KBI0 SEG11 RB5/KBI1/SEG29 RB5 KBI1 SEG29 RB6/KBI2/PGC RB6 KBI2 PGC RB7/KBI3/PGD RB7 KBI3 PGD 58 I/O I O 57 I/O I O 56 I/O I O 55 I/O I O 54 I/O I O 53 I/O I O 52 I/O I I/O 47 I/O I I/O TTL TTL ST Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming data pin. TTL TTL ST Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSPTM programming clock pin. TTL TTL Analog Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. SEG29 output for LCD. TTL TTL Analog Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. SEG11 output for LCD. TTL ST Analog Digital I/O. External interrupt 3. SEG10 output for LCD. TTL ST Analog Digital I/O. External interrupt 2. SEG9 output for LCD. TTL ST Analog Digital I/O. External interrupt 1. SEG8 output for LCD. TTL ST Analog Digital I/O. External interrupt 0. SEG30 output for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. DS39770B-page 20 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port. RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI RC0 T1OSO T13CKI RC1/T1OSI/CCP2/SEG32 RC1 T1OSI CCP2(1) SEG32 RC2/CCP1/SEG13 RC2 CCP1 SEG13 RC3/SCK/SCL/SEG17 RC3 SCK SCL SEG17 RC4/SDI/SDA/SEG16 RC4 SDI SDA SEG16 RC5/SDO/SEG12 RC5 SDO SEG12 RC6/TX1/CK1/SEG27 RC6 TX1 CK1 SEG27 RC7/RX1/DT1/SEG28 RC7 RX1 DT1 SEG28 36 I/O O I 35 I/O I I/O O 43 I/O I/O O 44 I/O I/O I/O O 45 I/O I I/O O 46 I/O O O 37 I/O O I/O O 38 I/O I I/O O ST ST ST Analog Digital I/O. EUSART asynchronous receive. EUSART synchronous data (see related TX1/CK1). SEG28 output for LCD. ST -- ST Analog Digital I/O. EUSART asynchronous transmit. EUSART synchronous clock (see related RX1/DT1). SEG27 output for LCD. ST -- Analog Digital I/O. SPI data out. SEG12 output for LCD. ST ST ST Analog Digital I/O. SPI data in. I2C data I/O. SEG16 output for LCD. ST ST ST Analog Digital I/O. Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode. Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2CTM mode. SEG17 output for LCD. ST ST Analog Digital I/O. Capture1 input/Compare1 output/PWM1 output. SEG13 output for LCD. ST CMOS ST Analog Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator input. Capture2 input/Compare2 output/PWM2 output. SEG32 output for LCD. ST -- ST Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator output. Timer1/Timer3 external clock input. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 21 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port. RD0/SEG0 RD0 SEG0 RD1/SEG1 RD1 SEG1 RD2/SEG2 RD2 SEG2 RD3/SEG3 RD3 SEG3 RD4/SEG4 RD4 SEG4 RD5/SEG5 RD5 SEG5 RD6/SEG6 RD6 SEG6 RD7/SEG7 RD7 SEG7 72 I/O O 69 I/O O 68 I/O O 67 I/O O 66 I/O O 65 I/O O 64 I/O O 63 I/O O ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG7 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG6 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG5 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG4 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG3 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG2 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG1 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG0 output for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. DS39770B-page 22 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port. RE0/LCDBIAS1 RE0 LCDBIAS1 RE1/LCDBIAS2 RE1 LCDBIAS2 LCDBIAS3 RE3/COM0 RE3 COM0 RE4/COM1 RE4 COM1 RE5/COM2 RE5 COM2 RE6/COM3 RE6 COM3 RE7/CCP2/SEG31 RE7 CCP2(2) SEG31 4 I/O I 3 I/O I 78 77 I/O O 76 I/O O 75 I/O O 74 I/O O 73 I/O I/O O ST ST Analog Digital I/O. Capture 2 input/Compare 2 output/PWM 2 output. SEG31 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. COM3 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. COM2 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. COM1 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. COM0 output for LCD. I ST Analog Analog Digital I/O. BIAS2 input for LCD. BIAS3 input for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. BIAS1 input for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 23 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port. RF1/AN6/C2OUT/SEG19 RF1 AN6 C2OUT SEG19 RF2/AN7/C1OUT/SEG20 RF2 AN7 C1OUT SEG20 RF3/AN8/SEG21 RF3 AN8 SEG21 RF4/AN9/SEG22 RF4 AN9 SEG22 RF5/AN10/CVREF/SEG23 RF5 AN10 CVREF SEG23 RF6/AN11/SEG24 RF6 AN11 SEG24 RF7/AN5/SS/SEG25 RF7 AN5 SS SEG25 23 I/O I O O 18 I/O I O O 17 I/O I O 16 I/O I O 15 I/O I O O 14 I/O I O 13 I/O O I O ST Analog TTL Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 5. SPI slave select input. SEG25 output for LCD. ST Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 11. SEG24 output for LCD. ST Analog Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 10. Comparator reference voltage output. SEG23 output for LCD. ST Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 9. SEG22 output for LCD. ST Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 8. SEG21 output for LCD. ST Analog -- Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 7. Comparator 1 output. SEG20 output for LCD. ST Analog -- Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 6. Comparator 2 output. SEG19 output for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. DS39770B-page 24 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTG is a bidirectional I/O port. RG0/LCDBIAS0 RG0 LCDBIAS0 RG1/TX2/CK2 RG1 TX2 CK2 RG2/RX2/DT2/VLCAP1 RG2 RX2 DT2 VLCAP1 RG3/VLCAP2 RG3 VLCAP2 RG4/SEG26 RG4 SEG26 5 I/O I 6 I/O O I/O 7 I/O I I/O I 8 I/O I 10 I/O O ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG26 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. LCD charge pump capacitor input. ST ST ST Analog Digital I/O. AUSART asynchronous receive. AUSART synchronous data (see related TX2/CK2). LCD charge pump capacitor input. ST -- ST Digital I/O. AUSART asynchronous transmit. AUSART synchronous clock (see related RX2/DT2). ST Analog Digital I/O. BIAS0 input for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 25 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTH is a bidirectional I/O port. RH0/SEG47 RH0 SEG47 RH1/SEG46 RH1 SEG46 RH2/SEG45 RH2 SEG45 RH3/SEG44 RH3 SEG44 RH4/SEG40 RH4 SEG40 RH5/SEG41 RH5 SEG41 RH6/SEG42 RH6 SEG42 RH7/SEG43 RH7 SEG43 79 I/O O 80 I/O O 1 I/O O 2 I/O O 22 I/O O 21 I/O O 20 I/O O 19 I/O O ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG43 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG42 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG41 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG40 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG44 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG45 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG46 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG47 output for LCD. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. DS39770B-page 26 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ90 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name TQFP Pin Buffer Type Type Description PORTJ is a bidirectional I/O port. RJ0 RJ1/SEG33 RJ1 SEG33 RJ2/SEG34 RJ2 SEG34 RJ3/SEG35 RJ3 SEG35 RJ4/SEG39 RJ4 SEG39 RJ5/SEG38 RJ5 SEG38 RJ6/SEG37 RJ6 SEG37 RJ7/SEG36 RJ7 SEG36 VSS VDD AVSS AVDD ENVREG VDDCORE/VCAP VDDCORE VCAP 62 61 I/O O 60 I/O O 59 I/O O 39 I/O O 40 I/O O 41 I/O O 42 I/O O 11, 31, 51, 70 32, 48, 71 26 25 24 12 P P -- -- P P P P I ST Analog -- -- -- -- ST Digital I/O. SEG36 output for LCD. Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. Positive supply for logic and I/O pins. Ground reference for analog modules. Positive supply for analog modules. Enable for on-chip voltage regulator. Core logic power or external filter capacitor connection. Positive supply for microcontroller core logic (regulator disabled). External filter capacitor connection (regulator enabled). ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG37 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O SEG38 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG39 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG35 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG34 output for LCD. ST Analog Digital I/O. SEG33 output for LCD. I/O ST Digital I/O. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. 2: Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 27 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 28 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 2.0 2.1 OSCILLATOR CONFIGURATIONS Oscillator Types Five of these are selected by the user by programming the FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits. The sixth mode (INTRC) may be invoked under software control; it can also be configured as the default mode on device Resets. In addition, PIC18F85J90 family devices can switch between different clock sources, either under software control, or automatically under certain conditions. This allows for additional power savings by managing device clock speed in real time without resetting the application. The clock sources for the PIC18F85J90 family of devices are shown in Figure 2-1. The PIC18F85J90 family of devices can be operated in six different oscillator modes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. HS High-Speed Crystal/Resonator HSPLL High-Speed Crystal/Resonator with Software PLL Control EC External Clock with FOSC/4 Output ECPLL External Clock with Software PLL Control INTOSC Internal Fast RC (8 MHz) oscillator INTRC Internal 31 kHz Oscillator FIGURE 2-1: PIC18F85J90 FAMILY CLOCK DIAGRAM PIC18F85J90 Family Primary Oscillator OSC2 Sleep 4 x PLL OSC1 T1OSO T1OSCEN Enable Oscillator OSCCON<6:4> Internal Oscillator Block 8 MHz Source 8 MHz (INTOSC) T1OSC MUX Secondary Oscillator Peripherals HS, EC HSPLL, ECPLL T1OSI OSCCON<6:4> 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz Postscaler 1 MHz 500 kHz 250 kHz 125 kHz 1 31 kHz 0 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 MUX Internal Oscillator CPU IDLEN Clock Control FOSC2:FOSC0 OSCCON<1:0> Clock Source Option for other modules INTRC Source OSCTUNE<7> 31 kHz (INTRC) WDT, PWRT, FSCM and Two-Speed Start-up (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 29 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 2.2 Control Registers The OSCCON register (Register 2-1) controls the main aspects of the device clock's operation. It selects the oscillator type to be used, which of the power-managed modes to invoke and the output frequency of the INTOSC source. It also provides status on the oscillators. The OSCTUNE register (Register 2-2) controls the tuning and operation of the internal oscillator block. It also implements the PLLEN bits, which control the operation of the Phase Locked Loop (PLL) in Internal Oscillator modes (see Section 2.4.3 "PLL Frequency Multiplier"). REGISTER 2-1: R/W-0 IDLEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER R/W-1 IRCF2 R/W-0 IRCF1 R/W-0 IRCF0 R(1) OSTS R-0 IOFS R/W-0 SCS1 R/W-0 SCS0 bit 0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown IDLEN: Idle Enable bit 1 = Device enters an Idle mode when a SLEEP instruction is executed 0 = Device enters Sleep mode when a SLEEP instruction is executed IRCF2:IRCF0: INTOSC Source Frequency Select bits(2) 111 = 8 MHz (INTOSC drives clock directly) 110 = 4 MHz 101 = 2 MHz 100 = 1 MHz (default) 011 = 500 kHz 010 = 250 kHz 001 = 125 kHz 000 = 31 kHz (from either INTOSC/256 or INTRC)(3) OSTS: Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status bit(1) 1 = Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) time-out has expired; primary oscillator is running 0 = Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) time-out is running; primary oscillator is not ready IOFS: INTOSC Frequency Stable bit 1 = Fast RC oscillator frequency is stable 0 = Fast RC oscillator frequency is not stable SCS1:SCS0: System Clock Select bits(4) 11 = Internal oscillator block 10 = Primary oscillator 01 = Timer1 oscillator When FOSC2 = 1: 00 = Primary oscillator When FOSC2 = 0: 00 = Internal oscillator Reset state depends on state of the IESO Configuration bit. Modifying these bits will cause an immediate clock frequency switch if the internal oscillator is providing the device clocks. Source selected by the INTSRC bit (OSCTUNE<7>), see text. Modifying these bits will cause an immediate clock source switch. bit 6-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1-0 Note 1: 2: 3: 4: DS39770B-page 30 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 2-2: R/W-0 INTSRC bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown OSCTUNE: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 TUN5 R/W-0 TUN4 R/W-0 TUN3 R/W-0 TUN2 R/W-0 TUN1 R/W-0 TUN0 bit 0 PLLEN(1) INTSRC: Internal Oscillator Low-Frequency Source Select bit 1 = 31.25 kHz device clock derived from 8 MHz INTOSC source (divide-by-256 enabled) 0 = 31 kHz device clock derived from INTRC 31 kHz oscillator PLLEN: Frequency Multiplier PLL Enable bit(1) 1 = PLL enabled 0 = PLL disabled TUN5:TUN0: Fast RC Oscillator (INTOSC) Frequency Tuning bits 011111 = Maximum frequency * * * * 000001 000000 = Center frequency. Fast RC oscillator is running at the calibrated frequency. 111111 * * * * 100000 = Minimum frequency Available only for ECPLL and HSPLL oscillator configurations; otherwise, this bit is unavailable and reads as `0'. bit 6 bit 5-0 Note 1: 2.3 Clock Sources and Oscillator Switching Essentially, PIC18F85J90 family devices have three independent clock sources: * Primary oscillators * Secondary oscillators * Internal oscillator The primary oscillators can be thought of as the main device oscillators. These are any external oscillators connected to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins, and include the External Crystal and Resonator modes and the External Clock modes. In some circumstances, the internal oscillator block may be considered a primary oscillator. The particular mode is defined by the FOSC Configuration bits. The details of these modes are covered in Section 2.4 "External Oscillator Modes". The secondary oscillators are external clock sources that are not connected to the OSC1 or OSC2 pins. These sources may continue to operate even after the controller is placed in a power-managed mode. PIC18F85J90 family devices offer the Timer1 oscillator as a secondary oscillator source. This oscillator, in all power-managed modes, is often the time base for functions such as a Real-Time Clock. The Timer1 oscillator is discussed in greater detail in Section 11.3 "Timer1 Oscillator" In addition to being a primary clock source in some circumstances, the internal oscillator is available as a power-managed mode clock source. The INTRC source is also used as the clock source for several special features, such as the WDT and Fail-Safe Clock Monitor. The internal oscillator block is discussed in more detail in Section 2.5 "Internal Oscillator Block". The PIC18F85J90 family includes features that allow the device clock source to be switched from the main oscillator, chosen by device configuration, to one of the alternate clock sources. When an alternate clock source is enabled, various power-managed operating modes are available. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 31 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 2.3.1 CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION 2.3.1.1 The System Clock Select bits, SCS1:SCS0 (OSCCON<1:0>), select the clock source. The available clock sources are the primary clock defined by the FOSC1:FOSC0 Configuration bits, the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator) and the internal oscillator. The clock source changes after one or more of the bits are written to, following a brief clock transition interval. The OSTS (OSCCON<3>) and T1RUN (T1CON<6>) bits indicate which clock source is currently providing the device clock. The OSTS bit indicates that the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has timed out and the primary clock is providing the device clock in primary clock modes. The T1RUN bit indicates when the Timer1 oscillator is providing the device clock in secondary clock modes. In power-managed modes, only one of these bits will be set at any time. If neither of these bits are set, the INTRC is providing the clock, or the internal oscillator has just started and is not yet stable. The IDLEN bit determines if the device goes into Sleep mode or one of the Idle modes when the SLEEP instruction is executed. The use of the flag and control bits in the OSCCON register is discussed in more detail in Section 3.0 "Power-Managed Modes". Note 1: The Timer1 oscillator must be enabled to select the secondary clock source. The Timer1 oscillator is enabled by setting the T1OSCEN bit in the Timer1 Control register (T1CON<3>). If the Timer1 oscillator is not enabled, then any attempt to select a secondary clock source when executing a SLEEP instruction will be ignored. 2: It is recommended that the Timer1 oscillator be operating and stable before executing the SLEEP instruction or a very long delay may occur while the Timer1 oscillator starts. System Clock Selection and the FOSC2 Configuration Bit The SCS bits are cleared on all forms of Reset. In the device's default configuration, this means the primary oscillator defined by FOSC1:FOSC0 (that is, one of the HS or EC modes) is used as the primary clock source on device Resets. The default clock configuration on Reset can be changed with the FOSC2 Configuration bit. This bit determines whether the external or internal oscillator will be the default clock source on subsequent device Resets. By extension, it also has the effect of determining the clock source selected when SCS1:SCS0 are in their Reset state (= 00). When FOSC2 = 1 (default), the oscillator source defined by FOSC1:FOSC0 is selected whenever SCS1:SCS0 = 00. When FOSC2 = 0, the internal oscillator block is selected whenever SCS1:SCS2 = 00. In those cases when the internal oscillator block is the default clock on Reset, the Fast RC oscillator (INTOSC) will be used as the device clock source. It will initially start at 1 MHz, the postscaler selection that corresponds to the Reset value of the IRCF2:IRCF0 bits (`100'). Regardless of the setting of FOSC2, INTRC will always be enabled on device power-up. It serves as the clock source until the device has loaded its configuration values from memory. It is at this point that the FOSC Configuration bits are read and the oscillator selection of the operational mode is made. Note that either the primary clock or the internal oscillator will have two bit setting options for the possible values of SCS1:SCS0, at any given time, depending on the setting of FOSC2. 2.3.2 OSCILLATOR TRANSITIONS PIC18F85J90 family devices contain circuitry to prevent clock "glitches" when switching between clock sources. A short pause in the device clock occurs during the clock switch. The length of this pause is the sum of two cycles of the old clock source and three to four cycles of the new clock source. This formula assumes that the new clock source is stable. Clock transitions are discussed in greater detail in Section 3.1.2 "Entering Power-Managed Modes". DS39770B-page 32 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 2.4 2.4.1 External Oscillator Modes CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR/CERAMIC RESONATORS (HS MODES) TABLE 2-2: CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR Crystal Freq. 4 MHz 8 MHz 20 MHz Typical Capacitor Values Tested: C1 C2 27 pF 22 pF 15 pF In HS or HSPLL Oscillator modes, a crystal or ceramic resonator is connected to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins to establish oscillation. Figure 2-2 shows the pin connections. The oscillator design requires the use of a parallel cut crystal. Note: Use of a series cut crystal may give a frequency out of the crystal manufacturer's specifications. Osc Type HS 27 pF 22 pF 15 pF Capacitor values are for design guidance only. Different capacitor values may be required to produce acceptable oscillator operation. The user should test the performance of the oscillator over the expected VDD and temperature range for the application. Refer to the Microchip application notes cited in Table 2-1 for oscillator specific information. Also see the notes following this table for additional information. TABLE 2-1: CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR CERAMIC RESONATORS Typical Capacitor Values Used: Mode HS Freq. 8.0 MHz 16.0 MHz OSC1 27 pF 22 pF OSC2 27 pF 22 pF Capacitor values are for design guidance only. Different capacitor values may be required to produce acceptable oscillator operation. The user should test the performance of the oscillator over the expected VDD and temperature range for the application. Refer to the following application notes for oscillator specific information: Note 1: Higher capacitance increases the stability of oscillator but also increases the start-up time. 2: Since each resonator/crystal has its own characteristics, the user should consult the resonator/crystal manufacturer for appropriate values of external components. 3: Rs may be required to avoid overdriving crystals with low drive level specification. 4: Always verify oscillator performance over the VDD and temperature range that is expected for the application. * AN588, "PIC(R) Microcontroller Oscillator Design Guide" * AN826, "Crystal Oscillator Basics and Crystal Selection for rfPIC(R) and PIC(R) Devices" * AN849, 'Basic PIC(R) Oscillator Design" * AN943, "Practical PIC(R) Oscillator Analysis and Design" * AN949, "Making Your Oscillator Work" See the notes following Table 2-2 for additional information. FIGURE 2-2: CRYSTAL/CERAMIC RESONATOR OPERATION (HS OR HSPLL CONFIGURATION) OSC1 To Internal Logic Sleep C1(1) XTAL OSC2 C2(1) Note 1: 2: 3: RS(2) RF(3) PIC18F85J90 See Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 for initial values of C1 and C2. A series resistor (RS) may be required for AT strip cut crystals. RF varies with the oscillator mode chosen. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 33 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 2.4.2 EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT (EC MODES) 2.4.3 PLL FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER The EC and ECPLL Oscillator modes require an external clock source to be connected to the OSC1 pin. There is no oscillator start-up time required after a Power-on Reset or after an exit from Sleep mode. In the EC Oscillator mode, the oscillator frequency divided by 4 is available on the OSC2 pin. This signal may be used for test purposes or to synchronize other logic. Figure 2-3 shows the pin connections for the EC Oscillator mode. A Phase Locked Loop (PLL) circuit is provided as an option for users who want to use a lower frequency oscillator circuit, or to clock the device up to its highest rated frequency from a crystal oscillator. This may be useful for customers who are concerned with EMI due to high-frequency crystals, or users who require higher clock speeds from an internal oscillator. For these reasons, the HSPLL and ECPLL modes are available. The HSPLL and ECPLL modes provide the ability to selectively run the device at 4 times the external oscillating source to produce frequencies up to 40 MHz. The PLL is enabled by programming the FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits (CONFIG2L<2:0>) to either `110' (for ECPLL) or `100' (for HSPLL). In addition, the PLLEN bit (OSCTUNE<6>) must also be set. Clearing PLLEN disables the PLL, regardless of the chosen oscillator configuration. It also allows additional flexibility for controlling the application's clock speed in software. FIGURE 2-3: EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT OPERATION (EC CONFIGURATION) Clock from Ext. System FOSC/4 or RA6 OSC1/CLKI PIC18F85J90 OSC2/CLKO FIGURE 2-5: PLL BLOCK DIAGRAM An external clock source may also be connected to the OSC1 pin in the HS mode, as shown in Figure 2-4. In this configuration, the divide-by-4 output on OSC2 is not available. HSPLL or ECPLL (CONFIG2L) PLL Enable (OSCTUNE) OSC2 HS or EC OSC1 Mode FIGURE 2-4: EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT OPERATION (HS OSC CONFIGURATION) FIN FOUT Phase Comparator Loop Filter Clock from Ext. System Open OSC1 PIC18F85J90 OSC2 (HS Mode) /4 VCO MUX SYSCLK DS39770B-page 34 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 2.5 Internal Oscillator Block 2.5.3 INTOSC FREQUENCY DRIFT The PIC18F85J90 family of devices includes an internal oscillator block which generates two different clock signals; either can be used as the microcontroller's clock source. This may eliminate the need for an external oscillator circuit on the OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins. The main output is the Fast RC oscillator, or INTOSC, an 8 MHz clock source which can be used to directly drive the device clock. It also drives a postscaler, which can provide a range of clock frequencies from 31 kHz to 4 MHz. INTOSC is enabled when a clock frequency from 125 kHz to 8 MHz is selected. The INTOSC output can also be enabled when 31 kHz is selected, depending on the INTSRC bit (OSCTUNE<7>). The other clock source is the Internal RC oscillator (INTRC), which provides a nominal 31 kHz output. INTRC is enabled if it is selected as the device clock source. It is also enabled automatically when any of the following are enabled: * Power-up Timer * Fail-Safe Clock Monitor * Watchdog Timer * Two-Speed Start-up These features are discussed in greater detail in Section 22.0 "Special Features of the CPU". The clock source frequency (INTOSC direct, INTOSC with postscaler or INTRC direct) is selected by configuring the IRCF bits of the OSCCON register. The default frequency on device Resets is 1 MHz. The INTOSC frequency may drift as VDD or temperature changes, and can affect the controller operation in a variety of ways. It is possible to adjust the INTOSC frequency by modifying the value in the OSCTUNE register. This will have no effect on the INTRC clock source frequency. Tuning INTOSC requires knowing when to make the adjustment, in which direction it should be made and in some cases, how large a change is needed. Three compensation techniques are shown here. 2.5.3.1 Compensating with the EUSART An adjustment may be required when the EUSART begins to generate framing errors or receives data with errors while in Asynchronous mode. Framing errors indicate that the device clock frequency is too high. To adjust for this, decrement the value in OSCTUNE to reduce the clock frequency. On the other hand, errors in data may suggest that the clock speed is too low. To compensate, increment OSCTUNE to increase the clock frequency. 2.5.3.2 Compensating with the Timers This technique compares device clock speed to some reference clock. Two timers may be used; one timer is clocked by the peripheral clock, while the other is clocked by a fixed reference source, such as the Timer1 oscillator. Both timers are cleared, but the timer clocked by the reference generates interrupts. When an interrupt occurs, the internally clocked timer is read and both timers are cleared. If the internally clocked timer value is much greater than expected, then the internal oscillator block is running too fast. To adjust for this, decrement the OSCTUNE register. 2.5.1 OSC1 AND OSC2 PIN CONFIGURATION Whenever the internal oscillator is configured as the default clock source (FOSC2 = 0), the OSC1 and OSC2 pins are reconfigured automatically as port pins, RA6 and RA7. In this mode, they function as general digital I/O. All oscillator functions on the pins are disabled. 2.5.3.3 Compensating with the CCP Module in Capture Mode 2.5.2 INTERNAL OSCILLATOR OUTPUT FREQUENCY AND TUNING The internal oscillator block is calibrated at the factory to produce an INTOSC output frequency of 8 MHz. It can be adjusted in the user's application by writing to TUN5:TUN0 (OSCTUNE<5:0>) in the OSCTUNE register (Register 2-2). When the OSCTUNE register is modified, the INTOSC frequency will begin shifting to the new frequency. The oscillator will stabilize within 1 ms. Code execution continues during this shift. There is no indication that the shift has occurred. The INTRC oscillator operates independently of the INTOSC source. Any changes in INTOSC across voltage and temperature are not necessarily reflected by changes in INTRC or vice versa. The frequency of INTRC is not affected by OSCTUNE. A CCP module can use free-running Timer1 (or Timer3), clocked by the internal oscillator block and an external event with a known period (i.e., AC power frequency). The time of the first event is captured in the CCPRxH:CCPRxL registers and is recorded for use later. When the second event causes a capture, the time of the first event is subtracted from the time of the second event. Since the period of the external event is known, the time difference between events can be calculated. If the measured time is much greater than the calculated time, the internal oscillator block is running too fast. To compensate, decrement the OSCTUNE register. If the measured time is much less than the calculated time, the internal oscillator block is running too slow. To compensate, increment the OSCTUNE register. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 35 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 2.6 Effects of Power-Managed Modes on the Various Clock Sources Timer1 oscillator may be operating to support a RealTime Clock. Other features may be operating that do not require a device clock source (i.e., MSSP slave, PSP, INTn pins and others). Peripherals that may add significant current consumption are listed in Section 25.2 "DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current". When PRI_IDLE mode is selected, the designated primary oscillator continues to run without interruption. For all other power-managed modes, the oscillator using the OSC1 pin is disabled. The OSC1 pin (and OSC2 pin if used by the oscillator) will stop oscillating. In secondary clock modes (SEC_RUN and SEC_IDLE), the Timer1 oscillator is operating and providing the device clock. The Timer1 oscillator may also run in all power-managed modes if required to clock Timer1 or Timer3. In RC_RUN and RC_IDLE modes, the internal oscillator provides the device clock source. The 31 kHz INTRC output can be used directly to provide the clock and may be enabled to support various special features, regardless of the power-managed mode (see Section 22.2 "Watchdog Timer (WDT)" through Section 22.5 "Fail-Safe Clock Monitor" for more information on WDT, Fail-Safe Clock Monitor and Two-Speed Start-up). If the Sleep mode is selected, all clock sources are stopped. Since all the transistor switching currents have been stopped, Sleep mode achieves the lowest current consumption of the device (only leakage currents). Enabling any on-chip feature that will operate during Sleep will increase the current consumed during Sleep. The INTRC is required to support WDT operation. The 2.7 Power-up Delays Power-up delays are controlled by two timers, so that no external Reset circuitry is required for most applications. The delays ensure that the device is kept in Reset until the device power supply is stable under normal circumstances and the primary clock is operating and stable. For additional information on power-up delays, see Section 4.5 "Power-up Timer (PWRT)". The first timer is the Power-up Timer (PWRT), which provides a fixed delay on power-up (parameter 33, Table 25-11). It is always enabled. The second timer is the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST), intended to keep the chip in Reset until the crystal oscillator is stable (HS modes). The OST does this by counting 1024 oscillator cycles before allowing the oscillator to clock the device. There is a delay of interval TCSD (parameter 38, Table 25-11), following POR, while the controller becomes ready to execute instructions. TABLE 2-3: EC, ECPLL HS, HSPLL INTOSC Note: OSC1 AND OSC2 PIN STATES IN SLEEP MODE OSC1 Pin Floating, pulled by external clock Feedback inverter disabled at quiescent voltage level I/O pin RA6, direction controlled by TRISA<6> OSC2 Pin At logic low (clock/4 output) Feedback inverter disabled at quiescent voltage level I/O pin RA7, direction controlled by TRISA<7> Oscillator Mode See Table 4-2 in Section 4.0 "Reset" for time-outs due to Sleep and MCLR Reset. DS39770B-page 36 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 3.0 POWER-MANAGED MODES 3.1.1 CLOCK SOURCES The PIC18F85J90 family devices provide the ability to manage power consumption by simply managing clocking to the CPU and the peripherals. In general, a lower clock frequency and a reduction in the number of circuits being clocked constitutes lower consumed power. For the sake of managing power in an application, there are three primary modes of operation: * Run mode * Idle mode * Sleep mode These modes define which portions of the device are clocked and at what speed. The Run and Idle modes may use any of the three available clock sources (primary, secondary or internal oscillator block); the Sleep mode does not use a clock source. The power-managed modes include several power-saving features offered on previous PIC(R) devices. One is the clock switching feature, offered in other PIC18 devices, allowing the controller to use the Timer1 oscillator in place of the primary oscillator. Also included is the Sleep mode, offered by all PIC devices, where all device clocks are stopped. The SCS1:SCS0 bits allow the selection of one of three clock sources for power-managed modes. They are: * the primary clock, as defined by the FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits * the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator) * the internal oscillator 3.1.2 ENTERING POWER-MANAGED MODES Switching from one power-managed mode to another begins by loading the OSCCON register. The SCS1:SCS0 bits select the clock source and determine which Run or Idle mode is to be used. Changing these bits causes an immediate switch to the new clock source, assuming that it is running. The switch may also be subject to clock transition delays. These are discussed in Section 3.1.3 "Clock Transitions and Status Indicators" and subsequent sections. Entry to the power-managed Idle or Sleep modes is triggered by the execution of a SLEEP instruction. The actual mode that results depends on the status of the IDLEN bit. Depending on the current mode and the mode being switched to, a change to a power-managed mode does not always require setting all of these bits. Many transitions may be done by changing the oscillator select bits, or changing the IDLEN bit, prior to issuing a SLEEP instruction. If the IDLEN bit is already configured correctly, it may only be necessary to perform a SLEEP instruction to switch to the desired mode. 3.1 Selecting Power-Managed Modes Selecting a power-managed mode requires two decisions: if the CPU is to be clocked or not and which clock source is to be used. The IDLEN bit (OSCCON<7>) controls CPU clocking, while the SCS1:SCS0 bits (OSCCON<1:0>) select the clock source. The individual modes, bit settings, clock sources and affected modules are summarized in Table 3-1. TABLE 3-1: Mode Sleep PRI_RUN SEC_RUN RC_RUN PRI_IDLE SEC_IDLE RC_IDLE Note 1: POWER-MANAGED MODES OSCCON bits IDLEN<7>(1) SCS1:SCS0<1:0> 0 N/A N/A N/A 1 1 1 N/A 10 01 11 10 01 11 Module Clocking Available Clock and Oscillator Source CPU Off Clocked Clocked Clocked Off Off Off Peripherals Off Clocked Clocked Clocked Clocked Clocked Clocked None - All clocks are disabled Primary - HS, EC, HSPLL, ECPLL; this is the normal full power execution mode Secondary - Timer1 Oscillator Internal Oscillator Primary - HS, EC, HSPLL, ECPLL Secondary - Timer1 Oscillator Internal Oscillator IDLEN reflects its value when the SLEEP instruction is executed. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 37 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 3.1.3 CLOCK TRANSITIONS AND STATUS INDICATORS 3.2 Run Modes The length of the transition between clock sources is the sum of two cycles of the old clock source and three to four cycles of the new clock source. This formula assumes that the new clock source is stable. Two bits indicate the current clock source and its status: OSTS (OSCCON<3>) and T1RUN (T1CON<6>). In general, only one of these bits will be set while in a given power-managed mode. When the OSTS bit is set, the primary clock is providing the device clock. When the T1RUN bit is set, the Timer1 oscillator is providing the clock. If neither of these bits is set, INTRC is clocking the device. Note: Executing a SLEEP instruction does not necessarily place the device into Sleep mode. It acts as the trigger to place the controller into either the Sleep mode, or one of the Idle modes, depending on the setting of the IDLEN bit. In the Run modes, clocks to both the core and peripherals are active. The difference between these modes is the clock source. 3.2.1 PRI_RUN MODE The PRI_RUN mode is the normal, full power execution mode of the microcontroller. This is also the default mode upon a device Reset unless Two-Speed Start-up is enabled (see Section 22.4 "Two-Speed Start-up" for details). In this mode, the OSTS bit is set (see Section 2.2 "Control Registers"). 3.2.2 SEC_RUN MODE The SEC_RUN mode is the compatible mode to the "clock switching" feature offered in other PIC18 devices. In this mode, the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. This gives users the option of lower power consumption while still using a high-accuracy clock source. SEC_RUN mode is entered by setting the SCS1:SCS0 bits to `01'. The device clock source is switched to the Timer1 oscillator (see Figure 3-1), the primary oscillator is shut down, the T1RUN bit (T1CON<6>) is set and the OSTS bit is cleared. 3.1.4 MULTIPLE SLEEP COMMANDS The power-managed mode that is invoked with the SLEEP instruction is determined by the setting of the IDLEN bit at the time the instruction is executed. If another SLEEP instruction is executed, the device will enter the power-managed mode specified by IDLEN at that time. If IDLEN has changed, the device will enter the new power-managed mode specified by the new setting. DS39770B-page 38 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY Note: The Timer1 oscillator should already be running prior to entering SEC_RUN mode. If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the SCS1:SCS0 bits are set to `01', entry to SEC_RUN mode will not occur. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, but not yet running, device clocks will be delayed until the oscillator has started. In such situations, initial oscillator operation is far from stable and unpredictable operation may result. On transitions from SEC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN mode, the peripherals and CPU continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator while the primary clock is started. When the primary clock becomes ready, a clock switch back to the primary clock occurs (see Figure 3-2). When the clock switch is complete, the T1RUN bit is cleared, the OSTS bit is set and the primary clock is providing the clock. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up; the Timer1 oscillator continues to run. FIGURE 3-1: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SEC_RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 1 2 3 Clock Transition n-1 n Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 T1OSI OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC PC + 2 PC + 4 FIGURE 3-2: TRANSITION TIMING FROM SEC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE (HSPLL) Q1 T1OSI OSC1 TOST(1) TPLL(1) 1 2 n-1 n Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 PLL Clock Output CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter SCS1:SCS0 bits Changed PC OSTS bit Set Clock Transition PC + 2 PC + 4 Note 1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 39 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 3.2.3 RC_RUN MODE In RC_RUN mode, the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the internal oscillator; the primary clock is shut down. This mode provides the best power conservation of all the Run modes while still executing code. It works well for user applications which are not highly timing sensitive or do not require high-speed clocks at all times. This mode is entered by setting SCS bits to `11'. When the clock source is switched to the INTRC (see Figure 3-3), the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is cleared. On transitions from RC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN mode, the device continues to be clocked from the INTRC while the primary clock is started. When the primary clock becomes ready, a clock switch to the primary clock occurs (see Figure 3-4). When the clock switch is complete, the OSTS bit is set and the primary clock is providing the device clock. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the switch. The INTRC source will continue to run if either the WDT or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled. FIGURE 3-3: TRANSITION TIMING TO RC_RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 1 2 3 Clock Transition n-1 n Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 INTRC OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC PC + 2 PC + 4 FIGURE 3-4: TRANSITION TIMING FROM RC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE Q1 INTRC OSC1 TOST(1) TPLL(1) 1 2 n-1 n Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 PLL Clock Output Clock Transition CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter SCS1:SCS0 bits Changed PC OSTS bit Set PC + 2 PC + 4 Note 1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. DS39770B-page 40 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 3.3 Sleep Mode 3.4 Idle Modes The power-managed Sleep mode is identical to the legacy Sleep mode offered in all other PIC devices. It is entered by clearing the IDLEN bit (the default state on device Reset) and executing the SLEEP instruction. This shuts down the selected oscillator (Figure 3-5). All clock source status bits are cleared. Entering the Sleep mode from any other mode does not require a clock switch. This is because no clocks are needed once the controller has entered Sleep. If the WDT is selected, the INTRC source will continue to operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also continue to run. When a wake event occurs in Sleep mode (by interrupt, Reset or WDT time-out), the device will not be clocked until the clock source selected by the SCS1:SCS0 bits becomes ready (see Figure 3-6), or it will be clocked from the internal oscillator if either the Two-Speed Start-up or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor are enabled (see Section 22.0 "Special Features of the CPU"). In either case, the OSTS bit is set when the primary clock is providing the device clocks. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. The Idle modes allow the controller's CPU to be selectively shut down while the peripherals continue to operate. Selecting a particular Idle mode allows users to further manage power consumption. If the IDLEN bit is set to a `1' when a SLEEP instruction is executed, the peripherals will be clocked from the clock source selected using the SCS1:SCS0 bits; however, the CPU will not be clocked. The clock source status bits are not affected. Setting IDLEN and executing a SLEEP instruction provides a quick method of switching from a given Run mode to its corresponding Idle mode. If the WDT is selected, the INTRC source will continue to operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also continue to run. Since the CPU is not executing instructions, the only exits from any of the Idle modes are by interrupt, WDT time-out or a Reset. When a wake event occurs, CPU execution is delayed by an interval of TCSD (parameter 38, Table 25-11) while it becomes ready to execute code. When the CPU begins executing code, it resumes with the same clock source for the current Idle mode. For example, when waking from RC_IDLE mode, the internal oscillator block will clock the CPU and peripherals (in other words, RC_RUN mode). The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. While in any Idle mode or the Sleep mode, a WDT time-out will result in a WDT wake-up to the Run mode currently specified by the SCS1:SCS0 bits. FIGURE 3-5: OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Sleep Program Counter PC TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SLEEP MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 PC + 2 FIGURE 3-6: TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM SLEEP (HSPLL) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 PLL Clock Output CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter Wake Event PC OSTS bit Set PC + 2 PC + 4 PC + 6 TOST(1) TPLL(1) Note 1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 41 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 3.4.1 PRI_IDLE MODE 3.4.2 SEC_IDLE MODE This mode is unique among the three low-power Idle modes, in that it does not disable the primary device clock. For timing sensitive applications, this allows for the fastest resumption of device operation with its more accurate primary clock source, since the clock source does not have to "warm up" or transition from another oscillator. PRI_IDLE mode is entered from PRI_RUN mode by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set IDLEN first, then set the SCS bits to `10' and execute SLEEP. Although the CPU is disabled, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the primary clock source specified by the FOSC1:FOSC0 Configuration bits. The OSTS bit remains set (see Figure 3-7). When a wake event occurs, the CPU is clocked from the primary clock source. A delay of interval TCSD is required between the wake event and when code execution starts. This is required to allow the CPU to become ready to execute instructions. After the wake-up, the OSTS bit remains set. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up (see Figure 3-8). In SEC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the peripherals continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. This mode is entered from SEC_RUN by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set IDLEN first, then set SCS1:SCS0 to `01' and execute SLEEP. When the clock source is switched to the Timer1 oscillator, the primary oscillator is shut down, the OSTS bit is cleared and the T1RUN bit is set. When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. After an interval of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code being clocked by the Timer1 oscillator. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up; the Timer1 oscillator continues to run (see Figure 3-8). Note: The Timer1 oscillator should already be running prior to entering SEC_IDLE mode. If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the SLEEP instruction is executed, the SLEEP instruction will be ignored and entry to SEC_IDLE mode will not occur. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, but not yet running, peripheral clocks will be delayed until the oscillator has started. In such situations, initial oscillator operation is far from stable and unpredictable operation may result. FIGURE 3-7: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO IDLE MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC PC + 2 FIGURE 3-8: TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM IDLE TO RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 TCSD CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter Wake Event PC DS39770B-page 42 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 3.4.3 RC_IDLE MODE 3.5.2 EXIT BY WDT TIME-OUT In RC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the peripherals continue to be clocked from the internal oscillator. This mode allows for controllable power conservation during Idle periods. From RC_RUN, this mode is entered by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, first set IDLEN, then clear the SCS bits and execute SLEEP. When the clock source is switched to the INTRC, the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is cleared. When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the INTOSC. After a delay of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code being clocked by the INTOSC. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. The INTOSC source will continue to run if either the WDT or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled. A WDT time-out will cause different actions depending on which power-managed mode the device is in when the time-out occurs. If the device is not executing code (all Idle modes and Sleep mode), the time-out will result in an exit from the power-managed mode (see Section 3.2 "Run Modes" and Section 3.3 "Sleep Mode"). If the device is executing code (all Run modes), the time-out will result in a WDT Reset (see Section 22.2 "Watchdog Timer (WDT)"). The Watchdog Timer and postscaler are cleared by one of the following events: * executing a SLEEP or CLRWDT instruction * the loss of a currently selected clock source (if the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled) 3.5.3 EXIT BY RESET 3.5 Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes Exiting an Idle or Sleep mode by Reset automatically forces the device to run from the INTRC. An exit from Sleep mode, or any of the Idle modes, is triggered by an interrupt, a Reset or a WDT time-out. This section discusses the triggers that cause exits from power-managed modes. The clocking subsystem actions are discussed in each of the power-managed mode sections (see Section 3.2 "Run Modes", Section 3.3 "Sleep Mode" and Section 3.4 "Idle Modes"). 3.5.4 EXIT WITHOUT AN OSCILLATOR START-UP DELAY Certain exits from power-managed modes do not invoke the OST at all. There are two cases: * PRI_IDLE mode, where the primary clock source is not stopped; and * the primary clock source is either the EC or ECPLL mode. In these instances, the primary clock source either does not require an oscillator start-up delay, since it is already running (PRI_IDLE), or normally does not require an oscillator start-up delay (EC). However, a fixed delay of interval TCSD following the wake event is still required when leaving Sleep and Idle modes to allow the CPU to prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle following this delay. 3.5.1 EXIT BY INTERRUPT Any of the available interrupt sources can cause the device to exit from an Idle mode, or the Sleep mode, to a Run mode. To enable this functionality, an interrupt source must be enabled by setting its enable bit in one of the INTCON or PIE registers. The exit sequence is initiated when the corresponding interrupt flag bit is set. On all exits from Idle or Sleep modes by interrupt, code execution branches to the interrupt vector if the GIE/GIEH bit (INTCON<7>) is set. Otherwise, code execution continues or resumes without branching (see Section 8.0 "Interrupts"). A fixed delay of interval TCSD following the wake event is required when leaving Sleep and Idle modes. This delay is required for the CPU to prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle following this delay. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 43 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 44 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 4.0 RESET 4.1 RCON Register The PIC18F85J90 family of devices differentiate between various kinds of Reset: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Power-on Reset (POR) MCLR Reset during normal operation MCLR Reset during power-managed modes Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset (during execution) Brown-out Reset (BOR) RESET Instruction Stack Full Reset Stack Underflow Reset Device Reset events are tracked through the RCON register (Register 4-1). The lower five bits of the register indicate that a specific Reset event has occurred. In most cases, these bits can only be set by the event and must be cleared by the application after the event. The state of these flag bits, taken together, can be read to indicate the type of Reset that just occurred. This is described in more detail in Section 4.6 "Reset State of Registers". The RCON register also has a control bit for setting interrupt priority (IPEN). Interrupt priority is discussed in Section 8.0 "Interrupts". This section discusses Resets generated by MCLR, POR and BOR and covers the operation of the various start-up timers. Stack Reset events are covered in Section 5.1.4.4 "Stack Full and Underflow Resets". WDT Resets are covered in Section 22.2 "Watchdog Timer (WDT)". A simplified block diagram of the on-chip Reset circuit is shown in Figure 4-1. FIGURE 4-1: RESET Instruction Stack Pointer SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT Stack Full/Underflow Reset External Reset MCLR ( )_IDLE Sleep WDT Time-out VDD Rise Detect POR Pulse VDD Brown-out Reset(1) S PWRT 32 s INTRC PWRT 65.5 ms Chip_Reset R Q 11-bit Ripple Counter Note 1: The ENVREG pin must be tied high to enable Brown-out Reset. The Brown-out Reset is provided by the on-chip voltage regulator when there is insufficient source voltage to maintain regulation. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 45 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 4-1: R/W-0 IPEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-1 RI R-1 TO R-1 PD R/W-0 POR R/W-0 BOR bit 0 IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit 1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts 0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16XXXX Compatibility mode) Unimplemented: Read as `0' RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit 1 = The RESET instruction was not executed (set by firmware only) 0 = The RESET instruction was executed causing a device Reset (must be set in software after a Brown-out Reset occurs) TO: Watchdog Time-out Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up, CLRWDT instruction or SLEEP instruction 0 = A WDT time-out occurred PD: Power-Down Detection Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction 0 = Set by execution of the SLEEP instruction POR: Power-on Reset Status bit 1 = A Power-on Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only) 0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs) BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit 1 = A Brown-out Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only) 0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Brown-out Reset occurs) bit 6-5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: It is recommended that the POR bit be set after a Power-on Reset has been detected, so that subsequent Power-on Resets may be detected. 2: If the on-chip voltage regulator is disabled, BOR remains `0' at all times. See Section 4.4.1 "Detecting BOR" for more information. 3: Brown-out Reset is said to have occurred when BOR is `0' and POR is `1' (assuming that POR was set to `1' by software immediately after a Power-on Reset). DS39770B-page 46 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 4.2 Master Clear (MCLR) FIGURE 4-2: The MCLR pin provides a method for triggering a hard external Reset of the device. A Reset is generated by holding the pin low. PIC18 extended microcontroller devices have a noise filter in the MCLR Reset path which detects and ignores small pulses. The MCLR pin is not driven low by any internal Resets, including the WDT. EXTERNAL POWER-ON RESET CIRCUIT (FOR SLOW VDD POWER-UP) VDD VDD D R R1 MCLR C 4.3 Power-on Reset (POR) Note 1: PIC18F85J90 A Power-on Reset condition is generated on-chip whenever VDD rises above a certain threshold. This allows the device to start in the initialized state when VDD is adequate for operation. To take advantage of the POR circuitry, tie the MCLR pin through a resistor (1 k to 10 k) to VDD. This will eliminate external RC components usually needed to create a Power-on Reset delay. A minimum rise rate for VDD is specified (parameter D004). For a slow rise time, see Figure 4-2. When the device starts normal operation (i.e., exits the Reset condition), device operating parameters (voltage, frequency, temperature, etc.) must be met to ensure operation. If these conditions are not met, the device must be held in Reset until the operating conditions are met. Power-on Reset events are captured by the POR bit (RCON<1>). The state of the bit is set to `0' whenever a Power-on Reset occurs; it does not change for any other Reset event. POR is not reset to `1' by any hardware event. To capture multiple events, the user manually resets the bit to `1' in software following any Power-on Reset. External Power-on Reset circuit is required only if the VDD power-up slope is too slow. The diode D helps discharge the capacitor quickly when VDD powers down. R < 40 k is recommended to make sure that the voltage drop across R does not violate the device's electrical specification. R1 1 k will limit any current flowing into MCLR from external capacitor C, in the event of MCLR/VPP pin breakdown, due to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or Electrical Overstress (EOS). 2: 3: 4.4.1 DETECTING BOR The BOR bit always resets to `0' on any Brown-out Reset or Power-on Reset event. This makes it difficult to determine if a Brown-out Reset event has occurred just by reading the state of BOR alone. A more reliable method is to simultaneously check the state of both POR and BOR. This assumes that the POR bit is reset to `1' in software immediately after any Power-on Reset event. If BOR is `0' while POR is `1', it can be reliably assumed that a Brown-out Reset event has occurred. If the voltage regulator is disabled, Brown-out Reset functionality is disabled. In this case, the BOR bit cannot be used to determine a Brown-out Reset event. The BOR bit is still cleared by a Power-on Reset event. 4.4 Brown-out Reset (BOR) The PIC18F85J90 family of devices incorporates a simple BOR function when the internal regulator is enabled (ENVREG pin is tied to VDD). The voltage regulator will trigger a Brown-out Reset when output of the regulator to the device core approaches the voltage at which the device is unable to run at full speed. The BOR circuit also keeps the device in Reset as VDD rises, until the regulator's output level is sufficient for full-speed operation. Once a BOR has occurred, the Power-up Timer will keep the chip in Reset for TPWRT (parameter 33). If VDD drops below the threshold for full-speed operation while the Power-up Timer is running, the chip will go back into a Brown-out Reset and the Power-up Timer will be initialized. Once VDD rises to the point where regulator output is sufficient, the Power-up Timer will execute the additional time delay. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 47 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 4.5 Power-up Timer (PWRT) 4.5.1 TIME-OUT SEQUENCE PIC18F85J90 family devices incorporate an on-chip Power-up Timer (PWRT) to help regulate the Power-on Reset process. The PWRT is always enabled. The main function is to ensure that the device voltage is stable before code is executed. The Power-up Timer (PWRT) of the PIC18F85J90 family devices is an 11-bit counter which uses the INTRC source as the clock input. This yields an approximate time interval of 2048 x 32 s = 65.6 ms. While the PWRT is counting, the device is held in Reset. The power-up time delay depends on the INTRC clock and will vary from chip-to-chip due to temperature and process variation. See DC parameter 33 for details. If enabled, the PWRT time-out is invoked after the POR pulse has cleared. The total time-out will vary based on the status of the PWRT. Figure 4-3, Figure 4-4, Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6 all depict time-out sequences on power-up with the Power-up Timer enabled. Since the time-outs occur from the POR pulse, if MCLR is kept low long enough, the PWRT will expire. Bringing MCLR high will begin execution immediately (Figure 4-5). This is useful for testing purposes, or to synchronize more than one PIC18FXXXX device operating in parallel. FIGURE 4-3: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE < TPWRT) VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET FIGURE 4-4: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 1 VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET DS39770B-page 48 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 4-5: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 2 VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET FIGURE 4-6: SLOW RISE TIME (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE > TPWRT) 3.3V VDD MCLR 0V 1V INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 49 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 4.6 Reset State of Registers Most registers are unaffected by a Reset. Their status is unknown on POR and unchanged by all other Resets. The other registers are forced to a "Reset state" depending on the type of Reset that occurred. Most registers are not affected by a WDT wake-up, since this is viewed as the resumption of normal operation. Status bits from the RCON register, RI, TO, PD, POR and BOR, are set or cleared differently in different Reset situations, as indicated in Table 4-1. These bits are used in software to determine the nature of the Reset. Table 4-2 describes the Reset states for all of the Special Function Registers. These are categorized by Power-on and Brown-out Resets, Master Clear and WDT Resets and WDT wake-ups. TABLE 4-1: STATUS BITS, THEIR SIGNIFICANCE AND THE INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER Program Counter(1) 0000h 0000h 0000h 0000h 0000h 0000h 0000h 0000h 0000h 0000h PC + 2 RCON Register RI 1 0 1 u u u u u u u u TO 1 u 1 1 1 0 u u u u 0 PD 1 u 1 u 0 u u u u u 0 POR 0 u u u u u u u u u u BOR 0 u 0 u u u u u u u u STKPTR Register STKFUL 0 u u u u u u 1 u u u STKUNF 0 u u u u u u u 1 1 u Condition Power-on Reset RESET Instruction Brown-out Reset MCLR during power-managed Run modes MCLR during power-managed Idle modes and Sleep mode WDT time-out during full power or power-managed Run modes MCLR during full power execution Stack Full Reset (STVREN = 1) Stack Underflow Reset (STVREN = 1) Stack Underflow Error (not an actual Reset, STVREN = 0) WDT time-out during power-managed Idle or Sleep modes Interrupt exit from power-managed modes PC + 2 u u 0 u u u u Legend: u = unchanged Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEH or GIEL bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). DS39770B-page 50 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset ---0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uu-0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 --00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 000x 1111 1111 1100 0000 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ---- xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets ---0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00-0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 --00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 0000 000u 1111 1111 1100 0000 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ---- uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt ---0 uuuu(1) uuuu uuuu(1) uuuu uuuu(1) uu-u uuuu(1) ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu PC + 2(2) --uu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu(3) uuuu uuuu(3) uuuu uuuu(3) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ---- uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A TOSU TOSH TOSL STKPTR PCLATU PCLATH PCL TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TABLAT PRODH PRODL INTCON INTCON2 INTCON3 INDF0 POSTINC0 POSTDEC0 PREINC0 PLUSW0 FSR0H FSR0L WREG INDF1 POSTINC1 POSTDEC1 PREINC1 PLUSW1 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as `0', q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: Bits 6 and 7 of PORTA, LATA and TRISA are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 51 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset ---- xxxx xxxx xxxx ---- 0000 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ---- xxxx xxxx xxxx ---x xxxx 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx 1111 1111 0100 q000 -011 1100 0--- ---0 0--1 11q0 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 -000 0000 xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets ---- uuuu uuuu uuuu ---- 0000 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ---- uuuu uuuu uuuu ---u uuuu 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 1111 1111 0100 q000 -011 1000 0--- ---0 0--q qquu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu u0uu uuuu 0000 0000 1111 1111 -000 0000 uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt ---- uuuu uuuu uuuu ---- uuuu N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ---- uuuu uuuu uuuu ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu quuu -uuu uuuu u--- ---u u--u qquu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 1111 1111 -uuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu FSR1H FSR1L BSR INDF2 POSTINC2 POSTDEC2 PREINC2 PLUSW2 FSR2H FSR2L STATUS TMR0H TMR0L T0CON OSCCON LCDREG WDTCON RCON (4) PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 TMR1H TMR1L T1CON TMR2 PR2 T2CON SSPBUF SSPADD SSPSTAT SSPCON1 SSPCON2 Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as `0', q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: Bits 6 and 7 of PORTA, LATA and TRISA are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read as `0'. DS39770B-page 52 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0-00 0000 --00 0000 0-00 0000 ---- ---x xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 ---- ---0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0111 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 000x 0000 0000 0000 0000 000- 0000 ---- ------0 x00MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 0-00 0000 --00 0000 0-00 0000 ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0111 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 000x 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu 000- 0000 ---- ------0 u00Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu u-uu uuuu --uu uuuu u-uu uuuu ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu- uuuu ---- ------0 u00- ADRESH ADRESL ADCON0 ADCON1 ADCON2 LCDDATA4 LCDDATA4 LCDDATA3 LCDDATA2 LCDDATA1 LCDDATA0 LCDSE5 LCDSE4 LCDSE4 LCDSE3 LCDSE2 LCDSE1 CVRCON CMCON TMR3H TMR3L T3CON SPBRG1 RCREG1 TXREG1 TXSTA1 RCSTA1 LCDPS LCDSE0 LCDCON EECON2 EECON1 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as `0', q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: Bits 6 and 7 of PORTA, LATA and TRISA are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 53 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset -111 -11-000 -00-000 -0011-- 11100-- 00000-- 000-111 1-11 -000 0-00 -000 0-00 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 0001 1111 1111 1111111 1-11 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111(5) xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 00-x xxxx xxxx xxxxxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 000x xxxx xxxx xxx(5) MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets -111 -11-000 -00-000 -0011-- 11100-- 00000-- 000-111 1-11 -000 0-00 -000 0-00 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 0001 1111 1111 1111111 1-11 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111(5) uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 00-u uuuu uuuu uuuuuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu (5) Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt -uuu -uu-uuu -00-(3) -uuu -00uu-- uuuuu-- uuu-(3) uu-- uuu-uuu u-uu -uuu u-uu(3) -uuu u-uu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuuuuu u-uu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu(5) uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uu-u uuuu uuuu uuuuuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu(5) uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 000u uuuu uuuu uuu- IPR3 PIR3 PIE3 IPR2 PIR2 PIE2 IPR1 PIR1 PIE1 OSCTUNE TRISJ TRISH TRISG TRISF TRISE TRISD TRISC TRISB TRISA(5) LATJ LATH LATG LATF LATE LATD LATC LATB LATA (5) PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PORTJ PORTH PORTG PORTF uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu 000u uuuu uuuu uuu- Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as `0', q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: Bits 6 and 7 of PORTA, LATA and TRISA are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read as `0'. DS39770B-page 54 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset xxxx x-xx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xx0x 0000(5) 0000 0000 01-0 0-00 xxxx xxxx ---- ---x xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx ---- ---x xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx ---- ---x xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx --00 0000 xxxx xxxx MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets uuuu u-uu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uu0u 0000(5) 0000 0000 01-0 0-00 uuuu uuuu ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu --00 0000 uuuu uuuu Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt uuuu u-uu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu(5) uuuu uuuu uu-u u-uu uuuu uuuu ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ---- ---u uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu --uu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTE PORTD PORTC PORTB PORTA(5) SPBRGH1 BAUDCON1 LCDDATA23 LCDDATA22 LCDDATA22 LCDDATA21 LCDDATA20 LCDDATA19 LCDDATA18 LCDDATA17 LCDDATA16 LCDDATA16 LCDDATA15 LCDDATA14 LCDDATA13 LCDDATA12 LCDDATA11 LCDDATA10 LCDDATA10 LCDDATA9 LCDDATA8 LCDDATA7 LCDDATA6 LCDDATA5 CCPR1H CCPR1L CCP1CON CCPR2H PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as `0', q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: Bits 6 and 7 of PORTA, LATA and TRISA are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 55 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset xxxx xxxx --00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 -010 0000 000x MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets uuuu uuuu --00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 -010 0000 000x Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt uuuu uuuu --uu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu -uuu uuuu uuuu CCPR2L CCP2CON SPBRG2 RCREG2 TXREG2 TXSTA2 RCSTA2 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 PIC18F6XJ90 PIC18F8XJ90 Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as `0', q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. 5: Bits 6 and 7 of PORTA, LATA and TRISA are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read as `0'. DS39770B-page 56 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION 5.1 Program Memory Organization There are two types of memory in PIC18 Flash microcontroller devices: * Program Memory * Data RAM As Harvard architecture devices, the data and program memories use separate busses; this allows for concurrent access of the two memory spaces. Additional detailed information on the operation of the Flash program memory is provided in Section 6.0 "Flash Program Memory". PIC18 microcontrollers implement a 21-bit program counter which is capable of addressing a 2-Mbyte program memory space. Accessing a location between the upper boundary of the physically implemented memory and the 2-Mbyte address will return all `0's (a NOP instruction). The entire PIC18F85J90 family offers a range of on-chip Flash program memory sizes, from 8 Kbytes (up to 4,096 single-word instructions) to 32 Kbytes (32,768 single-word instructions). The program memory maps for individual family members are shown in Figure 5-1. FIGURE 5-1: MEMORY MAPS FOR PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DEVICES PC<20:0> 21 CALL, CALLW, RCALL, RETURN, RETFIE, RETLW, ADDULNK, SUBULNK Stack Level 1 * * * Stack Level 31 PIC18FX3J90 On-Chip Memory Config. Words PIC18FX4J90 On-Chip Memory PIC18FX5J90 On-Chip Memory 000000h 001FFFh Config. Words 003FFFh Config. Words 007FFFh Unimplemented Read as `0' Unimplemented Read as `0' Unimplemented Read as `0' 1FFFFFh Note: Sizes of memory areas are not to scale. Sizes of program memory areas are enhanced to show detail. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 57 User Memory Space PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.1.1 HARD MEMORY VECTORS 5.1.2 FLASH CONFIGURATION WORDS All PIC18 devices have a total of three hard-coded return vectors in their program memory space. The Reset vector address is the default value to which the program counter returns on all device Resets; it is located at 0000h. PIC18 devices also have two interrupt vector addresses for the handling of high priority and low priority interrupts. The high priority interrupt vector is located at 0008h and the low priority interrupt vector is at 0018h. Their locations in relation to the program memory map are shown in Figure 5-2. Because PIC18F85J90 family devices do not have persistent configuration memory, the top four words of on-chip program memory are reserved for configuration information. On Reset, the configuration information is copied into the Configuration registers. The Configuration Words are stored in their program memory location in numerical order, starting with the lower byte of CONFIG1 at the lowest address and ending with the upper byte of CONFIG4. For these devices, only Configuration Words, CONFIG1 through CONFIG3, are used; CONFIG4 is reserved. The actual addresses of the Flash Configuration Word for devices in the PIC18F85J90 family are shown in Table 5-1. Their location in the memory map is shown with the other memory vectors in Figure 5-2. Additional details on the device Configuration Words are provided in Section 22.1 "Configuration Bits". FIGURE 5-2: HARD VECTOR AND CONFIGURATION WORD LOCATIONS FOR PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FAMILY DEVICES 0000h 0008h 0018h Reset Vector High Priority Interrupt Vector Low Priority Interrupt Vector TABLE 5-1: FLASH CONFIGURATION WORD FOR PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DEVICES Program Memory (Kbytes) 8 16 32 Configuration Word Addresses 1FF8h to 1FFFh 3FF8h to 3FFFh 7FF8h to 7FFFh Device PIC18F63J90 On-Chip Program Memory PIC18F83J90 PIC18F64J90 PIC18F84J90 PIC18F65J90 PIC18F85J90 Flash Configuration Words (Top of Memory-7) (Top of Memory) Read `0' 1FFFFFh Legend: (Top of Memory) represents upper boundary of on-chip program memory space (see Figure 5-1 for device-specific values). Shaded area represents unimplemented memory. Areas are not shown to scale. DS39770B-page 58 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.1.3 PROGRAM COUNTER The Program Counter (PC) specifies the address of the instruction to fetch for execution. The PC is 21 bits wide and is contained in three separate 8-bit registers. The low byte, known as the PCL register, is both readable and writable. The high byte, or PCH register, contains the PC<15:8> bits; it is not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCH register are performed through the PCLATH register. The upper byte is called PCU. This register contains the PC<20:16> bits; it is also not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCU register are performed through the PCLATU register. The contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are transferred to the program counter by any operation that writes PCL. Similarly, the upper two bytes of the program counter are transferred to PCLATH and PCLATU by an operation that reads PCL. This is useful for computed offsets to the PC (see Section 5.1.6.1 "Computed GOTO"). The PC addresses bytes in the program memory. To prevent the PC from becoming misaligned with word instructions, the Least Significant bit of PCL is fixed to a value of `0'. The PC increments by 2 to address sequential instructions in the program memory. The CALL, RCALL, GOTO and program branch instructions write to the program counter directly. For these instructions, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are not transferred to the program counter. The stack operates as a 31-word by 21-bit RAM and a 5-bit Stack Pointer, STKPTR. The stack space is not part of either program or data space. The Stack Pointer is readable and writable and the address on the top of the stack is readable and writable through the Top-of-Stack Special Function Registers. Data can also be pushed to, or popped from the stack, using these registers. A CALL type instruction causes a push onto the stack. The Stack Pointer is first incremented and the location pointed to by the Stack Pointer is written with the contents of the PC (already pointing to the instruction following the CALL). A RETURN type instruction causes a pop from the stack. The contents of the location pointed to by the STKPTR are transferred to the PC and then the Stack Pointer is decremented. The Stack Pointer is initialized to `00000' after all Resets. There is no RAM associated with the location corresponding to a Stack Pointer value of `00000'; this is only a Reset value. Status bits indicate if the stack is full, has overflowed or has underflowed. 5.1.4.1 Top-of-Stack Access 5.1.4 RETURN ADDRESS STACK The return address stack allows any combination of up to 31 program calls and interrupts to occur. The PC is pushed onto the stack when a CALL or RCALL instruction is executed, or an interrupt is Acknowledged. The PC value is pulled off the stack on a RETURN, RETLW or a RETFIE instruction (and on ADDULNK and SUBULNK instructions if the extended instruction set is enabled). PCLATU and PCLATH are not affected by any of the RETURN or CALL instructions. Only the top of the return address stack (TOS) is readable and writable. A set of three registers, TOSU:TOSH:TOSL, holds the contents of the stack location pointed to by the STKPTR register (Figure 5-3). This allows users to implement a software stack if necessary. After a CALL, RCALL or interrupt (and ADDULNK and SUBULNK instructions if the extended instruction set is enabled), the software can read the pushed value by reading the TOSU:TOSH:TOSL registers. These values can be placed on a user-defined software stack. At return time, the software can return these values to TOSU:TOSH:TOSL and do a return. The user must disable the global interrupt enable bits while accessing the stack to prevent inadvertent stack corruption. FIGURE 5-3: RETURN ADDRESS STACK AND ASSOCIATED REGISTERS Return Address Stack <20:0> Top-of-Stack Registers TOSU 00h TOSH 1Ah TOSL 34h 11111 11110 11101 Stack Pointer STKPTR<4:0> 00010 Top-of-Stack 001A34h 000D58h 00011 00010 00001 00000 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 59 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.1.4.2 Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) The STKPTR register (Register 5-1) contains the Stack Pointer value, the STKFUL (Stack Full) status bit and the STKUNF (Stack Underflow) status bits. The value of the Stack Pointer can be 0 through 31. The Stack Pointer increments before values are pushed onto the stack and decrements after values are popped off the stack. On Reset, the Stack Pointer value will be zero. The user may read and write the Stack Pointer value. This feature can be used by a Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) for return stack maintenance. After the PC is pushed onto the stack 31 times (without popping any values off the stack), the STKFUL bit is set. The STKFUL bit is cleared by software or by a POR. The action that takes place when the stack becomes full depends on the state of the STVREN (Stack Overflow Reset Enable) Configuration bit. (Refer to Section 22.1 "Configuration Bits" for a description of the device Configuration bits.) If STVREN is set (default), the 31st push will push the (PC + 2) value onto the stack, set the STKFUL bit and reset the device. The STKFUL bit will remain set and the Stack Pointer will be set to zero. If STVREN is cleared, the STKFUL bit will be set on the 31st push and the Stack Pointer will increment to 31. Any additional pushes will not overwrite the 31st push and the STKPTR will remain at 31. When the stack has been popped enough times to unload the stack, the next pop will return a value of zero to the PC and set the STKUNF bit, while the Stack Pointer remains at zero. The STKUNF bit will remain set until cleared by software or until a POR occurs. Note: Returning a value of zero to the PC on an underflow has the effect of vectoring the program to the Reset vector, where the stack conditions can be verified and appropriate actions can be taken. This is not the same as a Reset, as the contents of the SFRs are not affected. 5.1.4.3 PUSH and POP Instructions Since the Top-of-Stack is readable and writable, the ability to push values onto the stack and pull values off the stack, without disturbing normal program execution, is a desirable feature. The PIC18 instruction set includes two instructions, PUSH and POP, that permit the TOS to be manipulated under software control. TOSU, TOSH and TOSL can be modified to place data or a return address on the stack. The PUSH instruction places the current PC value onto the stack. This increments the Stack Pointer and loads the current PC value onto the stack. The POP instruction discards the current TOS by decrementing the Stack Pointer. The previous value pushed onto the stack then becomes the TOS value. REGISTER 5-1: R/C-0 STKFUL(1) bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 STKPTR: STACK POINTER REGISTER R/C-0 U-0 -- R/W-0 SP4 R/W-0 SP3 R/W-0 SP2 R/W-0 SP1 R/W-0 SP0 bit 0 C = Clearable-only bit W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown STKUNF(1) STKFUL: Stack Full Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack became full or overflowed 0 = Stack has not become full or overflowed STKUNF: Stack Underflow Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack underflow occurred 0 = Stack underflow did not occur Unimplemented: Read as `0' SP4:SP0: Stack Pointer Location bits Bit 7 and bit 6 are cleared by user software or by a POR. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4-0 Note 1: DS39770B-page 60 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.1.4.4 Stack Full and Underflow Resets 5.1.6 Device Resets on stack overflow and stack underflow conditions are enabled by setting the STVREN bit in Configuration Register 1L. When STVREN is set, a full or underflow condition will set the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit and then cause a device Reset. When STVREN is cleared, a full or underflow condition will set the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit, but not cause a device Reset. The STKFUL or STKUNF bits are cleared by the user software or a Power-on Reset. LOOK-UP TABLES IN PROGRAM MEMORY There may be programming situations that require the creation of data structures, or look-up tables, in program memory. For PIC18 devices, look-up tables can be implemented in two ways: * Computed GOTO * Table Reads 5.1.6.1 Computed GOTO 5.1.5 FAST REGISTER STACK A Fast Register Stack is provided for the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers to provide a "fast return" option for interrupts. This stack is only one level deep and is neither readable nor writable. It is loaded with the current value of the corresponding register when the processor vectors for an interrupt. All interrupt sources will push values into the Stack registers. The values in the registers are then loaded back into the working registers if the RETFIE, FAST instruction is used to return from the interrupt. If both low and high priority interrupts are enabled, the Stack registers cannot be used reliably to return from low priority interrupts. If a high priority interrupt occurs while servicing a low priority interrupt, the Stack register values stored by the low priority interrupt will be overwritten. In these cases, users must save the key registers in software during a low priority interrupt. If interrupt priority is not used, all interrupts may use the Fast Register Stack for returns from interrupt. If no interrupts are used, the Fast Register Stack can be used to restore the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers at the end of a subroutine call. To use the Fast Register Stack for a subroutine call, a CALL label, FAST instruction must be executed to save the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers to the Fast Register Stack. A RETURN, FAST instruction is then executed to restore these registers from the Fast Register Stack. Example 5-1 shows a source code example that uses the Fast Register Stack during a subroutine call and return. A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset to the program counter. An example is shown in Example 5-2. A look-up table can be formed with an ADDWF PCL instruction and a group of RETLW nn instructions. The W register is loaded with an offset into the table before executing a call to that table. The first instruction of the called routine is the ADDWF PCL instruction. The next instruction executed will be one of the RETLW nn instructions that returns the value `nn' to the calling function. The offset value (in WREG) specifies the number of bytes that the program counter should advance and should be multiples of 2 (LSb = 0). In this method, only one data byte may be stored in each instruction location and room on the return address stack is required. EXAMPLE 5-2: MOVF CALL nn00h ADDWF RETLW RETLW RETLW . . . COMPUTED GOTO USING AN OFFSET VALUE OFFSET, W TABLE PCL nnh nnh nnh ORG TABLE 5.1.6.2 Table Reads EXAMPLE 5-1: CALL SUB1, FAST FAST REGISTER STACK CODE EXAMPLE ;STATUS, WREG, BSR ;SAVED IN FAST REGISTER ;STACK A better method of storing data in program memory allows two bytes of data to be stored in each instruction location. Look-up table data may be stored two bytes per program word while programming. The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) specifies the byte address and the Table Latch (TABLAT) contains the data that is read from the program memory. Data is transferred from program memory one byte at a time. Table read operation is discussed further Section 6.1 "Table Reads and Table Writes". in * * SUB1 * * RETURN FAST ;RESTORE VALUES SAVED ;IN FAST REGISTER STACK (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 61 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.2 5.2.1 PIC18 Instruction Cycle CLOCKING SCHEME 5.2.2 INSTRUCTION FLOW/PIPELINING The microcontroller clock input, whether from an internal or external source, is internally divided by four to generate four non-overlapping quadrature clocks (Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4). Internally, the program counter is incremented on every Q1; the instruction is fetched from the program memory and latched into the Instruction Register (IR) during Q4. The instruction is decoded and executed during the following Q1 through Q4. The clocks and instruction execution flow are shown in Figure 5-4. An "Instruction Cycle" consists of four Q cycles, Q1 through Q4. The instruction fetch and execute are pipelined in such a manner that a fetch takes one instruction cycle, while the decode and execute take another instruction cycle. However, due to the pipelining, each instruction effectively executes in one cycle. If an instruction causes the program counter to change (e.g., GOTO), then two cycles are required to complete the instruction (Example 5-3). A fetch cycle begins with the Program Counter (PC) incrementing in Q1. In the execution cycle, the fetched instruction is latched into the Instruction Register (IR) in cycle Q1. This instruction is then decoded and executed during the Q2, Q3 and Q4 cycles. Data memory is read during Q2 (operand read) and written during Q4 (destination write). FIGURE 5-4: OSC1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PC OSC2/CLKO (RC mode) CLOCK/INSTRUCTION CYCLE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Internal Phase Clock PC PC + 2 PC + 4 Execute INST (PC - 2) Fetch INST (PC) Execute INST (PC) Fetch INST (PC + 2) Execute INST (PC + 2) Fetch INST (PC + 4) EXAMPLE 5-3: INSTRUCTION PIPELINE FLOW TCY0 TCY1 Execute 1 Fetch 2 Execute 2 Fetch 3 Execute 3 Fetch 4 Flush (NOP) Fetch SUB_1 Execute SUB_1 TCY2 TCY3 TCY4 TCY5 1. MOVLW 55h 2. MOVWF PORTB 3. BRA 4. BSF SUB_1 Fetch 1 PORTA, BIT3 (Forced NOP) 5. Instruction @ address SUB_1 All instructions are single cycle, except for any program branches. These take two cycles since the fetch instruction is "flushed" from the pipeline while the new instruction is being fetched and then executed. DS39770B-page 62 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.2.3 INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY The program memory is addressed in bytes. Instructions are stored as two bytes or four bytes in program memory. The Least Significant Byte of an instruction word is always stored in a program memory location with an even address (LSB = 0). To maintain alignment with instruction boundaries, the PC increments in steps of 2 and the LSB will always read `0' (see Section 5.1.3 "Program Counter"). Figure 5-5 shows an example of how instruction words are stored in the program memory. The CALL and GOTO instructions have the absolute program memory address embedded into the instruction. Since instructions are always stored on word boundaries, the data contained in the instruction is a word address. The word address is written to PC<20:1> which accesses the desired byte address in program memory. Instruction #2 in Figure 5-5 shows how the instruction, GOTO 0006h, is encoded in the program memory. Program branch instructions, which encode a relative address offset, operate in the same manner. The offset value stored in a branch instruction represents the number of single-word instructions that the PC will be offset by. Section 23.0 "Instruction Set Summary" provides further details of the instruction set. FIGURE 5-5: INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY LSB = 1 Program Memory Byte Locations LSB = 0 Word Address 000000h 000002h 000004h 000006h 000008h 00000Ah 00000Ch 00000Eh 000010h 000012h 000014h Instruction 1: Instruction 2: Instruction 3: MOVLW GOTO MOVFF 055h 0006h 123h, 456h 0Fh EFh F0h C1h F4h 55h 03h 00h 23h 56h 5.2.4 TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS The standard PIC18 instruction set has four two-word instructions: CALL, MOVFF, GOTO and LSFR. In all cases, the second word of the instructions always has `1111' as its four Most Significant bits; the other 12 bits are literal data, usually a data memory address. The use of `1111' in the 4 MSbs of an instruction specifies a special form of NOP. If the instruction is executed in proper sequence - immediately after the first word - the data in the second word is accessed and used by the instruction sequence. If the first word is skipped for some reason and the second word is executed by itself, a NOP is executed instead. This is necessary for cases when the two-word instruction is preceded by a conditional instruction that changes the PC. Example 5-4 shows how this works. Note: See Section 5.5 "Program Memory and the Extended Instruction Set" for information on two-word instructions in the extended instruction set. EXAMPLE 5-4: CASE 1: Object Code TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS Source Code TSTFSZ MOVFF ADDWF Source Code TSTFSZ MOVFF ADDWF REG1 REG1, REG2 REG3 ; is RAM location 0? ; Yes, execute this word ; 2nd word of instruction ; continue code REG1 REG1, REG2 REG3 ; is RAM location 0? ; No, skip this word ; Execute this word as a NOP ; continue code 0110 0110 0000 0000 1100 0001 0010 0011 1111 0100 0101 0110 0010 0100 0000 0000 CASE 2: Object Code 0110 0110 0000 0000 1100 0001 0010 0011 1111 0100 0101 0110 0010 0100 0000 0000 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 63 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.3 Note: Data Memory Organization The operation of some aspects of data memory are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 5.6 "Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set" for more information. 5.3.1 BANK SELECT REGISTER The data memory in PIC18 devices is implemented as static RAM. Each register in the data memory has a 12-bit address, allowing up to 4096 bytes of data memory. The memory space is divided into as many as 16 banks that contain 256 bytes each. The PIC18FX3J90/X4J90 devices, with up to 16 Kbytes of program memory, implement 4 complete banks for a total of 1024 bytes. PIC18FX5J90 devices, with 32 Kbytes of program memory, implement 8 complete banks for a total of 2048 bytes. Figure 5-6 and Figure 5-7 show the data memory organization for the devices. The data memory contains Special Function Registers (SFRs) and General Purpose Registers (GPRs). The SFRs are used for control and status of the controller and peripheral functions, while GPRs are used for data storage and scratchpad operations in the user's application. Any read of an unimplemented location will read as `0's. The instruction set and architecture allow operations across all banks. The entire data memory may be accessed by Direct, Indirect or Indexed Addressing modes. Addressing modes are discussed later in this section. To ensure that commonly used registers (select SFRs and select GPRs) can be accessed in a single cycle, PIC18 devices implement an Access Bank. This is a 256-byte memory space that provides fast access to select SFRs and the lower portion of GPR Bank 0 without using the BSR. Section 5.3.2 "Access Bank" provides a detailed description of the Access RAM. Large areas of data memory require an efficient addressing scheme to make rapid access to any address possible. Ideally, this means that an entire address does not need to be provided for each read or write operation. For PIC18 devices, this is accomplished with a RAM banking scheme. This divides the memory space into 16 contiguous banks of 256 bytes. Depending on the instruction, each location can be addressed directly by its full 12-bit address, or an 8-bit low-order address and a 4-bit Bank Pointer. Most instructions in the PIC18 instruction set make use of the Bank Pointer, known as the Bank Select Register (BSR). This SFR holds the 4 Most Significant bits of a location's address; the instruction itself includes the 8 Least Significant bits. Only the four lower bits of the BSR are implemented (BSR3:BSR0). The upper four bits are unused; they will always read `0' and cannot be written to. The BSR can be loaded directly by using the MOVLB instruction. The value of the BSR indicates the bank in data memory. The 8 bits in the instruction show the location in the bank and can be thought of as an offset from the bank's lower boundary. The relationship between the BSR's value and the bank division in data memory is shown in Figure 5-8. Since up to 16 registers may share the same low-order address, the user must always be careful to ensure that the proper bank is selected before performing a data read or write. For example, writing what should be program data to an 8-bit address of F9h while the BSR is 0Fh, will end up resetting the program counter. While any bank can be selected, only those banks that are actually implemented can be read or written to. Writes to unimplemented banks are ignored, while reads from unimplemented banks will return `0's. Even so, the STATUS register will still be affected as if the operation was successful. The data memory map in Figure 5-6 indicates which banks are implemented. In the core PIC18 instruction set, only the MOVFF instruction fully specifies the 12-bit address of the source and target registers. This instruction ignores the BSR completely when it executes. All other instructions include only the low-order address as an operand and must use either the BSR or the Access Bank to locate their target registers. DS39770B-page 64 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 5-6: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18FX3J90/X4J90 DEVICES When a = 0: BSR<3:0> 00h = 0000 Data Memory Map Access RAM Bank 0 FFh 00h Bank 1 FFh 00h Bank 2 FFh 00h Bank 3 FFh 00h GPR 3FFh 400h GPR 2FFh 300h GPR GPR 1FFh 200h 000h 05Fh 060h 0FFh 100h The BSR is ignored and the Access Bank is used. The first 96 bytes are general purpose RAM (from Bank 0). The second 160 bytes are Special Function Registers (from Bank 15). When a = 1: The BSR specifies the bank used by the instruction. = 0001 = 0010 = 0011 = 0100 Bank 4 Access Bank 00h Unused Read as `0' 5Fh Access RAM High 60h (SFRs) FFh Access RAM Low to = 1110 Bank 14 = 1111 Bank 15 FFh 00h FFh Unused SFR EFFh F00h F5Fh F60h FFFh (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 65 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 5-7: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18FX5J90 DEVICES When a = 0: BSR<3:0> 00h = 0000 Data Memory Map Access RAM Bank 0 FFh 00h Bank 1 FFh 00h Bank 2 FFh 00h Bank 3 FFh 00h Bank 4 FFh 00h Bank 5 FFh 00h Bank 6 FFh 00h Bank 7 FFh 00h GPR 7FFh 800h GPR 6FFh 700h GPR 5FFh 600h GPR 4FFh 500h GPR 3FFh 400h GPR 2FFh 300h GPR GPR 1FFh 200h 000h 05Fh 060h 0FFh 100h The BSR is ignored and the Access Bank is used. The first 96 bytes are general purpose RAM (from Bank 0). The second 160 bytes are Special Function Registers (from Bank 15). When a = 1: The BSR specifies the bank used by the instruction. = 0001 = 0010 = 0011 = 0100 = 0101 = 0110 = 0111 Access Bank 00h 5Fh Access RAM High 60h (SFRs) FFh Access RAM Low = 1000 Bank 8 to Unused Read as `0' = 1110 Bank 14 = 1111 Bank 15 FFh 00h FFh Unused SFR EFFh F00h F5Fh F60h FFFh DS39770B-page 66 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 5-8: 7 0 0 0 USE OF THE BANK SELECT REGISTER (DIRECT ADDRESSING) BSR(1) 0 0 0 1 0 0 100h 000h Data Memory 00h Bank 0 Bank 1 FFh 00h FFh 00h Bank 2 FFh 00h 7 1 1 From Opcode(2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 Bank Select(2) 200h 300h Bank 3 through Bank 13 E00h Bank 14 F00h Bank 15 FFFh Note 1: 2: FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh The Access RAM bit of the instruction can be used to force an override of the selected bank (BSR<3:0>) to the registers of the Access Bank. The MOVFF instruction embeds the entire 12-bit address in the instruction. 5.3.2 ACCESS BANK While the use of the BSR with an embedded 8-bit address allows users to address the entire range of data memory, it also means that the user must always ensure that the correct bank is selected. Otherwise, data may be read from, or written to, the wrong location. This can be disastrous if a GPR is the intended target of an operation, but an SFR is written to instead. Verifying and/or changing the BSR for each read or write to data memory can become very inefficient. To streamline access for the most commonly used data memory locations, the data memory is configured with an Access Bank, which allows users to access a mapped block of memory without specifying a BSR. The Access Bank consists of the first 96 bytes of memory (00h-5Fh) in Bank 0 and the last 160 bytes of memory (60h-FFh) in Bank 15. The lower half is known as the "Access RAM" and is composed of GPRs. The upper half is where the device's SFRs are mapped. These two areas are mapped contiguously in the Access Bank and can be addressed in a linear fashion by an 8-bit address (Figure 5-6). The Access Bank is used by core PIC18 instructions that include the Access RAM bit (the `a' parameter in the instruction). When `a' is equal to `1', the instruction uses the BSR and the 8-bit address included in the opcode for the data memory address. When `a' is `0', however, the instruction is forced to use the Access Bank address map; the current value of the BSR is ignored entirely. Using this "forced" addressing allows the instruction to operate on a data address in a single cycle without updating the BSR first. For 8-bit addresses of 60h and above, this means that users can evaluate and operate on SFRs more efficiently. The Access RAM below 60h is a good place for data values that the user might need to access rapidly, such as immediate computational results or common program variables. Access RAM also allows for faster and more code efficient context saving and switching of variables. The mapping of the Access Bank is slightly different when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). This is discussed in more detail in Section 5.6.3 "Mapping the Access Bank in Indexed Literal Offset Mode". 5.3.3 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER FILE PIC18 devices may have banked memory in the GPR area. This is data RAM which is available for use by all instructions. GPRs start at the bottom of Bank 0 (address 000h) and grow upwards towards the bottom of the SFR area. GPRs are not initialized by a Power-on Reset and are unchanged on all other Resets. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 67 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.3.4 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS The Special Function Registers (SFRs) are registers used by the CPU and peripheral modules for controlling the desired operation of the device. These registers are implemented as static RAM. SFRs start at the top of data memory (FFFh) and extend downward to occupy more than the top half of Bank 15 (F60h to FFFh). A list of these registers is given in Table 5-2 and Table 5-3. The SFRs can be classified into two sets: those associated with the "core" device functionality (ALU, Resets and interrupts) and those related to the peripheral functions. The Reset and Interrupt registers are described in their respective chapters, while the ALU's STATUS register is described later in this section. Registers related to the operation of the peripheral features are described in the chapter for that peripheral. The SFRs are typically distributed among the peripherals whose functions they control. Unused SFR locations are unimplemented and read as `0's. TABLE 5-2: Address FFFh FFEh FFDh FFCh FFBh FFAh FF9h FF8h FF7h FF6h FF5h FF4h FF3h FF2h FF1h FF0h FEFh SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP FOR PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DEVICES Name TOSU TOSH TOSL Address FDFh Name INDF2 (1) Address Name (3) Address F9Fh F9Eh F9Dh F9Ch F9Bh F9Ah F99h F98h F97h F96h F95h F94h F93h F92h F91h F90h F8Fh F8Eh F8Dh F8Ch F8Bh F8Ah F89h F88h F87h F86h F85h F84h F83h F82h F81h F80h Name IPR1 PIR1 PIE1 --(2) OSCTUNE TRISJ(3) TRISH(3) TRISG TRISF TRISE TRISD TRISC TRISB TRISA LATJ(3) LATH(3) LATG LATF LATE LATD LATC LATB LATA PORTJ(3) PORTH(3) PORTG PORTF PORTE PORTD PORTC PORTB PORTA Address F7Fh F7Eh Name SPBRGH1 BAUDCON1 FBFh LCDDATA4 FBEh FBDh FBCh FBBh FBAh FB9h FB8h FB7h FB6h FB5h FB4h FB3h FB2h FB1h FB0h FAFh FAEh FADh FACh FABh FAAh FA9h FA8h FA7h FA6h FA5h FA4h FA3h FA2h FA1h FA0h FDEh POSTINC2(1) FDDh POSTDEC2(1) FDCh FDBh FDAh FD9h FD8h FD7h FD6h FD5h FD4h FD3h FD2h FD1h FD0h FCFh FCEh FCDh FCCh FCBh FCAh FC9h FC8h FC7h FC6h FC5h FC4h FC3h FC2h FC1h FC0h PREINC2(1) PLUSW2(1) FSR2H FSR2L STATUS TMR0H TMR0L T0CON --(2) OSCCON LCDREG WDTCON RCON TMR1H TMR1L T1CON TMR2 PR2 T2CON SSPBUF SSPADD SSPSTAT SSPCON1 SSPCON2 ADRESH ADRESL ADCON0 ADCON1 ADCON2 LCDDATA3 LCDDATA2 LCDDATA1 LCDDATA0 LCDSE5(3) LCDSE4(3) LCDSE3 LCDSE2 LCDSE1 CVRCON CMCON TMR3H TMR3L T3CON --(2) SPBRG1 RCREG1 TXREG1 TXSTA1 RCSTA1 LCDPS LCDSE0 LCDCON EECON2 EECON1 IPR3 PIR3 PIE3 IPR2 PIR2 PIE2 F7Dh LCDDATA23(3) F7Ch LCDDATA22(3) F7Bh F7Ah F79h F78h LCDDATA21 LCDDATA20 LCDDATA19 LCDDATA18 STKPTR PCLATU PCLATH PCL TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TABLAT PRODH PRODL INTCON INTCON2 INTCON3 INDF0(1) F77h LCDDATA17(3) F76h LCDDATA16(3) F75h F74h F73h F72h LCDDATA15 LCDDATA14 LCDDATA13 LCDDATA12 F71h LCDDATA11(3) F70h LCDDATA10(3) F6Fh F6Eh F6Dh F6Ch F6Bh F6Ah F69h F68h F67h F66h F65h F64h F63h F62h F61h F60h LCDDATA9 LCDDATA8 LCDDATA7 LCDDATA6 LCDDATA5(3) CCPR1H CCPR1L CCP1CON CCPR2H CCPR2L CCP2CON SPBRG2 RCREG2 TXREG2 TXSTA2 RCSTA2 FEEh POSTINC0(1) FEDh POSTDEC0(1) FECh FEBh FEAh FE9h FE8h FE7h FE6h FE4h FE3h FE2h FE1h FE0h Note 1: 2: 3: PREINC0(1) PLUSW0 FSR0L WREG INDF1(1) POSTINC1(1) PREINC1(1) PLUSW1 FSR1L BSR (1) (1) FSR0H FE5h POSTDEC1(1) FSR1H This is not a physical register. Unimplemented registers are read as `0'. This register is not available on 64-pin devices. DS39770B-page 68 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 5-3: Filename TOSU TOSH TOSL STKPTR PCLATU PCLATH PCL TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TABLAT PRODH PRODL INTCON INTCON2 INTCON3 INDF0 POSTINC0 POSTDEC0 PREINC0 PLUSW0 FSR0H FSR0L WREG INDF1 POSTINC1 POSTDEC1 PREINC1 PLUSW1 FSR1H FSR1L BSR INDF2 POSTINC2 POSTDEC2 PREINC2 PLUSW2 FSR2H FSR2L STATUS Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER FILE SUMMARY Bit 7 -- Bit 6 -- Bit 5 -- Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR ---0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Return Stack Pointer Holding Register for PC<20:16> uu-0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 bit 21 Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>) --00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx TMR0IE INTEDG1 INT3IE INT0IE INTEDG2 INT2IE RBIE INTEDG3 INT1IE TMR0IF TMR0IP INT3IF INT0IF INT3IP INT2IF RBIF RBIP INT1IF 0000 000x 1111 1111 1100 0000 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ---- xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ---- xxxx xxxx xxxx Bank Select Register ---- 0000 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ---- xxxx xxxx xxxx OV Z DC C ---x xxxx Details on page 51, 59 51, 59 51, 59 51, 60 51, 59 51, 59 51, 59 51, 84 51, 84 51, 84 51, 84 51, 91 51, 91 51, 95 51, 96 51, 97 51, 75 51, 76 51, 76 51, 76 51, 76 51, 75 51, 75 51 51, 75 51, 76 51, 76 51, 76 51, 76 52, 75 52, 75 52, 64 52, 75 52, 76 52, 76 52, 76 52, 76 52, 75 52, 75 52, 73 Top-of-Stack Upper Byte (TOS<20:16>) Top-of-Stack High Byte (TOS<15:8>) Top-of-Stack Low Byte (TOS<7:0>) STKFUL -- STKUNF -- -- bit 21(1) Holding Register for PC<15:8> PC Low Byte (PC<7:0>) -- -- Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) Program Memory Table Latch Product Register High Byte Product Register Low Byte GIE/GIEH RBPU INT2IP PEIE/GIEL INTEDG0 INT1IP Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory - value of FSR0 not changed (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory - value of FSR0 post-incremented (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory - value of FSR0 post-decremented (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory - value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory - value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) - value of FSR0 offset by W -- -- -- -- Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 High Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 Low Byte Working Register Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory - value of FSR1 not changed (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory - value of FSR1 post-incremented (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory - value of FSR1 post-decremented (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory - value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory - value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) - value of FSR1 offset by W -- -- -- -- Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 High Byte Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 Low Byte -- -- -- -- Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory - value of FSR2 not changed (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory - value of FSR2 post-incremented (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory - value of FSR2 post-decremented (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory - value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory - value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) - value of FSR2 offset by W -- -- -- -- Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 High Byte Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 Low Byte -- -- -- N x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify Bit 21 of the PC is only available in Test mode and Serial Programming modes. These registers and/or bits are available only on 80-pin devices; otherwise they are unimplemented and read as `0'. Reset states shown are for 80-pin devices. Alternate names and definitions for these bits when the MSSP module is operating in I2CTM Slave mode. See Section 16.4.3.2 "Address Masking" for details. The PLLEN bit is only available in specific oscillator configurations; otherwise it is disabled and reads as `0'. See Section 2.4.3 "PLL Frequency Multiplier" for details. RA6/RA7 and their associated latch and direction bits are configured as port pins only when the internal oscillator is selected as the default clock source (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are disabled and these bits read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 69 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 5-3: Filename TMR0H TMR0L T0CON OSCCON LCDREG WDTCON RCON TMR1H TMR1L T1CON TMR2 PR2 T2CON SSPBUF SSPADD SSPSTAT SSPCON1 SSPCON2 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx T0CS IRCF1 BIAS2 -- -- T0SE IRCF0 BIAS1 -- RI PSA OSTS BIAS0 -- TO T0PS2 IOFS MODE13 -- PD T0PS1 SCS1 CKSEL1 -- POR T0PS0 SCS0 CKSEL0 SWDTEN BOR 1111 1111 0100 q000 -011 1100 0--- ---0 0--1 11q0 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 -000 0000 xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Details on page 52, 133 52, 133 52, 131 30, 52 52, 163 52, 289 46, 52 52, 139 52, 139 52, 135 52, 142 52, 142 52, 141 52, 193, 228 52, 228 52, 186, 195 52, 187, 196 52, 197, 198 53, 271 53, 271 53, 263 53, 264 53, 265 53, 161 53, 161 53, 161 53, 161 53, 161 53, 160 53, 160 53, 160 53, 160 53, 160 53, 279 53, 273 53, 145 53, 145 53, 143 Timer0 Register High Byte Timer0 Register Low Byte TMR0ON IDLEN -- REGSLP IPEN T08BIT IRCF2 CPEN -- -- Timer1 Register High Byte Timer1 Register Low Byte RD16 Timer2 Register Timer2 Period Register -- T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 T1RUN MSSP Receive Buffer/Transmit Register MSSP Address Register in I2CTM Slave mode. MSSP1 Baud Rate Reload Register in I2C Master mode. SMP WCOL GCEN GCEN CKE SSPOV ACKSTAT ACKSTAT D/A SSPEN ACKDT P CKP ACKEN S SSPM3 RCEN R/W SSPM2 PEN UA SSPM1 RSEN BF SSPM0 SEN SEN ADMSK5(3) ADMSK4(3) ADMSK3(3) ADMSK2(3) ADMSK1(3) ADRESH ADRESL ADCON0 ADCON1 ADCON2 LCDDATA4 LCDDATA3 LCDDATA2 LCDDATA1 LCDDATA0 LCDSE5(2) LCDSE4 LCDSE3 LCDSE2 LCDSE1 CVRCON CMCON TMR3H TMR3L T3CON Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: A/D Result Register High Byte A/D Result Register Low Byte ADCAL -- ADFM S39C0(2) S31C0 S23C0 S15C0 S07C0 SE47 SE39(2) SE31 SE23 SE15 CVREN C2OUT -- -- -- S38C0(2) S30C0 S22C0 S14C0 S06C0 SE46 SE38(2) SE30 SE22 SE14 CVROE C1OUT CHS3 VCFG1 ACQT2 S37C0(2) S29C0 S21C0 S13C0 S05C0 SE45 S37(2) SE29 SE21 SE13 CVRR C2INV CHS2 VCFG0 ACQT1 S36C0(2) S28C0 S20C0 S12C0 S04C0 SE44 SE36(2) SE28 SE20 SE12 CVRSS C1INV CHS1 PCFG3 ACQT0 S35C0(2) S27C0 S19C0 S11C0 S03C0 SE43 SE35(2) SE27 SE19 SE11 CVR3 CIS CHS0 PCFG2 ADCS2 S34C0(2) S26C0 S18C0 S10C0 S02C0 SE42 SE34(2) SE26 SE18 SE10 CVR2 CM2 GO/DONE PCFG1 ADCS1 S33C0(2) S25C0 S17C0 S09C0 S01C0 SE41 SE33(2) SE25 SE17 SE09 CVR1 CM1 ADON PCFG0 ADCS0 S32C0 S24C0 S16C0 S08C0 S00C0 SE40 SE32 SE24 SE16 SE08 CVR0 CM0 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0-00 0000 --00 0000 0-00 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0111 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Timer3 Register High Byte Timer3 Register Low Byte RD16 T3CCP2 T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON 0000 0000 x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify Bit 21 of the PC is only available in Test mode and Serial Programming modes. These registers and/or bits are available only on 80-pin devices; otherwise they are unimplemented and read as `0'. Reset states shown are for 80-pin devices. Alternate names and definitions for these bits when the MSSP module is operating in I2CTM Slave mode. See Section 16.4.3.2 "Address Masking" for details. The PLLEN bit is only available in specific oscillator configurations; otherwise it is disabled and reads as `0'. See Section 2.4.3 "PLL Frequency Multiplier" for details. RA6/RA7 and their associated latch and direction bits are configured as port pins only when the internal oscillator is selected as the default clock source (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are disabled and these bits read as `0'. DS39770B-page 70 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 5-3: Filename SPBRG1 RCREG1 TXREG1 TXSTA1 RCSTA1 LCDPS LCDSE0 LCDCON EECON2 EECON1 IPR3 PIR3 PIE3 IPR2 PIR2 PIE2 IPR1 PIR1 PIE1 OSCTUNE TRISJ(2) TRISH(2) TRISG TRISF TRISE TRISD TRISC TRISB TRISA LATJ(2) LATH(2) LATG LATF LATE LATD LATC LATB LATA Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 TXEN SREN LCDA SE05 WERR SYNC CREN WA SE04 -- SENDB ADDEN LP3 SE03 CS1 BRGH FERR LP2 SE02 CS0 TRMT OERR LP1 SE01 LMUX1 TX9D RX9D LP0 SE00 LMUX0 0000 0010 0000 000x 0000 0000 0000 0000 000- 0000 ---- ---WRERR -- -- -- BCLIP BCLIF BCLIE SSPIP SSPIF SSPIE TUN3 TRISJ3 TRISH3 TRISG3 TRISF3 TRISE3 TRISD3 TRISC3 TRISB3 TRISA3 LATJ3 LATH3 LATG3 LATF3 LATE3 LATD3 LATC3 LATB3 LATA3 WREN CCP2IP CCP2IF CCP2IE LVDIP LVDIF LVDIE -- -- -- TUN2 TRISJ2 TRISH2 TRISG2 TRISF2 -- TRISD2 TRISC2 TRISB2 TRISA2 LATJ2 LATH2 LATG2 LATF2 -- LATD2 LATC2 LATB2 LATA2 WR CCP1IP CCP1IF CCP1IE TMR3IP TMR3IF TMR3IE TMR2IP TMR2IF TMR2IE TUN1 TRISJ1 TRISH1 TRISG1 TRISF1 TRISE1 TRISD1 TRISC1 TRISB1 TRISA1 LATJ1 LATH1 LATG1 LATF1 LATE1 LATD1 LATC1 LATB1 LATA1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TMR1IP TMR1IF TMR1IE TUN0 TRISJ0 TRISH0 TRISG0 -- TRISE0 TRISD0 TRISC0 TRISB0 TRISA0 LATJ0 LATH0 LATG0 -- LATE0 LATD0 LATC0 LATB0 LATA0 ---0 x00-111 -11-000 -00-000 -0011-- 11100-- 00000-- 000-111 1-11 -000 0-00 -000 0-00 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 0001 1111 1111 1111111 1-11 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 00-x xxxx xxxx xxxxxxx x-xx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Details on page 53, 233 53, 241 53, 239 53, 230 53, 231 53, 159 53, 160 53, 158 53, 82 53, 83 54, 106 54, 100 54, 103 54, 105 54, 99 54, 102 54, 104 54, 98 54, 101 31, 54 54, 130 54, 128 54, 126 54, 124 54, 121 54, 119 54, 117 54, 114 54, 111 54, 130 54, 128 54, 126 54, 124 54, 121 54, 119 54, 117 54, 114 54, 111 EUSART Baud Rate Generator EUSART Receive Register EUSART Transmit Register CSRC SPEN WFT SE07 LCDEN TX9 RX9 BIASMD SE06 SLPEN EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) -- -- -- -- OSCFIP OSCFIF OSCFIE -- -- -- INTSRC TRISJ7 TRISH7 SPIOD TRISF7 TRISE7 TRISD7 TRISC7 TRISB7 TRISA7(5) LATJ7 LATH7 U2OD LATF7 LATE7 LATD7 LATC7 LATB7 LATA7(5) -- LCDIP LCDIF LCDIE CMIP CMIF CMIE ADIP ADIF ADIE PLLEN(4) TRISJ6 TRISH6 CCP2OD TRISF6 TRISE6 TRISD6 TRISC6 TRISB6 TRISA6(5) LATJ6 LATH6 U1OD LATF6 LATE6 LATD6 LATC6 LATB6 LATA6(5) -- RC2IP RC2IF RC2IE -- -- -- RC1IP RC1IF RC1IE TUN5 TRISJ5 TRISH5 CCP1OD TRISF5 TRISE5 TRISD5 TRISC5 TRISB5 TRISA5 LATJ5 LATH5 -- LATF5 LATE5 LATD5 LATC5 LATB5 LATA5 FREE TX2IP TX2IF TX2IE -- -- -- TX1IP TX1IF TX1IE TUN4 TRISJ4 TRISH4 TRISG4 TRISF4 TRISE4 TRISD4 TRISC4 TRISB4 TRISA4 LATJ4 LATH4 LATG4 LATF4 LATE4 LATD4 LATC4 LATB4 LATA4 x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify Bit 21 of the PC is only available in Test mode and Serial Programming modes. These registers and/or bits are available only on 80-pin devices; otherwise they are unimplemented and read as `0'. Reset states shown are for 80-pin devices. Alternate names and definitions for these bits when the MSSP module is operating in I2CTM Slave mode. See Section 16.4.3.2 "Address Masking" for details. The PLLEN bit is only available in specific oscillator configurations; otherwise it is disabled and reads as `0'. See Section 2.4.3 "PLL Frequency Multiplier" for details. RA6/RA7 and their associated latch and direction bits are configured as port pins only when the internal oscillator is selected as the default clock source (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are disabled and these bits read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 71 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 5-3: Filename PORTJ(2) PORTH(2) PORTG PORTF PORTE PORTD PORTC PORTB PORTA SPBRGH1 BAUDCON1 LCDDATA23(2) LCDDATA22 LCDDATA21 LCDDATA20 LCDDATA19 LCDDATA18 LCDDATA17(2) LCDDATA16 LCDDATA15 LCDDATA14 LCDDATA13 LCDDATA12 LCDDATA11(2) LCDDATA10 LCDDATA9 LCDDATA8 LCDDATA7 LCDDATA6 LCDDATA5(2) CCPR1H CCPR1L CCP1CON CCPR2H CCPR2L CCP2CON SPBRG2 RCREG2 TXREG2 TXSTA2 RCSTA2 Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Bit 7 RJ7 RH7 RDPU RF7 RE7 RD7 RC7 RB7 RA7(5) Bit 6 RJ6 RH6 REPU RF6 RE6 RD6 RC6 RB6 RA6(5) Bit 5 RJ5 RH5 RJPU(2) RF5 RE5 RD5 RC5 RB5 RA5 Bit 4 RJ4 RH4 RG4 RF4 RE4 RD4 RC4 RB4 RA4 Bit 3 RJ3 RH3 RG3 RF3 RE3 RD3 RC3 RB3 RA3 Bit 2 RJ2 RH2 RG2 RF2 -- RD2 RC2 RB2 RA2 Bit 1 RJ1 RH1 RG1 RF1 RE1 RD1 RC1 RB1 RA1 Bit 0 RJ0 RH0 RG0 -- RE0 RD0 RC0 RB0 RA0 Value on POR, BOR xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 000x xxxx xxxx xxxxxxx x-xx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xx0x 0000 0000 0000 SCKP S44C3 S36C3(2) S28C3 S20C3 S12C3 S04C3 S44C2 S36C2(2) S28C2 S20C2 S12C2 S04C2 S44C1 S36C1(2) S28C1 S20C1 S12C1 S04C1 S44C0 BRG16 S43C3 S35C3(2) S27C3 S19C3 S11C3 S03C3 S43C2 S35C2(2) S27C2 S19C2 S11C2 S03C2 S43C1 S35C1(2) S27C1 S19C1 S11C1 S03C1 S43C0 -- S42C3 S34C3(2) S26C3 S18C3 S10C3 S02C3 S42C2 S34C2(2) S26C2 S18C2 S10C2 S02C2 S42C1 S34C1(2) S26C1 S18C1 S10C1 S02C1 S42C0 WUE S41C3 S33C3(2) S25C3 S17C3 S09C3 S01C3 S41C2 S33C2(2) S25C2 S17C2 S09C2 S01C2 S41C1 S33C1(2) S25C1 S17C1 S09C1 S01C1 S41C0 ABDEN S40C3 S32C3 S24C3 S16C3 S08C3 S00C3 S40C2 S32C2 S24C2 S16C2 S08C2 S00C2 S40C1 S32C1 S24C1 S16C1 S08C1 S00C1 S40C0 01-0 0-00 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 --00 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx CCP2M3 CCP2M2 CCP2M1 CCP2M0 --00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 TXEN SREN SYNC CREN -- ADDEN BRGH FERR TRMT OERR TX9D RX9D 0000 -010 0000 000x Details on page 54, 130 54, 128 54, 126 54, 124 55, 121 55, 119 55, 117 55, 114 55, 111 55, 233 55, 232 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 161 55, 148 55, 148 55, 147 55, 148 56, 148 56, 147 56, 252 56, 257 56, 255 56, 250 56, 251 EUSART Baud Rate Generator High Byte ABDOVF S47C3 S39C3(2) S31C3 S23C3 S15C3 S07C3 S47C2 S39C2(2) S31C2 S23C2 S15C2 S07C2 S47C1 S39C1(2) S31C1 S23C1 S15C1 S07C1 S47C0 RCMT S46C3 S38C3(2) S30C3 S22C3 S14C3 S06C3 S46C2 S38C2(2) S30C2 S22C2 S14C2 S06C2 S46C1 S38C1(2) S30C1 S22C1 S14C1 S06C1 S46C0 -- S45C3 S37C3(2) S29C3 S21C3 S13C3 S05C3 S45C2 S37C2(2) S29C2 S21C2 S13C2 S05C2 S45C1 S37C1(2) S29C1 S21C1 S13C1 S05C1 S45C0 Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte -- -- DC1B1 DC1B0 Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 High Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 Low Byte -- -- DC2B1 DC2B0 AUSART Baud Rate Generator Register AUSART Receive Register AUSART Transmit Register CSRC SPEN TX9 RX9 x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify Bit 21 of the PC is only available in Test mode and Serial Programming modes. These registers and/or bits are available only on 80-pin devices; otherwise they are unimplemented and read as `0'. Reset states shown are for 80-pin devices. Alternate names and definitions for these bits when the MSSP module is operating in I2CTM Slave mode. See Section 16.4.3.2 "Address Masking" for details. The PLLEN bit is only available in specific oscillator configurations; otherwise it is disabled and reads as `0'. See Section 2.4.3 "PLL Frequency Multiplier" for details. RA6/RA7 and their associated latch and direction bits are configured as port pins only when the internal oscillator is selected as the default clock source (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are disabled and these bits read as `0'. DS39770B-page 72 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.3.5 STATUS REGISTER The STATUS register, shown in Register 5-2, contains the arithmetic status of the ALU. The STATUS register can be the operand for any instruction, as with any other register. If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruction that affects the Z, DC, C, OV or N bits, then the write to these five bits is disabled. These bits are set or cleared according to the device logic. Therefore, the result of an instruction with the STATUS register as destination may be different than intended. For example, CLRF STATUS will set the Z bit but leave the other bits unchanged. The STATUS register then reads back as `000u u1uu'. It is recommended, therefore, that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF, MOVFF and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS register because these instructions do not affect the Z, C, DC, OV or N bits in the STATUS register. For other instructions not affecting any Status bits, see the instruction set summaries in Table 23-2 and Table 23-3. Note: The C and DC bits operate as a borrow and digit borrow bit respectively, in subtraction. REGISTER 5-2: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7-5 bit 4 STATUS REGISTER U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-x N R/W-x OV R/W-x Z R/W-x DC(1) R/W-x C(2) bit 0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as `0' N: Negative bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2's complement). It indicates whether the result was negative (ALU MSB = 1). 1 = Result was negative 0 = Result was positive OV: Overflow bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2's complement). It indicates an overflow of the 7-bit magnitude which causes the sign bit (bit 7) to change state. 1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation) 0 = No overflow occurred Z: Zero bit 1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero 0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero DC: Digit Carry/Borrow bit(1) For ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW and SUBWF instructions: 1 = A carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result C: Carry/Borrow bit(2) For ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW and SUBWF instructions: 1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred For borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the 2's complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either bit 4 or bit 3 of the source register. For borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the 2's complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high or low-order bit of the source register. bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: 2: (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 73 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.4 Note: Data Addressing Modes The execution of some instructions in the core PIC18 instruction set are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 5.6 "Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set" for more information. The Access RAM bit `a' determines how the address is interpreted. When `a' is `1', the contents of the BSR (Section 5.3.1 "Bank Select Register") are used with the address to determine the complete 12-bit address of the register. When `a' is `0', the address is interpreted as being a register in the Access Bank. Addressing that uses the Access RAM is sometimes also known as Direct Forced Addressing mode. A few instructions, such as MOVFF, include the entire 12-bit address (either source or destination) in their opcodes. In these cases, the BSR is ignored entirely. The destination of the operation's results is determined by the destination bit `d'. When `d' is `1', the results are stored back in the source register, overwriting its original contents. When `d' is `0', the results are stored in the W register. Instructions without the `d' argument have a destination that is implicit in the instruction; their destination is either the target register being operated on or the W register. While the program memory can be addressed in only one way - through the program counter - information in the data memory space can be addressed in several ways. For most instructions, the addressing mode is fixed. Other instructions may use up to three modes, depending on which operands are used and whether or not the extended instruction set is enabled. The addressing modes are: * * * * Inherent Literal Direct Indirect 5.4.3 INDIRECT ADDRESSING An additional addressing mode, Indexed Literal Offset, is available when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). Its operation is discussed in greater detail in Section 5.6.1 "Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset". 5.4.1 INHERENT AND LITERAL ADDRESSING Many PIC18 control instructions do not need any argument at all; they either perform an operation that globally affects the device, or they operate implicitly on one register. This addressing mode is known as Inherent Addressing. Examples include SLEEP, RESET and DAW. Other instructions work in a similar way, but require an additional explicit argument in the opcode. This is known as Literal Addressing mode, because they require some literal value as an argument. Examples include ADDLW and MOVLW, which respectively, add or move a literal value to the W register. Other examples include CALL and GOTO, which include a 20-bit program memory address. Indirect Addressing allows the user to access a location in data memory without giving a fixed address in the instruction. This is done by using File Select Registers (FSRs) as pointers to the locations to be read or written to. Since the FSRs are themselves located in RAM as Special Function Registers, they can also be directly manipulated under program control. This makes FSRs very useful in implementing data structures such as tables and arrays in data memory. The registers for Indirect Addressing are also implemented with Indirect File Operands (INDFs) that permit automatic manipulation of the pointer value with auto-incrementing, auto-decrementing or offsetting with another value. This allows for efficient code using loops, such as the example of clearing an entire RAM bank in Example 5-5. It also enables users to perform Indexed Addressing and other Stack Pointer operations for program memory in data memory. EXAMPLE 5-5: HOW TO CLEAR RAM (BANK 1) USING INDIRECT ADDRESSING FSR0, 100h ; POSTINC0 ; Clear INDF ; register then ; inc pointer FSR0H, 1 ; All done with ; Bank1? NEXT ; NO, clear next ; YES, continue 5.4.2 DIRECT ADDRESSING NEXT Direct Addressing specifies all or part of the source and/or destination address of the operation within the opcode itself. The options are specified by the arguments accompanying the instruction. In the core PIC18 instruction set, bit-oriented and byte-oriented instructions use some version of Direct Addressing by default. All of these instructions include some 8-bit literal address as their Least Significant Byte. This address specifies either a register address in one of the banks of data RAM (Section 5.3.3 "General Purpose Register File"), or a location in the Access Bank (Section 5.3.2 "Access Bank") as the data source for the instruction. LFSR CLRF BTFSS BRA CONTINUE DS39770B-page 74 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.4.3.1 FSR Registers and the INDF Operand At the core of Indirect Addressing are three sets of registers: FSR0, FSR1 and FSR2. Each represents a pair of 8-bit registers, FSRnH and FSRnL. The four upper bits of the FSRnH register are not used, so each FSR pair holds a 12-bit value. This represents a value that can address the entire range of the data memory in a linear fashion. The FSR register pairs, then, serve as pointers to data memory locations. Indirect Addressing is accomplished with a set of Indirect File Operands, INDF0 through INDF2. These can be thought of as "virtual" registers: they are mapped in the SFR space but are not physically implemented. Reading or writing to a particular INDF register actually accesses its corresponding FSR register pair. A read from INDF1, for example, reads the data at the address indicated by FSR1H:FSR1L. Instructions that use the INDF registers as operands actually use the contents of their corresponding FSR as a pointer to the instruction's target. The INDF operand is just a convenient way of using the pointer. Because Indirect Addressing uses a full 12-bit address, data RAM banking is not necessary. Thus, the current contents of the BSR and the Access RAM bit have no effect on determining the target address. FIGURE 5-9: INDIRECT ADDRESSING 000h Bank 0 100h Bank 1 200h Bank 2 FSR1H:FSR1L 7 0 7 0 Bank 3 through Bank 13 300h Using an instruction with one of the Indirect Addressing registers as the operand.... ADDWF, INDF1, 1 ...uses the 12-bit address stored in the FSR pair associated with that register.... xxxx1111 11001100 ...to determine the data memory location to be used in that operation. In this case, the FSR1 pair contains FCCh. This means the contents of location FCCh will be added to that of the W register and stored back in FCCh. E00h Bank 14 F00h Bank 15 FFFh Data Memory (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 75 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.4.3.2 FSR Registers and POSTINC, POSTDEC, PREINC and PLUSW 5.4.3.3 Operations by FSRs on FSRs In addition to the INDF operand, each FSR register pair also has four additional indirect operands. Like INDF, these are "virtual" registers that cannot be indirectly read or written to. Accessing these registers actually accesses the associated FSR register pair, but also performs a specific action on its stored value. They are: * POSTDEC: accesses the FSR value, then automatically decrements it by `1' afterwards * POSTINC: accesses the FSR value, then automatically increments it by `1' afterwards * PREINC: increments the FSR value by `1', then uses it in the operation * PLUSW: adds the signed value of the W register (range of -127 to 128) to that of the FSR and uses the new value in the operation In this context, accessing an INDF register uses the value in the FSR registers without changing them. Similarly, accessing a PLUSW register gives the FSR value offset by the value in the W register; neither value is actually changed in the operation. Accessing the other virtual registers changes the value of the FSR registers. Operations on the FSRs with POSTDEC, POSTINC and PREINC affect the entire register pair; that is, rollovers of the FSRnL register from FFh to 00h carry over to the FSRnH register. On the other hand, results of these operations do not change the value of any flags in the STATUS register (e.g., Z, N, OV, etc.). The PLUSW register can be used to implement a form of Indexed Addressing in the data memory space. By manipulating the value in the W register, users can reach addresses that are fixed offsets from pointer addresses. In some applications, this can be used to implement some powerful program control structure, such as software stacks, inside of data memory. Indirect Addressing operations that target other FSRs or virtual registers represent special cases. For example, using an FSR to point to one of the virtual registers will not result in successful operations. As a specific case, assume that FSR0H:FSR0L contains FE7h, the address of INDF1. Attempts to read the value of the INDF1, using INDF0 as an operand, will return 00h. Attempts to write to INDF1, using INDF0 as the operand, will result in a NOP. On the other hand, using the virtual registers to write to an FSR pair may not occur as planned. In these cases, the value will be written to the FSR pair but without any incrementing or decrementing. Thus, writing to INDF2 or POSTDEC2 will write the same value to the FSR2H:FSR2L. Since the FSRs are physical registers mapped in the SFR space, they can be manipulated through all direct operations. Users should proceed cautiously when working on these registers, particularly if their code uses Indirect Addressing. Similarly, operations by Indirect Addressing are generally permitted on all other SFRs. Users should exercise the appropriate caution that they do not inadvertently change settings that might affect the operation of the device. 5.5 Program Memory and the Extended Instruction Set The operation of program memory is unaffected by the use of the extended instruction set. Enabling the extended instruction set adds five additional two-word commands to the existing PIC18 instruction set: ADDFSR, CALLW, MOVSF, MOVSS and SUBFSR. These instructions are executed as described in Section 5.2.4 "Two-Word Instructions". DS39770B-page 76 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.6 Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set 5.6.2 INSTRUCTIONS AFFECTED BY INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Any of the core PIC18 instructions that can use Direct Addressing are potentially affected by the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode. This includes all byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost one-half of the standard PIC18 instruction set. Instructions that only use Inherent or Literal Addressing modes are unaffected. Additionally, byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions are not affected if they use the Access Bank (Access RAM bit is `1') or include a file address of 60h or above. Instructions meeting these criteria will continue to execute as before. A comparison of the different possible addressing modes when the extended instruction set is enabled is shown in Figure 5-10. Those who desire to use byte-oriented or bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode should note the changes to assembler syntax for this mode. This is described in more detail in Section 23.2.1 "Extended Instruction Syntax". Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set (XINST Configuration bit = 1) significantly changes certain aspects of data memory and its addressing. Specifically, the use of the Access Bank for many of the core PIC18 instructions is different; this is due to the introduction of a new addressing mode for the data memory space. This mode also alters the behavior of Indirect Addressing using FSR2 and its associated operands. What does not change is just as important. The size of the data memory space is unchanged, as well as its linear addressing. The SFR map remains the same. Core PIC18 instructions can still operate in both Direct and Indirect Addressing mode; inherent and literal instructions do not change at all. Indirect Addressing with FSR0 and FSR1 also remains unchanged. 5.6.1 INDEXED ADDRESSING WITH LITERAL OFFSET Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set changes the behavior of Indirect Addressing using the FSR2 register pair and its associated file operands. Under the proper conditions, instructions that use the Access Bank - that is, most bit-oriented and byte-oriented instructions - can invoke a form of Indexed Addressing using an offset specified in the instruction. This special addressing mode is known as Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset, or Indexed Literal Offset mode. When using the extended instruction set, this addressing mode requires the following: * The use of the Access Bank is forced (`a' = 0); and * The file address argument is less than or equal to 5Fh. Under these conditions, the file address of the instruction is not interpreted as the lower byte of an address (used with the BSR in Direct Addressing) or as an 8-bit address in the Access Bank. Instead, the value is interpreted as an offset value to an Address Pointer specified by FSR2. The offset and the contents of FSR2 are added to obtain the target address of the operation. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 77 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 5-10: COMPARING ADDRESSING OPTIONS FOR BIT-ORIENTED AND BYTE-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS (EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ENABLED) EXAMPLE INSTRUCTION: ADDWF, f, d, a (Opcode: 0010 01da ffff ffff) When a = 0 and f 60h: The instruction executes in Direct Forced mode. `f' is interpreted as a location in the Access RAM between 060h and FFFh. This is the same as locations F60h to FFFh (Bank 15) of data memory. Locations below 060h are not available in this addressing mode. 000h 060h Bank 0 100h 00h Bank 1 through Bank 14 60h Valid range for `f' FFh Access RAM Bank 15 F40h SFRs FFFh Data Memory F00h When a = 0 and f 5Fh: The instruction executes in Indexed Literal Offset mode. `f' is interpreted as an offset to the address value in FSR2. The two are added together to obtain the address of the target register for the instruction. The address can be anywhere in the data memory space. Note that in this mode, the correct syntax is now: ADDWF [k], d where `k' is the same as `f'. 000h Bank 0 060h 100h Bank 1 through Bank 14 FSR2H F00h Bank 15 F40h SFRs FFFh Data Memory FSR2L 001001da ffffffff When a = 1 (all values of f): The instruction executes in Direct mode (also known as Direct Long mode). `f' is interpreted as a location in one of the 16 banks of the data memory space. The bank is designated by the Bank Select Register (BSR). The address can be in any implemented bank in the data memory space. 000h Bank 0 060h 100h Bank 1 through Bank 14 BSR 00000000 001001da ffffffff F00h Bank 15 F40h SFRs FFFh Data Memory DS39770B-page 78 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 5.6.3 MAPPING THE ACCESS BANK IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE The use of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode effectively changes how the lower part of Access RAM (00h to 5Fh) is mapped. Rather than containing just the contents of the bottom part of Bank 0, this mode maps the contents from Bank 0 and a user-defined "window" that can be located anywhere in the data memory space. The value of FSR2 establishes the lower boundary of the addresses mapped into the window, while the upper boundary is defined by FSR2 plus 95 (5Fh). Addresses in the Access RAM above 5Fh are mapped as previously described (see Section 5.3.2 "Access Bank"). An example of Access Bank remapping in this addressing mode is shown in Figure 5-11. Remapping of the Access Bank applies only to operations using the Indexed Literal Offset mode. Operations that use the BSR (Access RAM bit is `1') will continue to use Direct Addressing as before. Any Indirect or Indexed Addressing operation that explicitly uses any of the indirect file operands (including FSR2) will continue to operate as standard Indirect Addressing. Any instruction that uses the Access Bank, but includes a register address of greater than 05Fh, will use Direct Addressing and the normal Access Bank map. 5.6.4 BSR IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Although the Access Bank is remapped when the extended instruction set is enabled, the operation of the BSR remains unchanged. Direct Addressing, using the BSR to select the data memory bank, operates in the same manner as previously described. FIGURE 5-11: REMAPPING THE ACCESS BANK WITH INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET ADDRESSING 000h 05Fh Example Situation: ADDWF f, d, a FSR2H:FSR2L = 120h Locations in the region from the FSR2 Pointer (120h) to the pointer plus 05Fh (17Fh) are mapped to the bottom of the Access RAM (000h-05Fh). Special Function Registers at F60h through FFFh are mapped to 60h through FFh, as usual. Bank 0 addresses below 5Fh are not available in this mode. They can still be addressed by using the BSR. Not Accessible Bank 0 100h 120h 17Fh 200h Window Bank 1 Bank 1 "Window" 00h 5Fh 60h Bank 2 through Bank 14 SFRs FFh Access Bank F00h Bank 15 F60h FFFh SFRs Data Memory (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 79 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 80 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 6.0 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY 6.1 Table Reads and Table Writes The Flash program memory is readable, writable and erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD range. A read from program memory is executed on one byte at a time. A write to program memory is executed on blocks of 64 bytes at a time. Program memory is erased in blocks of 1024 bytes at a time. A Bulk Erase operation may not be issued from user code. Writing or erasing program memory will cease instruction fetches until the operation is complete. The program memory cannot be accessed during the write or erase, therefore, code cannot execute. An internal programming timer terminates program memory writes and erases. A value written to program memory does not need to be a valid instruction. Executing a program memory location that forms an invalid instruction results in a NOP. In order to read and write program memory, there are two operations that allow the processor to move bytes between the program memory space and the data RAM: * Table Read (TBLRD) * Table Write (TBLWT) The program memory space is 16 bits wide, while the data RAM space is 8 bits wide. Table reads and table writes move data between these two memory spaces through an 8-bit register (TABLAT). Table read operations retrieve data from program memory and place it into the data RAM space. Figure 6-1 shows the operation of a table read with program memory and data RAM. Table write operations store data from the data memory space into holding registers in program memory. The procedure to write the contents of the holding registers into program memory is detailed in Section 6.5 "Writing to Flash Program Memory". Figure 6-2 shows the operation of a table write with program memory and data RAM. Table operations work with byte entities. A table block containing data, rather than program instructions, is not required to be word-aligned. Therefore, a table block can start and end at any byte address. If a table write is being used to write executable code into program memory, program instructions will need to be word-aligned. FIGURE 6-1: TABLE READ OPERATION Instruction: TBLRD* Table Pointer(1) TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Latch (8-bit) TABLAT Program Memory (TBLPTR) Note 1: Table Pointer register points to a byte in program memory. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 81 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 6-2: TABLE WRITE OPERATION Instruction: TBLWT* Program Memory Holding Registers Table Pointer(1) TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL Table Latch (8-bit) TABLAT Program Memory (TBLPTR) Note 1: Table Pointer actually points to one of 64 holding registers, the address of which is determined by TBLPTRL<5:0>. The process for physically writing data to the program memory array is discussed in Section 6.5 "Writing to Flash Program Memory". 6.2 Control Registers Several control registers are used in conjunction with the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These include the: * * * * EECON1 register EECON2 register TABLAT register TBLPTR registers The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation. On power-up, the WREN bit is clear. The WRERR bit is set in hardware when the WR bit is set and cleared when the internal programming timer expires and the write operation is complete. Note: During normal operation, the WRERR is read as `1'. This can indicate that a write operation was prematurely terminated by a Reset, or a write operation was attempted improperly. 6.2.1 EECON1 AND EECON2 REGISTERS The EECON1 register (Register 6-1) is the control register for memory accesses. The EECON2 register is not a physical register; it is used exclusively in the memory write and erase sequences. Reading EECON2 will read all `0's. The FREE bit, when set, will allow a program memory erase operation. When FREE is set, the erase operation is initiated on the next WR command. When FREE is clear, only writes are enabled. The WR control bit initiates write operations. The bit cannot be cleared, only set, in software. It is cleared in hardware at the completion of the write operation. DS39770B-page 82 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 6-1: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7-5 bit 4 U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set S = Set only bit (cannot be cleared in software) `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown EECON1: EEPROM CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0 FREE R/W-x WRERR R/W-0 WREN R/S-0 WR U-0 -- bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as `0' FREE: Flash Row Erase Enable bit 1 = Erase the program memory row addressed by TBLPTR on the next WR command (cleared by completion of erase operation) 0 = Perform write only WRERR: Flash Program Error Flag bit 1 = A write operation is prematurely terminated (any Reset during self-timed programming in normal operation, or an improper write attempt) 0 = The write operation completed WREN: Flash Program Write Enable bit 1 = Allows write cycles to Flash program memory 0 = Inhibits write cycles to Flash program memory WR: Write Control bit 1 = Initiates a program memory erase cycle or write cycle (The operation is self-timed and the bit is cleared by hardware once write is complete. The WR bit can only be set (not cleared) in software.) 0 = Write cycle is complete Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 83 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 6.2.2 TABLE LATCH REGISTER (TABLAT) 6.2.4 TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES The Table Latch (TABLAT) is an 8-bit register mapped into the SFR space. The Table Latch register is used to hold 8-bit data during data transfers between program memory and data RAM. TBLPTR is used in reads, writes and erases of the Flash program memory. When a TBLRD is executed, all 22 bits of the TBLPTR determine which byte is read from program memory into TABLAT. When a TBLWT is executed, the seven LSbs of the Table Pointer register (TBLPTR<6:0>) determine which of the 64 program memory holding registers is written to. When the timed write to program memory begins (via the WR bit), the 12 MSbs of the TBLPTR (TBLPTR<21:10>) determine which program memory block of 1024 bytes is written to. For more detail, see Section 6.5 "Writing to Flash Program Memory". When an erase of program memory is executed, the 12 MSbs of the Table Pointer register point to the 1024-byte block that will be erased. The Least Significant bits are ignored. Figure 6-3 describes the relevant boundaries of the TBLPTR based on Flash program memory operations. 6.2.3 TABLE POINTER REGISTER (TBLPTR) The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register addresses a byte within the program memory. The TBLPTR is comprised of three SFR registers: Table Pointer Upper Byte, Table Pointer High Byte and Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTRU:TBLPTRH:TBLPTRL). These three registers join to form a 22-bit wide pointer. The low-order 21 bits allow the device to address up to 2 Mbytes of program memory space. The 22nd bit allows access to the device ID, the user ID and the Configuration bits. The Table Pointer register, TBLPTR, is used by the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These instructions can update the TBLPTR in one of four ways based on the table operation. These operations are shown in Table 6-1. These operations on the TBLPTR only affect the low-order 21 bits. TABLE 6-1: Example TBLRD* TBLWT* TBLRD*+ TBLWT*+ TBLRD*TBLWT*TBLRD+* TBLWT+* TABLE POINTER OPERATIONS WITH TBLRD AND TBLWT INSTRUCTIONS Operation on Table Pointer TBLPTR is not modified TBLPTR is incremented after the read/write TBLPTR is decremented after the read/write TBLPTR is incremented before the read/write FIGURE 6-3: 21 TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES BASED ON OPERATION TBLPTRU 16 15 TBLPTRH 8 7 TBLPTRL 0 ERASE: TBLPTR<21:10> TABLE WRITE: TBLPTR<21:6> TABLE READ: TBLPTR<21:0> DS39770B-page 84 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 6.3 Reading the Flash Program Memory The TBLRD instruction is used to retrieve data from program memory and places it into data RAM. Table reads from program memory are performed one byte at a time. TBLPTR points to a byte address in program space. Executing TBLRD places the byte pointed to into TABLAT. In addition, TBLPTR can be modified automatically for the next table read operation. The internal program memory is typically organized by words. The Least Significant bit of the address selects between the high and low bytes of the word. Figure 6-4 shows the interface between the internal program memory and the TABLAT. FIGURE 6-4: READS FROM FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY Program Memory (Even Byte Address) (Odd Byte Address) TBLPTR = xxxxx1 TBLPTR = xxxxx0 Instruction Register (IR) FETCH TBLRD TABLAT Read Register EXAMPLE 6-1: MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF READ_WORD READING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WORD CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL ; Load TBLPTR with the base ; address of the word TBLRD*+ MOVF MOVWF TBLRD*+ MOVF MOVWF TABLAT, W WORD_EVEN TABLAT, W WORD_ODD ; read into TABLAT and increment ; get data ; read into TABLAT and increment ; get data (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 85 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 6.4 Erasing Flash Program Memory 6.4.1 The minimum erase block is 512 words or 1024 bytes. Only through the use of an external programmer, or through ICSP control, can larger blocks of program memory be Bulk Erased. Word erase in the Flash array is not supported. When initiating an erase sequence from the microcontroller itself, a block of 1024 bytes of program memory is erased. The Most Significant 12 bits of the TBLPTR<21:10> point to the block being erased; TBLPTR<9:0> are ignored. The EECON1 register commands the erase operation. The WREN bit must be set to enable write operations. The FREE bit is set to select an erase operation. For protection, the write initiate sequence for EECON2 must be used. A long write is necessary for erasing the internal Flash. Instruction execution is halted while in a long write cycle. The long write will be terminated by the internal programming timer. FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY ERASE SEQUENCE The sequence of events for erasing a block of internal program memory location is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Load Table Pointer register with address of row being erased. Set the WREN and FREE bits (EECON1<2,4>) to enable the erase operation. Disable interrupts. Write 55h to EECON2. Write 0AAh to EECON2. Set the WR bit. This will begin the Row Erase cycle. The CPU will stall for duration of the erase for TIW (see parameter D133A). Re-enable interrupts. EXAMPLE 6-2: ERASING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY ROW MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL EECON1, EECON1, INTCON, 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1, INTCON, WREN FREE GIE ; load TBLPTR with the base ; address of the memory block ERASE_ROW BSF BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF ; enable write to memory ; enable Row Erase operation ; disable interrupts ; write 55h ; write 0AAh ; start erase (CPU stall) ; re-enable interrupts Required Sequence WR GIE DS39770B-page 86 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 6.5 Writing to Flash Program Memory The minimum programming block is 32 words or 64 bytes. Word or byte programming is not supported. Table writes are used internally to load the holding registers needed to program the Flash memory. There are 64 holding registers used by the table writes for programming. Since the Table Latch (TABLAT) is only a single byte, the TBLWT instruction may need to be executed 64 times for each programming operation. All of the table write operations will essentially be short writes because only the holding registers are written. At the end of updating the 64 holding registers, the EECON1 register must be written to in order to start the programming operation with a long write. The long write is necessary for programming the internal Flash. Instruction execution is halted while in a long write cycle. The long write will be terminated by the internal programming timer. The on-chip timer controls the write time. The write/erase voltages are generated by an on-chip charge pump, rated to operate over the voltage range of the device. Note 1: Unlike previous PIC(R) devices, members of the PIC18F85J90 family do not reset the holding registers after a write occurs. The holding registers must be cleared or overwritten before a programming sequence. 2: To maintain the endurance of the program memory cells, each Flash byte should not be programmed more than one time between erase operations. Before attempting to modify the contents of the target cell a second time, a Row Erase of the target row, or a Bulk Erase of the entire memory, must be performed. FIGURE 6-5: TABLE WRITES TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY TABLAT Write Register 8 TBLPTR = xxxxx0 TBLPTR = xxxxx1 8 TBLPTR = xxxxx2 8 TBLPTR = xxxx3F 8 Holding Register Holding Register Holding Register Holding Register Program Memory 6.5.1 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE SEQUENCE The sequence of events for programming an internal program memory location should be: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Read 1024 bytes into RAM. Update data values in RAM as necessary. Load Table Pointer register with address being erased. Execute the Row Erase procedure. Load Table Pointer register with address of first byte being written, minus 1. Write the 64 bytes into the holding registers with auto-increment. Set the WREN bit (EECON1<2>) to enable byte writes. Disable interrupts. Write 55h to EECON2. Write 0AAh to EECON2. Set the WR bit. This will begin the write cycle. The CPU will stall for duration of the write for TIW (see parameter D133A). 13. Re-enable interrupts. 14. Repeat steps 6 through 13 until all 1024 bytes are written to program memory. 15. Verify the memory (table read). An example of the required code is shown in Example 6-3 on the following page. Note: Before setting the WR bit, the Table Pointer address needs to be within the intended address range of the 64 bytes in the holding register. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 87 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY EXAMPLE 6-3: WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF ERASE_BLOCK BSF BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF MOVLW MOVWF RESTART_BUFFER MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF FILL_BUFFER ... WRITE_BUFFER MOVLW MOVWF WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS MOVFF MOVWF TBLWT+* D'64 COUNTER POSTINC0, WREG TABLAT ; number of bytes in holding register ; read the new data from I2C, SPI, ; PSP, USART, etc. D'64' COUNTER BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH FSR0H BUFFER_ADDR_LOW FSR0L EECON1, WREN EECON1, FREE INTCON, GIE 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1, WR INTCON, GIE D'16' WRITE_COUNTER ; enable write to memory ; enable Row Erase operation ; disable interrupts ; write 55h ; write 0AAh ; start erase (CPU stall) ; re-enable interrupts ; Need to write 16 blocks of 64 to write ; one erase block of 1024 CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL ; Load TBLPTR with the base address ; of the memory block, minus 1 ; point to buffer DECFSZ COUNTER BRA WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS PROGRAM_MEMORY BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF BCF EECON1, INTCON, 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1, INTCON, EECON1, WREN GIE ; ; ; ; ; get low byte of buffer data present data to table latch write data, perform a short write to internal TBLWT holding register. loop until buffers are full ; enable write to memory ; disable interrupts ; write 55h ; ; ; ; write 0AAh start program (CPU stall) re-enable interrupts disable write to memory Required Sequence WR GIE WREN DECFSZ WRITE_COUNTER BRA RESTART_BUFFER ; done with one write cycle ; if not done replacing the erase block DS39770B-page 88 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 6.5.2 WRITE VERIFY 6.6 Depending on the application, good programming practice may dictate that the value written to the memory should be verified against the original value. This should be used in applications where excessive writes can stress bits near the specification limit. Flash Program Operation During Code Protection See Section 22.6 "Program Verification and Code Protection" for details on code protection of Flash program memory. 6.5.3 UNEXPECTED TERMINATION OF WRITE OPERATION If a write is terminated by an unplanned event, such as loss of power or an unexpected Reset, the memory location just programmed should be verified and reprogrammed if needed. If the write operation is interrupted by a MCLR Reset or a WDT Time-out Reset during normal operation, the user can check the WRERR bit and rewrite the location(s) as needed. TABLE 6-2: Name TBLPTRU REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY Bit 7 -- Bit 6 -- Bit 5 bit 21 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page 51 51 51 51 INT0IE FREE RBIE WRERR TMR0IF WREN INT0IF WR RBIF -- 51 53 53 Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>) TBPLTRH Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) TABLAT INTCON EECON2 EECON1 Program Memory Table Latch GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE -- -- -- EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used during program memory access. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 89 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 90 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 7.0 7.1 8 x 8 HARDWARE MULTIPLIER Introduction EXAMPLE 7-1: MOVF MULWF ARG1, W ARG2 8 x 8 UNSIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE ; ; ARG1 * ARG2 -> ; PRODH:PRODL All PIC18 devices include an 8 x 8 hardware multiplier as part of the ALU. The multiplier performs an unsigned operation and yields a 16-bit result that is stored in the Product register pair, PRODH:PRODL. The multiplier's operation does not affect any flags in the STATUS register. Making multiplication a hardware operation allows it to be completed in a single instruction cycle. This has the advantages of higher computational throughput and reduced code size for multiplication algorithms and allows the PIC18 devices to be used in many applications previously reserved for digital signal processors. A comparison of various hardware and software multiply operations, along with the savings in memory and execution time, is shown in Table 7-1. EXAMPLE 7-2: MOVF MULWF BTFSC SUBWF MOVF BTFSC SUBWF ARG1, W ARG2 ARG2, SB PRODH, F ARG2, W ARG1, SB PRODH, F 8 x 8 SIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE ; ; ; ; ; ARG1 * ARG2 -> PRODH:PRODL Test Sign Bit PRODH = PRODH - ARG1 ; Test Sign Bit ; PRODH = PRODH ; - ARG2 7.2 Operation Example 7-1 shows the instruction sequence for an 8 x 8 unsigned multiplication. Only one instruction is required when one of the arguments is already loaded in the WREG register. Example 7-2 shows the sequence to do an 8 x 8 signed multiplication. To account for the sign bits of the arguments, each argument's Most Significant bit (MSb) is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done. TABLE 7-1: Routine PERFORMANCE COMPARISON FOR VARIOUS MULTIPLY OPERATIONS Multiply Method Without hardware multiply Hardware multiply Without hardware multiply Hardware multiply Without hardware multiply Hardware multiply Without hardware multiply Hardware multiply Program Memory (Words) 13 1 33 6 21 28 52 35 Cycles (Max) 69 1 91 6 242 28 254 40 Time @ 40 MHz 6.9 s 100 ns 9.1 s 600 ns 24.2 s 2.8 s 25.4 s 4.0 s @ 10 MHz 27.6 s 400 ns 36.4 s 2.4 s 96.8 s 11.2 s 102.6 s 16.0 s @ 4 MHz 69 s 1 s 91 s 6 s 242 s 28 s 254 s 40 s 8 x 8 unsigned 8 x 8 signed 16 x 16 unsigned 16 x 16 signed (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 91 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY Example 7-3 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 unsigned multiplication. Equation 7-1 shows the algorithm that is used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES3:RES0). EQUATION 7-2: 16 x 16 SIGNED MULTIPLICATION ALGORITHM EQUATION 7-1: 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MULTIPLICATION ALGORITHM ARG1H:ARG1L * ARG2H:ARG2L (ARG1H * ARG2H * 216) + (ARG1H * ARG2L * 28) + (ARG1L * ARG2H * 28) + (ARG1L * ARG2L) RES3:RES0 = = RES3:RES0= ARG1H:ARG1L * ARG2H:ARG2L = (ARG1H * ARG2H * 216) + (ARG1H * ARG2L * 28) + (ARG1L * ARG2H * 28) + (ARG1L * ARG2L) + (-1 * ARG2H<7> * ARG1H:ARG1L * 216) + (-1 * ARG1H<7> * ARG2H:ARG2L * 216) EXAMPLE 7-4: MOVF MULWF MOVFF MOVFF ; MOVF MULWF MOVFF MOVFF ; MOVF MULWF MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC ; MOVF MULWF MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC ; BTFSS BRA MOVF SUBWF MOVF SUBWFB ; SIGN_ARG1 BTFSS BRA MOVF SUBWF MOVF SUBWFB ; CONT_CODE : 16 x 16 SIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE ; ARG1L * ARG2L -> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; EXAMPLE 7-3: MOVF MULWF MOVFF MOVFF ; MOVF MULWF MOVFF MOVFF ; MOVF MULWF MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC ; MOVF MULWF MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE ; ARG1L * ARG2L-> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ARG1L, W ARG2L PRODH, RES1 PRODL, RES0 ARG1H, W ARG2H PRODH, RES3 PRODL, RES2 ARG1L, W ARG2H PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F ARG1H, W ARG2L PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F ARG2H, 7 SIGN_ARG1 ARG1L, W RES2 ARG1H, W RES3 ARG1L, W ARG2L PRODH, RES1 PRODL, RES0 ARG1H, W ARG2H PRODH, RES3 PRODL, RES2 ARG1L, W ARG2H PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F ARG1H, W ARG2L PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F ; ARG1H * ARG2H-> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ; ARG1H * ARG2H -> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ARG1L * ARG2H-> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ARG1L * ARG2H -> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products ARG1H * ARG2L -> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products ARG1H * ARG2L-> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products Example 7-4 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 signed multiply. Equation 7-2 shows the algorithm used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES3:RES0). To account for the sign bits of the arguments, the MSb for each argument pair is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done. ; ARG2H:ARG2L neg? ; no, check ARG1 ; ; ; ARG1H, 7 CONT_CODE ARG2L, W RES2 ARG2H, W RES3 ; ARG1H:ARG1L neg? ; no, done ; ; ; DS39770B-page 92 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 8.0 INTERRUPTS Members of the PIC18F85J90 family of devices have multiple interrupt sources and an interrupt priority feature that allows most interrupt sources to be assigned a high priority level or a low priority level. The high priority interrupt vector is at 0008h and the low priority interrupt vector is at 0018h. High priority interrupt events will interrupt any low priority interrupts that may be in progress. There are thirteen registers which are used to control interrupt operation. These registers are: * * * * * * * RCON INTCON INTCON2 INTCON3 PIR1, PIR2, PIR3 PIE1, PIE2, PIE3 IPR1, IPR2, IPR3 When the IPEN bit is cleared (default state), the interrupt priority feature is disabled and interrupts are compatible with PIC(R) mid-range devices. In Compatibility mode, the interrupt priority bits for each source have no effect. INTCON<6> is the PEIE bit which enables/disables all peripheral interrupt sources. INTCON<7> is the GIE bit which enables/disables all interrupt sources. All interrupts branch to address 0008h in Compatibility mode. When an interrupt is responded to, the global interrupt enable bit is cleared to disable further interrupts. If the IPEN bit is cleared, this is the GIE bit. If interrupt priority levels are used, this will be either the GIEH or GIEL bit. High priority interrupt sources can interrupt a low priority interrupt. Low priority interrupts are not processed while high priority interrupts are in progress. The return address is pushed onto the stack and the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector address (0008h or 0018h). Once in the Interrupt Service Routine, the source(s) of the interrupt can be determined by polling the interrupt flag bits. The interrupt flag bits must be cleared in software before re-enabling interrupts to avoid recursive interrupts. The "return from interrupt" instruction, RETFIE, exits the interrupt routine and sets the GIE bit (GIEH or GIEL if priority levels are used) which re-enables interrupts. For external interrupt events, such as the INT pins or the PORTB input change interrupt, the interrupt latency will be three to four instruction cycles. The exact latency is the same for one or two-cycle instructions. Individual interrupt flag bits are set regardless of the status of their corresponding enable bit or the GIE bit. Note: Do not use the MOVFF instruction to modify any of the Interrupt Control registers while any interrupt is enabled. Doing so may cause erratic microcontroller behavior. It is recommended that the Microchip header files supplied with MPLAB(R) IDE be used for the symbolic bit names in these registers. This allows the assembler/compiler to automatically take care of the placement of these bits within the specified register. In general, interrupt sources have three bits to control their operation. They are: * Flag bit to indicate that an interrupt event occurred * Enable bit that allows program execution to branch to the interrupt vector address when the flag bit is set * Priority bit to select high priority or low priority The interrupt priority feature is enabled by setting the IPEN bit (RCON<7>). When interrupt priority is enabled, there are two bits which enable interrupts globally. Setting the GIEH bit (INTCON<7>) enables all interrupts that have the priority bit set (high priority). Setting the GIEL bit (INTCON<6>) enables all interrupts that have the priority bit cleared (low priority). When the interrupt flag, enable bit and appropriate global interrupt enable bit are set, the interrupt will vector immediately to address 0008h or 0018h, depending on the priority bit setting. Individual interrupts can be disabled through their corresponding enable bits. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 93 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 8-1: PIC18F85J90 FAMILY INTERRUPT LOGIC TMR0IF TMR0IE TMR0IP RBIF RBIE RBIP INT0IF INT0IE INT1IF INT1IE INT1IP INT2IF INT2IE INT2IP INT3IF INT3IE INT3IP Wake-up if in Idle or Sleep modes PIR1<6:3,1:0> PIE1<6:3,1:0> IPR1<6:3,1:0> PIR2<7:6,3:1> PIE2<7:6 3:1> IPR2<7:6,3:1> PIR3<6:4,2:1> PIE3<6:4,2:1> IPR3<6:4,2:1> Interrupt to CPU Vector to Location 0008h GIE/GIEH IPEN IPEN PEIE/GIEL IPEN High Priority Interrupt Generation Low Priority Interrupt Generation PIR1<6:3,1:0> PIE1<6:3,1:0> IPR1<6:3,1:0> PIR2<7:6,3:1> PIE2<7:6,3:1> IPR2<7:6,3:1> PIR3<6:4,2:1> PIE3<6:4,2:1> IPR3<6:4,2:1> TMR0IF TMR0IE TMR0IP RBIF RBIE RBIP INT1IF INT1IE INT1IP INT2IF INT2IE INT2IP INT3IF INT3IE INT3IP IPEN Interrupt to CPU Vector to Location 0018h GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL DS39770B-page 94 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 8.1 INTCON Registers Note: The INTCON registers are readable and writable registers which contain various enable, priority and flag bits. Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. REGISTER 8-1: R/W-0 GIE/GIEH bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 INTCON: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 TMR0IE R/W-0 INT0IE R/W-0 RBIE R/W-0 TMR0IF R/W-0 INT0IF R/W-x RBIF(1) bit 0 PEIE/GIEL W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown GIE/GIEH: Global Interrupt Enable bit When IPEN = 0: 1 = Enables all unmasked interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts When IPEN = 1: 1 = Enables all high priority interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts PEIE/GIEL: Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit When IPEN = 0: 1 = Enables all unmasked peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all peripheral interrupts When IPEN = 1: 1 = Enables all low priority peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all low priority peripheral interrupts TMR0IE: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR0 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR0 overflow interrupt INT0IE: INT0 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT0 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT0 external interrupt RBIE: RB Port Change Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the RB port change interrupt 0 = Disables the RB port change interrupt TMR0IF: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR0 register has overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR0 register did not overflow INT0IF: INT0 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT0 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT0 external interrupt did not occur RBIF: RB Port Change Interrupt Flag bit(1) 1 = At least one of the RB7:RB4 pins changed state (must be cleared in software) 0 = None of the RB7:RB4 pins have changed state A mismatch condition will continue to set this bit. Reading PORTB will end the mismatch condition and allow the bit to be cleared. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 95 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 8-2: R/W-1 RBPU bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown INTCON2: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 2 R/W-1 R/W-1 INTEDG1 R/W-1 INTEDG2 R/W-1 INTEDG3 R/W-1 TMR0IP R/W-1 INT3IP R/W-1 RBIP bit 0 INTEDG0 RBPU: PORTB Pull-up Enable bit 1 = All PORTB pull-ups are disabled 0 = PORTB pull-ups are enabled by individual port latch values INTEDG0: External Interrupt 0 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge INTEDG1: External Interrupt 1 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge INTEDG2: External Interrupt 2 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge INTEDG3: External Interrupt 3 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge TMR0IP: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority INT3IP: INT3 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority RBIP: RB Port Change Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. DS39770B-page 96 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 8-3: R/W-1 INT2IP bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown INTCON3: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 3 R/W-1 INT1IP R/W-0 INT3IE R/W-0 INT2IE R/W-0 INT1IE R/W-0 INT3IF R/W-0 INT2IF R/W-0 INT1IF bit 0 INT2IP: INT2 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority INT1IP: INT1 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority INT3IE: INT3 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT3 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT3 external interrupt INT2IE: INT2 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT2 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT2 external interrupt INT1IE: INT1 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT1 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT1 external interrupt INT3IF: INT3 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT3 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT3 external interrupt did not occur INT2IF: INT2 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT2 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT2 external interrupt did not occur INT1IF: INT1 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT1 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT1 external interrupt did not occur bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 97 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 8.2 PIR Registers The PIR registers contain the individual flag bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are three Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) registers (PIR1, PIR2, PIR3). Note 1: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE (INTCON<7>). 2: User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are cleared prior to enabling an interrupt and after servicing that interrupt. REGISTER 8-4: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 bit 6 PIR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 1 R/W-0 ADIF R-0 RC1IF R-0 TX1IF R/W-0 SSPIF U-0 -- R/W-0 TMR2IF R/W-0 TMR1IF bit 0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as `0' ADIF: A/D Converter Interrupt Flag bit 1 = An A/D conversion completed (must be cleared in software) 0 = The A/D conversion is not complete RC1IF: EUSART Receive Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART receive buffer, RCREG1, is full (cleared when RCREG1 is read) 0 = The EUSART receive buffer is empty TX1IF: EUSART Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART transmit buffer, TXREG1, is empty (cleared when TXREG1 is written) 0 = The EUSART transmit buffer is full SSPIF: Master Synchronous Serial Port Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The transmission/reception is complete (must be cleared in software) 0 = Waiting to transmit/receive Unimplemented: Read as `0' TMR2IF: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR2 to PR2 match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR2 to PR2 match occurred TMR1IF: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR1 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR1 register did not overflow bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS39770B-page 98 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 8-5: R/W-0 OSCFIF bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown PIR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 2 R/W-0 CMIF U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0 BCLIF R/W-0 LVDIF R/W-0 TMR3IF U-0 -- bit 0 OSCFIF: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Device oscillator failed, clock input has changed to INTOSC (must be cleared in software) 0 = Device clock operating CMIF: Comparator Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Comparator input has changed (must be cleared in software) 0 = Comparator input has not changed Unimplemented: Read as `0' BCLIF: Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A bus collision occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No bus collision occurred LVDIF: Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A low-voltage condition occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The device voltage is above the regulator's low-voltage trip point TMR3IF: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR3 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR3 register did not overflow Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 6 bit 5-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 99 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 8-6: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 bit 6 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown PIR3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 3 R/W-0 LCDIF R-0 RC2IF R-0 TX2IF U-0 -- R/W-0 CCP2IF R/W-0 CCP1IF U-0 -- bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as `0' LCDIF: LCD Interrupt Flag bit (valid when Type-B waveform with Non-Static mode is selected) 1 = LCD data of all COMs is output (must be cleared in software) 0 = LCD data of all COMs is not yet output RC2IF: AUSART Receive Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The AUSART receive buffer, RCREG2, is full (cleared when RCREG2 is read) 0 = The AUSART receive buffer is empty TX2IF: AUSART Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The AUSART transmit buffer, TXREG2, is empty (cleared when TXREG2 is written) 0 = The AUSART transmit buffer is full Unimplemented: Read as `0' CCP2IF: CCP2 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode. CCP1IF: CCP1 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode. Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS39770B-page 100 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 8.3 PIE Registers The PIE registers contain the individual enable bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are three Peripheral Interrupt Enable registers (PIE1, PIE2, PIE3). When IPEN = 0, the PEIE bit must be set to enable any of these peripheral interrupts. REGISTER 8-7: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 bit 6 PIE1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 1 R/W-0 ADIE R/W-0 RC1IE R/W-0 TX1IE R/W-0 SSPIE U-0 -- R/W-0 TMR2IE R/W-0 TMR1IE bit 0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as `0' ADIE: A/D Converter Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the A/D interrupt 0 = Disables the A/D interrupt RC1IE: EUSART Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EUSART receive interrupt 0 = Disables the EUSART receive interrupt TX1IE: EUSART Transmit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EUSART transmit interrupt 0 = Disables the EUSART transmit interrupt SSPIE: Master Synchronous Serial Port Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the MSSP interrupt 0 = Disables the MSSP interrupt Unimplemented: Read as `0' TMR2IE: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt TMR1IE: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR1 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR1 overflow interrupt bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 101 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 8-8: R/W-0 OSCFIE bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown PIE2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 2 R/W-0 CMIE U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0 BCLIE R/W-0 LVDIE R/W-0 TMR3IE U-0 -- bit 0 OSCFIE: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled CMIE: Comparator Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled Unimplemented: Read as `0' BCLIE: Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled LVDIE: Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled TMR3IE: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 6 bit 5-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS39770B-page 102 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 8-9: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 bit 6 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown PIE3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 3 R/W-0 LCDIE R-0 RC2IE R-0 TX2IE U-0 -- R/W-0 CCP2IE R/W-0 CCP1IE U-0 -- bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as `0' LCDIE: LCD Interrupt Enable bit (valid when Type-B waveform with Non-Static mode is selected) 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled RC2IE: AUSART Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled TX2IE: AUSART Transmit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled Unimplemented: Read as `0' CCP2IE: CCP2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled CCP1IE: CCP1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the CCP1 interrupt 0 = Disables the CCP1 interrupt Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 103 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 8.4 IPR Registers The IPR registers contain the individual priority bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are three Peripheral Interrupt Priority registers (IPR1, IPR2, IPR3). Using the priority bits requires that the Interrupt Priority Enable (IPEN) bit be set. REGISTER 8-10: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 bit 6 IPR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 1 R/W-1 RC1IP R/W-1 TX1IP R/W-1 SSPIP U-0 -- R/W-1 TMR2IP R/W-1 TMR1IP bit 0 ADIP R/W-1 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as `0' ADIP: A/D Converter Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority RC1IP: EUSART Receive Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority TX1IP: EUSART Transmit Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 SSPIP: Master Synchronous Serial Port Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority Unimplemented: Read as `0' TMR2IP: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority TMR1IP: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS39770B-page 104 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 8-11: R/W-1 OSCFIP bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown IPR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 2 U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-1 BCLIP R/W-1 LVDIP R/W-1 TMR3IP U-0 -- bit 0 R/W-1 CMIP OSCFIP: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority CMIP: Comparator Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority Unimplemented: Read as `0' BCLIP: Bus Collision Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority LVDIP: Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority TMR3IP: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 6 bit 5-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 105 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 8-12: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 bit 6 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown IPR3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 3 R-0 RC2IP R-0 TX2IP U-0 -- R/W-1 CCP2IP R/W-1 CCP1IP U-0 -- bit 0 R/W-0 LCDIP Unimplemented: Read as `0' LCDIP: LCD Interrupt Priority bit (valid when Type-B waveform with Non-Static mode is selected) 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority RC2IP: AUSART Receive Priority Flag bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority TX2IP: AUSART Transmit Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority Unimplemented: Read as `0' CCP2IP: CCP2 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority CCP1IP: CCP1 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit bit bit 0 DS39770B-page 106 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 8.5 RCON Register The RCON register contains bits used to determine the cause of the last Reset or wake-up from Idle or Sleep modes. RCON also contains the bit that enables interrupt priorities (IPEN). REGISTER 8-13: R/W-0 IPEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-1 RI R-1 TO R-1 PD R/W-0 POR R/W-0 BOR bit 0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit 1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts 0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16CXXX Compatibility mode) Unimplemented: Read as `0' RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. TO: Watchdog Timer Time-out Flag bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. PD: Power-Down Detection Flag bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. POR: Power-on Reset Status bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. bit 6-5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 107 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 8.6 INTx Pin Interrupts 8.7 TMR0 Interrupt External interrupts on the RB0/INT0, RB1/INT1, RB2/INT2 and RB3/INT3 pins are edge-triggered. If the corresponding INTEDGx bit in the INTCON2 register is set (= 1), the interrupt is triggered by a rising edge; if the bit is clear, the trigger is on the falling edge. When a valid edge appears on the RBx/INTx pin, the corresponding flag bit, INTxIF, is set. This interrupt can be disabled by clearing the corresponding enable bit, INTxIE. Flag bit, INTxIF, must be cleared in software in the Interrupt Service Routine before re-enabling the interrupt. All external interrupts (INT0, INT1, INT2 and INT3) can wake-up the processor from the power-managed modes if bit INTxIE was set prior to going into the power-managed modes. If the Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE, is set, the processor will branch to the interrupt vector following wake-up. Interrupt priority for INT1, INT2 and INT3 is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bits, INT1IP (INTCON3<6>), INT2IP (INTCON3<7>) and INT3IP (INTCON2<1>). There is no priority bit associated with INT0. It is always a high priority interrupt source. In 8-bit mode (which is the default), an overflow in the TMR0 register (FFh 00h) will set flag bit, TMR0IF. In 16-bit mode, an overflow in the TMR0H:TMR0L register pair (FFFFh 0000h) will set TMR0IF. The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, TMR0IE (INTCON<5>). Interrupt priority for Timer0 is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bit, TMR0IP (INTCON2<2>). See Section 10.0 "Timer0 Module" for further details on the Timer0 module. 8.8 PORTB Interrupt-on-Change An input change on PORTB<7:4> sets flag bit, RBIF (INTCON<0>). The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, RBIE (INTCON<3>). Interrupt priority for PORTB interrupt-on-change is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bit, RBIP (INTCON2<0>). 8.9 Context Saving During Interrupts During interrupts, the return PC address is saved on the stack. Additionally, the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers are saved on the Fast Return Stack. If a fast return from interrupt is not used (see Section 5.3 "Data Memory Organization"), the user may need to save the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers on entry to the Interrupt Service Routine. Depending on the user's application, other registers may also need to be saved. Example 8-1 saves and restores the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers during an Interrupt Service Routine. EXAMPLE 8-1: MOVWF MOVFF MOVFF ; ; USER ; MOVFF MOVF MOVFF SAVING STATUS, WREG AND BSR REGISTERS IN RAM ; W_TEMP is in virtual bank ; STATUS_TEMP located anywhere ; BSR_TMEP located anywhere W_TEMP STATUS, STATUS_TEMP BSR, BSR_TEMP ISR CODE BSR_TEMP, BSR W_TEMP, W STATUS_TEMP, STATUS ; Restore BSR ; Restore WREG ; Restore STATUS DS39770B-page 108 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 9.0 I/O PORTS 9.1 I/O Port Pin Capabilities Depending on the device selected and features enabled, there are up to nine ports available. Some pins of the I/O ports are multiplexed with an alternate function from the peripheral features on the device. In general, when a peripheral is enabled, that pin may not be used as a general purpose I/O pin. Each port has three memory mapped registers for its operation: * TRIS register (Data Direction register) * PORT register (reads the levels on the pins of the device) * LAT register (Output Latch register) Reading the PORT register reads the current status of the pins, whereas writing to the PORT register writes to the Output Latch (LAT) register. Setting a TRIS bit (= 1) makes the corresponding PORT pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a high-impedance mode). Clearing a TRIS bit (= 0) makes the corresponding PORT pin an output (i.e., put the contents of the corresponding LAT bit on the selected pin). The Data Latch (LAT register) is useful for read-modify-write operations on the value that the I/O pins are driving. Read-modify-write operations on the LAT register read and write the latched output value for the PORT register. A simplified model of a generic I/O port, without the interfaces to other peripherals, is shown in Figure 9-1. When developing an application, the capabilities of the port pins must be considered. Outputs on some pins have higher output drive strength than others. Similarly, some pins can tolerate higher than VDD input levels. 9.1.1 INPUT PINS AND VOLTAGE CONSIDERATIONS The voltage tolerance of pins used as device inputs is dependent on the pin's input function. Pins that are used as digital only inputs are able to handle DC voltages up to 5.5V, a level typical for digital logic circuits. In contrast, pins that also have analog input functions of any kind can only tolerate voltages up to VDD. Voltage excursions beyond VDD on these pins should be avoided. Table 9-1 summarizes the input voltage capabilities. Refer to Section 25.0 "Electrical Characteristics" for more details. TABLE 9-1: PORT or Pin PORTA<7:0> PORTC<1:0> PORTF<7:1> PORTB<7:0> PORTC<7:2> PORTD<7:0> PORTE<7:0> PORTG<4:0> PORTH<7:0>(1) PORTJ<7:0>(1) Note 1: INPUT VOLTAGE TOLERANCE Tolerated Input VDD Description Only VDD input levels tolerated. 5.5V Tolerates input levels above VDD, useful for most standard logic. FIGURE 9-1: GENERIC I/O PORT OPERATION RD LAT Data Bus WR LAT or PORT Not available on 64-pin devices. D Q I/O pin (1) 9.1.2 PIN OUTPUT DRIVE CKx Data Latch D Q When used as digital I/O, the output pin drive strengths vary for groups of pins intended to meet the needs for a variety of applications. In general, there are three classes of output pins in terms of drive capability. PORTB and PORTC, as well as PORTA<7:6>, are designed to drive higher current loads, such as LEDs. PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ can also drive LEDs but only those with smaller current requirements. PORTF, PORTG and PORTH, along with PORTA<5:0>, have the lowest drive level but are capable of driving normal digital circuit loads with a high input impedance. Regardless of which port it is located on, all output pins in LCD Segment or Common mode have sufficient output to directly drive a display. Table 9-2 summarizes the output capabilities of the ports. Refer to the "Absolute Maximum Ratings" in Section 25.0 "Electrical Characteristics" for more details. WR TRIS CKx TRIS Latch Input Buffer RD TRIS Q D EN EN RD PORT Note 1: I/O pins have diode protection to VDD and VSS. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 109 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-2: Low PORTA<5:0> PORTF PORTG PORTH(1) Note 1: Not available on 64-pin devices. OUTPUT DRIVE LEVELS FOR VARIOUS PORTS Medium PORTD PORTE PORTJ(1) High PORTA<7:6> PORTB PORTC 9.2 PORTA, TRISA and LATA Registers PORTA is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISA and LATA. RA4/T0CKI is a Schmitt Trigger input. All other PORTA pins have TTL input levels and full CMOS output drivers. The RA4 pin is multiplexed with the Timer0 clock input and one of the LCD segment drives. RA5 and RA3:RA0 are multiplexed with analog inputs for the A/D converter. The operation of the analog inputs as A/D converter inputs is selected by clearing or setting the PCFG3:PCFG0 control bits in the ADCON1 register. The corresponding TRISA bits control the direction of these pins, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user must ensure the bits in the TRISA register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. Note: RA5 and RA3:RA0 are configured as analog inputs on any Reset and are read as `0'. RA4 is configured as a digital input. 9.1.3 PULL-UP CONFIGURATION Four of the I/O ports (PORTB, PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ) implement configurable weak pull-ups on all pins. These are internal pull-ups that allow floating digital input signals to be pulled to a consistent level without the use of external resistors. The pull-ups are enabled with a single bit for each of the ports: RBPU (INTCON2<7>) for PORTB, and RDPU, REPU and PJPU (PORTG<7:5>) for the other ports. 9.1.4 OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUTS The output pins for several peripherals are also equipped with a configurable, open-drain output option. This allows the peripherals to communicate with external digital logic, operating at a higher voltage level, without the use of level translators. The open-drain option is implemented on port pins specifically associated with the data and clock outputs of the USARTs, the MSSP module (in SPI mode) and the CCP modules. This option is selectively enabled by setting the open-drain control bit for the corresponding module in TRISG and LATG. Their configuration is discussed in more detail in Section 9.4 "PORTC, TRISC and LATC Registers", Section 9.6 "PORTE, TRISE and LATE Registers" and Section 9.8 "PORTG, TRISG and LATG Registers". When the open-drain option is required, the output pin must also be tied through an external pull-up resistor provided by the user to a higher voltage level, up to 5V (Figure 9-2). When a digital logic high signal is output, it is pulled up to the higher voltage level. OSC2/CLKO/RA6 and OSC1/CLKI/RA7 normally serve as the external circuit connections for the external (primary) oscillator circuit (HS Oscillator modes), or the external clock input and output (EC Oscillator modes). In these cases, RA6 and RA7 are not available as digital I/O and their corresponding TRIS and LAT bits are read as `0'. When the device is configured to use INTOSC or INTRC as the default oscillator mode (FOSC2 Configuration bit is `0'), RA6 and RA7 are automatically configured as digital I/O; the oscillator and clock in/clock out functions are disabled. RA1, RA4 and RA5 are multiplexed with LCD segment drives, controlled by bits in the LCDSE1 and LCDSE2 registers. I/O port functionality is only available when the LCD segments are disabled. EXAMPLE 9-1: CLRF CLRF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF ; ; LATA ; ; 07h ; ADCON1 ; 0BFh ; ; TRISA ; ; PORTA INITIALIZING PORTA Initialize PORTA by clearing output latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Configure A/D for digital inputs Value used to initialize data direction Set RA<7, 5:0> as inputs, RA<6> as output FIGURE 9-2: USING THE OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT (USART SHOWN AS EXAMPLE) +5V 3.3V PIC18F85J90 VDD TXX (at logic `1') 3.3V 5V DS39770B-page 110 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-3: Pin Name RA0/AN0 PORTA FUNCTIONS Function RA0 AN0 TRIS Setting 0 1 1 0 1 AN1 SEG18 1 x 0 1 AN2 VREF1 1 0 1 AN3 VREF+ 1 1 0 1 T0CKI SEG14 x x 0 1 AN4 SEG15 OSC2 CLKO RA6 OSC1 CLKI RA7 1 x x x 0 1 I/O O I I O I I O O I I I O I I I O I I O O I I O O O O I I I O I I/O Type DIG TTL ANA DIG TTL ANA ANA DIG TTL ANA ANA DIG TTL ANA ANA DIG ST ST ANA DIG TTL ANA ANA ANA DIG DIG TTL ANA ANA DIG TTL Description LATA<0> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTA<0> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 0. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. LATA<1> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTA<1> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 1. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. LCD segment 18 output; disables all other pin functions. LATA<2> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTA<2> data input; disabled when analog functions enabled. A/D input channel 2. Default input configuration on POR. A/D and Comparator low reference voltage input. LATA<3> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTA<3> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 3. Default input configuration on POR. A/D and Comparator high reference voltage input. LATA<4> data output. PORTA<4> data input. Default configuration on POR. Timer0 clock input. LCD segment 14 output; disables all other pin functions. LATA<5> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTA<5> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 4. Default configuration on POR. LCD segment 15 output; disables all other pin functions. Main oscillator feedback output connection (HS and HSPLL modes). System cycle clock output (FOSC/4) (EC and ECPLL modes). LATA<6> data output; disabled when FOSC2 Configuration bit is set. PORTA<6> data input; disabled when FOSC2 Configuration bit is set. Main oscillator input connection (HS and HSPLL modes). Main external clock source input (EC and ECPLL modes). LATA<7> data output; disabled when FOSC2 Configuration bit is set. PORTA<7> data input; disabled when FOSC2 Configuration bit is set. RA1/AN1/SEG18 RA1 RA2/AN2/VREF- RA2 RA3/AN3/VREF+ RA3 RA4/T0CKI/ SEG14 RA4 RA5/AN4/SEG15 RA5 OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 x x 0 1 Legend: O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Trigger Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don't care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). TABLE 9-4: Name PORTA LATA TRISA ADCON1 LCDSE1 LCDSE2 Legend: Note 1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTA Bit 7 RA7(1) Bit 6 RA6(1) LATA6(1) TRISA6(1) -- SE14 SE22 Bit 5 RA5 LATA5 TRISA5 VCFG1 SE13 SE21 Bit 4 RA4 LATA4 TRISA4 VCFG0 SE12 SE20 Bit 3 RA3 LATA3 TRISA3 PCFG3 SE11 SE19 Bit 2 RA2 LATA2 TRISA2 PCFG2 SE10 SE18 Bit 1 RA1 LATA1 TRISA1 PCFG1 SE09 SE17 Bit 0 RA0 LATA0 TRISA0 PCFG0 SE08 SE16 Reset Values on page 55 54 54 53 53 53 LATA7 -- (1) TRISA7(1) SE15 SE23 -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTA. These bits are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read as `X'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 111 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 9.3 PORTB, TRISB and LATB Registers Four of the PORTB pins (RB7:RB4) have an interrupt-on-change feature. Only pins configured as inputs can cause this interrupt to occur (i.e., any RB7:RB4 pin configured as an output is excluded from the interrupt-on-change comparison). The input pins (of RB7:RB4) are compared with the old value latched on the last read of PORTB. The "mismatch" outputs of RB7:RB4 are ORed together to generate the RB Port Change Interrupt with Flag bit, RBIF (INTCON<0>). This interrupt can wake the device from power-managed modes. The user, in the Interrupt Service Routine, can clear the interrupt in the following manner: a) Any read or write of PORTB (except with the MOVFF (ANY), PORTB instruction). This will end the mismatch condition. Clear flag bit, RBIF. PORTB is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISB and LATB. All pins on PORTB are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. EXAMPLE 9-2: CLRF PORTB ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; INITIALIZING PORTB Initialize PORTB by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RB<3:0> as inputs RB<5:4> as outputs RB<7:6> as inputs CLRF LATB MOVLW 0CFh b) MOVWF TRISB A mismatch condition will continue to set flag bit, RBIF. Reading PORTB will end the mismatch condition and allow flag bit, RBIF, to be cleared. The interrupt-on-change feature is recommended for wake-up on key depression operation and operations where PORTB is only used for the interrupt-on-change feature. Polling of PORTB is not recommended while using the interrupt-on-change feature. RB5:RB0 are also multiplexed with LCD segment drives, controlled by bits in the LCDSE1 and LCDSE3 registers. I/O port functionality is only available when the LCD segments are disabled. Each of the PORTB pins has a weak internal pull-up. A single control bit can turn on all the pull-ups. This is performed by clearing bit RBPU (INTCON2<7>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on a Power-on Reset. DS39770B-page 112 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-5: Pin Name RB0/INT0/SEG30 PORTB FUNCTIONS Function RB0 INT0 SEG30 TRIS Setting 0 1 1 x 0 1 INT1 SEG8 1 x 0 1 INT2 SEG9 1 x 0 1 INT3 SEG10 1 x 0 1 KBI0 SEG11 1 x 0 1 KBI1 SEG29 1 x 0 1 KBI2 PGC 1 x 0 1 KBI3 PGD 1 x x I/O O I I O O I I O O I I O O I I O O I I O O I I O O I I I O I I O I I/O Type DIG TTL ST ANA DIG TTL ST ANA DIG TTL ST ANA DIG TTL ST ANA DIG TTL TTL ANA DIG TTL TTL ANA DIG TTL TTL ST DIG TTL TTL DIG ST LATB<0> data output. PORTB<0> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. External interrupt 0 input. LCD segment 30 output; disables all other pin functions. LATB<1> data output. PORTB<1> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. External interrupt 1 input. LCD segment 8 output; disables all other pin functions. LATB<2> data output. PORTB<2> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. External interrupt 2 input. LCD segment 9 output; disables all other pin functions. LATB<3> data output. PORTB<3> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. External interrupt 3 input. LCD segment 10 output; disables all other pin functions. LATB<4> data output. PORTB<4> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. Interrupt-on-pin change. LCD segment 11 output; disables all other pin functions. LATB<5> data output. PORTB<5> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. Interrupt-on-pin change. LCD segment 29 output; disables all other pin functions. LATB<6> data output. PORTB<6> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. Interrupt-on-pin change. Serial execution (ICSPTM) clock input for ICSP and ICD operation. LATB<7> data output. PORTB<7> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. Interrupt-on-pin change. Serial execution data output for ICSP and ICD operation. Serial execution data input for ICSP and ICD operation. Description RB1/INT1/SEG8 RB1 RB2/INT2/SEG9 RB2 RB3/INT3/SEG10 RB3 RB4/KBI0/SEG11 RB4 RB5/KBI1/SEG29 RB5 RB6/KBI2/PGC RB6 RB7/KBI3/PGD RB7 Legend: O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Trigger Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don't care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 113 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-6: Name PORTB LATB TRISB INTCON INTCON2 INTCON3 LCDSE1 LCDSE3 Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTB Bit 7 RB7 LATB7 TRISB7 GIE/GIEH RBPU INT2IP SE15 SE31 Bit 6 RB6 LATB6 TRISB6 PEIE/GIEL INTEDG0 INT1IP SE14 SE30 Bit 5 RB5 LATB5 TRISB5 TMR0IE INTEDG1 INT3IE SE13 SE29 Bit 4 RB4 LATB4 TRISB4 INT0IE INTEDG2 INT2IE SE12 SE28 Bit 3 RB3 LATB3 TRISB3 RBIE INTEDG3 INT1IE SE11 SE27 Bit 2 RB2 LATB2 TRISB2 TMR0IF TMR0IP INT3IF SE10 SE26 Bit 1 RB1 LATB1 TRISB1 INT0IF INT3IP INT2IF SE09 SE25 Bit 0 RB0 LATB0 TRISB0 RBIF RBIP INT1IF SE08 SE24 Reset Values on page 55 54 54 51 51 51 53 53 Shaded cells are not used by PORTB. DS39770B-page 114 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 9.4 PORTC, TRISC and LATC Registers The contents of the TRISC register are affected by peripheral overrides. Reading TRISC always returns the current contents, even though a peripheral device may be overriding one or more of the pins. RC<7:1> pins are multiplexed with LCD segment drives, controlled by bits in the LCDSE1, LCDSE2, LCDSE3 and LCDSE4 registers. I/O port functionality is only available when the LCD segments are disabled. PORTC is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISC and LATC. Only PORTC pins, RC2 through RC7, are digital only pins and can tolerate input voltages up to 5.5V. PORTC is multiplexed with CCP, MSSP and EUSART peripheral functions (Table 9-7). The pins have Schmitt Trigger input buffers. The pins for CCP, SPI and EUSART are also configurable for open-drain output whenever these functions are active. Open-drain configuration is selected by setting the SPIOD, CCPxOD, and U1OD control bits (TRISG<7:5> and LATG<6>, respectively). RC1 is normally configured as the default peripheral pin for the CCP2 module. Assignment of CCP2 is controlled by Configuration bit, CCP2MX (default state, CCP2MX = 1). When enabling peripheral functions, care should be taken in defining TRIS bits for each PORTC pin. Some peripherals override the TRIS bit to make a pin an output, while other peripherals override the TRIS bit to make a pin an input. The user should refer to the corresponding peripheral section for the correct TRIS bit settings. Note: These pins are configured as digital inputs on any device Reset. EXAMPLE 9-3: CLRF PORTC ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; INITIALIZING PORTC Initialize PORTC by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RC<3:0> as inputs RC<5:4> as outputs RC<7:6> as inputs CLRF LATC MOVLW 0CFh MOVWF TRISC (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 115 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-7: Pin Name RC0/T1OSO/ T13CKI PORTC FUNCTIONS Function RC0 T1OSO T13CKI TRIS Setting 0 1 x 1 0 1 T1OSI CCP2(1) SEG32 x 0 1 x 0 1 CCP1 SEG13 0 1 x 0 1 SCK SCL SEG17 0 1 0 1 x 0 1 SDI SDA SEG16 1 1 x 0 1 SDO SEG12 0 x 0 1 TX1 CK1 SEG27 1 1 1 x 0 1 RX1 DT1 SEG28 1 1 1 x I/O O I O I O I I O I O O I O I O O I O I O I O O I I O I O O I O O O I O O I O O I I O I O I/O Type DIG ST ANA ST DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST DIG ST ANA DIG ST DIG ST DIG I2C ANA DIG ST ST DIG I2C ANA DIG ST DIG ANA DIG ST DIG DIG ST ANA DIG ST ST DIG ST ANA LATC<0> data output. PORTC<0> data input. Timer1 oscillator output; enabled when Timer1 oscillator enabled. Disables digital I/O and LCD segment driver. Timer1/Timer3 counter input. LATC<1> data output. PORTC<1> data input. Timer1 oscillator input. CCP2 Compare/PWM output. CCP2 Capture input. LCD segment 32 output; disables all other pin functions. LATC<2> data output. PORTC<2> data input. CCP1 Compare/PWM output; takes priority over port data. CCP1 Capture input. LCD segment 13 output; disables all other pin functions. LATC<3> data output. PORTC<3> data input. SPI clock output (MSSP module); takes priority over port data. SPI clock input (MSSP module). I2CTM clock output (MSSP module); takes priority over port data. I2C clock input (MSSP module); input type depends on module setting. LCD segment 17 output; disables all other pin functions. LATC<4> data output. PORTC<4> data input. SPI data input (MSSP module). I2C data output (MSSP module); takes priority over port data. I2C data input (MSSP module); input type depends on module setting. LCD segment 16 output; disables all other pin functions. LATC<5> data output. PORTC<5> data input. SPI data output (MSSP module). LCD segment 12 output; disables all other pin functions. LATC<6> data output. PORTC<6> data input. Synchronous serial data output (EUSART module); takes priority over port data. Synchronous serial data input (EUSART module); user must configure as an input. Synchronous serial clock input (EUSART module). LCD segment 27 output; disables all other pin functions. LATC<7> data output. PORTC<7> data input. Asynchronous serial receive data input (EUSART module). Synchronous serial data output (EUSART module); takes priority over port data. Synchronous serial data input (EUSART module); user must configure as an input. LCD segment 28 output; disables all other pin functions. Description RC1/T1OSI/ CCP2/SEG32 RC1 RC2/CCP1/ SEG13 RC2 RC3/SCK/SCL/ SEG17 RC3 RC4/SDI/SDA/ SEG16 RC4 RC5/SDO/ SEG12 RC5 RC6/TX1/CK1/ SEG27 RC6 RC7/RX1/DT1/ SEG28 RC7 Legend: Note 1: O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Trigger Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, I2C = I2C/SMBus Buffer Input, x = Don't care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Default assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. DS39770B-page 116 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-8: Name PORTC LATC TRISC LATG TRISG LCDSE1 LCDSE2 LCDSE3 LCDSE4 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTC Bit 7 RC7 LATC7 TRISC7 U2OD SPIOD SE15 SE23 SE31 SE39 (1) Bit 6 RC6 LATBC6 TRISC6 U1OD SE14 SE22 SE30 SE38 (1) Bit 5 RC5 LATC5 TRISC5 -- SE13 SE21 SE29 SE37 (1) Bit 4 RC4 LATCB4 TRISC4 LATG4 TRISG4 SE12 SE20 SE28 SE36 (1) Bit 3 RC3 LATC3 TRISC3 LATG3 TRISG3 SE11 SE19 SE27 SE35 (1) Bit 2 RC2 LATC2 TRISC2 LATG2 TRISG2 SE10 SE18 SE26 SE34 (1) Bit 1 RC1 LATC1 TRISC1 LATG1 TRISG1 SE09 SE17 SE25 SE33 (1) Bit 0 RC0 LATC0 TRISC0 LATG0 TRISG0 SE08 SE16 SE24 SE32 Reset Values on page 55 54 54 54 54 53 53 53 53 CCP2OD CCP1OD Legend: Shaded cells are not used by PORTC. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 117 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 9.5 PORTD, TRISD and LATD Registers All of the PORTD pins are multiplexed with LCD segment drives, controlled by bits in the LCDSE0 register. I/O port functionality is only available when the LCD segments are disabled. PORTD is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISD and LATD. All pins on PORTD are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. All pins on PORTD are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. Note: These pins are configured as digital inputs on any device Reset. EXAMPLE 9-4: CLRF PORTD ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; INITIALIZING PORTD Initialize PORTD by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RD<3:0> as inputs RD<5:4> as outputs RD<7:6> as inputs CLRF LATD MOVLW 0CFh Each of the PORTD pins has a weak internal pull-up. A single control bit can turn off all the pull-ups. This is performed by setting bit RDPU (PORTG<7>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on all device Resets. MOVWF TRISD DS39770B-page 118 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-9: Pin Name RD0/SEG0 PORTD FUNCTIONS Function RD0 SEG0 TRIS Setting 0 1 x 0 1 SEG1 x 0 1 SEG2 x 0 1 SEG3 x 0 1 SEG4 x 0 1 SEG5 x 0 1 SEG6 x 0 1 SEG7 x I/O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I I I/O Type DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA LATD<0> data output. PORTD<0> data input. LCD segment 0 output; disables all other pin functions. LATD<1> data output. PORTD<1> data input. LCD segment 1 output; disables all other pin functions. LATD<2> data output. PORTD<2> data input. LCD segment 2 output; disables all other pin functions. LATD<3> data output. PORTD<3> data input. LCD segment 3 output; disables all other pin functions. LATD<4> data output. PORTD<4> data input. LCD segment 4 output; disables all other pin functions. LATD<5> data output. PORTD<5> data input. LCD segment 5 output; disables all other pin functions. LATD<6> data output. PORTD<6> data input. LCD segment 6 output; disables all other pin functions. LATD<7> data output. PORTD<7> data input. LCD segment 7 output; disables all other pin functions. Description RD1/SEG1 RD1 RD2/SEG2 RD2 RD3/SEG3 RD3 RD4/SEG4 RD4 RD5/SEG5 RD5 RD6/SEG6 RD6 RD7/SEG7 RD7 Legend: O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Trigger Buffer Input, x = Don't care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). TABLE 9-10: Name PORTD LATD TRISD PORTG LCDSE0 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTD Bit 7 RD7 LATD7 TRISD7 RDPU SE7 Bit 6 RD6 LATD6 TRISD6 REPU SE6 Bit 5 RD5 LATD5 TRISD5 RJPU(1) SE5 Bit 4 RD4 LATD4 TRISD4 RG4 SE4 Bit 3 RD3 LATD3 TRISD3 RG3 SE3 Bit 2 RD2 LATD2 TRISD2 RG2 SE2 Bit 1 RD1 LATD1 TRISD1 RG1 SE1 Bit 0 RD0 LATD0 TRISD0 RG0 SE0 Reset Values on page 55 54 54 54 53 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by PORTD. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 119 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 9.6 PORTE, TRISE and LATE Registers Pins RE1 and RE0 are multiplexed with the functions of LCDBIAS2 and LCDBIAS1. When LCD bias generation is required (i.e., any application where the device is connected to an external LCD), these pins cannot be used as digital I/O. Note: The pin corresponding to RE2 of other PIC18F parts has the function of LCDBIAS3 in this device. It cannot be used as digital I/O. PORTE is a 7-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISE and LATE. All pins on PORTE are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. All pins on PORTE are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. The RE7 pin is also configurable for open-drain output when CCP2 is active on this pin. Open-drain configuration is selected by setting the CCP2OD control bit (TRISG<6>) Note: These pins are configured as digital inputs on any device Reset. RE7 is multiplexed with LCD segment drive (SEG31) controlled by the LCDSE3<7> bit. I/O port function is only available when the segment is disabled. RE7 can also be configured as the alternate peripheral pin for the CCP2 module. This is done by clearing the CCP2MX Configuration bit. Each of the PORTE pins has a weak internal pull-up. A single control bit can turn off all the pull-ups. This is performed by setting bit, REPU (PORTG<6>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on any device Reset. Pins RE6:RE3 are multiplexed with the LCD common drives. I/O port functions are only available on those PORTE pins depending on which commons are active. The configuration is determined by the LMUX1:LMUX0 control bits (LCDCON<1:0>). The availability is summarized in Table 9-11. EXAMPLE 9-5: CLRF PORTE ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; INITIALIZING PORTE Initialize PORTE by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RE<1:0> as inputs RE<7:2> as outputs CLRF LATE MOVLW 03h MOVWF TRISE TABLE 9-11: PORTE PINS AVAILABLE IN DIFFERENT LCD DRIVE CONFIGURATIONS Active LCD Commons COM0 COM0, COM1 COM0, COM1 and COM2 PORTE Available for I/O RE6, RE5, RE4 RE6, RE5 RE6 None LCDCON <1:0> 00 01 10 11 All (COM0 through COM3) DS39770B-page 120 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-12: Pin Name RE0/LCDBIAS1 PORTE FUNCTIONS Function RE0 LCDBIAS1 TRIS Setting 0 1 -- 0 1 LCDBIAS2 -- 0 1 COM0 x 0 1 COM1 x 0 1 COM2 x 0 1 COM3 x 0 1 CCP2(1) SEG31 0 1 x I/O O I I O I I O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O I O I/O Type DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST DIG ST ANA LATE<0> data output. PORTE<0> data input. LCD module bias voltage input. LATE<1> data output. PORTE<1> data input. LCD module bias voltage input. LATE<3> data output. PORTE<3> data input. LCD Common 0 output; disables all other outputs. LATE<4> data output. PORTE<4> data input. LCD Common 1 output; disables all other outputs. LATE<5> data output. PORTE<5> data input. LCD Common 2 output; disables all other outputs. LATE<6> data output. PORTE<6> data input. LCD Common 3 output; disables all other outputs. LATE<7> data output. PORTE<7> data input. CCP2 Compare/PWM output; takes priority over port data. CCP2 Capture input. Segment 31 analog output for LCD; disables digital output. Description RE1/LCDBIAS2 RE1 RE3/COM0 RE3 RE4/COM1 RE4 RE5/COM2 RE5 RE6/COM3 RE6 RE7/CCP2/ SEG31 RE7 Legend: Note 1: O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Trigger Buffer Input, x = Don't care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Alternate assignment for CCP2 when CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared. TABLE 9-13: Name PORTE LATE TRISE PORTG TRISG LCDCON LCDSE3 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTE Bit 7 RE7 LATE7 Bit 6 RE6 LATE6 TRISE6 REPU CCP2OD SLPEN SE30 Bit 5 RE5 LATE5 TRISE5 RJPU (1) Bit 4 RE4 LATE4 TRISE4 RG4 TRISG4 -- SE28 Bit 3 RE3 LATE3 TRISE3 RG3 TRISG3 CS1 SE27 Bit 2 -- -- -- RG2 TRISG2 CS0 SE26 Bit 1 RE1 LATE1 TRISE1 RG1 TRISG1 LMUX1 SE25 Bit 0 RE0 LATE0 TRISE0 RG0 TRISG0 LMUX0 SE24 Reset Values on page 55 54 54 54 54 53 53 TRISE7 RDPU SPIOD LCDEN SE31 CCP1OD WERR SE29 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by PORTE. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 121 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 9.7 PORTF, LATF and TRISF Registers PORTF is a 7-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISF and LATF. All pins on PORTF are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. PORTF is multiplexed with analog peripheral functions, as well as LCD segments. Pins RF1 through RF6 may be used as comparator inputs or outputs by setting the appropriate bits in the CMCON register. To use RF6:RF3 as digital inputs, it is also necessary to turn off the comparators. Note 1: On device Resets, pins RF6:RF1 are configured as analog inputs and are read as `0'. 2: To configure PORTF as digital I/O, turn off comparators and set ADCON1 value. PORTF is also multiplexed with LCD segment drives controlled by bits in the LCDSE2 and LCDSE3 registers. I/O port functions are only available when the segments are disabled. EXAMPLE 9-6: CLRF ; ; ; LATF ; ; ; 07h ; CMCON ; 0Fh ; ADCON1 ; 0CEh ; ; ; TRISF ; ; ; PORTF INITIALIZING PORTF Initialize PORTF by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Turn off comparators Set PORTF as digital I/O Value used to initialize data direction Set RF3:RF1 as inputs RF5:RF4 as outputs RF7:RF6 as inputs CLRF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF DS39770B-page 122 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-14: Pin Name RF1/AN6/C2OUT/ SEG19 PORTF FUNCTIONS Function RF1 AN6 C2OUT SEG19 TRIS Setting 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 AN7 C1OUT SEG20 1 0 x 0 1 AN8 SEG21 1 x 0 1 AN9 SEG22 1 x 0 1 AN10 CVREF SEG23 1 x x 0 1 AN11 SEG24 1 x 0 1 AN5 SS SEG25 1 1 x I/O O I I O O O I I O O O I I O O I I O O I I O O O I I O O I I I O I/O Type DIG ST ANA DIG ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ANA DIG ST ANA ANA DIG ST ANA ANA DIG ST ANA ANA ANA DIG ST ANA ANA DIG ST ANA TTL ANA Description LATF<1> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTF<1> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 6. Default configuration on POR. Comparator 2 output; takes priority over port data. LCD segment 19 output; disables all other pin functions. LATF<2> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTF<2> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 7. Default configuration on POR. Comparator 1 output; takes priority over port data. LCD segment 20 output; disables all other pin functions. LATF<3> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTF<3> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 8 and Comparator C2+ input. Default input configuration on POR; not affected by analog output. LCD segment 21 output; disables all other pin functions. LATF<4> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTF<4> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 9 and Comparator C2- input. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. LCD segment 22 output; disables all other pin functions. LATF<5> data output; not affected by analog input. Disabled when CVREF output enabled. PORTF<5> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. Disabled when CVREF output enabled. A/D input channel 10 and Comparator C1+ input. Default input configuration on POR. Comparator voltage reference output. Enabling this feature disables digital I/O. LCD segment 23 output; disables all other pin functions. LATF<6> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTF<6> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 11 and Comparator C1- input. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. LCD segment 24 output; disables all other pin functions. LATF<7> data output; not affected by analog input. PORTF<7> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. A/D input channel 5. Default configuration on POR. Slave select input for MSSP module. LCD segment 25 output; disables all other pin functions. RF2/AN7/C1OUT/ SEG20 RF2 RF3/AN8/SEG21 RF3 RF4/AN9/SEG22 RF4 RF5/AN10/CVREF/ SEG23 RF5 RF6/AN11/SEG24 RF6 RF7/AN5/SS/ SEG25 RF7 Legend: O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Trigger Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don't care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 123 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-15: Name PORTF LATF TRISF ADCON1 CMCON CVRCON LCDSE2 LCDSE3 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTF Bit 7 RF7 LATF7 TRISF7 -- C2OUT CVREN SE23 SE31 Bit 6 RF6 LATF6 TRISF6 -- C1OUT CVROE SE22 SE30 Bit 5 RF5 LATF5 TRISF5 VCFG1 C2INV CVRR SE21 SE29 Bit 4 RF4 LATF4 TRISF4 VCFG0 C1INV CVRSS SE20 SE28 Bit 3 RF3 LATF3 TRISF3 PCFG3 CIS CVR3 SE19 SE27 Bit 2 RF2 LATF2 TRISF2 PCFG2 CM2 CVR2 SE18 SE26 Bit 1 RF1 LATF1 TRISF1 PCFG1 CM1 CVR1 SE17 SE25 Bit 0 -- -- -- PCFG0 CM0 CVR0 SE16 SE24 Reset Values on page 54 54 54 53 53 53 53 53 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTF. DS39770B-page 124 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 9.8 PORTG, TRISG and LATG Registers Although the port itself is only five bits wide, the PORTG<7:5> bits are still implemented to control the weak pull-ups on the I/O ports associated with PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ. Setting these bits enables the respective port pull-ups. Most of the corresponding TRISG and LATG bits are implemented as open-drain control bits for CCP1, CCP2 and SPI (TRISG<7:5>), and the USARTs (LATG<7:6>). Setting these bits configures the output pin for the corresponding peripheral for open-drain operation. LATG<5> is not implemented. PORTG is a 5-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISG and LATG. All pins on PORTG are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. PORTG is multiplexed with both AUSART and LCD functions (Table 9-16). When operating as I/O, all PORTG pins have Schmitt Trigger input buffers. The RG1 pin is also configurable for open-drain output when the AUSART is active. Open-drain configuration is selected by setting the U2OD control bit (LATG<7>). RG4 is multiplexed with LCD segment drives controlled by bits in the LCDSE2 register. The I/O port function is only available when the segments are disabled. RG3 and RG2 are multiplexed with VLCAP pins for the LCD charge pump, and RG0 is multiplexed with LCDBIAS0 bias voltage input. When these pins are used for LCD bias generation, the I/O and other functions are unavailable. When enabling peripheral functions, care should be taken in defining TRIS bits for each PORTG pin. Some peripherals override the TRIS bit to make a pin an output, while other peripherals override the TRIS bit to make a pin an input. The user should refer to the corresponding peripheral section for the correct TRIS bit settings. The pin override value is not loaded into the TRIS register. This allows read-modify-write of the TRIS register without concern due to peripheral overrides. EXAMPLE 9-7: CLRF PORTG ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; INITIALIZING PORTG Initialize PORTG by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RG1:RG0 as outputs RG2 as input RG4:RG3 as inputs CLRF LATG MOVLW 04h MOVWF TRISG (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 125 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-16: Pin Name RG0/LCDBIAS0 PORTG FUNCTIONS Function RG0 LCDBIAS0 TRIS Setting 0 1 x 0 1 TX2 CK2 1 1 1 I/O O I I O I O O I O I I O I I O I I O I O I/O Type DIG ST ANA DIG ST DIG DIG ST DIG ST ST DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA LATG<0> data output. PORTG<0> data input. LCD module bias voltage input. LATG<1> data output. PORTG<1> data input. Synchronous serial data output (AUSART module); takes priority over port data. Synchronous serial data input (AUSART module); user must configure as an input. Synchronous serial clock input (AUSART module). LATG<2> data output. PORTG<2> data input. Asynchronous serial receive data input (AUSART module). Synchronous serial data output (AUSART module); takes priority over port data. Synchronous serial data input (AUSART module); user must configure as an input. LCD charge pump capacitor input. LATG<3> data output. PORTG<3> data input. LCD charge pump capacitor input. LATG<4> data output. PORTG<4> data input. LCD segment 26 output; disables all other pin functions. Description RG1/TX2/CK2 RG1 RG2/RX2/DT2/V LCAP1 RG2 RX2 DT2 0 1 1 1 1 VLCAP1 RG3/VLCAP2 RG3 VLCAP2 RG4/SEG26 RG4 SEG26 Legend: x 0 1 x 0 1 x O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Trigger Buffer Input, x = Don't care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). TABLE 9-17: Name PORTG LATG TRISG LCDSE3 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTG Bit 7 RDPU U2OD SPIOD SE31 Bit 6 REPU U1OD SE30 Bit 5 RJPU(1) -- SE29 Bit 4 RG4 LATG4 SE28 Bit 3 RG3 LATG3 TRISG3 SE27 Bit 2 RG2 LATG2 TRISG2 SE26 Bit 1 RG1 LATG1 TRISG1 SE25 Bit 0 RG0 LATG0 TRISG0 SE24 Reset Values on page 54 54 54 53 CCP2OD CCP1OD TRISG4 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTG. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as `0'. DS39770B-page 126 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 9.9 Note: PORTH, LATH and TRISH Registers PORTH is available only on 80-pin devices. EXAMPLE 9-8: CLRF PORTH INITIALIZING PORTH ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTH by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Configure PORTH as digital I/O Value used to initialize data direction Set RH3:RH0 as inputs RH5:RH4 as outputs RH7:RH6 as inputs CLRF LATH PORTH is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional I/O port. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISH and LATH. All pins are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. All pins on PORTH are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. All PORTH pins are multiplexed with LCD segment drives controlled by the LCDSE5 register. I/O port functions are only available when the segments are disabled. MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW 0Fh ADCON1 0CFh MOVWF TRISH (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 127 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-18: Pin Name RH0/SEG47 PORTH FUNCTIONS Function RH0 SEG47 TRIS Setting 0 1 x 0 1 SEG46 x 0 1 SEG45 x 0 1 SEG44 x 0 1 SEG40 x 0 1 SEG41 x 0 1 SEG42 x 0 1 SEG43 x I/O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O I/O Type DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA LATH<0> data output. PORTH<0> data input. LCD segment 47 output; disables all other pin functions. LATH<1> data output. PORTH<1> data input. LCD segment 46 output; disables all other pin functions. LATH<2> data output. PORTH<2> data input. LCD segment 45 output; disables all other pin functions. LATH<3> data output. PORTH<3> data input. LCD segment 44 output; disables all other pin functions. LATH<4> data output. PORTH<4> data input. LCD segment 40 output; disables all other pin functions. LATH<5> data output. PORTH<5> data input. LCD segment 41 output; disables all other pin functions. LATH<6> data output. PORTH<6> data input. LCD segment 42 output; disables all other pin functions. LATH<7> data output. PORTH<7> data input. LCD segment 43 output; disables all other pin functions. Description RH1/SEG46 RH1 RH2/SEG45 RH2 RH3/SEG44 RH3 RH4/SEG40 RH4 RH5/SEG41 RH5 RH6/SEG42 RH6 RH7/SEG43 RH7 Legend: O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Trigger Buffer Input, x = Don't care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). TABLE 9-19: Name PORTH LATH TRISH LCDSE5 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTH Bit 7 RH7 LATH7 TRISH7 SE47 Bit 6 RH6 LATH6 TRISH6 SE46 Bit 5 RH5 LATH5 TRISH5 SE45 Bit 4 RH4 LATH4 TRISH4 SE44 Bit 3 RH3 LATH3 TRISH3 SE43 Bit 2 RH2 LATH2 TRISH2 SE42 Bit 1 RH1 LATH1 TRISH1 SE41 Bit 0 RH0 LATH0 TRISH0 SE40 Reset Values on page 54 54 54 53 DS39770B-page 128 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 9.10 Note: PORTJ, TRISJ and LATJ Registers PORTJ is available only on 80-pin devices. PORTJ is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISJ and LATJ. All pins on PORTJ are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. All pins on PORTJ are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. Note: These pins are configured as digital inputs on any device Reset. Each of the PORTJ pins has a weak internal pull-up. The pull-ups are provided to keep the inputs at a known state for the external memory interface while powering up. A single control bit can turn off all the pull-ups. This is performed by clearing bit RJPU (PORTG<5>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on any device Reset. EXAMPLE 9-9: CLRF CLRF MOVLW PORTJ LATJ 0CFh ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; INITIALIZING PORTJ Initialize PORTJ by clearing output latches Alternate method to clear output latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RJ3:RJ0 as inputs RJ5:RJ4 as output RJ7:RJ6 as inputs All PORTJ pins except RJ0 are multiplexed with LCD segment drives controlled by the LCDSE4 register. I/O port functions are only available on these pins when the segments are disabled. MOVWF TRISJ (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 129 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 9-20: Pin Name RJ0 RJ1/SEG33 PORTJ FUNCTIONS Function RJ0 RJ1 SEG33 TRIS Setting 0 1 0 1 x 0 1 SEG34 x 0 1 SEG35 x 0 1 SEG39 x 0 1 SEG38 x 0 1 SEG37 x 0 1 SEG36 x I/O O I O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O O I O I/O Type DIG ST DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA DIG ST ANA LATJ<0> data output. PORTJ<0> data input. LATJ<1> data output. PORTJ<1> data input. LCD segment 33 output; disables all other pin functions. LATJ<2> data output. PORTJ<2> data input. LCD segment 34 output; disables all other pin functions. LATJ<3> data output. PORTJ<3> data input. LCD segment 35 output; disables all other pin functions. LATJ<4> data output. PORTJ<4> data input. LCD segment 39 output; disables all other pin functions. LATJ<5> data output. PORTJ<5> data input. LCD segment 38 output; disables all other pin functions. LATJ<6> data output. PORTJ<6> data input. LCD segment 37 output; disables all other pin functions. LATJ<7> data output. PORTJ<7> data input. LCD segment 36 output; disables all other pin functions. Description RJ2/SEG34 RJ2 RJ3/SEG35 RJ3 RJ4/SEG39 RJ4 RJ5/SEG38 RJ5 RJ6/SEG37 RJ6 RJ7/SEG36 RJ7 Legend: O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Trigger Buffer Input, x = Don't care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). TABLE 9-21: Name PORTJ LATJ TRISJ PORTG LCDSE4 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTJ Bit 7 RJ7 LATJ7 TRISJ7 RDPU SE39 Bit 6 RJ6 LATJ6 TRISJ6 REPU SE38 Bit 5 RJ5 LATJ5 TRISJ5 RJPU(1) SE37 Bit 4 RJ4 LATJ4 TRISJ4 RG4 SE36 Bit 3 RJ3 LATJ3 TRISJ3 RG3 SE35 Bit 2 RJ2 LATJ2 TRISJ2 RG2 SE34 Bit 1 RJ1 LATJ1 TRISJ1 RG1 SE33 Bit 0 RJ0 LATJ0 TRISJ0 RG0 SE32 Reset Values on page 54 54 54 54 53 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by PORTJ. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as `0'. DS39770B-page 130 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 10.0 TIMER0 MODULE The Timer0 module incorporates the following features: * Software selectable operation as a timer or counter in both 8-bit or 16-bit modes * Readable and writable registers * Dedicated 8-bit, software programmable prescaler * Selectable clock source (internal or external) * Edge select for external clock * Interrupt-on-overflow The T0CON register (Register 10-1) controls all aspects of the module's operation, including the prescale selection; it is both readable and writable. A simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 8-bit mode is shown in Figure 10-1. Figure 10-2 shows a simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 16-bit mode. REGISTER 10-1: R/W-1 TMR0ON bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 T0CON: TIMER0 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-1 T0CS R/W-1 T0SE R/W-1 PSA R/W-1 T0PS2 R/W-1 T0PS1 R/W-1 T0PS0 bit 0 R/W-1 T08BIT W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown TMR0ON: Timer0 On/Off Control bit 1 = Enables Timer0 0 = Stops Timer0 T08BIT: Timer0 8-Bit/16-Bit Control bit 1 = Timer0 is configured as an 8-bit timer/counter 0 = Timer0 is configured as a 16-bit timer/counter T0CS: Timer0 Clock Source Select bit 1 = Transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Internal instruction cycle clock (CLKO) T0SE: Timer0 Source Edge Select bit 1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on T0CKI pin PSA: Timer0 Prescaler Assignment bit 1 = TImer0 prescaler is not assigned. Timer0 clock input bypasses prescaler. 0 = Timer0 prescaler is assigned. Timer0 clock input comes from prescaler output. T0PS2:T0PS0: Timer0 Prescaler Select bits 111 = 1:256 Prescale value 110 = 1:128 Prescale value 101 = 1:64 Prescale value 100 = 1:32 Prescale value 011 = 1:16 Prescale value 010 = 1:8 Prescale value 001 = 1:4 Prescale value 000 = 1:2 Prescale value bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2-0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 131 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 10.1 Timer0 Operation Timer0 can operate as either a timer or a counter. The mode is selected with the T0CS bit (T0CON<5>). In Timer mode (T0CS = 0), the module increments on every clock by default unless a different prescaler value is selected (see Section 10.3 "Prescaler"). If the TMR0 register is written to, the increment is inhibited for the following two instruction cycles. The user can work around this by writing an adjusted value to the TMR0 register. The Counter mode is selected by setting the T0CS bit (= 1). In this mode, Timer0 increments either on every rising or falling edge of pin RA4/T0CKI. The incrementing edge is determined by the Timer0 Source Edge Select bit, T0SE (T0CON<4>); clearing this bit selects the rising edge. Restrictions on the external clock input are discussed below. An external clock source can be used to drive Timer0, however, it must meet certain requirements to ensure that the external clock can be synchronized with the internal phase clock (TOSC). There is a delay between synchronization and the onset of incrementing the timer/counter. 10.2 Timer0 Reads and Writes in 16-Bit Mode TMR0H is not the actual high byte of Timer0 in 16-bit mode. It is actually a buffered version of the real high byte of Timer0, which is not directly readable nor writable (refer to Figure 10-2). TMR0H is updated with the contents of the high byte of Timer0 during a read of TMR0L. This provides the ability to read all 16 bits of Timer0 without having to verify that the read of the high and low byte were valid, due to a rollover between successive reads of the high and low byte. Similarly, a write to the high byte of Timer0 must also take place through the TMR0H Buffer register. The high byte is updated with the contents of TMR0H when a write occurs to TMR0L. This allows all 16 bits of Timer0 to be updated at once. FIGURE 10-1: TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (8-BIT MODE) FOSC/4 0 1 1 Sync with Internal Clocks (2 TCY Delay) 8 8 Internal Data Bus TMR0L Set TMR0IF on Overflow T0CKI pin T0SE T0CS T0PS2:T0PS0 PSA Programmable Prescaler 3 0 Note: Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale. FIGURE 10-2: FOSC/4 TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT MODE) 0 1 1 Sync with Internal Clocks (2 TCY Delay) Read TMR0L Write TMR0L 8 8 TMR0H 8 8 Internal Data Bus TMR0 High Byte 8 Set TMR0IF on Overflow TMR0L T0CKI pin T0SE T0CS T0PS2:T0PS0 PSA Programmable Prescaler 3 0 Note: Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale. DS39770B-page 132 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 10.3 Prescaler 10.3.1 An 8-bit counter is available as a prescaler for the Timer0 module. The prescaler is not directly readable or writable. Its value is set by the PSA and T0PS2:T0PS0 bits (T0CON<3:0>) which determine the prescaler assignment and prescale ratio. Clearing the PSA bit assigns the prescaler to the Timer0 module. When it is assigned, prescale values from 1:2 through 1:256, in power-of-2 increments, are selectable. When assigned to the Timer0 module, all instructions writing to the TMR0 register (e.g., CLRF TMR0, MOVWF TMR0, BSF TMR0, etc.) clear the prescaler count. Note: Writing to TMR0 when the prescaler is assigned to Timer0 will clear the prescaler count but will not change the prescaler assignment. SWITCHING PRESCALER ASSIGNMENT The prescaler assignment is fully under software control and can be changed "on-the-fly" during program execution. 10.4 Timer0 Interrupt The TMR0 interrupt is generated when the TMR0 register overflows from FFh to 00h in 8-bit mode, or from FFFFh to 0000h in 16-bit mode. This overflow sets the TMR0IF flag bit. The interrupt can be masked by clearing the TMR0IE bit (INTCON<5>). Before re-enabling the interrupt, the TMR0IF bit must be cleared in software by the Interrupt Service Routine. Since Timer0 is shut down in Sleep mode, the TMR0 interrupt cannot awaken the processor from Sleep. TABLE 10-1: Name TMR0L TMR0H INTCON T0CON TRISA REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page 52 52 INT0IE T0SE TRISA4 RBIE PSA TRISA3 TMR0IF T0PS2 TRISA2 INT0IF T0PS1 TRISA1 RBIF T0PS0 TRISA0 51 52 54 T0CS TRISA5 Timer0 Register Low Byte Timer0 Register High Byte GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE TMR0ON T08BIT TRISA7(1) TRISA6(1) Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by Timer0. Note 1: RA6/RA7 and their associated latch and direction bits are configured as port pins only when the internal oscillator is selected as the default clock source (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are disabled and these bits read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 133 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 134 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 11.0 TIMER1 MODULE The Timer1 timer/counter module incorporates these features: * Software selectable operation as a 16-bit timer or counter * Readable and writable 8-bit registers (TMR1H and TMR1L) * Selectable clock source (internal or external) with device clock or Timer1 oscillator internal options * Interrupt on overflow * Reset on CCP Special Event Trigger * Device clock status flag (T1RUN) A simplified block diagram of the Timer1 module is shown in Figure 11-1. A block diagram of the module's operation in Read/Write mode is shown in Figure 11-2. The module incorporates its own low-power oscillator to provide an additional clocking option. The Timer1 oscillator can also be used as a low-power clock source for the microcontroller in power-managed operation. Timer1 can also be used to provide Real-Time Clock (RTC) functionality to applications with only a minimal addition of external components and code overhead. Timer1 is controlled through the T1CON Control register (Register 11-1). It also contains the Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit (T1OSCEN). Timer1 can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing control bit, TMR1ON (T1CON<0>). REGISTER 11-1: R/W-0 RD16 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 T1CON: TIMER1 CONTROL REGISTER R-0 R/W-0 T1CKPS1 R/W-0 T1CKPS0 R/W-0 T1OSCEN R/W-0 T1SYNC R/W-0 TMR1CS R/W-0 TMR1ON bit 0 T1RUN W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown RD16: 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit 1 = Enables register read/write of TImer1 in one 16-bit operation 0 = Enables register read/write of Timer1 in two 8-bit operations T1RUN: Timer1 System Clock Status bit 1 = Device clock is derived from Timer1 oscillator 0 = Device clock is derived from another source T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0: Timer1 Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value T1OSCEN: Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit 1 = Timer1 oscillator is enabled 0 = Timer1 oscillator is shut off The oscillator inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. T1SYNC: Timer1 External Clock Input Synchronization Select bit When TMR1CS = 1: 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input When TMR1CS = 0: This bit is ignored. Timer1 uses the internal clock when TMR1CS = 0. TMR1CS: Timer1 Clock Source Select bit 1 = External clock from pin RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI (on the rising edge) 0 = Internal clock (FOSC/4) TMR1ON: Timer1 On bit 1 = Enables Timer1 0 = Stops Timer1 bit 6 bit 5-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 135 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 11.1 Timer1 Operation Timer1 can operate in one of these modes: * Timer * Synchronous Counter * Asynchronous Counter The operating mode is determined by the clock select bit, TMR1CS (T1CON<1>). When TMR1CS is cleared (= 0), Timer1 increments on every internal instruction cycle (FOSC/4). When the bit is set, Timer1 increments on every rising edge of the Timer1 external clock input or the Timer1 oscillator, if enabled. When Timer1 is enabled, the RC1/T1OSI and RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI pins become inputs. This means the values of TRISC<1:0> are ignored and the pins are read as `0'. FIGURE 11-1: TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM (8-BIT MODE) Timer1 Oscillator On/Off Timer1 Clock Input 1 Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 0 2 T1OSCEN(1) T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0 T1SYNC TMR1ON Sleep Input TMR1CS Timer1 On/Off Synchronize Detect 1 FOSC/4 Internal Clock 0 T1OSO/T13CKI T1OSI Clear TMR1 (CCP Special Event Trigger) TMR1L TMR1 High Byte Set TMR1IF on Overflow Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. FIGURE 11-2: TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT READ/WRITE MODE) Timer1 Oscillator Timer1 Clock Input 1 1 FOSC/4 Internal Clock Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 0 2 TMR1CS T1OSCEN(1) T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0 T1SYNC TMR1ON Clear TMR1 (CCP Special Event Trigger) Sleep Input Synchronize Detect 0 T1OSO/T13CKI T1OSI Timer1 On/Off TMR1L TMR1 High Byte 8 Set TMR1IF on Overflow Read TMR1L Write TMR1L 8 8 TMR1H 8 8 Internal Data Bus Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. DS39770B-page 136 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 11.2 Timer1 16-Bit Read/Write Mode TABLE 11-1: Timer1 can be configured for 16-bit reads and writes (see Figure 11-2). When the RD16 control bit (T1CON<7>) is set, the address for TMR1H is mapped to a buffer register for the high byte of Timer1. A read from TMR1L will load the contents of the high byte of Timer1 into the Timer1 High Byte Buffer register. This provides the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of Timer1 without having to determine whether a read of the high byte, followed by a read of the low byte, has become invalid due to a rollover between reads. A write to the high byte of Timer1 must also take place through the TMR1H Buffer register. The Timer1 high byte is updated with the contents of TMR1H when a write occurs to TMR1L. This allows a user to write all 16 bits to both the high and low bytes of Timer1 at once. The high byte of Timer1 is not directly readable or writable in this mode. All reads and writes must take place through the Timer1 High Byte Buffer register. Writes to TMR1H do not clear the Timer1 prescaler. The prescaler is only cleared on writes to TMR1L. CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR THE TIMER1 OSCILLATOR(2,3,4) Freq. 32.768 kHz C1 27 pF(1) C2 27 pF(1) Oscillator Type LP Note 1: Microchip suggests these values as a starting point in validating the oscillator circuit. 2: Higher capacitance increases the stability of the oscillator but also increases the start-up time. 3: Since each resonator/crystal has its own characteristics, the user should consult the resonator/crystal manufacturer for appropriate values of external components. 4: Capacitor values are for design guidance only. 11.3.1 11.3 Timer1 Oscillator USING TIMER1 AS A CLOCK SOURCE An on-chip crystal oscillator circuit is incorporated between pins T1OSI (input) and T1OSO (amplifier output). It is enabled by setting the Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit, T1OSCEN (T1CON<3>). The oscillator is a low-power circuit rated for 32 kHz crystals. It will continue to run during all power-managed modes. The circuit for a typical LP oscillator is shown in Figure 11-3. Table 11-1 shows the capacitor selection for the Timer1 oscillator. The user must provide a software time delay to ensure proper start-up of the Timer1 oscillator. The Timer1 oscillator is also available as a clock source in power-managed modes. By setting the System Clock Select bits, SCS1:SCS0 (OSCCON<1:0>), to `01', the device switches to SEC_RUN mode; both the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. If the IDLEN bit (OSCCON<7>) is cleared and a SLEEP instruction is executed, the device enters SEC_IDLE mode. Additional details are available in Section 3.0 "Power-Managed Modes". Whenever the Timer1 oscillator is providing the clock source, the Timer1 system clock status flag, T1RUN (T1CON<6>), is set. This can be used to determine the controller's current clocking mode. It can also indicate the clock source being currently used by the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor. If the Clock Monitor is enabled and the Timer1 oscillator fails while providing the clock, polling the T1RUN bit will indicate whether the clock is being provided by the Timer1 oscillator or another source. FIGURE 11-3: EXTERNAL COMPONENTS FOR THE TIMER1 LP OSCILLATOR PIC18F85J90 T1OSI XTAL 32.768 kHz T1OSO C1 27 pF C2 27 pF Note: See the Notes with Table 11-1 for additional information about capacitor selection. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 137 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 11.3.2 TIMER1 OSCILLATOR LAYOUT CONSIDERATIONS 11.5 Resetting Timer1 Using the CCP Special Event Trigger The Timer1 oscillator circuit draws very little power during operation. Due to the low-power nature of the oscillator, it may also be sensitive to rapidly changing signals in close proximity. The oscillator circuit, shown in Figure 11-3, should be located as close as possible to the microcontroller. There should be no circuits passing within the oscillator circuit boundaries other than VSS or VDD. If a high-speed circuit must be located near the oscillator (such as the CCP1 pin in Output Compare or PWM mode, or the primary oscillator using the OSC2 pin), a grounded guard ring around the oscillator circuit, as shown in Figure 11-4, may be helpful when used on a single-sided PCB or in addition to a ground plane. If CCP1 or CCP2 is configured to use Timer1 and to generate a Special Event Trigger in Compare mode (CCPxM3:CCPxM0 = 1011), this signal will reset Timer3. The trigger from CCP2 will also start an A/D conversion if the A/D module is enabled (see Section 14.3.4 "Special Event Trigger" for more information). The module must be configured as either a timer or a synchronous counter to take advantage of this feature. When used this way, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair effectively becomes a period register for Timer1. If Timer1 is running in Asynchronous Counter mode, this Reset operation may not work. In the event that a write to Timer1 coincides with a Special Event Trigger, the write operation will take precedence. Note: The Special Event Triggers from the CCPx module will not set the TMR1IF interrupt flag bit (PIR1<0>). FIGURE 11-4: OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT WITH GROUNDED GUARD RING VDD VSS OSC1 OSC2 11.6 Using Timer1 as a Real-Time Clock RC0 RC1 RC2 Note: Not drawn to scale. Adding an external LP oscillator to Timer1 (such as the one described in Section 11.3 "Timer1 Oscillator" above) gives users the option to include RTC functionality to their applications. This is accomplished with an inexpensive watch crystal to provide an accurate time base and several lines of application code to calculate the time. When operating in Sleep mode and using a battery or supercapacitor as a power source, it can completely eliminate the need for a separate RTC device and battery backup. The application code routine, RTCisr, shown in Example 11-1, demonstrates a simple method to increment a counter at one-second intervals using an Interrupt Service Routine. Incrementing the TMR1 register pair to overflow triggers the interrupt and calls the routine which increments the seconds counter by one. Additional counters for minutes and hours are incremented as the previous counter overflows. Since the register pair is 16 bits wide, counting up to overflow the register directly from a 32.768 kHz clock would take 2 seconds. To force the overflow at the required one-second intervals, it is necessary to preload it. The simplest method is to set the MSb of TMR1H with a BSF instruction. Note that the TMR1L register is never preloaded or altered; doing so may introduce cumulative error over many cycles. For this method to be accurate, Timer1 must operate in Asynchronous mode and the Timer1 overflow interrupt must be enabled (PIE1<0> = 1) as shown in the routine, RTCinit. The Timer1 oscillator must also be enabled and running at all times. 11.4 Timer1 Interrupt The TMR1 register pair (TMR1H:TMR1L) increments from 0000h to FFFFh and rolls over to 0000h. The Timer1 interrupt, if enabled, is generated on overflow which is latched in interrupt flag bit, TMR1IF (PIR1<0>). This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the Timer1 Interrupt Enable bit, TMR1IE (PIE1<0>). DS39770B-page 138 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY EXAMPLE 11-1: RTCinit MOVLW MOVWF CLRF MOVLW MOVWF CLRF CLRF MOVLW MOVWF BSF RETURN RTCisr BSF BCF INCF MOVLW CPFSGT RETURN CLRF INCF MOVLW CPFSGT RETURN CLRF INCF MOVLW CPFSGT RETURN CLRF RETURN TMR1H, 7 PIR1, TMR1IF secs, F .59 secs secs mins, F .59 mins mins hours, F .23 hours hours ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Preload for 1 sec overflow Clear interrupt flag Increment seconds 60 seconds elapsed? No, done Clear seconds Increment minutes 60 minutes elapsed? No, done clear minutes Increment hours 24 hours elapsed? 80h TMR1H TMR1L b'00001111' T1CON secs mins .12 hours PIE1, TMR1IE ; Preload TMR1 register pair ; for 1 second overflow ; Configure for external clock, ; Asynchronous operation, external oscillator ; Initialize timekeeping registers ; IMPLEMENTING A REAL-TIME CLOCK USING A TIMER1 INTERRUPT SERVICE ; Enable Timer1 interrupt ; No, done ; Reset hours ; Done TABLE 11-2: Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 TMR1L TMR1H T1CON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP Reset Values on page 51 54 54 54 52 52 TMR1CS TMR1ON 52 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL -- -- -- ADIF ADIE ADIP Timer1 Register Low Byte Timer1 Register High Byte RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC Legend: Shaded cells are not used by the Timer1 module. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 139 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 140 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 12.0 TIMER2 MODULE 12.1 Timer2 Operation The Timer2 module incorporates the following features: * 8-bit Timer and Period registers (TMR2 and PR2, respectively) * Readable and writable (both registers) * Software programmable prescaler (1:1, 1:4 and 1:16) * Software programmable postscaler (1:1 through 1:16) * Interrupt on TMR2 to PR2 match * Optional use as the shift clock for the MSSP module The module is controlled through the T2CON register (Register 12-1) which enables or disables the timer and configures the prescaler and postscaler. Timer2 can be shut off by clearing control bit, TMR2ON (T2CON<2>), to minimize power consumption. A simplified block diagram of the module is shown in Figure 12-1. In normal operation, TMR2 is incremented from 00h on each clock (FOSC/4). A 4-bit counter/prescaler on the clock input gives direct input, divide-by-4 and divide-by-16 prescale options. These are selected by the prescaler control bits, T2CKPS1:T2CKPS0 (T2CON<1:0>). The value of TMR2 is compared to that of the Period register, PR2, on each clock cycle. When the two values match, the comparator generates a match signal as the timer output. This signal also resets the value of TMR2 to 00h on the next cycle and drives the output counter/postscaler (see Section 12.2 "Timer2 Interrupt"). The TMR2 and PR2 registers are both directly readable and writable. The TMR2 register is cleared on any device Reset, while the PR2 register initializes at FFh. Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared on the following events: * a write to the TMR2 register * a write to the T2CON register * any device Reset (Power-on Reset, MCLR Reset, Watchdog Timer Reset or Brown-out Reset) TMR2 is not cleared when T2CON is written. REGISTER 12-1: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 bit 6-3 T2CON: TIMER2 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 T2OUTPS2 R/W-0 T2OUTPS1 R/W-0 T2OUTPS0 R/W-0 TMR2ON R/W-0 T2CKPS1 R/W-0 T2CKPS0 bit 0 R/W-0 T2OUTPS3 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as `0' T2OUTPS3:T2OUTPS0: Timer2 Output Postscale Select bits 0000 = 1:1 Postscale 0001 = 1:2 Postscale * * * 1111 = 1:16 Postscale TMR2ON: Timer2 On bit 1 = Timer2 is on 0 = Timer2 is off T2CKPS1:T2CKPS0: Timer2 Clock Prescale Select bits 00 = Prescaler is 1 01 = Prescaler is 4 1x = Prescaler is 16 bit 2 bit 1-0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 141 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 12.2 Timer2 Interrupt 12.3 Timer2 Output Timer2 can also generate an optional device interrupt. The Timer2 output signal (TMR2 to PR2 match) provides the input for the 4-bit output counter/postscaler. This counter generates the TMR2 match interrupt flag which is latched in TMR2IF (PIR1<1>). The interrupt is enabled by setting the TMR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit, TMR2IE (PIE1<1>). A range of 16 postscale options (from 1:1 through 1:16 inclusive) can be selected with the postscaler control bits, T2OUTPS3:T2OUTPS0 (T2CON<6:3>). The unscaled output of TMR2 is available primarily to the CCP modules, where it is used as a time base for operations in PWM mode. Timer2 can be optionally used as the shift clock source for the MSSP module operating in SPI mode. Additional information is provided in Section 16.0 "Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) Module". FIGURE 12-1: TIMER2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 4 1:1 to 1:16 Postscaler T2OUTPS3:T2OUTPS0 2 T2CKPS1:T2CKPS0 Reset FOSC/4 1:1, 1:4, 1:16 Prescaler TMR2 8 Set TMR2IF TMR2 Output (to PWM or MSSP) TMR2/PR2 Match Comparator PR2 8 8 Internal Data Bus TABLE 12-1: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER2 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP Reset Values on page 51 54 54 54 52 T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 52 52 Bit 7 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 TMR2 T2CON PR2 -- -- -- -- ADIF ADIE ADIP Timer2 Register T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON Timer2 Period Register Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer2 module. DS39770B-page 142 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 13.0 TIMER3 MODULE The Timer3 timer/counter module incorporates these features: * Software selectable operation as a 16-bit timer or counter * Readable and writable 8-bit registers (TMR3H and TMR3L) * Selectable clock source (internal or external) with device clock or Timer1 oscillator internal options * Interrupt on overflow * Module Reset on CCP Special Event Trigger A simplified block diagram of the Timer3 module is shown in Figure 13-1. A block diagram of the module's operation in Read/Write mode is shown in Figure 13-2. The Timer3 module is controlled through the T3CON register (Register 13-1). It also selects the clock source options for the CCP modules. See Section 14.2.2 "Timer1/Timer3 Mode Selection" for more information. REGISTER 13-1: R/W-0 RD16 bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 T3CON: TIMER3 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 T3CKPS1 R/W-0 T3CKPS0 R/W-0 T3CCP1 R/W-0 T3SYNC R/W-0 TMR3CS R/W-0 TMR3ON bit 0 R/W-0 T3CCP2 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown RD16: 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit 1 = Enables register read/write of Timer3 in one 16-bit operation 0 = Enables register read/write of Timer3 in two 8-bit operations T3CCP2:T3CCP1: Timer3 and Timer1 to CCPx Enable bits 1x = Timer3 is the capture/compare clock source for the CCP modules 01 = Timer3 is the capture/compare clock source for CCP2; Timer1 is the capture/compare clock source for CCP1 00 = Timer1 is the capture/compare clock source for the CCP modules T3CKPS1:T3CKPS0: Timer3 Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value T3SYNC: Timer3 External Clock Input Synchronization Control bit (Not usable if the device clock comes from Timer1/Timer3.) When TMR3CS = 1: 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input When TMR3CS = 0: This bit is ignored. Timer3 uses the internal clock when TMR3CS = 0. TMR3CS: Timer3 Clock Source Select bit 1 = External clock input from Timer1 oscillator or T13CKI (on the rising edge after the first falling edge) 0 = Internal clock (FOSC/4) TMR3ON: Timer3 On bit 1 = Enables Timer3 0 = Stops Timer3 bit 6,3 bit 5-4 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 143 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 13.1 Timer3 Operation Timer3 can operate in one of three modes: * Timer * Synchronous Counter * Asynchronous Counter The operating mode is determined by the clock select bit, TMR3CS (T3CON<1>). When TMR3CS is cleared (= 0), Timer3 increments on every internal instruction cycle (FOSC/4). When the bit is set, Timer3 increments on every rising edge of the Timer1 external clock input or the Timer1 oscillator, if enabled. As with Timer1, the RC1/T1OSI and RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI pins become inputs when the Timer1 oscillator is enabled. This means the values of TRISC<1:0> are ignored and the pins are read as `0'. FIGURE 13-1: TIMER3 BLOCK DIAGRAM (8-BIT MODE) Timer1 Oscillator Timer1 Clock Input 1 1 FOSC/4 Internal Clock T1OSCEN(1) T3CKPS1:T3CKPS0 T3SYNC TMR3ON TMR3CS Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 0 2 Sleep Input Timer3 On/Off Synchronize Detect 0 T1OSO/T13CKI T1OSI CCPx Special Event Trigger CCPx Select from T3CON<6,3> Clear TMR3 TMR3L TMR3 High Byte Set TMR3IF on Overflow Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. FIGURE 13-2: TIMER3 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT READ/WRITE MODE) Timer1 Oscillator Timer1 Clock Input 1 1 FOSC/4 Internal Clock TMR3CS T1OSCEN(1) T3CKPS1:T3CKPS0 T3SYNC TMR3ON CCPx Special Event Trigger CCPx Select from T3CON<6,3> Clear TMR3 TMR3L Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 0 2 Sleep Input Timer3 On/Off Synchronize Detect 0 T13CKI/T1OSO T1OSI TMR3 High Byte 8 Set TMR3IF on Overflow Read TMR1L Write TMR1L 8 8 TMR3H 8 8 Internal Data Bus Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. DS39770B-page 144 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 13.2 Timer3 16-Bit Read/Write Mode 13.4 Timer3 Interrupt Timer3 can be configured for 16-bit reads and writes (see Figure 13-2). When the RD16 control bit (T3CON<7>) is set, the address for TMR3H is mapped to a buffer register for the high byte of Timer3. A read from TMR3L will load the contents of the high byte of Timer3 into the Timer3 High Byte Buffer register. This provides the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of Timer1 without having to determine whether a read of the high byte, followed by a read of the low byte, has become invalid due to a rollover between reads. A write to the high byte of Timer3 must also take place through the TMR3H Buffer register. The Timer3 high byte is updated with the contents of TMR3H when a write occurs to TMR3L. This allows a user to write all 16 bits to both the high and low bytes of Timer3 at once. The high byte of Timer3 is not directly readable or writable in this mode. All reads and writes must take place through the Timer3 High Byte Buffer register. Writes to TMR3H do not clear the Timer3 prescaler. The prescaler is only cleared on writes to TMR3L. The TMR3 register pair (TMR3H:TMR3L) increments from 0000h to FFFFh and overflows to 0000h. The Timer3 interrupt, if enabled, is generated on overflow and is latched in interrupt flag bit, TMR3IF (PIR2<1>). This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the Timer3 Interrupt Enable bit, TMR3IE (PIE2<1>). 13.5 Resetting Timer3 Using the CCP Special Event Trigger If CCP1 or CCP2 is configured to use Timer3 and to generate a Special Event Trigger in Compare mode (CCPxM3:CCPxM0 = 1011), this signal will reset Timer3. The trigger from CCP2 will also start an A/D conversion if the A/D module is enabled (see Section 14.3.4 "Special Event Trigger" for more information). The module must be configured as either a timer or synchronous counter to take advantage of this feature. When used this way, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair effectively becomes a period register for Timer3. If Timer3 is running in Asynchronous Counter mode, the Reset operation may not work. In the event that a write to Timer3 coincides with a Special Event Trigger from a CCP module, the write will take precedence. Note: The Special Event Triggers from the CCPx module will not set the TMR3IF interrupt flag bit (PIR2<1>). 13.3 Using the Timer1 Oscillator as the Timer3 Clock Source The Timer1 internal oscillator may be used as the clock source for Timer3. The Timer1 oscillator is enabled by setting the T1OSCEN (T1CON<3>) bit. To use it as the Timer3 clock source, the TMR3CS bit must also be set. As previously noted, this also configures Timer3 to increment on every rising edge of the oscillator source. The Timer1 oscillator is described in Section 11.0 "Timer1 Module". TABLE 13-1: Name INTCON PIR2 PIE2 IPR2 TMR3L TMR3H T1CON T3CON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER3 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE -- -- -- Bit 4 INT0IE -- -- -- Bit 3 RBIE BCLIF BCLIE BCLIP Bit 2 TMR0IF LVDIF LVDIE LVDIP Bit 1 INT0IF TMR3IF TMR3IE TMR3IP Bit 0 RBIF -- -- -- Reset Values on page 51 54 54 54 53 53 TMR1CS TMR3CS TMR1ON TMR3ON 52 53 T3CCP1 T3SYNC GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL OSCFIF OSCFIE OSCFIP CMIF CMIE CMIP Timer3 Register Low Byte Timer3 Register High Byte RD16 RD16 T1RUN T3CCP2 T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer3 module. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 145 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 146 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 14.0 CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM (CCP) MODULES Each CCP module contains a 16-bit register which can operate as a 16-bit Capture register, a 16-bit Compare register or a PWM Master/Slave Duty Cycle register. For the sake of clarity, all CCP module operation in the following sections is described with respect to CCP2, but is equally applicable to CCP1. PIC18F85J90 family devices have two CCP (Capture/Compare/PWM) modules, designated CCP1 and CCP2. Both modules implement standard Capture, Compare and Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) modes. REGISTER 14-1: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7-6 bit 5-4 CCPxCON: CCPx CONTROL REGISTER (CCP1, CCP2 MODULES) U-0 -- R/W-0 DCxB1 R/W-0 DCxB0 R/W-0 CCPxM3 R/W-0 CCPxM2 R/W-0 CCPxM1 R/W-0 CCPxM0 bit 0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as `0' DCxB1:DCxB0: PWM Duty Cycle bit 1 and bit 0 for CCPx Module Capture mode: Unused. Compare mode: Unused. PWM mode: These bits are the two Least Significant bits (bit 1 and bit 0) of the 10-bit PWM duty cycle. The eight Most Significant bits (DCx9:DCx2) of the duty cycle are found in CCPRxL. CCPxM3:CCPxM0: CCPx Module Mode Select bits 0000 = Capture/Compare/PWM disabled (resets CCPx module) 0001 = Reserved 0010 = Compare mode, toggle output on match (CCPxIF bit is set) 0011 = Reserved 0100 = Capture mode, every falling edge 0101 = Capture mode, every rising edge 0110 = Capture mode, every 4th rising edge 0111 = Capture mode, every 16th rising edge 1000 = Compare mode: initialize CCPx pin low; on compare match, force CCPx pin high (CCPxIF bit is set) 1001 = Compare mode: initialize CCPx pin high; on compare match, force CCPx pin low (CCPxIF bit is set) 1010 = Compare mode: generate software interrupt on compare match (CCPxIF bit is set, CCPx pin reflects I/O state) 1011 = Compare mode: Special Event Trigger; reset timer; start A/D conversion on CCPx match (CCPxIF bit is set)(1) 11xx = PWM mode CCPxM3:CCPxM0 = 1011 will only reset timer and not start A/D conversion on CCP1 match. bit 3-0 Note 1: (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 147 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 14.1 CCP Module Configuration Each Capture/Compare/PWM module is associated with a control register (generically, CCPxCON) and a data register (CCPRx). The data register in turn is comprised of two 8-bit registers: CCPRxL (low byte) and CCPRxH (high byte). All registers are both readable and writable. Depending on the configuration selected, up to four timers may be active at once, with modules in the same configuration (Capture/Compare or PWM) sharing timer resources. The possible configurations are shown in Figure 14-1. 14.1.2 OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT OPTION 14.1.1 CCP MODULES AND TIMER RESOURCES The CCP modules utilize Timers 1, 2 or 3, depending on the mode selected. Timer1 and Timer3 are available to modules in Capture or Compare modes, while Timer2 is available for modules in PWM mode. When operating in Output mode (i.e., in Compare or PWM modes), the drivers for the CCPx pins can be optionally configured as open-drain outputs. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor and allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. The open-drain output option is controlled by the CCP2OD and CCP1OD bits (TRISG<6:5>). Setting the appropriate bit configures the pin for the corresponding module for open-drain operation. TABLE 14-1: CCP MODE - TIMER RESOURCE Timer Resource Timer1 or Timer3 Timer1 or Timer3 Timer2 CCP Mode Capture Compare PWM 14.1.3 CCP2 PIN ASSIGNMENT The assignment of a particular timer to a module is determined by the Timer to CCP enable bits in the T3CON register (Register 13-1). Both modules may be active at any given time and may share the same timer resource if they are configured to operate in the same mode (Capture/Compare or PWM) at the same time. The interactions between the two modules are summarized in Table 14-2. The pin assignment for CCP2 (Capture input, Compare and PWM output) can change, based on device configuration. The CCP2MX Configuration bit determines which pin CCP2 is multiplexed to. By default, it is assigned to RC1 (CCP2MX = 1). If the Configuration bit is cleared, CCP2 is multiplexed with RE7. Changing the pin assignment of CCP2 does not automatically change any requirements for configuring the port pin. Users must always verify that the appropriate TRIS register is configured correctly for CCP2 operation, regardless of where it is located. FIGURE 14-1: CCP AND TIMER INTERCONNECT CONFIGURATIONS T3CCP<2:1> = 01 TMR1 TMR3 T3CCP<2:1> = 1x TMR1 TMR3 T3CCP<2:1> = 00 TMR1 TMR3 CCP1 CCP2 CCP1 CCP2 CCP1 CCP2 TMR2 Timer1 is used for all Capture and Compare operations for all CCP modules. Timer2 is used for PWM operations for all CCP modules. Modules may share either timer resource as a common time base. TMR2 Timer1 is used for Capture and Compare operations for CCP1 and Timer 3 is used for CCP2. Both the modules use Timer2 as a common time base if they are in PWM modes. TMR2 Timer3 is used for all Capture and Compare operations for all CCP modules. Timer2 is used for PWM operations for all CCP modules. Modules may share either timer resource as a common time base. DS39770B-page 148 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 14-2: Capture Capture INTERACTIONS BETWEEN CCP1 AND CCP2 FOR TIMER RESOURCES Interaction Each module can use TMR1 or TMR3 as the time base. The time base can be different for each CCP. CCP2 can be configured for the Special Event Trigger to reset TMR1 or TMR3 (depending upon which time base is used). Automatic A/D conversions on trigger event can also be done. Operation of CCP1 could be affected if it is using the same timer as a time base. CCP1 can be configured for the Special Event Trigger to reset TMR1 or TMR3 (depending upon which time base is used). Operation of CCP2 could be affected if it is using the same timer as a time base. Either module can be configured for the Special Event Trigger to reset the time base. Automatic A/D conversions on CCP2 trigger event can be done. Conflicts may occur if both modules are using the same time base. None None None None Both PWMs will have the same frequency and update rate (TMR2 interrupt). Capture Compare CCP1 Mode CCP2 Mode Compare Capture Compare Compare Capture Compare PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM Capture Compare PWM (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 149 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 14.2 Capture Mode 14.2.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT In Capture mode, the CCPR2H:CCPR2L register pair captures the 16-bit value of the TMR1 or TMR3 register when an event occurs on the CCP2 pin (RC1 or RE7, depending on device configuration). An event is defined as one of the following: * * * * every falling edge every rising edge every 4th rising edge every 16th rising edge When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the CCP2IE bit (PIE3<2>) clear to avoid false interrupts and should clear the flag bit, CCP2IF, following any such change in operating mode. 14.2.4 CCP PRESCALER The event is selected by the mode select bits, CCP2M3:CCP2M0 (CCP2CON<3:0>). When a capture is made, the interrupt request flag bit, CCP2IF (PIR3<2>), is set; it must be cleared in software. If another capture occurs before the value in register CCPR2 is read, the old captured value is overwritten by the new captured value. There are four prescaler settings in Capture mode. They are specified as part of the operating mode selected by the mode select bits (CCP2M3:CCP2M0). Whenever the CCP module is turned off, or the CCP module is not in Capture mode, the prescaler counter is cleared. This means that any Reset will clear the prescaler counter. Switching from one capture prescaler to another may generate an interrupt. Also, the prescaler counter will not be cleared; therefore, the first capture may be from a non-zero prescaler. Example 14-1 shows the recommended method for switching between capture prescalers. This example also clears the prescaler counter and will not generate the "false" interrupt. 14.2.1 CCP PIN CONFIGURATION In Capture mode, the appropriate CCPx pin should be configured as an input by setting the corresponding TRIS direction bit. Note: If RC1/CCP2 or RE7/CCP2 is configured as an output, a write to the port can cause a capture condition. EXAMPLE 14-1: CHANGING BETWEEN CAPTURE PRESCALERS 14.2.2 TIMER1/TIMER3 MODE SELECTION The timers that are to be used with the capture feature (Timer1 and/or Timer3) must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture operation may not work. The timer to be used with each CCP module is selected in the T3CON register (see Section 14.1.1 "CCP Modules and Timer Resources"). CLRF CCP2CON ; Turn CCP module off MOVLW NEW_CAPT_PS ; Load WREG with the ; new prescaler mode ; value and CCP ON MOVWF CCP2CON ; Load CCP2CON with ; this value FIGURE 14-2: CAPTURE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM TMR3H Set CCP1IF T3CCP2 TMR3 Enable CCPR1H TMR1 Enable TMR1H Set CCP2IF TMR1L CCPR1L TMR3L CCP1 pin Prescaler / 1, 4, 16 and Edge Detect T3CCP2 CCP1CON<3:0> Q1:Q4 CCP2CON<3:0> 4 4 T3CCP1 T3CCP2 CCP2 pin Prescaler / 1, 4, 16 and Edge Detect 4 TMR3H TMR3 Enable CCPR2H TMR1 Enable TMR3L CCPR2L T3CCP2 T3CCP1 TMR1H TMR1L DS39770B-page 150 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 14.3 Compare Mode 14.3.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE In Compare mode, the 16-bit CCPR2 register value is constantly compared against either the TMR1 or TMR3 register pair value. When a match occurs, the CCP2 pin can be: * * * * driven high driven low toggled (high-to-low or low-to-high) remain unchanged (that is, reflects the state of the I/O latch) When the Generate Software Interrupt mode is chosen (CCP2M3:CCP2M0 = 1010), the CCP2 pin is not affected. Only a CCP interrupt is generated, if enabled, and the CCP2IE bit is set. 14.3.4 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER The action on the pin is based on the value of the mode select bits (CCP2M3:CCP2M0). At the same time, the interrupt flag bit, CCP2IF, is set. Both CCP modules are equipped with a Special Event Trigger. This is an internal hardware signal generated in Compare mode to trigger actions by other modules. The Special Event Trigger is enabled by selecting the Compare Special Event Trigger mode (CCP2M3:CCP2M0 = 1011). For either CCP module, the Special Event Trigger resets the timer register pair for whichever timer resource is currently assigned as the module's time base. This allows the CCPRx registers to serve as a programmable period register for either timer. The Special Event Trigger for CCP2 can also start an A/D conversion. In order to do this, the A/D converter must already be enabled. Note: The Special Event Trigger of CCP1 only resets Timer1/Timer3 and cannot start an A/D conversion even when the A/D converter is enabled. 14.3.1 CCP PIN CONFIGURATION The user must configure the CCPx pin as an output by clearing the appropriate TRIS bit. Note: Clearing the CCP2CON register will force the RC1 or RE7 compare output latch (depending on device configuration) to the default low level. This is not the PORTC or PORTE I/O data latch. 14.3.2 TIMER1/TIMER3 MODE SELECTION Timer1 and/or Timer3 must be running in Timer mode, or Synchronized Counter mode, if the CCP module is using the compare feature. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the compare operation may not work. FIGURE 14-3: COMPARE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM Special Event Trigger (Timer1 Reset) CCP1 pin Comparator Compare Match Output Logic 4 CCP1CON<3:0> S R TRIS Output Enable Q CCPR1H CCPR1L Set CCP1IF 0 TMR1H TMR1L 0 1 TMR3H T3CCP1 TMR3L 1 Special Event Trigger (Timer1/Timer3 Reset, A/D Trigger) T3CCP2 Set CCP2IF CCP2 pin Output Logic 4 CCP2CON<3:0> S R TRIS Output Enable Q Comparator Compare Match CCPR2H CCPR2L (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 151 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 14-3: Name INTCON RCON PIR3 PIE3 IPR3 PIR2 PIE2 IPR2 TRISC TRISE TRISG TMR1L TMR1H T1CON TMR3H TMR3L T3CON CCPR1L CCPR1H CCP1CON CCPR2L CCPR2H CCP2CON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CAPTURE, COMPARE, TIMER1 AND TIMER3 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INT0IE RI TX2IF TX2IE TX2IP -- -- -- TRISC4 TRISE4 TRISG4 Bit 3 RBIE TO -- -- -- BCLIF BCLIE BCLIP TRISC3 TRISE3 TRISG3 Bit 2 TMR0IF PD CCP2IF CCP2IE CCP2IP LVDIF LVDIE LVDIP TRISC2 -- TRISG2 Bit 1 INT0IF POR CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP1IP TMR3IF TMR3IE TMR3IP TRISC1 TRISE1 TRISG1 Bit 0 RBIF BOR -- -- -- -- -- -- TRISC0 TRISE0 TRISG0 Reset Values on Page 51 52 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 52 52 TMR1CS TMR1ON 52 53 53 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON 53 55 55 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 55 56 55 CCP2M3 CCP2M2 CCP2M1 CCP2M0 56 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE IPEN -- -- -- OSCFIF OSCFIE OSCFIP TRISC7 TRISE7 SPIOD -- LCDIF LCDIE LCDIP CMIF CMIE CMIP TRISC6 TRISE6 -- RC2IF RC2IE RC2IP -- -- -- TRISC5 TRISE5 CCP2OD CCP1OD Timer1 Register Low Byte Timer1 Register High Byte RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC Timer3 Register High Byte Timer3 Register Low Byte RD16 T3CCP2 T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte -- -- DC1B1 DC1B0 Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 Low Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 High Byte -- -- DC2B1 DC2B0 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by Capture/Compare, Timer1 or Timer3. DS39770B-page 152 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 14.4 PWM Mode In Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) mode, the CCP2 pin produces up to a 10-bit resolution PWM output. Since the CCP2 pin is multiplexed with a PORTC or PORTE data latch, the appropriate TRIS bit must be cleared to make the CCP2 pin an output. Note: Clearing the CCP2CON register will force the RC1 or RE7 output latch (depending on device configuration) to the default low level. This is not the PORTC or PORTE I/O data latch. A PWM output (Figure 14-5) has a time base (period) and a time that the output stays high (duty cycle). The frequency of the PWM is the inverse of the period (1/period). FIGURE 14-5: Period PWM OUTPUT Duty Cycle TMR2 = PR2 TMR2 = Duty Cycle TMR2 = PR2 Figure 14-4 shows a simplified block diagram of the CCP1 module in PWM mode. For a step-by-step procedure on how to set up the CCP module for PWM operation, see Section 14.4.3 "Setup for PWM Operation". 14.4.1 PWM PERIOD FIGURE 14-4: Duty Cycle Registers CCPR1L SIMPLIFIED PWM BLOCK DIAGRAM CCP1CON<5:4> The PWM period is specified by writing to the PR2 register. The PWM period can be calculated using the following formula: EQUATION 14-1: PWM Period = (PR2) + 1] * 4 * TOSC * (TMR2 Prescale Value) CCPR1H (Slave) PWM frequency is defined as 1/[PWM period]. R Q RC2/CCP1 Comparator When TMR2 is equal to PR2, the following three events occur on the next increment cycle: * TMR2 is cleared * The CCP2 pin is set (exception: if PWM duty cycle = 0%, the CCP2 pin will not be set) * The PWM duty cycle is latched from CCPR2L into CCPR2H Note: The Timer2 postscalers (see Section 12.0 "Timer2 Module") are not used in the determination of the PWM frequency. The postscaler could be used to have a servo update rate at a different frequency than the PWM output. TMR2 (Note 1) S Comparator Clear Timer, CCP1 pin and latch D.C. TRISC<2> PR2 Note 1: The 8-bit TMR2 value is concatenated with the 2-bit internal Q clock, or 2 bits of the prescaler, to create the 10-bit time base. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 153 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 14.4.2 PWM DUTY CYCLE The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing to the CCPR2L register and to the CCP2CON<5:4> bits. Up to 10-bit resolution is available. The CCPR2L contains the eight MSbs and the CCP2CON<5:4> contains the two LSbs. This 10-bit value is represented by CCPR2L:CCP2CON<5:4>. The following equation is used to calculate the PWM duty cycle in time: The CCPR2H register and a 2-bit internal latch are used to double-buffer the PWM duty cycle. This double-buffering is essential for glitchless PWM operation. When the CCPR2H and 2-bit latch match TMR2, concatenated with an internal 2-bit Q clock or 2 bits of the TMR2 prescaler, the CCP2 pin is cleared. The maximum PWM resolution (bits) for a given PWM frequency is given by the equation: EQUATION 14-2: PWM Duty Cycle = (CCPR2L:CCP2CON<5:4>) * TOSC * (TMR2 Prescale Value) CCPR2L and CCP2CON<5:4> can be written to at any time, but the duty cycle value is not latched into CCPR2H until after a match between PR2 and TMR2 occurs (i.e., the period is complete). In PWM mode, CCPR2H is a read-only register. EQUATION 14-3: FOSC log --------------- FPWM PWM Resolution (max) = -----------------------------bits log ( 2 ) Note: If the PWM duty cycle value is longer than the PWM period, the CCP2 pin will not be cleared. TABLE 14-4: EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS AT 40 MHz 2.44 kHz 16 FFh 14 9.77 kHz 4 FFh 12 39.06 kHz 1 FFh 10 156.25 kHz 1 3Fh 8 312.50 kHz 1 1Fh 7 416.67 kHz 1 17h 6.58 PWM Frequency Timer Prescaler (1, 4, 16) PR2 Value Maximum Resolution (bits) DS39770B-page 154 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 14.4.3 SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION 3. 4. 5. The following steps should be taken when configuring the CCP module for PWM operation: 1. 2. Set the PWM period by writing to the PR2 register. Set the PWM duty cycle by writing to the CCPR2L register and CCP2CON<5:4> bits. Make the CCP2 pin an output by clearing the appropriate TRIS bit. Set the TMR2 prescale value, then enable Timer2 by writing to T2CON. Configure the CCP2 module for PWM operation. TABLE 14-5: Name INTCON RCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 TRISC TRISE TRISG TMR2 PR2 T2CON CCPR1L CCPR1H CCP1CON CCPR2L CCPR2H CCP2CON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PWM AND TIMER2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE -- RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP TRISC5 TRISE5 CCP1OD Bit 4 INT0IE RI TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP TRISC4 TRISE4 TRISG4 Bit 3 RBIE TO SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP TRISC3 TRISE3 TRISG3 Bit 2 TMR0IF PD -- -- -- TRISC2 -- TRISG2 Bit 1 INT0IF POR TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP TRISC1 TRISE1 TRISG1 Bit 0 RBIF BOR TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP TRISC0 TRISE0 TRISG0 Reset Values on Page 51 52 54 54 54 54 54 54 52 52 52 55 55 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 55 56 55 CCP2M3 CCP2M2 CCP2M1 CCP2M0 56 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL IPEN -- -- -- TRISC7 TRISE7 SPIOD -- ADIF ADIE ADIP TRISC6 TRISE6 CCP2OD Timer2 Register Timer2 Period Register -- T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte -- -- DC1B1 DC1B0 Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 Low Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 High Byte -- -- DC2B1 DC2B0 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by PWM or Timer2. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 155 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 156 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.0 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) DRIVER MODULE The LCD driver module supports these features: * Direct driving of LCD panel * On-chip bias generator with dedicated charge pump to support a range of fixed and variable bias options * Up to four commons, with four Multiplexing modes * Up to 48 (80-pin devices) or 33 (64-pin devices) segments * Three LCD clock sources with selectable prescaler, with a fourth source available for use with the LCD charge pump A simplified block diagram of the module is shown in Figure 15-1. The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) driver module generates the timing control to drive a static or multiplexed LCD panel. It also provides control of the LCD pixel data. The module can drive panels of up to 192 pixels (48 segments by 4 commons) in 80-pin devices, and 132 pixels (33 segments by 4 commons) in 64-pin devices. FIGURE 15-1: Data Bus LCD DRIVER MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM LCD DATA 24 x 8 (= 4 x 48) LCDDATA23 LCDDATA22 . . . LCDDATA1 8 LCDDATA0 192 to 48 MUX 48 SEG<47:0> Bias Voltage Timing Control LCDCON LCDPS LCDSEx LCD Bias Generation FOSC/4 T13CKI INTRC Oscillator INTOSC Oscillator COM3:COM0 4 To I/O Pins LCD Clock Source Select LCD Charge Pump (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 157 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.1 * * * * LCD Registers The LCD driver module has 33 registers: LCD Control Register (LCDCON) LCD Phase Register (LCDPS) LCDREG Register (LCD Regulator Control) Six LCD Segment Enable Registers (LCDSE5:LCDSE0) * 24 LCD Data Registers (LCDDATA23:LCDDATA0) The LCDPS register, shown in Register 15-2, configures the LCD clock source prescaler and the type of waveform: Type-A or Type-B. Details on these features are provided in Section 15.2 "LCD Clock Source", Section 15.3 "LCD Bias Generation" and Section 15.8 "LCD Waveform Generation". The LCDREG register is described in Section 15.3 "LCD Bias Generation". The LCD Segment Enable registers (LCDSEx) configure the functions of the port pins. Setting the segment enable bit for a particular segment configures that pin as an LCD driver. The prototype LCDSE register is shown in Register 15-3. There are six LCDSE registers (LCDSE5:LCDSE0), listed in Table 15-1. 15.1.1 LCD CONTROL REGISTERS The LCDCON register, shown in Register 15-1, controls the overall operation of the module. Once the module is configured, the LCDEN (LCDCON<7>) bit is used to enable or disable the LCD module. The LCD panel can also operate during Sleep by clearing the SLPEN (LCDCON<6>) bit. REGISTER 15-1: R/W-0 LCDEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 LCDCON: LCD CONTROL REGISTER R/C-0 WERR U-0 -- R/W-0 CS1 R/W-0 CS0 R/W-0 LMUX1 R/W-0 LMUX0 bit 0 C = Clearable bit W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown R/W-0 SLPEN LCDEN: LCD Driver Enable bit 1 = LCD driver module is enabled 0 = LCD driver module is disabled SLPEN: LCD Driver Enable in Sleep mode bit 1 = LCD driver module is disabled in Sleep mode 0 = LCD driver module is enabled in Sleep mode WERR: LCD Write Failed Error bit 1 = LCDDATAx register written while LCDPS<4> = 0 (must be cleared in software) 0 = No LCD write error Unimplemented: Read as `0' CS1:CS0: Clock Source Select bits 1x = INTRC (31 kHz) 01 = T13CKI (Timer1) 00 = System clock (FOSC/4) LMUX1:LMUX0: Commons Select bits LMUX1: LMUX0 00 01 10 11 Maximum Number of Pixels: Multiplex Type PIC18F6XJ90 Static (COM0) 1/2 (COM1:COM0) 1/3 (COM2:COM0) 1/4 (COM3:COM0) 33 66 99 132 PIC18F8XJ90 48 96 144 192 Static 1/2 or 1/3 1/2 or 1/3 1/3 Bias Type bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3-2 bit 1-0 DS39770B-page 158 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 15-2: R/W-0 WFT bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown LCDPS: LCD PHASE REGISTER R-0 LCDA R-0 WA R/W-0 LP3 R/W-0 LP2 R/W-0 LP1 R/W-0 LP0 bit 0 R/W-0 BIASMD WFT: Waveform Type Select bit 1 = Type-B waveform (phase changes on each frame boundary) 0 = Type-A waveform (phase changes within each common type) BIASMD: Bias Mode Select bit When LMUX1:LMUX0 = 00: 0 = Static Bias mode (do not set this bit to `1') When LMUX1:LMUX0 = 01 or 10: 1 = 1/2 Bias mode 0 = 1/3 Bias mode When LMUX1:LMUX0 = 11: 0 = 1/3 Bias mode (do not set this bit to `1') LCDA: LCD Active Status bit 1 = LCD driver module is active 0 = LCD driver module is inactive WA: LCD Write Allow Status bit 1 = Write into the LCDDATAx registers is allowed 0 = Write into the LCDDATAx registers is not allowed LP3:LP0: LCD Prescaler Select bits 1111 = 1:16 1110 = 1:15 1101 = 1:14 1100 = 1:13 1011 = 1:12 1010 = 1:11 1001 = 1:10 1000 = 1:9 0111 = 1:8 0110 = 1:7 0101 = 1:6 0100 = 1:5 0011 = 1:4 0010 = 1:3 0001 = 1:2 0000 = 1:1 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3-0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 159 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 15-3: R/W-0 SE(n + 7) bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7-0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown LCDSEx: LCD SEGMENT ENABLE REGISTERS R/W-0 SE(n + 5) R/W-0 SE(n + 4) R/W-0 SE(n + 3) R/W-0 SE(n + 2) R/W-0 SE(n + 1) R/W-0 SE(n) bit 0 R/W-0 SE(n + 6) SEG(n + 7):SEG(n): Segment Enable bits For LCDSE0: n = 0 For LCDSE1: n = 8 For LCDSE2: n = 16 For LCDSE3: n = 24 For LCDSE4: n = 32 For LCDSE5: n = 40 1 = Segment function of the pin is enabled, digital I/O disabled 0 = I/O function of the pin is enabled TABLE 15-1: LCDSE REGISTERS AND ASSOCIATED SEGMENTS Register LCDSE0 LCDSE1 LCDSE2 LCDSE3 LCDSE4(1) LCDSE5(2) Segments 7:0 15:8 23:16 31:24 39:32 47:40 Note 1: 2: LCDSE4<7:1> (SEG39:SEG33) are not implemented in 64-pin devices. LCDSE5 is not implemented in 64-pin devices. DS39770B-page 160 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.1.2 LCD DATA REGISTERS Once the module is initialized for the LCD panel, the individual bits of the LCDDATA23:LCDDATA0 registers are cleared or set to represent a clear or dark pixel, respectively. Specific sets of LCDDATA registers are used with specific segments and common signals. Each bit represents a unique combination of a specific segment connected to a specific common. Individual LCDDATA bits are named by the convention "SxxCy", with "xx" as the segment number and "y" as the common number. The relationship is summarized in Table 15-2. The prototype LCDDATA register is shown in Register 15-4. Note: In 64-pin devices, writing into the registers LCDDATA5, LCDDATA11, LCDDATA17, and LCDDATA23 will not affect the status of any pixels. REGISTER 15-4: R/W-0 S(n + 7)Cy bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7-0 LCDDATAx: LCD DATA REGISTERS R/W-0 S(n + 5)Cy R/W-0 S(n + 4)Cy R/W-0 S(n + 3)Cy R/W-0 S(n + 2)Cy R/W-0 S(n + 1)Cy R/W-0 S(n)Cy bit 0 R/W-0 S(n + 6)Cy W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown S(n + 7)Cy:S(n)Cy: Pixel On bits For LCDDATA0 through LCDDATA5: n = (8x), y = 0 For LCDDATA6 through LCDDATA11: n = (8(x - 6)), y = 1 For LCDDATA12 through LCDDATA17: n = (8(x - 12)), y = 2 For LCDDATA18 through LCDDATA23: n = (8(x - 18)), y = 3 1 = Pixel on (dark) 0 = Pixel off (clear) TABLE 15-2: Segments LCDDATA REGISTERS AND BITS FOR SEGMENT AND COM COMBINATIONS COM Lines 0 1 LCDDATA6 S00C1:S07C1 LCDDATA7 S08C1:S15C1 LCDDATA8 S16C1:S23C1 LCDDATA9 S24C1:S31C1 LCDDATA10(1) S32C1:S39C1 LCDDATA11 (2) 2 LCDDATA12 S00C2:S07C2 LCDDATA13 S08C2:S15C2 LCDDATA14 S16C2:S23C2 LCDDATA15 S24C2:S31C2 LCDDATA16(1) S32C2:S39C2 LCDDATA17 (2) 3 LCDDATA18 S00C3:S07C3 LCDDATA19 S08C0:S15C3 LCDDATA20 S16C3:S23C3 LCDDATA21 S24C3:S31C3 LCDDATA22(1) S32C3:S39C3 LCDDATA23(2) S40C3:S47C3 0 through 7 8 through 15 16 through 23 24 through 31 32 through 39 40 through 47 Note 1: 2: LCDDATA0 S00C0:S07C0 LCDDATA1 S08C0:S15C0 LCDDATA2 S16C0:S23C0 LCDDATA3 S24C0:S31C0 LCDDATA4(1) S32C0:S39C0 LCDDATA5(2) S40C0:S47C0 S40C1:S47C1 S40C2:S47C2 Bits<7:1> of these registers are not implemented in 64-pin devices. Bit 0 of these registers (SEG32Cy) is always implemented. These registers are not implemented on 64-pin devices. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 161 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.2 LCD Clock Source The LCD driver module generates its internal clock from 3 possible sources: * System clock (FOSC/4) * Timer1 oscillator * INTRC source The LCD clock generator uses a configurable divide-by-32/divide-by-8192 postscaler to produce a baseline frequency of about 1 kHz nominal, regardless of the source selected. The clock source selection and the postscaler configuration are determined by the Clock Source Select bits, CS1:CS0 (LCDCON<3:2>). An additional programmable prescaler is used to derive the LCD frame frequency from the 1 kHz baseline. The prescaler is configured using the LP3:LP0 bits (LCDPS<3:0>) for any one of 16 options, ranging from 1:1 to 1:16. Proper timing for waveform generation is set by the LMUX1:LMUX0 bits (LCDCON<1:0>). These bits determine which Commons Multiplexing mode is to be used, and divide down the LCD clock source as required. They also determine the configuration of the ring counter that is used to switch the LCD commons on or off. The charge pump clock can use either the Timer1 oscillator or the INTRC source, as well as the 8 MHz INTOSC source (after being divided by 256 by a prescaler). The charge pump clock source is configured using the CKSEL1:CKSEL0 bits (LCDREG<1:0>). 15.2.2 CLOCK SOURCE CONSIDERATIONS When using the system clock as the LCD clock source, it is assumed that the system clock frequency is a nominal 32 MHz (for a FOSC/4 frequency of 8 MHz). Because the prescaler option for the FOSC/4 clock selection is fixed at divide-by-8192, system clock speeds that differ from 32 MHz will produce frame frequencies and refresh rates different than discussed in this chapter. The user will need to keep this in mind when designing the display application. The Timer1 and INTRC sources can be used as LCD clock sources when the device is in Sleep mode. To use the Timer1 oscillator, it is necessary to set the T1OSCEN bit (T1CON<3>). Selecting either Timer1 or INTRC as the LCD clock source will not automatically activate these sources. Similarly, selecting the INTOSC as the charge pump clock source will not turn the oscillator on. To use INTOSC, it must be selected as the system clock source by using the FOSC2 Configuration bit. If Timer1 is used as a clock source for the device, either as an LCD clock source or for any other purpose, LCD segment 32 become unavailable. 15.2.1 LCD VOLTAGE REGULATOR CLOCK SOURCE In addition to the clock source for LCD timing, a separate 31 kHz nominal clock is required for the LCD charge pump. This is provided from a distinct branch of the LCD clock source. FIGURE 15-2: LCD CLOCK GENERATION 2 LCDCON<3:2> /4 System Clock (FOSC/4) Timer1 Oscillator Internal 31 kHz Source 00 /2 01 10 1x 11 2 2 11 INTOSC 8 MHz Source /256 10 01 31 kHz Clock to LCD Charge Pump 01 1:1 to 1:16 Programmable Prescaler /32 or /8192 /1, 2, 3, 4 Ring Counter COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 00 LCDPS<3:0> 4 LCDCON<1:0> LCDREG<1:0> DS39770B-page 162 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.3 LCD Bias Generation 15.3.2 LCD VOLTAGE REGULATOR The LCD driver module is capable of generating the required bias voltages for LCD operation with a minimum of external components. This includes the ability to generate the different voltage levels required by the different bias types required by the LCD. The driver module can also provide bias voltages both above and below microcontroller VDD through the use of an on-chip LCD voltage regulator. The purpose of the LCD regulator is to provide proper bias voltage and good contrast for the LCD, regardless of VDD levels. This module contains a charge pump and internal voltage reference. The regulator can be configured by using external components to boost bias voltage above VDD. It can also operate a display at a constant voltage below VDD. The regulator can also be selectively disabled to allow bias voltages to be generated by an external resistor network. The LCD regulator is controlled through the LCDREG register (Register 15-5). It is enabled or disabled using the CKSEL1:CKSEL0 bits, while the charge pump can be selectively enabled using the CPEN bit. When the regulator is enabled, the MODE13 bit is used to select the bias type. The peak LCD bias voltage, measured as a difference between the potentials of LCDBIAS3 and LCDBIAS0, is configured with the BIAS bits. 15.3.1 LCD BIAS TYPES PIC18F85J90 family devices support three bias types based on the waveforms generated to control segments and commons: * Static (two discrete levels) * 1/2 Bias (three discrete levels * 1/3 Bias (four discrete levels) The use of different waveforms in driving the LCD is discussed in more detail in Section 15.8 "LCD Waveform Generation". REGISTER 15-5: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 bit 6 LCDREG: VOLTAGE REGULATOR CONTROL REGISTER RW-1 BIAS2 RW-1 BIAS1 RW-1 BIAS0 RW-1 MODE13 RW-0 CKSEL1 RW-0 CKSEL0 bit 0 RW-0 CPEN W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as `0' CPEN: LCD Charge Pump Enable bit 1 = Charge pump enabled; highest LCD bias voltage is 3.6V 0 = Charge pump disabled; highest LCD bias voltage is AVDD BIAS2:BIAS0: Regulator Voltage Output Control bits 111 = 3.60V peak (offset on LCDBIAS0 of 0V) 110 = 3.47V peak (offset on LCDBIAS0 of 0.13V) 101 = 3.34V peak (offset on LCDBIAS0 of 0.26V) 100 = 3.21V peak (offset on LCDBIAS0 of 0.39V) 011 = 3.08V peak (offset on LCDBIAS0 of 0.52V) 010 = 2.95V peak (offset on LCDBIAS0 of 0.65V) 001 = 2.82V peak (offset on LCDBIAS0 of 0.78V) 000 = 2.69V peak (offset on LCDBIAS0 of 0.91V) MODE13: 1/3 LCD Bias Enable bit 1 = Regulator output supports 1/3 LCD Bias mode 0 = Regulator output supports static LCD Bias mode CKSEL1:CKSEL0: Regulator Clock Source Select bits 11 = INTRC 10 = INTOSC 8 MHz source 01 = Timer1 oscillator 00 = LCD regulator disabled bit 5-3 bit 2 bit 1-0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 163 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.3.3 BIAS CONFIGURATIONS PIC18F85J90 family devices have four distinct circuit configurations for LCD bias generation: * * * * M0: Regulator with Boost M1: Regulator without Boost M2: Resistor Ladder with Software Contrast M3: Resistor Ladder with Hardware Contrast M0 is enabled by selecting a valid regulator clock source (CKSEL<1:0> set to any value except `00') and setting the CPEN bit. If static Bias type is required, the MODE13 bit must be cleared. 15.3.3.2 M1 (Regulator without Boost) 15.3.3.1 M0 (Regulator with Boost) In M0 operation, the LCD charge pump feature is enabled. This allows the regulator to generate voltages up to +3.6V to the LCD (as measured at LCDBIAS3). M0 uses a flyback capacitor connected between VLCAP1 and VLCAP2, as well as filter capacitors on LCDBIAS0 through LCDBIAS3, to obtain the required voltage boost (Figure 15-3). The output voltage (VBIAS) is the difference of potential between LCDBIAS3 and LCDBIAS0. It is set by the BIAS2:BIAS0 bits which adjust the offset between LCDBIAS0 and VSS. The flyback capacitor (CFLY) acts as a charge storage element for large LCD loads. This mode is useful in those cases where the voltage requirements of the LCD are higher than the microcontroller's VDD. It also permits software control of the display's contrast by adjustment of bias voltage by changing the value of the BIAS bits. M0 supports Static and 1/3 Bias types. Generation of the voltage levels for 1/3 Bias is handled automatically, but must be configured in software. M1 operation is similar to M0, but does not use the LCD charge pump. It can provide VBIAS up to the voltage level supplied directly to LCDBIAS3. It can be used in cases where VDD for the application is expected to never drop below a level that can provide adequate contrast for the LCD. The connection of external components is very similar to M0, except that LCDBIAS3 must be tied directly to VDD (Figure 15-3). The BIAS<2:0> bits can still be used to adjust contrast in software by changing VBIAS. As with M0, changing these bits changes the offset between LCDBIAS0 and VSS. In M1, this is reflected in the change between the LCDBIAS0 and the voltage tied to LCDBIAS3. Thus, if VDD should change, VBIAS will also change; where in M0, the level of VBIAS is constant. Like M0, M1 supports Static and 1/3 Bias types.Generation of the voltage levels for 1/3 Bias is handled automatically but must be configured in software. M1 is enabled by selecting a valid regulator clock source (CKSEL<1:0> set to any value except `00') and clearing the CPEN bit. If 1/3 Bias type is required, the MODE13 bit should also be set. FIGURE 15-3: LCD REGULATOR CONNECTIONS FOR M0 AND M1 CONFIGURATIONS PIC18F85J90 AVDD VDD VDD VLCAP1 VLCAP2 LCDBIAS3 CFLY 0.047 F(1) VDD C3 0.047 F(1) C2 0.047 F(1) C1 0.047 F(1) C0 0.047 F(1) C2 0.047 F(1) C1 0.047 F(1) C0 0.047 F(1) CFLY 0.047 F(1) LCDBIAS2 LCDBIAS1 LCDBIAS0 Mode 0 (VBIAS up to 3.6V) Note 1: Mode 1 (VBIAS VDD) These values are provided for design guidance only; they should be optimized for the application by the designer based on the actual LCD specifications. DS39770B-page 164 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.3.3.3 M2 (Resistor Ladder with Software Contrast) M2 operation also uses the LCD regulator but disables the charge pump. The regulator's internal voltage reference remains active as a way to regulate contrast. It is used in cases where the current requirements of the LCD exceed the capacity of the regulator's charge pump. In this configuration, the LCD bias voltage levels are created by an external resistor voltage divider connected across LCDBIAS0 through LCDBIAS3, with the top of the divider tied to VDD (Figure 15-4). The potential at the bottom of the ladder is determined by the LCD regulator's voltage reference, tied internally to LCDBIAS0. The bias type is determined by the voltages on the LCDBIAS pins, which are controlled by the configuration of the resistor ladder. Most applications using M2 will use a 1/3 or 1/2 Bias type. While Static Bias can also be used, it offers extremely limited contrast range and additional current consumption over other bias generation modes. Like M1, the LCDBIAS bits can be used to control contrast, limited by the level of VDD supplied to the device. Also, since there is no capacitor required across VLCAP1 and VLCAP2, these pins are available as digital I/O ports, RG2 and RG3. M2 is selected by clearing the CKSEL<1:0> bits and setting the CPEN bit. FIGURE 15-4: RESISTOR LADDER CONNECTIONS FOR CONFIGURATION M2 PIC18F85J90 VDD AVDD LCDBIAS3 10 k(1) LCDBIAS2 10 k(1) LCDBIAS1 10 k(1) LCDBIAS0 10 k(1) 10 k(1) 1/2 Bias 1/3 Bias Bias Type Bias Level at Pin 1/2 Bias LCDBIAS0 LCDBIAS1 LCDBIAS2 LCDBIAS3 Note 1: (Internal low reference voltage) 1/2 VBIAS 1/2 VBIAS VBIAS (up to AVDD) 1/3 Bias (Internal low reference voltage) 1/3 VBIAS 2/3 VBIAS VBIAS (up to AVDD) These values are provided for design guidance only; they should be optimized for the application by the designer based on the actual LCD specifications. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 165 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.3.3.4 M3 (Hardware Contrast) In M3, the LCD regulator is completely disabled. Like M2, LCD bias levels are tied to AVDD, and are generated using an external divider. The difference is that the internal voltage reference is also disabled and the bottom of the ladder is tied to ground (VSS); see Figure 15-5. The value of the resistors and the difference between VSS and VDD determine the contrast range; no software adjustment is possible. This configuration is also used where the LCD's current requirements exceed the capacity of the charge pump, and software contrast control is not needed. Depending on the bias type required, resistors are connected between some or all of the pins. A potentiometer can also be connected between LCDBIAS3 and VDD to allow for hardware controlled contrast adjustment. M3 is selected by clearing the CKSEL<1:0> and CPEN bits. FIGURE 15-5: RESISTOR LADDER CONNECTIONS FOR CONFIGURATION M3 PIC18F85J90 VDD AVDD (2) LCDBIAS3 10 k(1) LCDBIAS2 10 k(1) LCDBIAS1 10 k(1) LCDBIAS0 10 k(1) 10 k(1) Static Bias 1/2 Bias 1/3 Bias Bias Type Bias Level at Pin Static LCDBIAS0 LCDBIAS1 LCDBIAS2 LCDBIAS3 Note 1: 2: AVSS AVSS AVDD AVDD 1/2 Bias AVSS 1/2 AVDD 1/2 AVDD AVDD 1/3 Bias AVSS 1/3 AVDD 2/3 AVDD AVDD These values are provided for design guidance only; they should be optimized for the application by the designer based on the actual LCD specifications. Potentiometer for manual contrast adjustment is optional; it may be omitted entirely. DS39770B-page 166 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.3.4 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR THE LCD CHARGE PUMP 15.4 LCD Multiplex Types When designing applications that use the LCD regulator with the charge pump enabled, users must always consider both the dynamic current and RMS (static) current requirements of the display, and what the charge pump can deliver. Both dynamic and static current can be determined by Equation 15-1: The LCD driver module can be configured into four multiplex types: * * * * Static (only COM0 used) 1/2 multiplex (COM0 and COM1 are used) 1/3 multiplex (COM0, COM1 and COM2 are used) 1/4 multiplex (all COM0, COM1, COM2 and COM3 are used) EQUATION 15-1: I=Cx dV dT For dynamic current, C is the value of the capacitors attached to LCDBIAS3 and LCDBIAS2. The variable, dV, is the voltage drop allowed on C2 and C3 during a voltage switch on the LCD display, and dT is the duration of the transient current after a clock pulse occurs. For practical design purposes, these will be assumed to be 0.047 F for C, 0.1V for dV and 1 s for dT. This yields a dynamic current of 4.7 mA for 1 s. RMS current is determined by the value of CFLY for C, the voltage across VLCAP1 and VLCAP2 for dV and the regulator clock period (TPER) for dT. Assuming CFLY of 0.047 F, a value of 1.02V across CFLY and TPER of 30 s, the maximum theoretical static current will be 1.8 mA. Since the charge pump must charge five capacitors, the maximum current becomes 360 A. For a real-world assumption of 50% efficiency, this yields a practical current of 180 A. Users should compare the calculated current capacity against the requirements of the LCD. While dV and dT are relatively fixed by device design, the values of CFLY and the capacitors on the LCDBIAS pins can be changed to increase or decrease current. As always, any changes should be evaluated in the actual circuit for its impact on the application. The number of active commons used is configured by the LMUX1:LMUX0 bits (LCDCON<1:0>), which determines the function of the PORTE<6:4> pins (see Table 15-3 for details). If the pin is configured as a COM drive, the port I/O function is disabled and the TRIS setting of that pin is overridden. Note: On a Power-on Reset, the LMUX1:LMUX0 bits are `00'. TABLE 15-3: LMUX1: LMUX0 00 01 10 11 PORTE<6:4> FUNCTION PORTE<5> Digital I/O Digital I/O PORTE<4> Digital I/O COM1 Driver PORTE<6> Digital I/O Digital I/O Digital I/O COM2 Driver COM1 Driver COM3 Driver COM2 Driver COM1 Driver 15.5 Segment Enables The LCDSEx registers are used to select the pin function for each segment pin. Setting a bit configures the corresponding pin to function as a segment driver. LCDSEx registers do not override the TRIS bit settings, so the TRIS bits must be configured as input for that pin. Note: On a Power-on Reset, these pins are configured as digital I/O. 15.6 Pixel Control The LCDDATAx registers contain bits which define the state of each pixel. Each bit defines one unique pixel. Table 15-2 shows the correlation of each bit in the LCDDATAx registers to the respective common and segment signals. Any LCD pixel location not being used for display can be used as general purpose RAM. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 167 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.7 LCD Frame Frequency 15.8 LCD Waveform Generation The rate at which the COM and SEG outputs changes is called the LCD frame frequency. Frame frequency is set by the LP3:LP0 bits (LCDPS<3:0>), and is also affected by the Multiplex mode being used. The relationship between the Multiplex mode, LP bits setting and frame rate is shown in Table 15-4 and Table 15-5. LCD waveform generation is based on the principle that the net AC voltage across the dark pixel should be maximized and the net AC voltage across the clear pixel should be minimized. The net DC voltage across any pixel should be zero. The COM signal represents the time slice for each common, while the SEG contains the pixel data. The pixel signal (COM-SEG) will have no DC component and it can take only one of the two rms values. The higher rms value will create a dark pixel and a lower rms value will create a clear pixel. As the number of commons increases, the delta between the two rms values decreases. The delta represents the maximum contrast that the display can have. The LCDs can be driven by two types of waveform: Type-A and Type-B. In the Type-A waveform, the phase changes within each common type, whereas in the Type-B waveform, the phase changes on each frame boundary. Thus, the Type-A waveform maintains 0 VDC over a single frame, whereas the Type-B waveform takes two frames. Note 1: If the power-managed Sleep mode is invoked while the LCD Sleep bit is set (LCDCON<6> is `1'), take care to execute Sleep only when the VDC on all the pixels is `0'. 2: When the LCD clock source is the system clock, the LCD module will go to Sleep if the microcontroller goes into Sleep mode, regardless of the setting of the SPLEN bit. Thus, always take care to see that the VDC on all pixels is `0' whenever Sleep mode is invoked. Figure 15-6 through Figure 15-16 provide waveforms for static, half multiplex, one-third multiplex and quarter multiplex drives for Type-A and Type-B waveforms. TABLE 15-4: Multiplex Mode Static 1/2 1/3 1/4 FRAME FREQUENCY FORMULAS Frame Frequency (Hz) Clock source/(4 x 1 x (LP3:LP0 + 1)) Clock source/(2 x 2 x (LP3:LP0 + 1)) Clock source/(1 x 3 x (LP3:LP0 + 1)) Clock source/(1 x 4 x (LP3:LP0 + 1)) TABLE 15-5: APPROXIMATE FRAME FREQUENCY (IN Hz) FOR LP PRESCALER SETTINGS Multiplex Mode LP3:LP0 Static 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 125 83 62 50 42 36 31 1/2 125 83 62 50 42 36 31 1/3 167 111 83 67 56 48 42 1/4 125 83 62 50 42 36 31 DS39770B-page 168 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-6: TYPE-A/TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN STATIC DRIVE V1 COM0 COM0 V0 V1 SEG0 V0 V1 SEG1 V0 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 COM0-SEG1 V0 1 Frame (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 169 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-7: TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/2 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE V2 COM0 COM1 V1 V0 COM0 COM1 V2 V1 V0 V2 SEG0 V1 V0 V2 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 V1 V0 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 -V2 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 V0 -V1 -V2 1 Frame DS39770B-page 170 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-8: TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/2 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE V2 COM0 COM1 V1 V0 COM0 V2 COM1 V1 V0 V2 SEG0 V1 V0 V2 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 V1 V0 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 -V2 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 V0 -V1 -V2 2 Frames (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 171 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-9: TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/2 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 COM0 COM1 V2 V1 V0 COM0 COM1 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 SEG0 V1 V0 V3 V2 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 V0 -V1 -V2 1 Frame -V3 DS39770B-page 172 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-10: TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/2 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 COM0 COM1 V2 V1 V0 COM0 COM1 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 SEG0 V1 V0 V3 V2 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 V0 -V1 -V2 2 Frames -V3 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 173 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-11: TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/3 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE V2 COM0 V1 V0 COM2 COM1 COM1 COM0 V2 V1 V0 V2 COM2 V1 V0 V2 SEG0 SEG2 V1 V0 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 V2 SEG1 V1 V0 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 -V2 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 V0 -V1 -V2 1 Frame DS39770B-page 174 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-12: TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/3 MUX, 1/2 BIAS DRIVE V2 COM0 V1 V0 COM2 V2 COM1 COM1 COM0 V1 V0 COM2 V2 V1 V0 SEG0 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 V2 V1 V0 SEG1 V2 V1 V0 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 -V2 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 V0 -V1 -V2 2 Frames (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 175 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-13: TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/3 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 V2 COM0 V1 V0 COM2 COM1 COM1 COM0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 COM2 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 SEG0 SEG2 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 V1 V0 V3 SEG1 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 1 Frame DS39770B-page 176 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-14: TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/3 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE V3 V2 COM0 V1 V0 COM2 COM1 COM1 COM0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 COM2 V2 V1 V0 V3 SEG0 V2 V1 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 V0 V3 SEG1 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG0 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 COM0-SEG1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 2 Frames (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 177 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-15: COM3 COM2 COM0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 TYPE-A WAVEFORMS IN 1/4 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE COM1 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 COM0-SEG0 COM0-SEG1 1 Frame DS39770B-page 178 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 15-16: COM3 COM2 COM0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 V3 V2 V1 V0 -V1 -V2 -V3 TYPE-B WAVEFORMS IN 1/4 MUX, 1/3 BIAS DRIVE COM1 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0 SEG1 SEG0 SEG1 COM0-SEG0 COM0-SEG1 2 Frames (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 179 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.9 LCD Interrupts The LCD timing generation provides an interrupt that defines the LCD frame timing. This interrupt can be used to coordinate the writing of the pixel data with the start of a new frame. Writing pixel data at the frame boundary allows a visually crisp transition of the image. This interrupt can also be used to synchronize external events to the LCD. For example, the interface to an external segment driver can be synchronized for segment data update to the LCD frame. A new frame is defined to begin at the leading edge of the COM0 common signal. The interrupt will be set immediately after the LCD controller completes accessing all pixel data required for a frame. This will occur at a fixed interval before the frame boundary (TFINT), as shown in Figure 15-17. The LCD controller will begin to access data for the next frame within the interval from the interrupt to when the controller begins to access data after the interrupt (TFWR). New data must be written within TFWR, as this is when the LCD controller will begin to access the data for the next frame. When the LCD driver is running with Type-B waveforms, and the LMUX1:LMUX0 bits are not equal to `00', there are some additional issues that must be addressed. Since the DC voltage on the pixel takes two frames to maintain zero volts, the pixel data must not change between subsequent frames. If the pixel data were allowed to change, the waveform for the odd frames would not necessarily be the complement of the waveform generated in the even frames and a DC component would be introduced into the panel. Therefore, when using Type-B waveforms, the user must synchronize the LCD pixel updates to occur within a subframe after the frame interrupt. To correctly sequence writing while in Type-B, the interrupt will only occur on complete phase intervals. If the user attempts to write when the write is disabled, the WERR (LCDCON<5>) bit is set. Note: The interrupt is not generated when the Type-A waveform is selected and when the Type-B with no multiplex (static) is selected. FIGURE 15-17: EXAMPLE WAVEFORMS AND INTERRUPT TIMING IN QUARTER DUTY CYCLE DRIVE LCD Interrupt Occurs Controller Accesses Next Frame Data V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 V3 V2 V1 V0 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 2 Frames TFINT Frame Boundary TFWR = TFRAME/2 * (LMUX1:LMUX0 + 1) + TCY/2 TFINT = (TFWR/2 - (2 TCY + 40 ns)) Minimum = 1.5(TFRAME/4) - (2 TCY + 40 ns) (TFWR/2 - (1 TCY + 40 ns)) Maximum = 1.5(TFRAME/4) - (1 TCY + 40 ns) Frame Boundary TFWR Frame Boundary DS39770B-page 180 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.10 Operation During Sleep The LCD module can operate during Sleep. The selection is controlled by the SLPEN bit (LCDCON<6>). Setting the SLPEN bit allows the LCD module to go to Sleep. Clearing the SLPEN bit allows the module to continue to operate during Sleep. If a SLEEP instruction is executed and SLPEN = 1, the LCD module will cease all functions and go into a very low-current consumption mode. The module will stop operation immediately and drive the minimum LCD voltage on both segment and common lines. Figure 15-18 shows this operation. To ensure that no DC component is introduced on the panel, the SLEEP instruction should be executed immediately after a LCD frame boundary. The LCD interrupt can be used to determine the frame boundary. See Section 15.9 "LCD Interrupts" for the formulas to calculate the delay. If a SLEEP instruction is executed and SLPEN = 0, the module will continue to display the current contents of the LCDDATA registers. To allow the module to continue operation while in Sleep, the clock source must be either the Timer1 oscillator or one of the internal oscillators (either INTRC or INTOSC as the default system clock). While in Sleep, the LCD data cannot be changed. The LCD module current consumption will not decrease in this mode; however, the overall consumption of the device will be lower due to shut down of the core and other peripheral functions. If the system clock is selected and the module is not configured for Sleep operation, the module will ignore the SLPEN bit and stop operation immediately. The minimum LCD voltage will then be driven onto the segments and commons 15.10.1 USING THE LCD REGULATOR DURING SLEEP Applications that use the LCD regulator for bias generation may not achieve the same degree of power reductions in Sleep mode when compared to applications using Mode 3 (resistor ladder) biasing. This is particularly true with Mode 0 operation, where the charge pump is active. If Modes 0, 1 or 2 are used for bias generation, software contrast control will not be available. FIGURE 15-18: SLEEP ENTRY/EXIT WHEN SLPEN = 1 OR CS1:CS0 = 00 V3 V2 V1 COM0 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM1 V0 V3 V2 V1 COM2 V0 V3 V2 V1 SEG0 V0 2 Frames SLEEP Instruction Execution Wake-up (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 181 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 15.11 Configuring the LCD Module The following is the sequence of steps to configure the LCD module. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the frame clock prescale using bits LP3:LP0 (LCDPS<3:0>). Configure the appropriate pins to function as segment drivers using the LCDSEx registers. Configure the appropriate pins as inputs using TRISx registers. Configure the LCD module for the following using the LCDCON register: * Multiplex and Bias mode (LMUX1:LMUX0) * Timing source (CS1:CS0) * Sleep mode (SLPEN) Write initial values to pixel data registers, LCDDATA0 through LCDDATA23. Configure the LCD Regulator: a) If M2 or M3 bias configuration is to be used, turn off the regulator by setting CKSEL<1:0> (LCDREG<1:0>) to `00'. Set or clear the CPEN bit (LCDREG<6>) to select Mode 2 or Mode 3, as appropriate. b) If M0 or M1 bias generation is to be used: * Set the VBIAS level using the BIAS<2:0> bits (LCDREG<5:3>). * Set or clear the CPEN bit to enable or disable the charge pump. * Set or clear the MODE13 bit (LCDREG<2>) to select the Bias mode. * Select a regulator clock source using the CKSEL<1:0> bits. Clear LCD Interrupt Flag, LCDIF (PIR3<6>), and if desired, enable the interrupt by setting the LCDIE bit (PIE3<6>). Enable the LCD module by setting the LCDEN bit (LCDCON<7>). 5. 6. 7. 8. DS39770B-page 182 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 15-6: Name INTCON PIR3 PIE3 IPR3 RCON LCDDATA23(1) LCDDATA22 LCDDATA21 LCDDATA20 LCDDATA19 LCDDATA18 LCDDATA17(1) LCDDATA16 LCDDATA15 LCDDATA14 LCDDATA13 LCDDATA12 LCDDATA11(1) LCDDATA10 LCDDATA9 LCDDATA8 LCDDATA7 LCDDATA6 LCDDATA5(1) LCDDATA4 LCDDATA3 LCDDATA2 LCDDATA1 LCDDATA0 LCDSE5(1) LCDSE4 LCDSE3 LCDSE2 LCDSE1 LCDSE0 LCDCON LCDPS LCDREG REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH LCD OPERATION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INT0IE TX2IF TX2IE TX2IP RI S44C3 S36C3(1) S28C3 S20C3 S12C3 S04C3 S44C2 S36C2(1) S28C2 S20C2 S12C2 S04C2 S44C1 S36C1(1) S28C1 S20C1 S12C1 S04C1 S44C0 S36C0(1) S28C0 S20C0 S12C0 S04C0 SE44 SE36(1) SE28 SE20 SE12 SE04 -- WA BIAS1 Bit 3 RBIE -- -- -- TO S43C3 S35C3(1) S27C3 S19C3 S11C3 S03C3 S43C2 S35C2(1) S27C2 S19C2 S11C2 S03C2 S43C1 S35C1(1) S27C1 S19C1 S11C1 S03C1 S43C0 S35C0(1) S27C0 S19C0 S11C0 S03C0 SE43 SE35(1) SE27 SE19 SE11 SE03 CS1 LP3 BIAS0 Bit 2 TMR0IF CCP2IF CCP2IE CCP2IP PD S42C3 S34C3(1) S26C3 S18C3 S10C3 S02C3 S42C2 S34C2(1) S26C2 S18C2 S10C2 S02C2 S42C1 S34C1(1) S26C1 S18C1 S10C1 S02C1 S42C0 S34C0(1) S26C0 S18C0 S10C0 S02C0 SE42 SE34(1) SE26 SE18 SE10 SE02 CS0 LP2 MODE13 Bit 1 INT0IF CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP1IP POR S41C3 S33C3(1) S25C3 S17C3 S09C3 S01C3 S41C2 S33C2(1) S25C2 S17C2 S09C2 S01C2 S41C1 S33C1(1) S25C1 S17C1 S09C1 S01C1 S41C0 S33C0(1) S25C0 S17C0 S09C0 S01C0 SE41 SE33(1) SE25 SE17 SE09 SE01 LMUX1 LP1 CKSEL1 Bit 0 RBIF -- -- -- BOR S40C3 S32C3 S24C3 S16C3 S08C3 S00C3 S40C2 S32C2 S24C2 S16C2 S08C2 S00C2 S40C1 S32C1 S24C1 S16C1 S08C1 S00C1 S40C0 S32C0 S24C0 S16C0 S08C0 S00C0 SE40 SE32 SE24 SE16 SE08 SE00 LMUX0 LP0 CKSEL0 Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 52 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE -- -- -- IPEN S47C3 S39C3 (1) LCDIF LCDIE LCDIP -- S46C3 S38C3(1) S30C3 S22C3 S14C3 S06C3 S46C2 S38C2(1) S30C2 S22C2 S14C2 S06C2 S46C1 S38C1(1) S30C1 S22C1 S14C1 S06C1 S46C0 S38C0(1) S30C0 S22C0 S14C0 S06C0 SE46 SE38(1) SE30 SE22 SE14 SE06 SLPEN BIASMD CPEN RC2IF RC2IE RC2IP -- S45C3 S37C3(1) S29C3 S21C3 S13C3 S05C3 S45C2 S37C2(1) S29C2 S21C2 S13C2 S05C2 S45C1 S37C1(1) S29C1 S21C1 S13C1 S05C1 S45C0 S37C0(1) S29C0 S21C0 S13C0 S05C0 SE45 SE37(1) SE29 SE21 SE13 SE05 WERR LCDA BIAS2 S31C3 S23C3 S15C3 S07C3 S47C2 S39C2(1) S31C2 S23C2 S15C2 S07C2 S47C1 S39C1(1) S31C1 S23C1 S15C1 S07C1 S47C0 S39C0 (1) S31C0 S23C0 S15C0 S07C0 SE47 SE39(1) SE31 SE23 SE15 SE07 LCDEN WFT -- Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for LCD operation. Note 1: These registers or individual bits are unimplemented on 64-pin devices. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 183 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 184 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.0 MASTER SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL PORT (MSSP) MODULE Master SSP (MSSP) Module Overview 16.3 SPI Mode The SPI mode allows 8 bits of data to be synchronously transmitted and received simultaneously. All four modes of SPI are supported. To accomplish communication, typically three pins are used: * Serial Data Out (SDO) - RC5/SDO * Serial Data In (SDI) - RC4/SDI/SDA * Serial Clock (SCK) - RC3/SCK/SCL Additionally, a fourth pin may be used when in a Slave mode of operation: * Slave Select (SS) - RF7/SS Figure 16-1 shows the block diagram of the MSSP module when operating in SPI mode. 16.1 The Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) module is a serial interface, useful for communicating with other peripheral or microcontroller devices. These peripheral devices may be serial EEPROMs, shift registers, display drivers, A/D converters, etc. The MSSP module can operate in one of two modes: * Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) * Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2CTM) - Full Master mode - Slave mode (with general address call) The I2C interface supports the following modes in hardware: * Master mode * Multi-Master mode * Slave mode FIGURE 16-1: MSSP BLOCK DIAGRAM (SPI MODE) Internal Data Bus Read SSPBUF reg Write 16.2 Control Registers SDI SSPSR reg SDO bit 0 Shift Clock Each MSSP module has three associated control registers. These include a status register (SSPSTAT) and two control registers (SSPCON1 and SSPCON2). The use of these registers and their individual bits differ significantly depending on whether the MSSP module is operated in SPI or I2C mode. Additional details are provided under the individual sections. SS SS Control Enable Edge Select 2 Clock Select SSPM3:SSPM0 SMP:CKE 4 TMR2 Output 2 2 SCK ( ) Edge Select Prescaler TOSC 4, 16, 64 Data to TXx/RXx in SSPSR TRIS bit (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 185 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.3.1 REGISTERS Each MSSP module has four registers for SPI mode operation. These are: * * * * MSSP Control Register 1 (SSPCON1) MSSP Status Register (SSPSTAT) Serial Receive/Transmit Buffer Register (SSPBUF) MSSP Shift Register (SSPSR) - Not directly accessible SSPSR is the shift register used for shifting data in or out. SSPBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written to or read from. In receive operations, SSPSR and SSPBUF together create a double-buffered receiver. When SSPSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPBUF and the SSPIF interrupt is set. During transmission, the SSPBUF is not double-buffered. A write to SSPBUF will write to both SSPBUF and SSPSR. SSPCON1 and SSPSTAT are the control and status registers in SPI mode operation. The SSPCON1 register is readable and writable. The lower 6 bits of the SSPSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPSTAT are read/write. REGISTER 16-1: R/W-0 SMP bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 SSPSTAT: MSSP STATUS REGISTER (SPI MODE) R-0 D/A R-0 P R-0 S R-0 R/W R0 UA R-0 BF bit 0 (1) R/W-0 CKE W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown SMP: Sample bit SPI Master mode: 1 = Input data sampled at end of data output time 0 = Input data sampled at middle of data output time SPI Slave mode: SMP must be cleared when SPI is used in Slave mode. CKE: SPI Clock Select bit(1) 1 = Transmit occurs on transition from active to Idle clock state 0 = Transmit occurs on transition from Idle to active clock state D/A: Data/Address bit Used in I2CTM mode only. P: Stop bit Used in I2C mode only. This bit is cleared when the MSSP module is disabled, SSPEN is cleared. S: Start bit Used in I2C mode only. R/W: Read/Write Information bit Used in I2C mode only. UA: Update Address bit Used in I2C mode only. BF: Buffer Full Status bit (Receive mode only) 1 = Receive complete, SSPBUF is full 0 = Receive not complete, SSPBUF is empty Polarity of clock state is set by the CKP bit (SSPCON1<4>). bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: DS39770B-page 186 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 16-2: R/W-0 WCOL bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown SSPCON1: MSSP CONTROL REGISTER 1 (SPI MODE) R/W-0 SSPEN(2) R/W-0 CKP R/W-0 SSPM3(3) R/W-0 SSPM2(3) R/W-0 SSPM1(3) R/W-0 SSPM0(3) bit 0 R/W-0 SSPOV(1) WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit (Transmit mode only) 1 = The SSPBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision SSPOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit(1) SPI Slave mode: 1 = A new byte is received while the SSPBUF register is still holding the previous data. In case of overflow, the data in SSPSR is lost. Overflow can only occur in Slave mode. The user must read the SSPBUF, even if only transmitting data, to avoid setting overflow (must be cleared in software). 0 = No overflow SSPEN: Master Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit(2) 1 = Enables serial port and configures SCK, SDO, SDI and SS as serial port pins 0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins CKP: Clock Polarity Select bit 1 = Idle state for clock is a high level 0 = Idle state for clock is a low level SSPM3:SSPM0: Master Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits(3) 0101 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCK pin, SS pin control disabled, SS can be used as I/O pin 0100 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCK pin, SS pin control enabled 0011 = SPI Master mode, clock = TMR2 output/2 0010 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/64 0001 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/16 0000 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/4 In Master mode, the overflow bit is not set since each new reception (and transmission) is initiated by writing to the SSPBUF register. When enabled, these pins must be properly configured as input or output. Bit combinations not specifically listed here are either reserved or implemented in I2CTM mode only. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3-0 Note 1: 2: 3: (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 187 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.3.2 OPERATION When initializing the SPI, several options need to be specified. This is done by programming the appropriate control bits (SSPCON1<5:0> and SSPSTAT<7:6>). These control bits allow the following to be specified: * * * * Master mode (SCK is the clock output) Slave mode (SCK is the clock input) Clock Polarity (Idle state of SCK) Data Input Sample Phase (middle or end of data output time) * Clock Edge (output data on rising/falling edge of SCK) * Clock Rate (Master mode only) * Slave Select mode (Slave mode only) Each MSSP consists of a transmit/receive shift register (SSPSR) and a buffer register (SSPBUF). The SSPSR shifts the data in and out of the device, MSb first. The SSPBUF holds the data that was written to the SSPSR until the received data is ready. Once the 8 bits of data have been received, that byte is moved to the SSPBUF register. Then, the Buffer Full detect bit, BF (SSPSTAT<0>), and the interrupt flag bit, SSPIF, are set. This double-buffering of the received data (SSPBUF) allows the next byte to start reception before reading the data that was just received. Any write to the SSPBUF register during transmission/reception of data will be ignored and the Write Collision detect bit, WCOL (SSPCON1<7>), will be set. User software must clear the WCOL bit so that it can be determined if the following write(s) to the SSPBUF register completed successfully. When the application software is expecting to receive valid data, the SSPBUF should be read before the next byte of data to transfer is written to the SSPBUF. The Buffer Full bit, BF (SSPSTAT<0>), indicates when SSPBUF has been loaded with the received data (transmission is complete). When the SSPBUF is read, the BF bit is cleared. This data may be irrelevant if the SPI is only a transmitter. Generally, the MSSP interrupt is used to determine when the transmission/reception has completed. The SSPBUF must be read and/or written. If the interrupt method is not going to be used, then software polling can be done to ensure that a write collision does not occur. Example 16-1 shows the loading of the SSPBUF (SSPSR) for data transmission. The SSPSR is not directly readable or writable and can only be accessed by addressing the SSPBUF register. Additionally, the SSPSTAT register indicates the various status conditions. EXAMPLE 16-1: LOOP BTFSS BRA MOVF MOVWF MOVF MOVWF LOADING THE SSPBUF (SSPSR) REGISTER SSPSTAT, BF LOOP SSPBUF, W RXDATA TXDATA, W SSPBUF ;Has data been received (transmit complete)? ;No ;WREG reg = contents of SSPBUF ;Save in user RAM, if data is meaningful ;W reg = contents of TXDATA ;New data to xmit DS39770B-page 188 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.3.3 ENABLING SPI I/O To enable the serial port, MSSP Enable bit, SSPEN (SSPCON1<5>), must be set. To reset or reconfigure SPI mode, clear the SSPEN bit, reinitialize the SSPCON registers and then set the SSPEN bit. This configures the SDI, SDO, SCK and SS pins as serial port pins. For the pins to behave as the serial port function, some must have their data direction bits (in the TRIS register) appropriately programmed as follows: * SDI is automatically controlled by the SPI module * SDO must have TRISC<5> bit cleared * SCK (Master mode) must have TRISC<3> bit cleared * SCK (Slave mode) must have TRISC<3> bit set * SS must have TRISF<7> bit set Any serial port function that is not desired may be overridden by programming the corresponding data direction (TRIS) register to the opposite value. to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor, and allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. The open-drain output option is controlled by the SPIOD bit (TRISG<7>). Setting the bit configures both pins for open-drain operation. 16.3.5 TYPICAL CONNECTION Figure 16-2 shows a typical connection between two microcontrollers. The master controller (Processor 1) initiates the data transfer by sending the SCK signal. Data is shifted out of both shift registers on their programmed clock edge and latched on the opposite edge of the clock. Both processors should be programmed to the same Clock Polarity (CKP), then both controllers would send and receive data at the same time. Whether the data is meaningful (or dummy data) depends on the application software. This leads to three scenarios for data transmission: * Master sends data - Slave sends dummy data * Master sends data - Slave sends data * Master sends dummy data - Slave sends data 16.3.4 OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT OPTION The drivers for the SDO output and SCK clock pins can be optionally configured as open-drain outputs. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled FIGURE 16-2: SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION SPI Master SSPM3:SSPM0 = 00xx SDO SDI SPI Slave SSPM3:SSPM0 = 010x Serial Input Buffer (SSPBUF) Serial Input Buffer (SSPBUF) Shift Register (SSPSR) MSb LSb SDI SDO Shift Register (SSPSR) MSb LSb SCK PROCESSOR 1 Serial Clock SCK PROCESSOR 2 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 189 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.3.6 MASTER MODE The master can initiate the data transfer at any time because it controls the SCK. The master determines when the slave (Processor 2, Figure 16-2) will broadcast data by the software protocol. In Master mode, the data is transmitted/received as soon as the SSPBUF register is written to. If the SPI is only going to receive, the SDO output could be disabled (programmed as an input). The SSPSR register will continue to shift in the signal present on the SDI pin at the programmed clock rate. As each byte is received, it will be loaded into the SSPBUF register as if a normal received byte (interrupts and status bits appropriately set). This could be useful in receiver applications as a "Line Activity Monitor" mode. The clock polarity is selected by appropriately programming the CKP bit (SSPCON1<4>). This, then, would give waveforms for SPI communication as shown in Figure 16-3, Figure 16-5 and Figure 16-6, where the MSB is transmitted first. In Master mode, the SPI clock rate (bit rate) is user-programmable to be one of the following: * * * * FOSC/4 (or TCY) FOSC/16 (or 4 * TCY) FOSC/64 (or 16 * TCY) Timer2 output/2 This allows a maximum data rate (at 40 MHz) of 10.00 Mbps. Figure 16-3 shows the waveforms for Master mode. When the CKE bit is set, the SDO data is valid before there is a clock edge on SCK. The change of the input sample is shown based on the state of the SMP bit. The time when the SSPBUF is loaded with the received data is shown. FIGURE 16-3: Write to SSPBUF SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) SDO (CKE = 0) SDO (CKE = 1) SDI (SMP = 0) Input Sample (SMP = 0) SDI (SMP = 1) Input Sample (SMP = 1) SSPIF SSPSR to SSPBUF SPI MODE WAVEFORM (MASTER MODE) 4 Clock Modes bit 7 bit 7 bit 6 bit 6 bit 5 bit 5 bit 4 bit 4 bit 3 bit 3 bit 2 bit 2 bit 1 bit 1 bit 0 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 Next Q4 Cycle after Q2 DS39770B-page 190 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.3.7 SLAVE MODE In Slave mode, the data is transmitted and received as the external clock pulses appear on SCK. When the last bit is latched, the SSPIF interrupt flag bit is set. Before enabling the module in SPI Slave mode, the clock line must match the proper Idle state. The clock line can be observed by reading the SCK pin. The Idle state is determined by the CKP bit (SSPCON1<4>). While in Slave mode, the external clock is supplied by the external clock source on the SCK pin. This external clock must meet the minimum high and low times as specified in the electrical specifications. While in Sleep mode, the slave can transmit/receive data. When a byte is received, the device will wake-up from Sleep. driven. When the SS pin goes high, the SDO pin is no longer driven, even if in the middle of a transmitted byte and becomes a floating output. External pull-up/pull-down resistors may be desirable depending on the application. Note 1: When the SPI is in Slave mode with SS pin control enabled (SSPCON1<3:0> = 0100), the SPI module will reset if the SS pin is set to VDD. 2: If the SPI is used in Slave mode with CKE set, then the SS pin control must be enabled. When the SPI module resets, the bit counter is forced to `0'. This can be done by either forcing the SS pin to a high level or clearing the SSPEN bit. To emulate two-wire communication, the SDO pin can be connected to the SDI pin. When the SPI needs to operate as a receiver, the SDO pin can be configured as an input. This disables transmissions from the SDO. The SDI can always be left as an input (SDI function) since it cannot create a bus conflict. 16.3.8 SLAVE SELECT SYNCHRONIZATION The SS pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The SPI must be in Slave mode with SS pin control enabled (SSPCON1<3:0> = 04h). When the SS pin is low, transmission and reception are enabled and the SDO pin is FIGURE 16-4: SLAVE SYNCHRONIZATION WAVEFORM SS SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPBUF SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 7 bit 0 SDI (SMP = 0) Input Sample (SMP = 0) SSPIF Interrupt Flag SSPSR to SSPBUF bit 0 bit 7 bit 7 Next Q4 Cycle after Q2 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 191 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 16-5: SS Optional SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPBUF SDO SDI (SMP = 0) Input Sample (SMP = 0) SSPIF Interrupt Flag SSPSR to SSPBUF bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 0) bit 7 bit 0 Next Q4 Cycle after Q2 FIGURE 16-6: SS Not Optional SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) Write to SSPBUF SDO SDI (SMP = 0) Input Sample (SMP = 0) SSPIF Interrupt Flag SSPSR to SSPBUF SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 1) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 Next Q4 Cycle after Q2 DS39770B-page 192 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.3.9 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES mode and data to be shifted into the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register. When all 8 bits have been received, the MSSP interrupt flag bit will be set and if enabled, will wake the device. In SPI Master mode, module clocks may be operating at a different speed than when in Full Power mode; in the case of Sleep mode, all clocks are halted. In Idle modes, a clock is provided to the peripherals. That clock should be from the primary clock source, the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator at 32.768 kHz) or the INTRC source. See Section 2.3 "Clock Sources and Oscillator Switching" for additional information. In most cases, the speed that the master clocks SPI data is not important; however, this should be evaluated for each system. If MSSP interrupts are enabled, they can wake the controller from Sleep mode, or one of the Idle modes, when the master completes sending data. If an exit from Sleep or Idle mode is not desired, MSSP interrupts should be disabled. If the Sleep mode is selected, all module clocks are halted and the transmission/reception will remain in that state until the devices wakes. After the device returns to Run mode, the module will resume transmitting and receiving data. In SPI Slave mode, the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register operates asynchronously to the device. This allows the device to be placed in any power-managed 16.3.10 EFFECTS OF A RESET A Reset disables the MSSP module and terminates the current transfer. 16.3.11 BUS MODE COMPATIBILITY Table 16-1 shows the compatibility between the standard SPI modes and the states of the CKP and CKE control bits. TABLE 16-1: SPI BUS MODES Control Bits State CKP 0 0 1 1 CKE 1 0 1 0 Standard SPI Mode Terminology 0, 0 0, 1 1, 0 1, 1 There is also an SMP bit which controls when the data is sampled. TABLE 16-2: Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 TRISC TRISF TRISG SSPBUF SSPCON1 SSPSTAT REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SPI OPERATION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP TRISC4 TRISF4 TRISG4 CKP P Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP TRISC3 TRISF3 TRISG3 SSPM3 S Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- TRISC2 TRISF2 TRISG2 SSPM2 R/W Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP TRISC1 TRISF1 TRISG1 SSPM1 UA Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP TRISC0 -- TRISG0 SSPM0 BF Reset Values on page 51 54 54 54 54 54 54 52 52 52 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE -- -- -- TRISC7 TRISF7 SPIOD WCOL SMP ADIF ADIE ADIP TRISC6 TRISF6 CCP2OD SSPOV CKE RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP TRISC5 TRISF5 CCP1OD SSPEN D/A MSSP Receive Buffer/Transmit Register Legend: Shaded cells are not used by the MSSP module in SPI mode. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 193 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4 I2C Mode 16.4.1 REGISTERS The MSSP module in I 2C mode fully implements all master and slave functions (including general call support) and provides interrupts on Start and Stop bits in hardware to determine a free bus (multi-master function). The MSSP module implements the standard mode specifications as well as 7-bit and 10-bit addressing. Two pins are used for data transfer: * Serial clock (SCL) - RC3/SCK/SCL * Serial data (SDA) - RC4/SDI/SDA The user must configure these pins as inputs by setting the TRISC<4:3> bits. The MSSP module has six registers for I2C operation. These are: MSSP Control Register 1 (SSPCON1) MSSP Control Register 2 (SSPCON2) MSSP Status Register (SSPSTAT) Serial Receive/Transmit Buffer Register (SSPBUF) * MSSP Shift Register (SSPSR) - Not directly accessible * MSSP Address Register (SSPADD) SSPCON1, SSPCON2 and SSPSTAT are the control and status registers in I2C mode operation. The SSPCON1 and SSPCON2 registers are readable and writable. The lower 6 bits of the SSPSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPSTAT are read/write. Many of the bits in SSPCON2 assume different functions, depending on whether the module is operating in Master or Slave mode; bits <5:2> also assume different names in Slave mode. The different aspects of SSPCON2 are shown in Register 16-5 (for Master mode) and Register 16-6 (Slave mode). SSPSR is the shift register used for shifting data in or out. SSPBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written to or read from. LSb Addr Match * * * * FIGURE 16-7: MSSP BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2CTM MODE) Internal Data Bus Read SCL Shift Clock SSPSR reg MSb SSPBUF reg Write SDA Match Detect Address Mask SSPADD register holds the slave device address when the MSSP is configured in I2C Slave mode. When the MSSP is configured in Master mode, the lower seven bits of SSPADD act as the Baud Rate Generator reload value. In receive operations, SSPSR and SSPBUF together create a double-buffered receiver. When SSPSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPBUF and the SSPIF interrupt is set. During transmission, the SSPBUF is not double-buffered. A write to SSPBUF will write to both SSPBUF and SSPSR. SSPADD reg Start and Stop bit Detect Set, Reset S, P bits (SSPSTAT reg) DS39770B-page 194 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 16-3: R/W-0 SMP bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown SSPSTAT: MSSP STATUS REGISTER (I2CTM MODE) R-0 D/A R-0 P (1) R/W-0 CKE R-0 S (1) R-0 R/W R0 UA R-0 BF bit 0 SMP: Slew Rate Control bit In Master or Slave mode: 1 = Slew rate control disabled for Standard Speed mode (100 kHz and 1 MHz) 0 = Slew rate control enabled for High-Speed mode (400 kHz) CKE: SMBus Select bit In Master or Slave mode: 1 = Enable SMBus specific inputs 0 = Disable SMBus specific inputs D/A: Data/Address bit In Master mode: Reserved. In Slave mode: 1 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was data 0 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was address P: Stop bit(1) 1 = Indicates that a Stop bit has been detected last 0 = Stop bit was not detected last S: Start bit(1) 1 = Indicates that a Start bit has been detected last 0 = Start bit was not detected last R/W: Read/Write Information bit (I2C mode only) In Slave mode:(2) 1 = Read 0 = Write In Master mode:(3) 1 = Transmit is in progress 0 = Transmit is not in progress UA: Update Address bit (10-Bit Slave mode only) 1 = Indicates that the user needs to update the address in the SSPADD register 0 = Address does not need to be updated BF: Buffer Full Status bit In Transmit mode: 1 = SSPBUF is full 0 = SSPBUF is empty In Receive mode: 1 = SSPBUF is full (does not include the ACK and Stop bits) 0 = SSPBUF is empty (does not include the ACK and Stop bits) This bit is cleared on Reset and when SSPEN is cleared. This bit holds the R/W bit information following the last address match. This bit is only valid from the address match to the next Start bit, Stop bit or not ACK bit. ORing this bit with SEN, RSEN, PEN, RCEN or ACKEN will indicate if the MSSP is in Active mode. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: 2: 3: (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 195 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 16-4: R/W-0 WCOL bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown SSPCON1: MSSP CONTROL REGISTER 1 (I2CTM MODE) R/W-0 SSPEN(1) R/W-0 CKP R/W-0 SSPM3 R/W-0 SSPM2 R/W-0 SSPM1 R/W-0 SSPM0 bit 0 R/W-0 SSPOV WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit In Master Transmit mode: 1 = A write to the SSPBUF register was attempted while the I2C conditions were not valid for a transmission to be started (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision In Slave Transmit mode: 1 = The SSPBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision In Receive mode (Master or Slave modes): This is a "don't care" bit. SSPOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit In Receive mode: 1 = A byte is received while the SSPBUF register is still holding the previous byte (must be cleared in software) 0 = No overflow In Transmit mode: This is a "don't care" bit in Transmit mode. SSPEN: Master Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit(1) 1 = Enables the serial port and configures the SDA and SCL pins as the serial port pins 0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins CKP: SCK Release Control bit In Slave mode: 1 = Release clock 0 = Holds clock low (clock stretch), used to ensure data setup time In Master mode: Unused in this mode. SSPM3:SSPM0: Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits 1111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1011 = I2C Firmware Controlled Master mode (slave Idle) 1000 = I2C Master mode, clock = FOSC/(4 * (SSPADD + 1)) 0111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address 0110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address Bit combinations not specifically listed here are either reserved or implemented in SPI mode only. When enabled, the SDA and SCL pins must be configured as inputs. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3-0 Note 1: DS39770B-page 196 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 16-5: R/W-0 GCEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 bit 6 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown SSPCON2: MSSP CONTROL REGISTER 2 (I2CTM MASTER MODE) R/W-0 ACKDT(1) R/W-0 ACKEN(2) R/W-0 RCEN(2) R/W-0 PEN(2) R/W-0 RSEN(2) R/W-0 SEN(2) bit 0 R/W-0 ACKSTAT GCEN: General Call Enable bit Unused in Master mode. ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit (Master Transmit mode only) 1 = Acknowledge was not received from slave 0 = Acknowledge was received from slave ACKDT: Acknowledge Data bit (Master Receive mode only)(1) 1 = Not Acknowledge 0 = Acknowledge ACKEN: Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiate Acknowledge sequence on SDA and SCL pins and transmit ACKDT data bit. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Acknowledge sequence Idle RCEN: Receive Enable bit (Master Receive mode only)(2) 1 = Enables Receive mode for I2C 0 = Receive Idle PEN: Stop Condition Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiate Stop condition on SDA and SCL pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Stop condition Idle RSEN: Repeated Start Condition Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiate Repeated Start condition on SDA and SCL pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Repeated Start condition Idle SEN: Start Condition Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiate Start condition on SDA and SCL pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Start condition Idle Value that will be transmitted when the user initiates an Acknowledge sequence at the end of a receive. If the I2C module is active, these bits may not be set (no spooling) and the SSPBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPBUF are disabled). bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: 2: (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 197 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 16-6: R/W-0 GCEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown SSPCON2: MSSP CONTROL REGISTER 2 (I2CTM SLAVE MODE) R/W-0 ADMSK5 R/W-0 ADMSK4 R/W-0 ADMSK3 R/W-0 ADMSK2 R/W-0 ADMSK1 R/W-0 SEN(1) bit 0 R/W-0 ACKSTAT GCEN: General Call Enable bit 1 = Enable interrupt when a general call address (0000h) is received in the SSPSR 0 = General call address disabled ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit Unused in Slave mode. ADMSK5:ADMSK2: Slave Address Mask Select bits 1 = Masking of corresponding bits of SSPADD enabled 0 = Masking of corresponding bits of SSPADD disabled ADMSK1: Slave Address Least Significant bit(s) Mask Select bit In 7-Bit Address mode: 1 = Masking of SSPADD<1> only enabled 0 = Masking of SSPADD<1> only disabled In 10-Bit Address mode: 1 = Masking of SSPADD<1:0> enabled 0 = Masking of SSPADD<1:0> disabled SEN: Stretch Enable bit(1) 1 = Clock stretching is enabled for both slave transmit and slave receive (stretch enabled) 0 = Clock stretching is disabled If the I2C module is active, this bit may not be set (no spooling) and the SSPBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPBUF are disabled). bit 6 bit 5-2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: DS39770B-page 198 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.2 OPERATION The MSSP module functions are enabled by setting the MSSP Enable bit, SSPEN (SSPCON1<5>). The SSPCON1 register allows control of the I 2C operation. Four mode selection bits (SSPCON1<3:0>) allow one of the following I 2C modes to be selected: * * * * * * I C Master mode, clock = (FOSC/4) x (SSPADD + 1) I 2C Slave mode (7-bit address) I 2C Slave mode (10-bit address) I 2C Slave mode (7-bit address) with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled I 2C Slave mode (10-bit address) with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled I 2C Firmware Controlled Master mode, slave is Idle 2 The SCL clock input must have a minimum high and low for proper operation. The high and low times of the I2C specification, as well as the requirement of the MSSP module, are shown in timing parameter 100 and parameter 101. 16.4.3.1 Addressing Once the MSSP module has been enabled, it waits for a Start condition to occur. Following the Start condition, the 8 bits are shifted into the SSPSR register. All incoming bits are sampled with the rising edge of the clock (SCL) line. The value of register SSPSR<7:1> is compared to the value of the SSPADD register. The address is compared on the falling edge of the eighth clock (SCL) pulse. If the addresses match and the BF and SSPOV bits are clear, the following events occur: 1. 2. 3. 4. The SSPSR register value is loaded into the SSPBUF register. The Buffer Full bit, BF, is set. An ACK pulse is generated. The MSSP Interrupt Flag bit, SSPIF, is set (and interrupt is generated, if enabled) on the falling edge of the ninth SCL pulse. Selection of any I 2C mode, with the SSPEN bit set, forces the SCL and SDA pins to be open-drain, provided these pins are programmed to inputs by setting the appropriate TRISC or TRISD bits. To ensure proper operation of the module, pull-up resistors must be provided externally to the SCL and SDA pins. 16.4.3 SLAVE MODE In Slave mode, the SCL and SDA pins must be configured as inputs (TRISC<4:3> set). The MSSP module will override the input state with the output data when required (slave-transmitter). The I 2C Slave mode hardware will always generate an interrupt on an exact address match. In addition, address masking will also allow the hardware to generate an interrupt for more than one address (up to 31 in 7-bit addressing and up to 63 in 10-bit addressing). Through the mode select bits, the user can also choose to interrupt on Start and Stop bits. When an address is matched, or the data transfer after an address match is received, the hardware automatically will generate the Acknowledge (ACK) pulse and load the SSPBUF register with the received value currently in the SSPSR register. Any combination of the following conditions will cause the MSSP module not to give this ACK pulse: * The Buffer Full bit, BF (SSPSTAT<0>), was set before the transfer was received. * The overflow bit, SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>), was set before the transfer was received. In this case, the SSPSR register value is not loaded into the SSPBUF, but bit SSPIF is set. The BF bit is cleared by reading the SSPBUF register, while bit SSPOV is cleared through software. In 10-Bit Address mode, two address bytes need to be received by the slave. The five Most Significant bits (MSbs) of the first address byte specify if this is a 10-bit address. Bit R/W (SSPSTAT<2>) must specify a write so the slave device will receive the second address byte. For a 10-bit address, the first byte would equal `11110 A9 A8 0', where `A9' and `A8' are the two MSbs of the address. The sequence of events for 10-bit address is as follows, with steps 7 through 9 for the slave-transmitter: 1. 2. Receive first (high) byte of address (bits SSPIF, BF and UA (SSPSTAT<1>) are set). Update the SSPADD register with second (low) byte of address (clears bit UA and releases the SCL line). Read the SSPBUF register (clears bit BF) and clear flag bit, SSPIF. Receive second (low) byte of address (SSPIF, BF and UA bits are set). Update the SSPADD register with the first (high) byte of address. If match releases SCL line, this will clear UA bit. Read the SSPBUF register (clears bit BF) and clear flag bit, SSPIF. Receive Repeated Start condition. Receive first (high) byte of address (SSPIF and BF bits are set). Read the SSPBUF register (clears BF bit) and clear flag bit, SSPIF. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 199 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.3.2 Address Masking Masking an address bit causes that bit to become a "don't care". When one address bit is masked, two addresses will be Acknowledged and cause an interrupt. It is possible to mask more than one address bit at a time, which makes it possible to Acknowledge up to 31 addresses in 7-bit mode and up to 63 addresses in 10-bit mode (see Example 16-2). The I2C Slave behaves the same way whether address masking is used or not. However, when address masking is used, the I2C slave can Acknowledge multiple addresses and cause interrupts. When this occurs, it is necessary to determine which address caused the interrupt by checking SSPBUF. In 7-Bit Address mode, address mask bits, ADMSK<5:1> (SSPCON<5:1>), mask the corresponding address bits in the SSPADD register. For any ADMSK bits that are set (ADMSK EXAMPLE 16-2: 7-Bit Addressing: ADDRESS MASKING EXAMPLES SSPADD<7:1> = A0h (1010000) (SSPADD<0> is assumed to be `0') ADMSK<5:1> 10-Bit Addressing: SSPADD<7:0> = A0h (10100000) (the two MSbs of the address are ignored in this example, since they are not affected by masking) ADMSK<5:1> = 00111 Addresses Acknowledged: A0h, A1h, A2h, A3h, A4h, A5h, A6h, A7h, A8h, A9h, AAh, ABh, ACh, ADh, AEh, AFh = 00111 Addresses Acknowledged: A0h, A2h, A4h, A6h, A8h, AAh, ACh, AEh DS39770B-page 200 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.3.3 Reception 16.4.3.4 Transmission When the R/W bit of the address byte is clear and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the SSPSTAT register is cleared. The received address is loaded into the SSPBUF register and the SDA line is held low (ACK). When the address byte overflow condition exists, then the no Acknowledge (ACK) pulse is given. An overflow condition is defined as either bit, BF (SSPSTAT<0>), is set or bit, SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>), is set. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. The interrupt flag bit, SSPIF, must be cleared in software. The SSPSTAT register is used to determine the status of the byte. If SEN is enabled (SSPCON2<0> = 1), SCK/SCL will be held low (clock stretch) following each data transfer. The clock must be released by setting bit, CKP (SSPCON1<4>). See Section 16.4.4 "Clock Stretching" for more details. When the R/W bit of the incoming address byte is set and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the SSPSTAT register is set. The received address is loaded into the SSPBUF register. The ACK pulse will be sent on the ninth bit and pin RC3 is held low, regardless of SEN (see Section 16.4.4 "Clock Stretching" for more details). By stretching the clock, the master will be unable to assert another clock pulse until the slave is done preparing the transmit data. The transmit data must be loaded into the SSPBUF register which also loads the SSPSR register. Then, pin RC3 should be enabled by setting bit, CKP (SSPCON1<4>). The eight data bits are shifted out on the falling edge of the SCL input. This ensures that the SDA signal is valid during the SCL high time (Figure 16-10). The ACK pulse from the master-receiver is latched on the rising edge of the ninth SCL input pulse. If the SDA line is high (not ACK), then the data transfer is complete. In this case, when the ACK is latched by the slave, the slave logic is reset (resets SSPSTAT register) and the slave monitors for another occurrence of the Start bit. If the SDA line was low (ACK), the next transmit data must be loaded into the SSPBUF register. Again, pin RC3 must be enabled by setting bit, CKP. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. The SSPIF bit must be cleared in software and the SSPSTAT register is used to determine the status of the byte. The SSPIF bit is set on the falling edge of the ninth clock pulse. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 201 FIGURE 16-8: DS39770B-page 202 Receiving Address A5 ACK A4 A3 A2 A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 R/W = 0 Receiving Data ACK Receiving Data D1 D0 ACK 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Bus master terminates transfer Cleared in software SSPBUF is read SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. SDA A7 A6 SCL S 1 2 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY SSPIF (PIR1<3>) I2CTM SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) CKP (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. (CKP does not reset to `0' when SEN = 0) FIGURE 16-9: Receiving Address A5 ACK X A3 X X D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 R/W = 0 Receiving Data ACK Receiving Data ACK D0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Bus master terminates transfer Cleared in software SSPBUF is read SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. SDA A7 A6 SCL S 1 2 SSPIF (PIR1<3>) BF (SSPSTAT<0>) I2CTM SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 AND ADMSK<5:1> = 01011 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) CKP (CKP does not reset to `0' when SEN = 0) Note 1: x = Don't care (i.e., address bit can be either a `1' or a `0'). 2: In this example, an address equal to A7.A6.A5.X.A3.X.X will be Acknowledged and cause an interrupt. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DS39770B-page 203 FIGURE 16-10: DS39770B-page 204 R/W = 0 ACK D1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Transmitting Data D0 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Transmitting Data ACK A4 A3 A2 4 SCL held low while CPU responds to SSPIF 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Cleared in software From SSPIF ISR SSPBUF is written in software SSPBUF is written in software Cleared in software From SSPIF ISR Receiving Address SDA A7 A6 A5 SCL 1 2 3 S Data in sampled PIC18F85J90 FAMILY SSPIF (PIR1<3>) I2CTM SLAVE MODE TIMING (TRANSMISSION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary CKP is set in software BF (SSPSTAT<0>) CKP (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. CKP is set in software FIGURE 16-11: Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place R/W = 0 A8 D5 D4 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 ACK Receive Second Byte of Address Receive Data Byte Receive Data Byte D3 D2 D1 D0 Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place ACK (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 0 A9 5 6 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Bus master terminates transfer Cleared in software Cleared in software Cleared in software Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with low byte of address UA is set indicating that SSPADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with high byte of address Receive First Byte of Address SDA 1 1 1 1 SCL S 1 2 3 4 SSPIF (PIR1<3>) Cleared in software BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPBUF is written with contents of SSPSR I2CTM SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) UA (SSPSTAT<1>) UA is set indicating that the SSPADD needs to be updated CKP (CKP does not reset to `0' when SEN = 0) PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DS39770B-page 205 FIGURE 16-12: DS39770B-page 206 Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place R/W = 0 A8 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK A7 A6 A5 X A3 A2 X X D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 ACK Receive Second Byte of Address Receive Data Byte Receive Data Byte ACK Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place 6 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 7 8 9 P Bus master terminates transfer Cleared in software Cleared in software Cleared in software Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with low byte of address UA is set indicating that SSPADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with high byte of address Receive First Byte of Address SDA 1 1 1 1 0 A9 SCL S 1 2 3 4 5 SSPIF (PIR1<3>) Cleared in software PIC18F85J90 FAMILY BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPBUF is written with contents of SSPSR I2CTM SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 AND ADMSK<5:1> = 01001 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) UA (SSPSTAT<1>) UA is set indicating that the SSPADD needs to be updated CKP (CKP does not reset to `0' when SEN = 0) Note 1: x = Don't care (i.e., address bit can be either a `1' or a `0'). 2: In this example, an address equal to A9.A8.A7.A6.A5.X.A3.A2.X.X will be Acknowledged and cause an interrupt. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 3: Note that the Most Significant bits of the address are not affected by the bit masking. FIGURE 16-13: Bus master terminates transfer Clock is held low until CKP is set to `1' R/W = 1 ACK Transmitting Data Byte D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place R/W = 0 Receive Second Byte of Address Receive First Byte of Address ACK 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 0 A9 A8 Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place 5 Sr 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Cleared in software Cleared in software Cleared in software Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag Write of SSPBUF BF flag is clear initiates transmit at the end of the third address sequence Completion of data transmission clears BF flag Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with low byte of address UA is set indicating that SSPADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with high byte of address. CKP is set in software CKP is automatically cleared in hardware, holding SCL low Receive First Byte of Address SDA 1 1 1 1 SCL S 1 2 3 4 SSPIF (PIR1<3>) I2CTM SLAVE MODE TIMING (TRANSMISSION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPBUF is written with contents of SSPSR UA (SSPSTAT<1>) UA is set indicating that the SSPADD needs to be updated CKP (SSPCON1<4>) PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DS39770B-page 207 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.4 CLOCK STRETCHING 16.4.4.3 Both 7-Bit and 10-Bit Slave modes implement automatic clock stretching during a transmit sequence. The SEN bit (SSPCON2<0>) allows clock stretching to be enabled during receives. Setting SEN will cause the SCL pin to be held low at the end of each data receive sequence. Clock Stretching for 7-Bit Slave Transmit Mode The 7-Bit Slave Transmit mode implements clock stretching by clearing the CKP bit after the falling edge of the ninth clock if the BF bit is clear. This occurs regardless of the state of the SEN bit. The user's ISR must set the CKP bit before transmission is allowed to continue. By holding the SCL line low, the user has time to service the ISR and load the contents of the SSPBUF before the master device can initiate another transmit sequence (see Figure 16-10). Note 1: If the user loads the contents of SSPBUF, setting the BF bit before the falling edge of the ninth clock, the CKP bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. 2: The CKP bit can be set in software regardless of the state of the BF bit. 16.4.4.1 Clock Stretching for 7-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) In 7-Bit Slave Receive mode, on the falling edge of the ninth clock at the end of the ACK sequence, if the BF bit is set, the CKP bit in the SSPCON1 register is automatically cleared, forcing the SCL output to be held low. The CKP being cleared to `0' will assert the SCL line low. The CKP bit must be set in the user's ISR before reception is allowed to continue. By holding the SCL line low, the user has time to service the ISR and read the contents of the SSPBUF before the master device can initiate another receive sequence. This will prevent buffer overruns from occurring (see Figure 16-15). Note 1: If the user reads the contents of the SSPBUF before the falling edge of the ninth clock, thus clearing the BF bit, the CKP bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. 2: The CKP bit can be set in software regardless of the state of the BF bit. The user should be careful to clear the BF bit in the ISR before the next receive sequence in order to prevent an overflow condition. 16.4.4.4 Clock Stretching for 10-Bit Slave Transmit Mode In 10-Bit Slave Transmit mode, clock stretching is controlled during the first two address sequences by the state of the UA bit, just as it is in 10-Bit Slave Receive mode. The first two addresses are followed by a third address sequence which contains the high-order bits of the 10-bit address and the R/W bit set to `1'. After the third address sequence is performed, the UA bit is not set, the module is now configured in Transmit mode and clock stretching is controlled by the BF flag as in 7-Bit Slave Transmit mode (see Figure 16-13). 16.4.4.2 Clock Stretching for 10-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) In 10-Bit Slave Receive mode, during the address sequence, clock stretching automatically takes place but CKP is not cleared. During this time, if the UA bit is set after the ninth clock, clock stretching is initiated. The UA bit is set after receiving the upper byte of the 10-bit address and following the receive of the second byte of the 10-bit address with the R/W bit cleared to `0'. The release of the clock line occurs upon updating SSPADD. Clock stretching will occur on each data receive sequence as described in 7-bit mode. Note: If the user polls the UA bit and clears it by updating the SSPADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock occurs and if the user hasn't cleared the BF bit by reading the SSPBUF register before that time, then the CKP bit will still NOT be asserted low. Clock stretching on the basis of the state of the BF bit only occurs during a data sequence, not an address sequence. DS39770B-page 208 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.4.5 Clock Synchronization and the CKP bit When the CKP bit is cleared, the SCL output is forced to `0'. However, clearing the CKP bit will not assert the SCL output low until the SCL output is already sampled low. Therefore, the CKP bit will not assert the SCL line until an external I2C master device has already asserted the SCL line. The SCL output will remain low until the CKP bit is set and all other devices on the I2C bus have deasserted SCL. This ensures that a write to the CKP bit will not violate the minimum high time requirement for SCL (see Figure 16-14). FIGURE 16-14: CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TIMING Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 SDA DX DX - 1 SCL CKP Master device asserts clock Master device deasserts clock WR SSPCON (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 209 FIGURE 16-15: DS39770B-page 210 Clock is not held low because buffer full bit is clear prior to falling edge of 9th clock Clock is held low until CKP is set to `1' ACK Receiving Data D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D2 D1 D0 Receiving Address A5 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK R/W = 0 Receiving Data Clock is not held low because ACK = 1 ACK 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Bus master terminates transfer Cleared in software SSPBUF is read SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. SDA A7 A6 SCL S 1 2 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY SSPIF (PIR1<3>) I2CTM SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 1 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary If BF is cleared prior to the falling edge of the 9th clock, CKP will not be reset to `0' and no clock stretching will occur BF is set after falling edge of the 9th clock, CKP is reset to `0' and clock stretching occurs CKP written to `1' in software BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) CKP (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 16-16: Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place Clock is held low until CKP is set to `1' Receive Data Byte D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 R/W = 0 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Receive Second Byte of Address Receive Data Byte Clock is held low until update of SSPADD has taken place Clock is not held low because ACK = 1 ACK Receive First Byte of Address A9 A8 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 6 1 2 3 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Cleared in software Cleared in software Cleared in software Bus master terminates transfer Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag Dummy read of SSPBUF to clear BF flag SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with low byte of address after falling edge of ninth clock UA is set indicating that SSPADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPADD is updated with high byte of address after falling edge of ninth clock Note: An update of the SSPADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock will have no effect on UA and UA will remain set. CKP written to `1' in software Note: An update of the SSPADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock will have no effect on UA and UA will remain set. SDA 1 1 1 1 0 SCL S 1 2 3 4 5 SSPIF (PIR1<3>) Cleared in software BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPBUF is written with contents of SSPSR I2CTM SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 1 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) UA (SSPSTAT<1>) UA is set indicating that the SSPADD needs to be updated CKP PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DS39770B-page 211 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.5 GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SUPPORT The addressing procedure for the I2C bus is such that the first byte after the Start condition usually determines which device will be the slave addressed by the master. The exception is the general call address which can address all devices. When this address is used, all devices should, in theory, respond with an Acknowledge. The general call address is one of eight addresses reserved for specific purposes by the I2C protocol. It consists of all `0's with R/W = 0. The general call address is recognized when the General Call Enable bit, GCEN, is enabled (SSPCON2<7> set). Following a Start bit detect, 8 bits are shifted into the SSPSR and the address is compared against the SSPADD. It is also compared to the general call address and fixed in hardware. If the general call address matches, the SSPSR is transferred to the SSPBUF, the BF flag bit is set (eighth bit) and on the falling edge of the ninth bit (ACK bit), the SSPIF interrupt flag bit is set. When the interrupt is serviced, the source for the interrupt can be checked by reading the contents of the SSPBUF. The value can be used to determine if the address was device specific or a general call address. In 10-bit mode, the SSPADD is required to be updated for the second half of the address to match and the UA bit is set (SSPSTAT<1>). If the general call address is sampled when the GCEN bit is set, while the slave is configured in 10-Bit Address mode, then the second half of the address is not necessary, the UA bit will not be set and the slave will begin receiving data after the Acknowledge (Figure 16-17). FIGURE 16-17: SLAVE MODE GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SEQUENCE (7 OR 10-BIT ADDRESS MODE) Address is compared to General Call Address after ACK, set interrupt R/W = 0 Receiving Data D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK SDA SCL S SSPIF BF (SSPSTAT<0>) 1 General Call Address ACK D7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Cleared in software SSPBUF is read SSPOV (SSPCON1<6>) GCEN (SSPCON2<7>) `1' `0' DS39770B-page 212 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.6 MASTER MODE Note: Master mode is enabled by setting and clearing the appropriate SSPM bits in SSPCON1 and by setting the SSPEN bit. In Master mode, the SCL and SDA lines are manipulated by the MSSP hardware. Master mode of operation is supported by interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I 2C bus may be taken when the P bit is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the S and P bits clear. In Firmware Controlled Master mode, user code conducts all I 2C bus operations based on Start and Stop bit conditions. Once Master mode is enabled, the user has six options. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Assert a Start condition on SDA and SCL. Assert a Repeated Start condition on SDA and SCL. Write to the SSPBUF register initiating transmission of data/address. Configure the I2C port to receive data. Generate an Acknowledge condition at the end of a received byte of data. Generate a Stop condition on SDA and SCL. The MSSP module, when configured in I2C Master mode, does not allow queueing of events. For instance, the user is not allowed to initiate a Start condition and immediately write the SSPBUF register to initiate transmission before the Start condition is complete. In this case, the SSPBUF will not be written to and the WCOL bit will be set, indicating that a write to the SSPBUF did not occur. The following events will cause the MSSP Interrupt Flag bit, SSPIF, to be set (and MSSP interrupt, if enabled): * * * * * Start condition Stop condition Data transfer byte transmitted/received Acknowledge transmit Repeated Start FIGURE 16-18: MSSP BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2CTM MASTER MODE) Internal Data Bus Read SSPBUF Write Baud Rate Generator Clock Arbitrate/WCOL Detect (hold off clock source) DS39770B-page 213 Shift Clock SSPSR Receive Enable MSb LSb SSPM3:SSPM0 SSPADD<6:0> SDA SDA In SCL SCL In Bus Collision Start bit Detect Stop bit Detect Write Collision Detect Clock Arbitration State Counter for End of XMIT/RCV Set/Reset S, P, WCOL (SSPSTAT, SSPCON1) Set SSPIF, BCLIF Reset ACKSTAT, PEN (SSPCON2) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Clock Cntl Start bit, Stop bit, Acknowledge Generate PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.6.1 I2C Master Mode Operation A typical transmit sequence would go as follows: 1. The user generates a Start condition by setting the Start Enable bit, SEN (SSPCON2<0>). 2. SSPIF is set. The MSSP module will wait the required start time before any other operation takes place. 3. The user loads the SSPBUF with the slave address to transmit. 4. Address is shifted out the SDA pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. 5. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the SSPCON2 register (SSPCON2<6>). 6. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPIF bit. 7. The user loads the SSPBUF with eight bits of data. 8. Data is shifted out the SDA pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. 9. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the SSPCON2 register (SSPCON2<6>). 10. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPIF bit. 11. The user generates a Stop condition by setting the Stop Enable bit, PEN (SSPCON2<2>). 12. Interrupt is generated once the Stop condition is complete. The master device generates all of the serial clock pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will not be released. In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output through SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 bits) and the Read/Write (R/W) bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic `0'. Serial data is transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is transmitted, an Acknowledge bit is received. Start and Stop conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end of a serial transfer. In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the transmitting device (7 bits) and the R/W bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic `1'. Thus, the first byte transmitted is a 7-bit slave address followed by a `1' to indicate the receive bit. Serial data is received via SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. Serial data is received 8 bits at a time. After each byte is received, an Acknowledge bit is transmitted. Start and Stop conditions indicate the beginning and end of transmission. The Baud Rate Generator used for the SPI mode operation is used to set the SCL clock frequency for either 100 kHz, 400 kHz or 1 MHz I2C operation. See Section 16.4.7 "Baud Rate" for more detail. DS39770B-page 214 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.7 2 BAUD RATE In I C Master mode, the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) reload value is placed in the lower 7 bits of the SSPADD register (Figure 16-19). When a write occurs to SSPBUF, the Baud Rate Generator will automatically begin counting. The BRG counts down to `0' and stops until another reload has taken place. The BRG count is decremented twice per instruction cycle (TCY) on the Q2 and Q4 clocks. In I2C Master mode, the BRG is reloaded automatically. Once the given operation is complete (i.e., transmission of the last data bit is followed by ACK), the internal clock will automatically stop counting and the SCL pin will remain in its last state. Table 16-3 demonstrates clock rates based on instruction cycles and the BRG value loaded into SSPADD. 16.4.7.1 Baud Rate Generation in Power-Managed Modes When the device is operating in one of the power-managed modes, the clock source to the BRG may change frequency or even stop, depending on the mode and clock source selected. Switching to a Run or Idle mode from either the secondary clock or internal oscillator is likely to change the clock rate to the BRG. In Sleep mode, the BRG will not be clocked at all. FIGURE 16-19: BAUD RATE GENERATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM SSPM3:SSPM0 SSPADD<6:0> SSPM3:SSPM0 SCL Reload Control CLKO Reload BRG Down Counter FOSC/4 TABLE 16-3: FCY I2CTM CLOCK RATE w/BRG FCY * 2 20 MHz 20 MHz 20 MHz 8 MHz 8 MHz 8 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz I2C BRG Value 18h 1Fh 63h 09h 0Ch 27h 02h 09h 00h FSCL (2 Rollovers of BRG) 400 kHz(1) 312.5 kHz 100 kHz 400 kHz(1) 308 kHz 100 kHz 333 kHz(1) 100 kHz 1 MHz(1) 10 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz 4 MHz 4 MHz 4 MHz 1 MHz 1 MHz 1 MHz Note 1: I2CTM The interface does not conform to the 400 kHz specification (which applies to rates greater than 100 kHz) in all details, but may be used with care where higher rates are required by the application. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 215 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.7.2 Clock Arbitration Clock arbitration occurs when the master, during any receive, transmit or Repeated Start/Stop condition, deasserts the SCL pin (SCL allowed to float high). When the SCL pin is allowed to float high, the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is suspended from counting until the SCL pin is actually sampled high. When the SCL pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPADD<6:0> and begins counting. This ensures that the SCL high time will always be at least one BRG rollover count in the event that the clock is held low by an external device (Figure 16-20). FIGURE 16-20: SDA BAUD RATE GENERATOR TIMING WITH CLOCK ARBITRATION DX SCL deasserted but slave holds SCL low (clock arbitration) DX - 1 SCL allowed to transition high SCL BRG decrements on Q2 and Q4 cycles BRG Value 03h 02h 01h 00h (hold off) 03h 02h SCL is sampled high, reload takes place and BRG starts its count BRG Reload DS39770B-page 216 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.8 I2C MASTER MODE START CONDITION TIMING Note: To initiate a Start condition, the user sets the Start Enable bit, SEN (SSPCON2<0>). If the SDA and SCL pins are sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPADD<6:0> and starts its count. If SCL and SDA are both sampled high when the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SDA pin is driven low. The action of the SDA being driven low while SCL is high is the Start condition and causes the S bit (SSPSTAT<3>) to be set. Following this, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPADD<6:0> and resumes its count. When the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SEN bit (SSPCON2<0>) will be automatically cleared by hardware. The Baud Rate Generator is suspended, leaving the SDA line held low and the Start condition is complete. If at the beginning of the Start condition, the SDA and SCL pins are already sampled low, or if during the Start condition, the SCL line is sampled low before the SDA line is driven low, a bus collision occurs. The Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLIF, is set, the Start condition is aborted and the I2C module is reset into its Idle state. 16.4.8.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when a Start sequence is in progress, the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). Note: Because queueing of events is not allowed, writing to the lower 5 bits of SSPCON2 is disabled until the Start condition is complete. FIGURE 16-21: FIRST START BIT TIMING Set S bit (SSPSTAT<3>) SDA = 1, SCL = 1 At completion of Start bit, hardware clears SEN bit and sets SSPIF bit TBRG Write to SSPBUF occurs here 1st bit TBRG SCL TBRG S 2nd bit Write to SEN bit occurs here TBRG SDA (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 217 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.9 I2C MASTER MODE REPEATED START CONDITION TIMING Note 1: If RSEN is programmed while any other event is in progress, it will not take effect. 2: A bus collision during the Repeated Start condition occurs if: * SDA is sampled low when SCL goes from low-to-high. * SCL goes low before SDA is asserted low. This may indicate that another master is attempting to transmit a data `1'. Immediately following the SSPIF bit getting set, the user may write the SSPBUF with the 7-bit address in 7-bit mode or the default first address in 10-bit mode. After the first eight bits are transmitted and an ACK is received, the user may then transmit an additional eight bits of address (10-bit mode) or eight bits of data (7-bit mode). A Repeated Start condition occurs when the RSEN bit (SSPCON2<1>) is programmed high and the I2C logic module is in the Idle state. When the RSEN bit is set, the SCL pin is asserted low. When the SCL pin is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded with the contents of SSPADD<6:0> and begins counting. The SDA pin is released (brought high) for one Baud Rate Generator count (TBRG). When the Baud Rate Generator times out, if SDA is sampled high, the SCL pin will be deasserted (brought high). When SCL is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPADD<6:0> and begins counting. SDA and SCL must be sampled high for one TBRG. This action is then followed by assertion of the SDA pin (SDA = 0) for one TBRG while SCL is high. Following this, the RSEN bit (SSPCON2<1>) will be automatically cleared and the Baud Rate Generator will not be reloaded, leaving the SDA pin held low. As soon as a Start condition is detected on the SDA and SCL pins, the S bit (SSPSTAT<3>) will be set. The SSPIF bit will not be set until the Baud Rate Generator has timed out. 16.4.9.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when a Repeated Start sequence is in progress, the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). Note: Because queueing of events is not allowed, writing of the lower 5 bits of SSPCON2 is disabled until the Repeated Start condition is complete. FIGURE 16-22: REPEATED START CONDITION WAVEFORM S bit set by hardware SDA = 1, SCL = 1 Write to SSPCON2 occurs here: SDA = 1, SCL (no change) At completion of Start bit, hardware clears RSEN bit and sets SSPIF TBRG TBRG TBRG SDA RSEN bit set by hardware on falling edge of ninth clock, end of Xmit SCL TBRG 1st bit Write to SSPBUF occurs here TBRG Sr = Repeated Start DS39770B-page 218 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.10 I2C MASTER MODE TRANSMISSION Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address or the other half of a 10-bit address is accomplished by simply writing a value to the SSPBUF register. This action will set the Buffer Full bit, BF, and allow the Baud Rate Generator to begin counting and start the next transmission. Each bit of address/data will be shifted out onto the SDA pin after the falling edge of SCL is asserted (see data hold time specification parameter 106). SCL is held low for one Baud Rate Generator rollover count (TBRG). Data should be valid before SCL is released high (see data setup time specification parameter 107). When the SCL pin is released high, it is held that way for TBRG. The data on the SDA pin must remain stable for that duration and some hold time after the next falling edge of SCL. After the eighth bit is shifted out (the falling edge of the eighth clock), the BF flag is cleared and the master releases SDA. This allows the slave device being addressed to respond with an ACK bit during the ninth bit time if an address match occurred, or if data was received properly. The status of ACK is written into the ACKDT bit on the falling edge of the ninth clock. If the master receives an Acknowledge, the Acknowledge Status bit, ACKSTAT, is cleared; if not, the bit is set. After the ninth clock, the SSPIF bit is set and the master clock (Baud Rate Generator) is suspended until the next data byte is loaded into the SSPBUF, leaving SCL low and SDA unchanged (Figure 16-23). After the write to the SSPBUF, each bit of the address will be shifted out on the falling edge of SCL until all seven address bits and the R/W bit are completed. On the falling edge of the eighth clock, the master will deassert the SDA pin, allowing the slave to respond with an Acknowledge. On the falling edge of the ninth clock, the master will sample the SDA pin to see if the address was recognized by a slave. The status of the ACK bit is loaded into the ACKSTAT status bit (SSPCON2<6>). Following the falling edge of the ninth clock transmission of the address, the SSPIF is set, the BF flag is cleared and the Baud Rate Generator is turned off until another write to the SSPBUF takes place, holding SCL low and allowing SDA to float. The user should verify that the WCOL is clear after each write to SSPBUF to ensure the transfer is correct. In all cases, WCOL must be cleared in software. 16.4.10.3 ACKSTAT Status Flag In Transmit mode, the ACKSTAT bit (SSPCON2<6>) is cleared when the slave has sent an Acknowledge (ACK = 0) and is set when the slave does not Acknowledge (ACK = 1). A slave sends an Acknowledge when it has recognized its address (including a general call), or when the slave has properly received its data. 16.4.11 I2C MASTER MODE RECEPTION Master mode reception is enabled by programming the Receive Enable bit, RCEN (SSPCON2<3>). Note: The MSSP module must be in an Idle state before the RCEN bit is set or the RCEN bit will be disregarded. The Baud Rate Generator begins counting and on each rollover, the state of the SCL pin changes (high-to-low/low-to-high) and data is shifted into the SSPSR. After the falling edge of the eighth clock, the receive enable flag is automatically cleared, the contents of the SSPSR are loaded into the SSPBUF, the BF flag bit is set, the SSPIF flag bit is set and the Baud Rate Generator is suspended from counting, holding SCL low. The MSSP is now in Idle state awaiting the next command. When the buffer is read by the CPU, the BF flag bit is automatically cleared. The user can then send an Acknowledge bit at the end of reception by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN (SSPCON2<4>). 16.4.11.1 BF Status Flag In receive operation, the BF bit is set when an address or data byte is loaded into SSPBUF from SSPSR. It is cleared when the SSPBUF register is read. 16.4.11.2 SSPOV Status Flag In receive operation, the SSPOV bit is set when 8 bits are received into the SSPSR and the BF flag bit is already set from a previous reception. 16.4.11.3 16.4.10.1 BF Status Flag In Transmit mode, the BF bit (SSPSTAT<0>) is set when the CPU writes to SSPBUF and is cleared when all 8 bits are shifted out. WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when a receive is already in progress (i.e., SSPSR is still shifting in a data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). 16.4.10.2 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes to the SSPBUF when a transmit is already in progress (i.e., SSPSR is still shifting out a data byte), the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur) after 2 TCY after the SSPBUF write. If SSPBUF is rewritten within 2 TCY, the WCOL bit is set and SSPBUF is updated. This may result in a corrupted transfer. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 219 FIGURE 16-23: DS39770B-page 220 Write SSPCON2<0> (SEN = 1), Start condition begins From slave, clear ACKSTAT bit (SSPCON2<6>) R/W = 0 ACKSTAT in SSPCON2 = 1 SEN = 0 Transmit Address to Slave SDA SSPBUF written with 7-bit address and R/W start transmit SCL S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 SCL held low while CPU responds to SSPIF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P A7 ACK = 0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Transmitting Data or Second Half of 10-bit Address D0 ACK PIC18F85J90 FAMILY SSPIF Cleared in software Cleared in software service routine from MSSP interrupt I 2CTM MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (TRANSMISSION, 7 OR 10-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary BF (SSPSTAT<0>) SSPBUF written SEN After Start condition, SEN cleared by hardware PEN R/W Cleared in software SSPBUF is written in software (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 16-24: Write to SSPCON2<4> to start Acknowledge sequence, SDA = ACKDT (SSPCON2<5>) = 0 Master configured as a receiver by programming SSPCON2<3> (RCEN = 1) ACK from Slave R/W = 0 ACK Receiving Data from Slave Receiving Data from Slave RCEN cleared automatically ACK RCEN = 1, start next receive RCEN cleared automatically ACK from Master, SDA = ACKDT = 0 Set ACKEN, start Acknowledge sequence, SDA = ACKDT = 1 PEN bit = 1 written here (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK ACK is not sent Bus master terminates transfer Write to SSPCON2<0> (SEN = 1), begin Start condition SEN = 0 Write to SSPBUF occurs here, start XMIT Transmit Address to Slave SDA A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 SCL S Set SSPIF interrupt at end of receive 1 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 9 Set SSPIF at end of receive P Set SSPIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence Data shifted in on falling edge of CLK SSPIF Cleared in software Cleared in software Set SSPIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence Cleared in software Cleared in software I 2CTM MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) Preliminary SDA = 0, SCL = 1 while CPU responds to SSPIF Cleared in software Set P bit (SSPSTAT<4>) and SSPIF BF (SSPSTAT<0>) Last bit is shifted into SSPSR and contents are unloaded into SSPBUF SSPOV SSPOV is set because SSPBUF is still full ACKEN PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DS39770B-page 221 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.12 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE TIMING 16.4.13 STOP CONDITION TIMING An Acknowledge sequence is enabled by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN (SSPCON2<4>). When this bit is set, the SCL pin is pulled low and the contents of the Acknowledge data bit are presented on the SDA pin. If the user wishes to generate an Acknowledge, then the ACKDT bit should be cleared. If not, the user should set the ACKDT bit before starting an Acknowledge sequence. The Baud Rate Generator then counts for one rollover period (TBRG) and the SCL pin is deasserted (pulled high). When the SCL pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator counts for TBRG. The SCL pin is then pulled low. Following this, the ACKEN bit is automatically cleared, the Baud Rate Generator is turned off and the MSSP module then goes into Idle mode (Figure 16-25). A Stop bit is asserted on the SDA pin at the end of a receive/transmit by setting the Stop Sequence Enable bit, PEN (SSPCON2<2>). At the end of a receive/transmit, the SCL line is held low after the falling edge of the ninth clock. When the PEN bit is set, the master will assert the SDA line low. When the SDA line is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded and counts down to `0'. When the Baud Rate Generator times out, the SCL pin will be brought high and one TBRG (Baud Rate Generator rollover count) later, the SDA pin will be deasserted. When the SDA pin is sampled high while SCL is high, the P bit (SSPSTAT<4>) is set. A TBRG later, the PEN bit is cleared and the SSPIF bit is set (Figure 16-26). 16.4.13.1 WCOL Status Flag 16.4.12.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPBUF when an Acknowledge sequence is in progress, then WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). If the user writes the SSPBUF when a Stop sequence is in progress, then the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn't occur). FIGURE 16-25: ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE WAVEFORM Acknowledge sequence starts here, write to SSPCON2, ACKEN = 1, ACKDT = 0 SDA D0 ACKEN automatically cleared TBRG ACK TBRG SCL 8 9 SSPIF Cleared in software SSPIF set at the end of Acknowledge sequence SSPIF set at the end of receive Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. Cleared in software FIGURE 16-26: STOP CONDITION RECEIVE OR TRANSMIT MODE Write to SSPCON2, set PEN Falling edge of 9th clock TBRG SCL = 1 for TBRG, followed by SDA = 1 for TBRG after SDA sampled high. P bit (SSPSTAT<4>) is set. PEN bit (SSPCON2<2>) is cleared by hardware and the SSPIF bit is set SCL SDA ACK P TBRG TBRG TBRG SCL brought high after TBRG SDA asserted low before rising edge of clock to setup Stop condition Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. DS39770B-page 222 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.14 SLEEP OPERATION 2 16.4.17 While in Sleep mode, the I C module can receive addresses or data and when an address match or complete byte transfer occurs, wake the processor from Sleep (if the MSSP interrupt is enabled). MULTI -MASTER COMMUNICATION, BUS COLLISION AND BUS ARBITRATION 16.4.15 EFFECTS OF A RESET A Reset disables the MSSP module and terminates the current transfer. 16.4.16 MULTI-MASTER MODE In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I 2C bus may be taken when the P bit (SSPSTAT<4>) is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the S and P bits clear. When the bus is busy, enabling the MSSP interrupt will generate the interrupt when the Stop condition occurs. In multi-master operation, the SDA line must be monitored for arbitration to see if the signal level is the expected output level. This check is performed in hardware with the result placed in the BCLIF bit. The states where arbitration can be lost are: * * * * * Address Transfer Data Transfer A Start Condition A Repeated Start Condition An Acknowledge Condition Multi-Master mode support is achieved by bus arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits onto the SDA pin, arbitration takes place when the master outputs a `1' on SDA by letting SDA float high, and another master asserts a `0'. When the SCL pin floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data on SDA is a `1' and the data sampled on the SDA pin = 0, then a bus collision has taken place. The master will set the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLIF and reset the I2C port to its Idle state (Figure 16-27). If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the transmission is halted, the BF flag is cleared, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted and the SSPBUF can be written to. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. If a Start, Repeated Start, Stop or Acknowledge condition was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the condition is aborted, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted and the respective control bits in the SSPCON2 register are cleared. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. The master will continue to monitor the SDA and SCL pins. If a Stop condition occurs, the SSPIF bit will be set. A write to the SSPBUF will start the transmission of data at the first data bit regardless of where the transmitter left off when the bus collision occurred. In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C bus can be taken when the P bit is set in the SSPSTAT register, or the bus is Idle and the S and P bits are cleared. FIGURE 16-27: BUS COLLISION TIMING FOR TRANSMIT AND ACKNOWLEDGE Data changes while SCL = 0 SDA line pulled low by another source SDA released by master Sample SDA. While SCL is high, data doesn't match what is driven by the master. Bus collision has occurred. SDA SCL Set bus collision interrupt (BCLIF) BCLIF (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 223 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.17.1 Bus Collision During a Start Condition During a Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) b) SDA or SCL are sampled low at the beginning of the Start condition (Figure 16-28). SCL is sampled low before SDA is asserted low (Figure 16-29). If the SDA pin is sampled low during this count, the BRG is reset and the SDA line is asserted early (Figure 16-30). If, however, a `1' is sampled on the SDA pin, the SDA pin is asserted low at the end of the BRG count. The Baud Rate Generator is then reloaded and counts down to `0'. If the SCL pin is sampled as `0' during this time, a bus collision does not occur. At the end of the BRG count, the SCL pin is asserted low. Note: The reason that bus collision is not a factor during a Start condition is that no two bus masters can assert a Start condition at the exact same time. Therefore, one master will always assert SDA before the other. This condition does not cause a bus collision because the two masters must be allowed to arbitrate the first address following the Start condition. If the address is the same, arbitration must be allowed to continue into the data portion, Repeated Start or Stop conditions. During a Start condition, both the SDA and the SCL pins are monitored. If the SDA pin is already low, or the SCL pin is already low, then all of the following occur: * the Start condition is aborted; * the BCLIF flag is set; and * the MSSP module is reset to its Idle state (Figure 16-28). The Start condition begins with the SDA and SCL pins deasserted. When the SDA pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded from SSPADD<6:0> and counts down to `0'. If the SCL pin is sampled low while SDA is high, a bus collision occurs, because it is assumed that another master is attempting to drive a data `1' during the Start condition. FIGURE 16-28: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SDA ONLY) SDA goes low before the SEN bit is set. Set BCLIF, S bit and SSPIF set because SDA = 0, SCL = 1. SDA SCL Set SEN, enable Start condition if SDA = 1, SCL = 1 SEN SDA sampled low before Start condition. Set BCLIF. S bit and SSPIF set because SDA = 0, SCL = 1. SSPIF and BCLIF are cleared in software S SEN cleared automatically because of bus collision. MSSP module reset into Idle state. BCLIF SSPIF SSPIF and BCLIF are cleared in software DS39770B-page 224 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 16-29: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SCL = 0) SDA = 0, SCL = 1 TBRG TBRG SDA SCL Set SEN, enable Start sequence if SDA = 1, SCL = 1 SCL = 0 before SDA = 0, bus collision occurs. Set BCLIF. SCL = 0 before BRG time-out, bus collision occurs. Set BCLIF. SEN BCLIF Interrupt cleared in software S SSPIF `0' `0' `0' `0' FIGURE 16-30: BRG RESET DUE TO SDA ARBITRATION DURING START CONDITION SDA = 0, SCL = 1 Set S Less than TBRG TBRG Set SSPIF SDA SDA pulled low by other master. Reset BRG and assert SDA. SCL S SCL pulled low after BRG time-out Set SEN, enable Start sequence if SDA = 1, SCL = 1 SEN BCLIF `0' S SSPIF SDA = 0, SCL = 1, set SSPIF Interrupts cleared in software (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 225 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.17.2 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition During a Repeated Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) b) A low level is sampled on SDA when SCL goes from low level to high level. SCL goes low before SDA is asserted low, indicating that another master is attempting to transmit a data `1'. If SDA is low, a bus collision has occurred (i.e., another master is attempting to transmit a data `0', see Figure 16-31). If SDA is sampled high, the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. If SDA goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out, no bus collision occurs because no two masters can assert SDA at exactly the same time. If SCL goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out and SDA has not already been asserted, a bus collision occurs. In this case, another master is attempting to transmit a data `1' during the Repeated Start condition (see Figure 16-32). If, at the end of the BRG time-out, both SCL and SDA are still high, the SDA pin is driven low and the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. At the end of the count, regardless of the status of the SCL pin, the SCL pin is driven low and the Repeated Start condition is complete. When the user deasserts SDA and the pin is allowed to float high, the BRG is loaded with SSPADD<6:0> and counts down to `0'. The SCL pin is then deasserted and when sampled high, the SDA pin is sampled. FIGURE 16-31: SDA BUS COLLISION DURING A REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 1) SCL Sample SDA when SCL goes high. If SDA = 0, set BCLIF and release SDA and SCL. RSEN BCLIF Cleared in software S SSPIF `0' `0' FIGURE 16-32: BUS COLLISION DURING REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 2) TBRG TBRG SDA SCL SCL goes low before SDA, set BCLIF. Release SDA and SCL. Interrupt cleared in software RSEN S SSPIF `0' BCLIF DS39770B-page 226 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 16.4.17.3 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition Bus collision occurs during a Stop condition if: a) After the SDA pin has been deasserted and allowed to float high, SDA is sampled low after the BRG has timed out. After the SCL pin is deasserted, SCL is sampled low before SDA goes high. The Stop condition begins with SDA asserted low. When SDA is sampled low, the SCL pin is allowed to float. When the pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator is loaded with SSPADD<6:0> and counts down to `0'. After the BRG times out, SDA is sampled. If SDA is sampled low, a bus collision has occurred. This is due to another master attempting to drive a data `0' (Figure 16-33). If the SCL pin is sampled low before SDA is allowed to float high, a bus collision occurs. This is another case of another master attempting to drive a data `0' (Figure 16-34). b) FIGURE 16-33: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 1) TBRG TBRG TBRG SDA sampled low after TBRG, set BCLIF SDA SDA asserted low SCL PEN BCLIF P SSPIF `0' `0' FIGURE 16-34: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 2) TBRG TBRG TBRG SDA Assert SDA SCL PEN BCLIF P SSPIF `0' `0' SCL goes low before SDA goes high, set BCLIF (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 227 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 16-4: Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 PIR2 PIE2 IPR2 TRISC SSPBUF SSPADD SSPCON1 SSPCON2 SSPSTAT REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH I2CTM OPERATION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP -- -- -- TRISC5 Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP -- -- -- TRISC4 Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP BCLIF BCLIE BCLIP TRISC3 Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- LVDIF LVDIE LVDIP TRISC2 Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP TMR3IF TMR3IE TMR3IP TRISC1 Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP -- -- -- TRISC0 Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 52 52 SSPM2 PEN R/W SSPM1 RSEN UA SSPM0 SEN SEN BF I2CTM mode. 52 52 52 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL -- -- -- OSCFIF OSCFIE OSCFIP TRISC7 ADIF ADIE ADIP CMIF CMIE CMIP TRISC6 MSSP Receive Buffer/Transmit Register MSSP Address Register (I2CTM Slave mode), MSSP Baud Rate Reload Register (I2C Master mode) WCOL GCEN GCEN SMP SSPOV ACKSTAT CKE SSPEN ACKDT D/A CKP ACKEN P SSPM3 RCEN S ACKSTAT ADMSK5(1) ADMSK4(1) ADMSK3(1) ADMSK2(1) ADMSK1(1) Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the MSSP module in Note 1: Alternate bit definitions for use in I2C Slave mode operations only. DS39770B-page 228 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.0 ENHANCED UNIVERSAL SYNCHRONOUS ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER TRANSMITTER (EUSART) The pins of the EUSART are multiplexed with the functions of PORTC (RC6/TX1/CK1/SEG27 and RC7/RX1/DT1/SEG28). In order to configure these pins as an EUSART: * bit SPEN (RCSTA1<7>) must be set (= 1) * bit TRISC<7> must be set (= 1) * bit TRISC<6> must be set (= 1) Note: The EUSART control will automatically reconfigure the pin from input to output as needed. PIC18F85J90 family devices have three serial I/O modules: the MSSP module, discussed in the previous chapter and two Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (USART) modules. (Generically, the USART is also known as a Serial Communications Interface or SCI.) The USART can be configured as a full-duplex asynchronous system that can communicate with peripheral devices, such as CRT terminals and personal computers. It can also be configured as a half-duplex synchronous system that can communicate with peripheral devices, such as A/D or D/A integrated circuits, serial EEPROMs, etc. There are two distinct implementations of the USART module in these devices: the Enhanced USART (EUSART) discussed here and the Addressable USART discussed in the next chapter. For this device family, USART1 always refers to the EUSART, while USART2 is always the AUSART. The EUSART and AUSART modules implement the same core features for serial communications; their basic operation is essentially the same. The EUSART module provides additional features, including Automatic Baud Rate Detection and calibration, automatic wake-up on Sync Break reception and 12-bit Break character transmit. These features make it ideally suited for use in Local Interconnect Network bus (LIN bus) systems. The EUSART can be configured in the following modes: * Asynchronous (full-duplex) with: - Auto-wake-up on character reception - Auto-baud calibration - 12-bit Break character transmission * Synchronous - Master (half-duplex) with selectable clock polarity * Synchronous - Slave (half-duplex) with selectable clock polarity The driver for the TX1 output pin can also be optionally configured as an open-drain output. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor, and allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. The open-drain output option is controlled by the U1OD bit (LATG<6>). Setting the bit configures the pin for open-drain operation. 17.1 Control Registers The operation of the Enhanced USART module is controlled through three registers: * Transmit Status and Control Register 1 (TXSTA1) * Receive Status and Control Register 1 (RCSTA1) * Baud Rate Control Register 1 (BAUDCON1) The registers are described Register 17-2 and Register 17-3. in Register 17-1, (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 229 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 17-1: R/W-0 CSRC bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown TXSTA1: EUSART TRANSMIT STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 TXEN(1) R/W-0 SYNC R/W-0 SENDB R/W-0 BRGH R-1 TRMT R/W-0 TX9D bit 0 TX9 R/W-0 CSRC: Clock Source Select bit Asynchronous mode: Don't care. Synchronous mode: 1 = Master mode (clock generated internally from BRG) 0 = Slave mode (clock from external source) TX9: 9-Bit Transmit Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit transmission 0 = Selects 8-bit transmission TXEN: Transmit Enable bit(1) 1 = Transmit enabled 0 = Transmit disabled SYNC: AUSART Mode Select bit 1 = Synchronous mode 0 = Asynchronous mode SENDB: Send Break Character bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Send Sync Break on next transmission (cleared by hardware upon completion) 0 = Sync Break transmission completed Synchronous mode: Don't care. BRGH: High Baud Rate Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = High speed 0 = Low speed Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. TRMT: Transmit Shift Register Status bit 1 = TSR empty 0 = TSR full TX9D: 9th bit of Transmit Data Can be address/data bit or a parity bit. SREN/CREN overrides TXEN in Sync mode. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: DS39770B-page 230 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 17-2: R/W-0 SPEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown RCSTA1: EUSART RECEIVE STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 SREN R/W-0 CREN R/W-0 ADDEN R-0 FERR R-0 OERR R-x RX9D bit 0 RX9 R/W-0 SPEN: Serial Port Enable bit 1 = Serial port enabled (configures RX1/DT1 and TX1/CK1 pins as serial port pins) 0 = Serial port disabled (held in Reset) RX9: 9-Bit Receive Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit reception 0 = Selects 8-bit reception SREN: Single Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: Don't care. Synchronous mode - Master: 1 = Enables single receive 0 = Disables single receive This bit is cleared after reception is complete. Synchronous mode - Slave: Don't care. CREN: Continuous Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Enables receiver 0 = Disables receiver Synchronous mode: 1 = Enables continuous receive until enable bit CREN is cleared (CREN overrides SREN) 0 = Disables continuous receive ADDEN: Address Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode 9-bit (RX9 = 1): 1 = Enables address detection, enables interrupt and loads the receive buffer when RSR<8> is set 0 = Disables address detection, all bytes are received and ninth bit can be used as parity bit Asynchronous mode 9-bit (RX9 = 0): Don't care. FERR: Framing Error bit 1 = Framing error (can be updated by reading RCREG1 register and receiving next valid byte) 0 = No framing error OERR: Overrun Error bit 1 = Overrun error (can be cleared by clearing bit CREN) 0 = No overrun error RX9D: 9th bit of Received Data This can be address/data bit or a parity bit and must be calculated by user firmware. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 231 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 17-3: R/W-0 ABDOVF bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown BAUDCON1: BAUD RATE CONTROL REGISTER 1 R-1 U-0 -- R/W-0 SCKP R/W-0 BRG16 U-0 -- R/W-0 WUE R/W-0 ABDEN bit 0 RCMT ABDOVF: Auto-Baud Acquisition Rollover Status bit 1 = A BRG rollover has occurred during Auto-Baud Rate Detect mode (must be cleared in software) 0 = No BRG rollover has occurred RCMT: Receive Operation Idle Status bit 1 = Receive operation is Idle 0 = Receive operation is active Unimplemented: Read as `0' SCKP: Synchronous Clock Polarity Select bit Asynchronous mode: Unused in this mode. Synchronous mode: 1 = Idle state for clock (CK1) is a high level 0 = Idle state for clock (CK1) is a low level BRG16: 16-Bit Baud Rate Register Enable bit 1 = 16-bit Baud Rate Generator - SPBRGH1 and SPBRG1 0 = 8-bit Baud Rate Generator - SPBRG1 only (Compatible mode), SPBRGH1 value ignored Unimplemented: Read as `0' WUE: Wake-up Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = EUSART will continue to sample the RX1 pin - interrupt generated on falling edge; bit cleared in hardware on following rising edge 0 = RX1 pin not monitored or rising edge detected Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. ABDEN: Auto-Baud Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Enable baud rate measurement on the next character. Requires reception of a Sync field (55h); cleared in hardware upon completion. 0 = Baud rate measurement disabled or completed Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 DS39770B-page 232 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.2 EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG) geous to use the high baud rate (BRGH = 1) or the 16-bit BRG to reduce the baud rate error, or achieve a slow baud rate for a fast oscillator frequency. Writing a new value to the SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 registers causes the BRG timer to be reset (or cleared). This ensures the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow before outputting the new baud rate. The BRG is a dedicated, 8-bit or 16-bit generator that supports both the Asynchronous and Synchronous modes of the EUSART. By default, the BRG operates in 8-bit mode; setting the BRG16 bit (BAUDCON1<3>) selects 16-bit mode. The SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 register pair controls the period of a free-running timer. In Asynchronous mode, BRGH (TXSTA1<2>) and BRG16 (BAUDCON1<3>) bits also control the baud rate. In Synchronous mode, BRGH is ignored. Table 17-1 shows the formula for computation of the baud rate for different EUSART modes that only apply in Master mode (internally generated clock). Given the desired baud rate and FOSC, the nearest integer value for the SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 registers can be calculated using the formulas in Table 17-1. From this, the error in baud rate can be determined. An example calculation is shown in Example 17-1. Typical baud rates and error values for the various Asynchronous modes are shown in Table 17-2. It may be advanta- 17.2.1 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES The device clock is used to generate the desired baud rate. When one of the power-managed modes is entered, the new clock source may be operating at a different frequency. This may require an adjustment to the value in the SPBRG1 register pair. 17.2.2 SAMPLING The data on the RX1 pin is sampled three times by a majority detect circuit to determine if a high or a low level is present at the RX1 pin. TABLE 17-1: SYNC BAUD RATE FORMULAS BRG/EUSART Mode Baud Rate Formula FOSC/[64 (n + 1)] FOSC/[16 (n + 1)] Configuration Bits BRG16 BRGH 0 0 0 8-bit/Asynchronous 0 0 1 8-bit/Asynchronous 0 1 0 16-bit/Asynchronous 0 1 1 16-bit/Asynchronous 1 0 x 8-bit/Synchronous 1 1 x 16-bit/Synchronous Legend: x = Don't care, n = Value of SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 register pair FOSC/[4 (n + 1)] EXAMPLE 17-1: CALCULATING BAUD RATE ERROR For a device with FOSC of 16 MHz, desired baud rate of 9600, Asynchronous mode, 8-bit BRG: Desired Baud Rate = FOSC/(64 ([SPBRGH1:SPBRG1] + 1)) Solving for SPBRGH1:SPBRG1: X = ((FOSC/Desired Baud Rate)/64) - 1 = ((16000000/9600)/64) - 1 = [25.042] = 25 Calculated Baud Rate = 16000000/(64 (25 + 1)) = 9615 Error = (Calculated Baud Rate - Desired Baud Rate)/Desired Baud Rate = (9615 - 9600)/9600 = 0.16% TABLE 17-2: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE BAUD RATE GENERATOR Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TX9D RX9D ABDEN Reset Values on Page 53 53 55 55 53 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TXSTA1 RCSTA1 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR BAUDCON1 ABDOVF RCMT -- SCKP BRG16 -- WUE SPBRGH1 EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte SPBRG1 EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the BRG. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 233 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 17-3: BAUD RATE (K) BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 FOSC = 20.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.221 2.404 9.766 19.531 62.500 104.167 % Error -- 1.73 0.16 1.73 1.73 8.51 -9.58 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 40.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- -- 2.441 9.615 19.531 56.818 125.000 % Error -- -- 1.73 0.16 1.73 -1.36 8.51 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 10.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.202 2.404 9.766 19.531 52.083 78.125 % Error -- 0.16 0.16 1.73 1.73 -9.58 -32.18 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.201 2.403 9.615 -- -- -- % Error -- -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 -- -- 255 64 31 10 4 -- 255 129 31 15 4 2 -- 129 64 15 7 2 1 -- 103 51 12 -- -- -- SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.202 2.404 8.929 20.833 62.500 62.500 % Error 0.16 0.16 0.16 -6.99 8.51 8.51 -45.75 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 2.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 2.403 -- -- -- -- % Error -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 -- -- -- -- -- % Error -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 207 51 25 6 2 0 0 103 25 12 -- -- -- -- 51 12 -- -- -- -- -- SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- -- -- 9.766 19.231 58.140 113.636 % Error -- -- -- 1.73 0.16 0.94 -1.36 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 20.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- -- -- 9.615 19.231 56.818 113.636 % Error -- -- -- 0.16 0.16 -1.36 -1.36 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 10.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- -- 2.441 9.615 19.531 56.818 125.000 % Error -- -- 1.73 0.16 1.73 -1.36 8.51 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- -- 2.403 9.615 19.230 55.555 -- % Error -- -- -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 3.55 -- SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 -- -- -- 255 129 42 21 -- -- -- 129 64 21 10 -- -- 255 64 31 10 4 -- -- 207 51 25 8 -- SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.202 2.404 9.615 19.231 62.500 125.000 % Error -- 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 8.51 8.51 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 2.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.201 2.403 9.615 -- -- -- % Error -- -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 2.403 -- -- -- -- % Error -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 -- 207 103 25 12 3 1 -- 103 51 12 -- -- -- 207 51 25 -- -- -- -- DS39770B-page 234 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 17-3: BAUD RATE (K) BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED) SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 FOSC = 20.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.200 2.399 9.615 19.231 56.818 113.636 % Error 0.02 -0.03 -0.03 0.16 0.16 -1.36 -1.36 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 40.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.200 2.402 9.615 19.231 58.140 113.636 % Error 0.00 0.02 0.06 0.16 0.16 0.94 -1.36 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 10.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.200 2.404 9.615 19.531 56.818 125.000 % Error 0.02 -0.03 0.16 0.16 1.73 -1.36 8.51 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 2.403 9.615 19.230 55.555 -- % Error -0.04 -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 3.55 -- SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 8332 2082 1040 259 129 42 21 4165 1041 520 129 64 21 10 2082 520 259 64 31 10 4 1665 415 207 51 25 8 -- SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.202 2.404 9.615 19.231 62.500 125.000 % Error 0.04 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 8.51 8.51 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 2.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 2.403 9.615 -- -- -- % Error -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 2.403 -- -- -- -- % Error -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 832 207 103 25 12 3 1 415 103 51 12 -- -- -- 207 51 25 -- -- -- -- SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.200 2.400 9.606 19.193 57.803 114.943 % Error 0.00 0.00 0.02 0.06 -0.03 0.35 -0.22 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 20.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.200 2.400 9.596 19.231 57.471 116.279 % Error 0.00 0.02 0.02 -0.03 0.16 -0.22 0.94 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 10.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.200 2.402 9.615 19.231 58.140 113.636 % Error 0.00 0.02 0.06 0.16 0.16 0.94 -1.36 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.200 2.400 9.615 19.230 57.142 117.647 % Error -0.01 -0.04 -0.04 -0.16 -0.16 0.79 -2.12 SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 33332 8332 4165 1040 520 172 86 16665 4165 2082 520 259 86 42 8332 2082 1040 259 129 42 21 6665 1665 832 207 103 34 16 SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.200 2.404 9.615 19.231 58.824 111.111 % Error 0.01 0.04 0.16 0.16 0.16 2.12 -3.55 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 2.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 2.403 9.615 19.230 55.555 -- % Error -0.04 -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 3.55 -- SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 2.403 9.615 19.230 -- -- % Error -0.04 -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 3332 832 415 103 51 16 8 1665 415 207 51 25 8 -- 832 207 103 25 12 -- -- (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 235 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.2.3 AUTO-BAUD RATE DETECT The Enhanced USART module supports the automatic detection and calibration of baud rate. This feature is active only in Asynchronous mode and while the WUE bit is clear. The automatic baud rate measurement sequence (Figure 17-1) begins whenever a Start bit is received and the ABDEN bit is set. The calculation is self-averaging. In the Auto-Baud Rate Detect (ABD) mode, the clock to the BRG is reversed. Rather than the BRG clocking the incoming RX1 signal, the RX1 signal is timing the BRG. In ABD mode, the internal Baud Rate Generator is used as a counter to time the bit period of the incoming serial byte stream. Once the ABDEN bit is set, the state machine will clear the BRG and look for a Start bit. The Auto-Baud Rate Detect must receive a byte with the value, 55h (ASCII "U", which is also the LIN bus Sync character), in order to calculate the proper bit rate. The measurement is taken over both a low and a high bit time in order to minimize any effects caused by asymmetry of the incoming signal. After a Start bit, the SPBRG1 begins counting up, using the preselected clock source on the first rising edge of RX1. After eight bits on the RX1 pin or the fifth rising edge, an accumulated value totalling the proper BRG period is left in the SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 register pair. Once the 5th edge is seen (this should correspond to the Stop bit), the ABDEN bit is automatically cleared. If a rollover of the BRG occurs (an overflow from FFFFh to 0000h), the event is trapped by the ABDOVF status bit (BAUDCON1<7>). It is set in hardware by BRG rollovers and can be set or cleared by the user in software. ABD mode remains active after rollover events and the ABDEN bit remains set (Figure 17-2). While calibrating the baud rate period, the BRG registers are clocked at 1/8th the preconfigured clock rate. Note that the BRG clock will be configured by the BRG16 and BRGH bits. Independent of the BRG16 bit setting, both the SPBRG1 and SPBRGH1 will be used as a 16-bit counter. This allows the user to verify that no carry occurred for 8-bit modes by checking for 00h in the SPBRGH1 register. Refer to Table 17-4 for counter clock rates to the BRG. While the ABD sequence takes place, the EUSART state machine is held in Idle. The RC1IF interrupt is set once the fifth rising edge on RX1 is detected. The value in the RCREG1 needs to be read to clear the RC1IF interrupt. The contents of RCREG1 should be discarded. Note 1: If the WUE bit is set with the ABDEN bit, Auto-Baud Rate Detection will occur on the byte following the Break character. 2: It is up to the user to determine that the incoming character baud rate is within the range of the selected BRG clock source. Some combinations of oscillator frequency and EUSART baud rates are not possible due to bit error rates. Overall system timing and communication baud rates must be taken into consideration when using the Auto-Baud Rate Detection feature. TABLE 17-4: BRG16 0 0 1 1 Note: BRGH 0 1 0 1 BRG COUNTER CLOCK RATES BRG Counter Clock FOSC/512 FOSC/128 FOSC/128 FOSC/32 During the ABD sequence, SPBRG1 and SPBRGH1 are both used as a 16-bit counter, independent of the BRG16 setting. 17.2.3.1 ABD and EUSART Transmission Since the BRG clock is reversed during ABD acquisition, the EUSART transmitter cannot be used during ABD. This means that whenever the ABDEN bit is set, TXREG1 cannot be written to. Users should also ensure that ABDEN does not become set during a transmit sequence. Failing to do this may result in unpredictable EUSART operation. DS39770B-page 236 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 17-1: BRG Value AUTOMATIC BAUD RATE CALCULATION XXXXh 0000h Edge #1 bit 1 Edge #2 bit 3 Edge #3 bit 5 Edge #4 bit 7 001Ch Edge #5 Stop bit Start RX1 pin bit 0 bit 2 bit 4 bit 6 BRG Clock Set by User ABDEN bit RC1IF bit (Interrupt) Read RCREG1 SPBRG1 SPBRGH1 XXXXh XXXXh 1Ch 00h Auto-Cleared Note: The ABD sequence requires the EUSART module to be configured in Asynchronous mode and WUE = 0. FIGURE 17-2: BRG Clock ABDEN bit RX1 pin ABDOVF bit BRG OVERFLOW SEQUENCE Start bit 0 FFFFh BRG Value XXXXh 0000h 0000h (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 237 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.3 EUSART Asynchronous Mode The Asynchronous mode of operation is selected by clearing the SYNC bit (TXSTA1<4>). In this mode, the EUSART uses standard Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) format (one Start bit, eight or nine data bits and one Stop bit). The most common data format is 8 bits. An on-chip dedicated 8-bit/16-bit Baud Rate Generator can be used to derive standard baud rate frequencies from the oscillator. The EUSART transmits and receives the LSb first. The EUSART's transmitter and receiver are functionally independent, but use the same data format and baud rate. The Baud Rate Generator produces a clock, either x16 or x64 of the bit shift rate, depending on the BRGH and BRG16 bits (TXSTA1<2> and BAUDCON1<3>). Parity is not supported by the hardware but can be implemented in software and stored as the 9th data bit. When operating in Asynchronous mode, the EUSART module consists of the following important elements: * * * * * * * Baud Rate Generator Sampling Circuit Asynchronous Transmitter Asynchronous Receiver Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break Character 12-Bit Break Character Transmit Auto-Baud Rate Detection Once the TXREG1 register transfers the data to the TSR register (occurs in one TCY), the TXREG1 register is empty and the TX1IF flag bit (PIR1<4>) is set. This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the interrupt enable bit, TX1IE (PIE1<4>). TX1IF will be set regardless of the state of TX1IE; it cannot be cleared in software. TX1IF is also not cleared immediately upon loading TXREG1, but becomes valid in the second instruction cycle following the load instruction. Polling TX1IF immediately following a load of TXREG1 will return invalid results. While TX1IF indicates the status of the TXREG1 register, another bit, TRMT (TXSTA1<1>), shows the status of the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit which is set when the TSR register is empty. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit so the user has to poll this bit in order to determine if the TSR register is empty. Note 1: The TSR register is not mapped in data memory so it is not available to the user. 2: Flag bit, TX1IF, is set when enable bit, TXEN, is set. To set up an Asynchronous Transmission: 1. Initialize the SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing bit SYNC and setting bit SPEN. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TX1IE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set transmit bit, TX9; can be used as address/data bit. Enable the transmission by setting bit, TXEN, which will also set bit, TX1IF. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit TX9D. Load data to the TXREG1 register (starts transmission). If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 17.3.1 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMITTER The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 17-3. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit (Serial) Shift register (TSR). The Shift register obtains its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register, TXREG1. The TXREG1 register is loaded with data in software. The TSR register is not loaded until the Stop bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As soon as the Stop bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded with new data from the TXREG1 register (if available). FIGURE 17-3: EUSART TRANSMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus TX1IF TXREG1 Register 8 MSb (8) Interrupt TXEN Baud Rate CLK TRMT SPEN *** TSR Register LSb 0 Pin Buffer and Control TX1 pin TX1IE BRG16 SPBRGH1 SPBRG1 TX9 TX9D Baud Rate Generator DS39770B-page 238 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 17-4: Write to TXREG1 BRG Output (Shift Clock) TX1 (pin) TX1IF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg. Empty Flag) Word 1 ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Start bit bit 0 bit 1 Word 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit 1 TCY TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg FIGURE 17-5: Write to TXREG1 ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (BACK TO BACK) Word 2 Word 1 BRG Output (Shift Clock) TX1 (pin) 1 TCY Start bit bit 0 bit 1 Word 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit Word 2 bit 0 TX1IF bit (Interrupt Reg. Flag) 1 TCY TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) Note: Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg. Word 2 Transmit Shift Reg. This timing diagram shows two consecutive transmissions. TABLE 17-5: Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 RCSTA1 TXREG1 TXSTA1 BAUDCON1 SPBRGH1 SPBRG1 LATG REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP SREN TXEN -- Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP CREN SYNC SCKP Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP ADDEN SENDB BRG16 Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- FERR BRGH -- Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP OERR TRMT WUE Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP RX9D TX9D ABDEN Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 53 53 53 55 55 53 LATG2 LATG1 LATG0 54 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL -- -- -- SPEN CSRC ABDOVF ADIF ADIE ADIP RX9 TX9 RCMT EUSART Transmit Register EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte U2OD U1OD -- LATG4 LATG3 Legend: -- = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous transmission. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 239 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.3.2 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER 17.3.3 SETTING UP 9-BIT MODE WITH ADDRESS DETECT The receiver block diagram is shown in Figure 17-6. The data is received on the RX1 pin and drives the data recovery block. The data recovery block is actually a high-speed shifter operating at x16 times the baud rate, whereas the main receive serial shifter operates at the bit rate or at FOSC. This mode would typically be used in RS-232 systems. To set up an Asynchronous Reception: 1. Initialize the SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing bit SYNC and setting bit, SPEN. 3. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RC1IE. 4. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. 5. Enable the reception by setting bit, CREN. 6. Flag bit, RC1IF, will be set when reception is complete and an interrupt will be generated if enable bit, RC1IE, was set. 7. Read the RCSTA1 register to get the 9th bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 8. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREG1 register. 9. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing enable bit CREN. 10. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. This mode would typically be used in RS-485 systems. To set up an Asynchronous Reception with Address Detect Enable: Initialize the SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing the SYNC bit and setting the SPEN bit. 3. If interrupts are required, set the RCEN bit and select the desired priority level with the RC1IP bit. 4. Set the RX9 bit to enable 9-bit reception. 5. Set the ADDEN bit to enable address detect. 6. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. 7. The RC1IF bit will be set when reception is complete. The interrupt will be Acknowledged if the RC1IE and GIE bits are set. 8. Read the RCSTA1 register to determine if any error occurred during reception, as well as read bit 9 of data (if applicable). 9. Read RCREG1 to determine if the device is being addressed. 10. If any error occurred, clear the CREN bit. 11. If the device has been addressed, clear the ADDEN bit to allow all received data into the receive buffer and interrupt the CPU. 1. FIGURE 17-6: EUSART RECEIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM CREN x64 Baud Rate CLK OERR FERR BRG16 SPBRGH1 SPBRG1 Baud Rate Generator / 64 or / 16 or /4 MSb Stop (8) 7 RSR Register *** 1 0 LSb Start RX9 Pin Buffer and Control RX1 Data Recovery RX9D RCREG1 Register FIFO SPEN 8 Interrupt RC1IF RC1IE Data Bus DS39770B-page 240 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 17-7: RX1 (pin) Rcv Shift Reg Rcv Buffer Reg RCREG1 Read Rcv Buffer Reg RC1IF (Interrupt Flag) OERR bit CREN bit Note: This timing diagram shows three words appearing on the RX1 input. The RCREG1 (Receive Buffer register) is read after the third word causing the OERR (Overrun) bit to be set. Word 1 RCREG1 ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit bit 0 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 2 RCREG1 TABLE 17-6: Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 RCSTA1 RCREG1 TXSTA1 BAUDCON1 SPBRGH1 SPBRG1 REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP CREN SYNC SCKP Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP ADDEN SENDB BRG16 Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- FERR BRGH -- Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP OERR TRMT WUE Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP RX9D TX9D ABDEN Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 53 53 53 55 55 53 -- GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE -- -- -- SPEN CSRC ABDOVF ADIF ADIE ADIP RX9 TX9 RCMT RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP SREN TXEN EUSART Receive Register EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte Legend: -- = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous reception. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 241 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.3.4 AUTO-WAKE-UP ON SYNC BREAK CHARACTER During Sleep mode, all clocks to the EUSART are suspended. Because of this, the Baud Rate Generator is inactive and a proper byte reception cannot be performed. The auto-wake-up feature allows the controller to wake-up, due to activity on the RX1/DT1 line, while the EUSART is operating in Asynchronous mode. The auto-wake-up feature is enabled by setting the WUE bit (BAUDCON<1>). Once set, the typical receive sequence on RX1/DT1 is disabled and the EUSART remains in an Idle state, monitoring for a wake-up event independent of the CPU mode. A wake-up event consists of a high-to-low transition on the RX1/DT1 line. (This coincides with the start of a Sync Break or a Wake-up Signal character for the LIN protocol.) Following a wake-up event, the module generates an RC1IF interrupt. The interrupt is generated synchronously to the Q clocks in normal operating modes (Figure 17-8) and asynchronously, if the device is in Sleep mode (Figure 17-9). The interrupt condition is cleared by reading the RCREG1 register. The WUE bit is automatically cleared once a low-to-high transition is observed on the RX1 line following the wake-up event. At this point, the EUSART module is in Idle mode and returns to normal operation. This signals to the user that the Sync Break event is over. end-of-character and cause data or framing errors. Therefore, to work properly, the initial character in the transmission must be all `0's. This can be 00h (8 bytes) for standard RS-232 devices, or 000h (12 bits) for LIN bus. Oscillator start-up time must also be considered, especially in applications using oscillators with longer start-up intervals (i.e., XT or HS mode). The Sync Break (or Wake-up Signal) character must be of sufficient length and be followed by a sufficient interval to allow enough time for the selected oscillator to start and provide proper initialization of the EUSART. 17.3.4.2 Special Considerations Using the WUE Bit The timing of WUE and RC1IF events may cause some confusion when it comes to determining the validity of received data. As noted, setting the WUE bit places the EUSART in an Idle mode. The wake-up event causes a receive interrupt by setting the RC1IF bit. The WUE bit is cleared after this when a rising edge is seen on RX1/DT1. The interrupt condition is then cleared by reading the RCREG1 register. Ordinarily, the data in RCREG1 will be dummy data and should be discarded. The fact that the WUE bit has been cleared (or is still set) and the RC1IF flag is set should not be used as an indicator of the integrity of the data in RCREG1. Users should consider implementing a parallel method in firmware to verify received data integrity. To assure that no actual data is lost, check the RCMT bit to verify that a receive operation is not in process. If a receive operation is not occurring, the WUE bit may then be set just prior to entering the Sleep mode. 17.3.4.1 Special Considerations Using Auto-Wake-up Since auto-wake-up functions by sensing rising edge transitions on RX1/DT1, information with any state changes before the Stop bit may signal a false FIGURE 17-8: OSC1 AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING NORMAL OPERATION Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Bit set by user WUE bit(1) RX1/DT1 Line RC1IF Auto-Cleared Cleared due to user read of RCREG1 Note 1: The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. FIGURE 17-9: OSC1 AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING SLEEP Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Bit set by user WUE bit(2) RX1/DT1 Line RC1IF SLEEP Command Executed Note 1: 2: Sleep Ends Note 1 Auto-Cleared Cleared due to user read of RCREG1 If the wake-up event requires long oscillator warm-up time, the auto-clear of the WUE bit can occur while the stposc signal is still active. This sequence should not depend on the presence of Q clocks. The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. DS39770B-page 242 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.3.5 BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE The Enhanced USART module has the capability of sending the special Break character sequences that are required by the LIN bus standard. The Break character transmit consists of a Start bit, followed by twelve `0' bits and a Stop bit. The Frame Break character is sent whenever the SENDB and TXEN bits (TXSTA<3> and TXSTA<5>) are set while the Transmit Shift register is loaded with data. Note that the value of data written to TXREG1 will be ignored and all `0's will be transmitted. The SENDB bit is automatically reset by hardware after the corresponding Stop bit is sent. This allows the user to preload the transmit FIFO with the next transmit byte following the Break character (typically, the Sync character in the LIN specification). Note that the data value written to the TXREG1 for the Break character is ignored. The write simply serves the purpose of initiating the proper sequence. The TRMT bit indicates when the transmit operation is active or Idle, just as it does during normal transmission. See Figure 17-10 for the timing of the Break character sequence. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Configure the EUSART for the desired mode. Set the TXEN and SENDB bits to set up the Break character. Load the TXREG1 with a dummy character to initiate transmission (the value is ignored). Write `55h' to TXREG1 to load the Sync character into the transmit FIFO buffer. After the Break has been sent, the SENDB bit is reset by hardware. The Sync character now transmits in the preconfigured mode. When the TXREG1 becomes empty, as indicated by the TX1IF, the next data byte can be written to TXREG1. 17.3.6 RECEIVING A BREAK CHARACTER The Enhanced USART module can receive a Break character in two ways. The first method forces configuration of the baud rate at a frequency of 9/13 the typical speed. This allows for the Stop bit transition to be at the correct sampling location (13 bits for Break versus Start bit and 8 data bits for typical data). The second method uses the auto-wake-up feature described in Section 17.3.4 "Auto-Wake-up On Sync Break Character". By enabling this feature, the EUSART will sample the next two transitions on RX1/DT1, cause an RC1IF interrupt and receive the next data byte followed by another interrupt. Note that following a Break character, the user will typically want to enable the Auto-Baud Rate Detect feature. For both methods, the user can set the ABD bit once the TX1IF interrupt is observed. 17.3.5.1 Break and Sync Transmit Sequence The following sequence will send a message frame header made up of a Break, followed by an Auto-Baud Sync byte. This sequence is typical of a LIN bus master. FIGURE 17-10: Write to TXREG1 BRG Output (Shift Clock) TX1 (pin) SEND BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE Dummy Write Start bit bit 0 bit 1 Break bit 11 Stop bit TX1IF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg. Empty Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) SENDB sampled here SENDB (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) Auto-Cleared (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 243 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.4 EUSART Synchronous Master Mode Once the TXREG1 register transfers the data to the TSR register (occurs in one TCYCLE), the TXREG1 is empty and the TX1IF flag bit (PIR1<4>) is set. The interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the interrupt enable bit, TX1IE (PIE1<4>). TX1IF is set regardless of the state of enable bit TX1IE; it cannot be cleared in software. It will reset only when new data is loaded into the TXREG1 register. While flag bit TX1IF indicates the status of the TXREG1 register, another bit, TRMT (TXSTA<1>), shows the status of the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit which is set when the TSR is empty. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit so the user has to poll this bit in order to determine if the TSR register is empty. The TSR is not mapped in data memory so it is not available to the user. To set up a Synchronous Master Transmission: 1. Initialize the SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRG16 bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TX1IE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set bit, TX9. Enable the transmission by setting bit, TXEN. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit TX9D. Start transmission by loading data to the TXREG1 register. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. The Synchronous Master mode is entered by setting the CSRC bit (TXSTA<7>). In this mode, the data is transmitted in a half-duplex manner (i.e., transmission and reception do not occur at the same time). When transmitting data, the reception is inhibited and vice versa. Synchronous mode is entered by setting bit SYNC (TXSTA<4>). In addition, enable bit, SPEN (RCSTA1<7>), is set in order to configure the TX1 and RX1 pins to CK1 (clock) and DT1 (data) lines, respectively. The Master mode indicates that the processor transmits the master clock on the CK1 line. Clock polarity is selected with the SCKP bit (BAUDCON<4>). Setting SCKP sets the Idle state on CK1 as high, while clearing the bit sets the Idle state as low. This option is provided to support Microwire devices with this module. 17.4.1 EUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 17-3. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit (Serial) Shift register (TSR). The Shift register obtains its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register, TXREG1. The TXREG1 register is loaded with data in software. The TSR register is not loaded until the last bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As soon as the last bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded with new data from the TXREG1 (if available). FIGURE 17-11: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 RC7/RX1/DT1 pin RC6/TX1/CK1 pin (SCKP = 0) RC6/TX1/CK1 pin (SCKP = 1) Write to TXREG1 Reg TX1IF bit (Interrupt Flag) TRMT bit TXEN bit Note: `1' bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 7 Word 1 Word 2 Write Word 1 Write Word 2 `1' Sync Master mode, SPBRG1 = 0; continuous transmission of two 8-bit words. DS39770B-page 244 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 17-12: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (THROUGH TXEN) bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 6 bit 7 RC7/RX1/DT1 pin RC6/TX1/CK1 pin Write to TXREG1 Reg TX1IF bit TRMT bit TXEN bit TABLE 17-7: Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 RCSTA1 TXREG1 TXSTA1 SPBRGH1 SPBRG1 LATG REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP CREN SYNC SCKP Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP ADDEN SENDB BRG16 Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- FERR BRGH -- Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP OERR TRMT WUE Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP RX9D TX9D ABDEN Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 53 53 53 55 55 53 LATG2 LATG1 LATG0 54 -- GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE -- -- -- SPEN CSRC ADIF ADIE ADIP RX9 TX9 RCMT RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP SREN TXEN EUSART Transmit Register BAUDCON1 ABDOVF EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte U2OD U1OD -- LATG4 LATG3 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master transmission. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 245 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.4.2 EUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION Once Synchronous mode is selected, reception is enabled by setting either the Single Receive Enable bit, SREN (RCSTA1<5>), or the Continuous Receive Enable bit, CREN (RCSTA1<4>). Data is sampled on the RX1 pin on the falling edge of the clock. If enable bit SREN is set, only a single word is received. If enable bit CREN is set, the reception is continuous until CREN is cleared. If both bits are set, then CREN takes precedence. To set up a Synchronous Master Reception: 1. Initialize the SPBRGH1:SPBRG1 registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRG16 bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits, SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. Ensure bits, CREN and SREN, are clear. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RC1IE. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. If a single reception is required, set bit, SREN. For continuous reception, set bit, CREN. 7. Interrupt flag bit, RC1IF, will be set when reception is complete and an interrupt will be generated if the enable bit, RC1IE, was set. 8. Read the RCSTA1 register to get the 9th bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 9. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREG1 register. 10. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing bit, CREN. 11. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2. FIGURE 17-13: SYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION (MASTER MODE, SREN) Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 RC7/RX1/DT1 pin RC6/TX1/CK1 pin (SCKP = 0) RC6/TX1/CK1 pin (SCKP = 1) Write to SREN bit SREN bit CREN bit `0' RC1IF bit (Interrupt) Read RCREG1 Note: bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 `0' Timing diagram demonstrates Sync Master mode with bit SREN = 1 and bit BRGH = 0. TABLE 17-8: Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 RCSTA1 RCREG1 TXSTA1 SPBRGH1 SPBRG1 REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP SREN TXEN -- Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP CREN SYNC SCKP Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP ADDEN SENDB BRG16 Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- FERR BRGH -- Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP OERR TRMT WUE Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP RX9D TX9D ABDEN Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 53 53 53 55 55 53 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL -- -- -- SPEN CSRC ADIF ADIE ADIP RX9 TX9 RCMT EUSART Receive Register BAUDCON1 ABDOVF EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master reception. DS39770B-page 246 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.5 EUSART Synchronous Slave Mode To set up a Synchronous Slave Transmission: 1. Enable the synchronous slave serial port by setting bits SYNC and SPEN and clearing bit CSRC. Clear bits CREN and SREN. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TX1IE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set bit, TX9. Enable the transmission by setting enable bit, TXEN. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit TX9D. Start transmission by loading data to the TXREG1 register. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. Synchronous Slave mode is entered by clearing bit CSRC (TXSTA<7>). This mode differs from the Synchronous Master mode in that the shift clock is supplied externally at the CK1 pin (instead of being supplied internally in Master mode). This allows the device to transfer or receive data while in any low-power mode. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 17.5.1 EUSART SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMIT The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes are identical except in the case of the Sleep mode. If two words are written to the TXREG1 and then the SLEEP instruction is executed, the following will occur: a) b) c) d) The first word will immediately transfer to the TSR register and transmit. The second word will remain in the TXREG1 register. Flag bit, TX1IF, will not be set. When the first word has been shifted out of TSR, the TXREG1 register will transfer the second word to the TSR and flag bit, TX1IF, will now be set. If enable bit, TX1IE, is set, the interrupt will wake the chip from Sleep. If the global interrupt is enabled, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. e) TABLE 17-9: Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 RCSTA1 TXREG1 TXSTA1 SPBRGH1 SPBRG1 LATG REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP SREN TXEN -- Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP CREN SYNC SCKP Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP ADDEN SENDB BRG16 Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- FERR BRGH -- Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP OERR TRMT WUE Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP RX9D TX9D ABDEN Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 53 53 53 55 55 53 LATG2 LATG1 LATG0 54 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL -- -- -- SPEN CSRC ADIF ADIE ADIP RX9 TX9 RCMT EUSART Transmit Register BAUDCON1 ABDOVF EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte U2OD U1OD -- LATG4 LATG3 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave transmission. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 247 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 17.5.2 EUSART SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION To set up a Synchronous Slave Reception: 1. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits SYNC and SPEN and clearing bit CSRC. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RC1IE. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. To enable reception, set enable bit, CREN. Flag bit, RC1IF, will be set when reception is complete. An interrupt will be generated if enable bit, RC1IE, was set. Read the RCSTA1 register to get the 9th bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREG1 register. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing bit, CREN. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes is identical except in the case of Sleep or any Idle mode, and bit SREN, which is a "don't care" in Slave mode. If receive is enabled by setting the CREN bit prior to entering Sleep or any Idle mode, then a word may be received while in this low-power mode. Once the word is received, the RSR register will transfer the data to the RCREG1 register; if the RC1IE enable bit is set, the interrupt generated will wake the chip from the low-power mode. If the global interrupt is enabled, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. TABLE 17-10: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 RCSTA1 RCREG1 TXSTA1 SPBRGH1 SPBRG1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP CREN SYNC SCKP Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP ADDEN SENDB BRG16 Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- FERR BRGH -- Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP OERR TRMT WUE Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP RX9D TX9D ABDEN Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 53 53 53 55 55 53 -- GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE -- -- -- SPEN CSRC ADIF ADIE ADIP RX9 TX9 RCMT RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP SREN TXEN EUSART Receive Register BAUDCON1 ABDOVF EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave reception. DS39770B-page 248 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 18.0 ADDRESSABLE UNIVERSAL SYNCHRONOUS ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER TRANSMITTER (AUSART) Note: The AUSART control will automatically reconfigure the pin from input to output as needed. The Addressable Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (AUSART) module is very similar in function to the Enhanced USART module, discussed in the previous chapter. It is provided as an additional channel for serial communication with external devices, for those situations that do not require auto-baud detection or LIN bus support. The AUSART can be configured in the following modes: * Asynchronous (full-duplex) * Synchronous - Master (half-duplex) * Synchronous - Slave (half-duplex) The pins of the AUSART module are multiplexed with the functions of PORTG (RG1/TX2/CK2 and RG2/RX2/DT2/VLCAP1, respectively). In order to configure these pins as an AUSART: * bit SPEN (RCSTA2<7>) must be set (= 1) * bit TRISG<2> must be set (= 1) * bit TRISG<1> must be cleared (= 0) for Asynchronous and Synchronous Master modes * bit TRISG<1> must be set (= 1) for Synchronous Slave mode The driver for the TX2 output pin can also be optionally configured as an open-drain output. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor, and allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. The open-drain output option is controlled by the U2OD bit (LATG<7>). Setting the bit configures the pin for open-drain operation. 18.1 Control Registers The operation of the Addressable USART module is controlled through two registers, TXSTA2 and RXSTA2. These are detailed in Register 18-1 and Register 18-2, respectively. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 249 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 18-1: R/W-0 CSRC bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown TXSTA2: AUSART TRANSMIT STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 TXEN(1) R/W-0 SYNC U-0 -- R/W-0 BRGH R-1 TRMT R/W-0 TX9D bit 0 TX9 R/W-0 CSRC: Clock Source Select bit Asynchronous mode: Don't care. Synchronous mode: 1 = Master mode (clock generated internally from BRG) 0 = Slave mode (clock from external source) TX9: 9-Bit Transmit Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit transmission 0 = Selects 8-bit transmission TXEN: Transmit Enable bit(1) 1 = Transmit enabled 0 = Transmit disabled SYNC: AUSART Mode Select bit 1 = Synchronous mode 0 = Asynchronous mode Unimplemented: Read as `0' BRGH: High Baud Rate Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = High speed 0 = Low speed Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. TRMT: Transmit Shift Register Status bit 1 = TSR empty 0 = TSR full TX9D: 9th bit of Transmit Data Can be address/data bit or a parity bit. SREN/CREN overrides TXEN in Sync mode. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: DS39770B-page 250 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 18-2: R/W-0 SPEN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown RCSTA2: AUSART RECEIVE STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 SREN R/W-0 CREN R/W-0 ADDEN R-0 FERR R-0 OERR R-x RX9D bit 0 RX9 R/W-0 SPEN: Serial Port Enable bit 1 = Serial port enabled (configures RX2/DT2 and TX2/CK2 pins as serial port pins) 0 = Serial port disabled (held in Reset) RX9: 9-Bit Receive Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit reception 0 = Selects 8-bit reception SREN: Single Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: Don't care. Synchronous mode - Master: 1 = Enables single receive 0 = Disables single receive This bit is cleared after reception is complete. Synchronous mode - Slave: Don't care. CREN: Continuous Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Enables receiver 0 = Disables receiver Synchronous mode: 1 = Enables continuous receive until enable bit CREN is cleared (CREN overrides SREN) 0 = Disables continuous receive ADDEN: Address Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode 9-bit (RX9 = 1): 1 = Enables address detection, enables interrupt and loads the receive buffer when RSR<8> is set 0 = Disables address detection, all bytes are received and ninth bit can be used as parity bit Asynchronous mode 9-bit (RX9 = 0): Don't care. FERR: Framing Error bit 1 = Framing error (can be updated by reading RCREG2 register and receiving next valid byte) 0 = No framing error OERR: Overrun Error bit 1 = Overrun error (can be cleared by clearing bit CREN) 0 = No overrun error RX9D: 9th bit of Received Data This can be address/data bit or a parity bit and must be calculated by user firmware. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 251 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 18.2 AUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG) Writing a new value to the SPBRG2 register causes the BRG timer to be reset (or cleared). This ensures the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow before outputting the new baud rate. The BRG is a dedicated, 8-bit generator that supports both the Asynchronous and Synchronous modes of the AUSART. The SPBRG2 register controls the period of a free-running timer. In Asynchronous mode, bit BRGH (TXSTA<2>) also controls the baud rate. In Synchronous mode, BRGH is ignored. Table 18-1 shows the formula for computation of the baud rate for different AUSART modes, which only apply in Master mode (internally generated clock). Given the desired baud rate and FOSC, the nearest integer value for the SPBRG2 register can be calculated using the formulas in Table 18-1. From this, the error in baud rate can be determined. An example calculation is shown in Example 18-1. Typical baud rates and error values for the various Asynchronous modes are shown in Table 18-2. It may be advantageous to use the high baud rate (BRGH = 1) to reduce the baud rate error, or achieve a slow baud rate for a fast oscillator frequency. 18.2.1 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES The device clock is used to generate the desired baud rate. When one of the power-managed modes is entered, the new clock source may be operating at a different frequency. This may require an adjustment to the value in the SPBRG2 register. 18.2.2 SAMPLING The data on the RX2 pin is sampled three times by a majority detect circuit to determine if a high or a low level is present at the RX2 pin. TABLE 18-1: BAUD RATE FORMULAS BRG/AUSART Mode Baud Rate Formula FOSC/[64 (n + 1)] FOSC/[16 (n + 1)] FOSC/[4 (n + 1)] Configuration Bits SYNC 0 0 1 BRGH 0 1 x Asynchronous Asynchronous Synchronous Legend: x = Don't care, n = Value of SPBRG2 register EXAMPLE 18-1: CALCULATING BAUD RATE ERROR For a device with FOSC of 16 MHz, desired baud rate of 9600, Asynchronous mode, BRGH = 0: Desired Baud Rate = FOSC/(64 ([SPBRG2] + 1)) Solving for SPBRG2: X = ((FOSC/Desired Baud Rate)/64) - 1 = ((16000000/9600)/64) - 1 = [25.042] = 25 Calculated Baud Rate = 16000000/(64 (25 + 1)) = 9615 Error = (Calculated Baud Rate - Desired Baud Rate)/Desired Baud Rate = (9615 - 9600)/9600 = 0.16% TABLE 18-2: Name TXSTA2 RCSTA2 SPBRG2 REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE BAUD RATE GENERATOR Bit 7 CSRC SPEN Bit 6 TX9 RX9 Bit 5 TXEN SREN Bit 4 SYNC CREN Bit 3 -- ADDEN Bit 2 BRGH FERR Bit 1 TRMT OERR Bit 0 TX9D RX9D Reset Values on Page 56 56 56 AUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Legend: Shaded cells are not used by the BRG. DS39770B-page 252 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 18-3: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES BRGH = 0 FOSC = 40.000 MHz BAUD RATE (K) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 Actual Rate (K) -- -- 2.441 9.615 19.531 56.818 125.000 % Error -- -- 1.73 0.16 1.73 -1.36 8.51 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 20.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.221 2.404 9.766 19.531 62.500 104.167 % Error -- 1.73 0.16 1.73 1.73 8.51 -9.58 BRGH = 0 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 10.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.202 2.404 9.766 19.531 52.083 78.125 % Error -- 0.16 0.16 1.73 1.73 -9.58 -32.18 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.201 2.403 9.615 -- -- -- % Error -- -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) -- -- 255 64 31 10 4 -- 255 129 31 15 4 2 -- 129 64 15 7 2 1 -- 103 51 12 -- -- -- FOSC = 4.000 MHz BAUD RATE (K) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.202 2.404 8.929 20.833 62.500 62.500 % Error 0.16 0.16 0.16 -6.99 8.51 8.51 -45.75 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 2.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 2.403 -- -- -- -- % Error -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 -- -- -- -- -- % Error -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) 207 51 25 6 2 0 0 103 25 12 -- -- -- -- 51 12 -- -- -- -- -- BRGH = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- -- -- 9.766 19.231 58.140 113.636 % Error -- -- -- 1.73 0.16 0.94 -1.36 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 20.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- -- -- 9.615 19.231 56.818 113.636 % Error -- -- -- 0.16 0.16 -1.36 -1.36 BRGH = 1 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 10.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- -- 2.441 9.615 19.531 56.818 125.000 % Error -- -- 1.73 0.16 1.73 -1.36 8.51 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- -- 2.403 9.615 19.230 55.555 -- % Error -- -- -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 3.55 -- SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 -- -- -- 255 129 42 21 -- -- -- 129 64 21 10 -- -- 255 64 31 10 4 -- -- 207 51 25 8 -- BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.202 2.404 9.615 19.231 62.500 125.000 % Error -- 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 8.51 8.51 SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 2.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) -- 1.201 2.403 9.615 -- -- -- % Error -- -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) 0.300 1.201 2.403 -- -- -- -- % Error -0.16 -0.16 -0.16 -- -- -- -- SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 -- 207 103 25 12 3 1 -- 103 51 12 -- -- -- 207 51 25 -- -- -- -- (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 253 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 18.3 AUSART Asynchronous Mode The Asynchronous mode of operation is selected by clearing the SYNC bit (TXSTA2<4>). In this mode, the AUSART uses standard Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) format (one Start bit, eight or nine data bits and one Stop bit). The most common data format is 8 bits. An on-chip, dedicated, 8-bit Baud Rate Generator can be used to derive standard baud rate frequencies from the oscillator. The AUSART transmits and receives the LSb first. The AUSART's transmitter and receiver are functionally independent but use the same data format and baud rate. The Baud Rate Generator produces a clock, either x16 or x64 of the bit shift rate, depending on the BRGH bit (TXSTA2<2>). Parity is not supported by the hardware but can be implemented in software and stored as the 9th data bit. When operating in Asynchronous mode, the AUSART module consists of the following important elements: * * * * Baud Rate Generator Sampling Circuit Asynchronous Transmitter Asynchronous Receiver Once the TXREG2 register transfers the data to the TSR register (occurs in one TCY), the TXREG2 register is empty and the TX2IF flag bit (PIR3<4>) is set. This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the interrupt enable bit, TX2IE (PIE3<4>). TX2IF will be set regardless of the state of TX2IE; it cannot be cleared in software. TX2IF is also not cleared immediately upon loading TXREG2, but becomes valid in the second instruction cycle following the load instruction. Polling TX2IF immediately following a load of TXREG2 will return invalid results. While TX2IF indicates the status of the TXREG2 register, another bit, TRMT (TXSTA2<1>), shows the status of the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit which is set when the TSR register is empty. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit so the user has to poll this bit in order to determine if the TSR register is empty. Note 1: The TSR register is not mapped in data memory so it is not available to the user. 2: Flag bit, TX2IF, is set when enable bit, TXEN, is set. To set up an Asynchronous Transmission: 1. Initialize the SPBRG2 register for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing bit SYNC and setting bit SPEN. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TX2IE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set transmit bit, TX9. Can be used as address/data bit. Enable the transmission by setting bit, TXEN, which will also set bit, TX2IF. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit, TX9D. Load data to the TXREG2 register (starts transmission). If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. 18.3.1 AUSART ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMITTER 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. The AUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 18-1. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit (Serial) Shift register (TSR). The Shift register obtains its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register, TXREG2. The TXREG2 register is loaded with data in software. The TSR register is not loaded until the Stop bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As soon as the Stop bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded with new data from the TXREG2 register (if available). FIGURE 18-1: AUSART TRANSMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus TX2IF TXREG2 Register 8 MSb (8) *** TSR Register LSb 0 Pin Buffer and Control TX2 pin TX2IE Interrupt TXEN Baud Rate CLK TRMT SPBRG2 TX9 Baud Rate Generator TX9D SPEN DS39770B-page 254 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 18-2: Write to TXREG2 BRG Output (Shift Clock) TX2 (pin) TX2IF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg. Empty Flag) Word 1 ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Start bit bit 0 bit 1 Word 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit 1 TCY TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg FIGURE 18-3: Write to TXREG2 ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (BACK TO BACK) Word 2 Word 1 BRG Output (Shift Clock) TX2 (pin) 1 TCY Start bit bit 0 bit 1 Word 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit Word 2 bit 0 TX2IF bit (Interrupt Reg. Flag) 1 TCY TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) Note: Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg. Word 2 Transmit Shift Reg. This timing diagram shows two consecutive transmissions. TABLE 18-4: Name INTCON PIR3 PIE3 IPR3 RCSTA2 TXREG2 TXSTA2 SPBRG2 LATG REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC2IF RC2IE RC2IP SREN TXEN -- Bit 4 INT0IE TX2IF TX2IE TX2IP CREN SYNC LATG4 Bit 3 RBIE -- -- -- ADDEN -- LATG3 Bit 2 TMR0IF CCP2IF CCP2IE CCP2IP FERR BRGH LATG2 Bit 1 INT0IF CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP1IP OERR TRMT LATG1 Bit 0 RBIF -- -- -- RX9D TX9D LATG0 Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 56 56 56 56 54 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL -- -- -- SPEN CSRC U2OD LCDIF LCDIE LCDIP RX9 TX9 U1OD AUSART Transmit Register AUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Legend: -- = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous transmission. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 255 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 18.3.2 AUSART ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER 18.3.3 SETTING UP 9-BIT MODE WITH ADDRESS DETECT The receiver block diagram is shown in Figure 18-4. The data is received on the RX2 pin and drives the data recovery block. The data recovery block is actually a high-speed shifter operating at x16 times the baud rate, whereas the main receive serial shifter operates at the bit rate or at FOSC. This mode would typically be used in RS-232 systems. To set up an Asynchronous Reception: 1. Initialize the SPBRG2 register for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing bit, SYNC, and setting bit, SPEN. 3. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RC2IE. 4. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. 5. Enable the reception by setting bit, CREN. 6. Flag bit, RC2IF, will be set when reception is complete and an interrupt will be generated if enable bit, RC2IE, was set. 7. Read the RCSTA2 register to get the 9th bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 8. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREG2 register. 9. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing enable bit, CREN. 10. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. This mode would typically be used in RS-485 systems. To set up an Asynchronous Reception with Address Detect Enable: 1. Initialize the SPBRG2 register for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing the SYNC bit and setting the SPEN bit. 3. If interrupts are required, set the RCEN bit and select the desired priority level with the RC2IP bit. 4. Set the RX9 bit to enable 9-bit reception. 5. Set the ADDEN bit to enable address detect. 6. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. 7. The RC2IF bit will be set when reception is complete. The interrupt will be Acknowledged if the RC2IE and GIE bits are set. 8. Read the RCSTA2 register to determine if any error occurred during reception, as well as read bit 9 of data (if applicable). 9. Read RCREG2 to determine if the device is being addressed. 10. If any error occurred, clear the CREN bit. 11. If the device has been addressed, clear the ADDEN bit to allow all received data into the receive buffer and interrupt the CPU. FIGURE 18-4: AUSART RECEIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM CREN x64 Baud Rate CLK SPBRG2 Baud Rate Generator / 64 or / 16 or /4 MSb Stop (8) 7 RSR Register *** 1 0 LSb Start OERR FERR RX9 Pin Buffer and Control RX2 Data Recovery RX9D RCREG2 Register FIFO SPEN 8 Interrupt RC2IF RC2IE Data Bus DS39770B-page 256 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 18-5: RX2 (pin) Rcv Shift Reg Rcv Buffer Reg Read Rcv Buffer Reg RCREG2 RC2IF (Interrupt Flag) OERR bit CREN Note: This timing diagram shows three words appearing on the RX2 input. The RCREG2 (Receive Buffer register) is read after the third word causing the OERR (Overrun) bit to be set. Word 1 RCREG2 ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit bit 0 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 2 RCREG2 TABLE 18-5: Name INTCON PIR3 PIE3 IPR3 RCSTA2 RCREG2 TXSTA2 SPBRG2 REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INT0IE TX2IF TX2IE TX2IP CREN SYNC Bit 3 RBIE -- -- -- ADDEN -- Bit 2 TMR0IF CCP2IF CCP2IE CCP2IP FERR BRGH Bit 1 INT0IF CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP1IP OERR TRMT Bit 0 RBIF -- -- -- RX9D TX9D Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 56 56 56 56 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE -- -- -- SPEN CSRC LCDIF LCDIE LCDIP RX9 TX9 RC2IF RC2IE RC2IP SREN TXEN AUSART Receive Register AUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Legend: -- = unimplemented locations read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous reception. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 257 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 18.4 AUSART Synchronous Master Mode Once the TXREG2 register transfers the data to the TSR register (occurs in one TCYCLE), the TXREG2 is empty and the TX2IF flag bit (PIR3<4>) is set. The interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the interrupt enable bit, TX2IE (PIE3<4>). TX2IF is set regardless of the state of enable bit, TX2IE; it cannot be cleared in software. It will reset only when new data is loaded into the TXREG2 register. While flag bit, TX2IF, indicates the status of the TXREG2 register, another bit, TRMT (TXSTA2<1>), shows the status of the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit which is set when the TSR is empty. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit so the user has to poll this bit in order to determine if the TSR register is empty. The TSR is not mapped in data memory so it is not available to the user. To set up a Synchronous Master Transmission: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Initialize the SPBRG2 register for the appropriate baud rate. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits, SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TX2IE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set bit, TX9. Enable the transmission by setting bit, TXEN. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit TX9D. Start transmission by loading data to the TXREG2 register. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. The Synchronous Master mode is entered by setting the CSRC bit (TXSTA2<7>). In this mode, the data is transmitted in a half-duplex manner (i.e., transmission and reception do not occur at the same time). When transmitting data, the reception is inhibited and vice versa. Synchronous mode is entered by setting bit, SYNC (TXSTA2<4>). In addition, enable bit, SPEN (RCSTA2<7>), is set in order to configure the TX2 and RX2 pins to CK2 (clock) and DT2 (data) lines, respectively. The Master mode indicates that the processor transmits the master clock on the CK2 line. 18.4.1 AUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION The AUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 18-1. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit (Serial) Shift register (TSR). The Shift register obtains its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register, TXREG2. The TXREG2 register is loaded with data in software. The TSR register is not loaded until the last bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As soon as the last bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded with new data from the TXREG2 (if available). FIGURE 18-6: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 RX2/DT2 pin bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 7 Word 1 TX2/CK2 pin Write to TXREG2 Reg TX2IF bit (Interrupt Flag) TRMT bit TXEN bit Note: `1' Word 2 Write Word 1 Write Word 2 `1' Sync Master mode, SPBRG2 = 0; continuous transmission of two 8-bit words. DS39770B-page 258 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 18-7: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (THROUGH TXEN) bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 6 bit 7 RX2/DT2 pin TX2/CK2 pin Write to TXREG2 Reg TX2IF bit TRMT bit TXEN bit TABLE 18-6: Name INTCON PIR3 PIE3 IPR3 RCSTA2 TXREG2 TXSTA2 SPBRG2 LATG REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INT0IE TX2IF TX2IE TX2IP CREN SYNC LATG4 Bit 3 RBIE -- -- -- ADDEN -- LATG3 Bit 2 TMR0IF CCP2IF CCP2IE CCP2IP FERR BRGH LATG2 Bit 1 INT0IF CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP1IP OERR TRMT LATG1 Bit 0 RBIF -- -- -- RX9D TX9D LATG0 Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 56 56 56 56 54 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE -- -- -- SPEN CSRC U2OD LCDIF LCDIE LCDIP RX9 TX9 U1OD RC2IF RC2IE RC2IP SREN TXEN -- AUSART Transmit Register AUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master transmission. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 259 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 18.4.2 AUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION Once Synchronous mode is selected, reception is enabled by setting either the Single Receive Enable bit, SREN (RCSTA2<5>), or the Continuous Receive Enable bit, CREN (RCSTA2<4>). Data is sampled on the RX2 pin on the falling edge of the clock. If enable bit SREN is set, only a single word is received. If enable bit CREN is set, the reception is continuous until CREN is cleared. If both bits are set, then CREN takes precedence. To set up a Synchronous Master Reception: 1. 2. 3. Initialize the SPBRG2 register for the appropriate baud rate. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. Ensure bits CREN and SREN are clear. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RC2IE. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. If a single reception is required, set bit, SREN. For continuous reception, set bit, CREN. 7. Interrupt flag bit, RC2IF, will be set when reception is complete and an interrupt will be generated if the enable bit, RC2IE, was set. 8. Read the RCSTA2 register to get the 9th bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 9. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREG2 register. 10. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing bit, CREN. 11. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. 4. 5. 6. FIGURE 18-8: SYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION (MASTER MODE, SREN) Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 RX2/DT2 pin TX2/CK2 pin Write to bit SREN SREN bit CREN bit `0' RC2IF bit (Interrupt) Read RCREG2 Note: bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 `0' Timing diagram demonstrates Sync Master mode with bit SREN = 1 and bit BRGH = 0. TABLE 18-7: Name INTCON PIR3 PIE3 IPR3 RCSTA2 RCREG2 TXSTA2 SPBRG2 REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC2IF RC2IE RC2IP SREN TXEN Bit 4 INT0IE TX2IF TX2IE TX2IP CREN SYNC Bit 3 RBIE -- -- -- ADDEN -- Bit 2 TMR0IF CCP2IF CCP2IE CCP2IP FERR BRGH Bit 1 INT0IF CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP1IP OERR TRMT Bit 0 RBIF -- -- -- RX9D TX9D Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 56 56 56 56 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL -- -- -- SPEN CSRC LCDIF LCDIE LCDIP RX9 TX9 AUSART Receive Register AUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master reception. DS39770B-page 260 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 18.5 AUSART Synchronous Slave Mode To set up a Synchronous Slave Transmission: 1. Enable the synchronous slave serial port by setting bits, SYNC and SPEN, and clearing bit, CSRC. Clear bits, CREN and SREN. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TX2IE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set bit, TX9. Enable the transmission by setting enable bit, TXEN. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit TX9D. Start transmission by loading data to the TXREG2 register. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. Synchronous Slave mode is entered by clearing bit, CSRC (TXSTA2<7>). This mode differs from the Synchronous Master mode in that the shift clock is supplied externally at the CK2 pin (instead of being supplied internally in Master mode). This allows the device to transfer or receive data while in any low-power mode. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 18.5.1 AUSART SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMIT The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes are identical except in the case of the Sleep mode. If two words are written to the TXREG2 and then the SLEEP instruction is executed, the following will occur: a) b) c) d) The first word will immediately transfer to the TSR register and transmit. The second word will remain in TXREG2 register. Flag bit, TX2IF, will not be set. When the first word has been shifted out of TSR, the TXREG2 register will transfer the second word to the TSR and flag bit, TX2IF, will now be set. If enable bit, TX2IE, is set, the interrupt will wake the chip from Sleep. If the global interrupt is enabled, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. e) TABLE 18-8: Name INTCON PIR3 PIE3 IPR3 RCSTA2 TXREG2 TXSTA2 SPBRG2 LATG REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC2IF RC2IE RC2IP SREN TXEN -- Bit 4 INT0IE TX2IF TX2IE TX2IP CREN SYNC LATG4 Bit 3 RBIE -- -- -- ADDEN -- LATG3 Bit 2 TMR0IF CCP2IF CCP2IE CCP2IP FERR BRGH LATG2 Bit 1 INT0IF CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP1IP OERR TRMT LATG1 Bit 0 RBIF -- -- -- RX9D TX9D LATG0 Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 56 56 56 56 54 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL -- -- -- SPEN CSRC U2OD LCDIF LCDIE LCDIP RX9 TX9 U1OD AUSART Transmit Register AUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave transmission. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 261 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 18.5.2 AUSART SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION To set up a Synchronous Slave Reception: 1. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits, SYNC and SPEN, and clearing bit, CSRC. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RC2IE. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. To enable reception, set enable bit, CREN. Flag bit, RC2IF, will be set when reception is complete. An interrupt will be generated if enable bit, RC2IE, was set. Read the RCSTA2 register to get the 9th bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREG2 register. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing bit, CREN. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes is identical except in the case of Sleep or any Idle mode, and bit SREN, which is a "don't care" in Slave mode. If receive is enabled by setting the CREN bit prior to entering Sleep, or any Idle mode, then a word may be received while in this low-power mode. Once the word is received, the RSR register will transfer the data to the RCREG2 register; if the RC2IE enable bit is set, the interrupt generated will wake the chip from low-power mode. If the global interrupt is enabled, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. TABLE 18-9: Name INTCON PIR3 PIE3 IPR3 RCSTA2 RCREG2 TXSTA2 SPBRG2 REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INT0IE TX2IF TX2IE TX2IP CREN SYNC Bit 3 RBIE -- -- -- ADDEN -- Bit 2 TMR0IF CCP2IF CCP2IE CCP2IP FERR BRGH Bit 1 INT0IF CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP1IP OERR TRMT Bit 0 RBIF -- -- -- RX9D TX9D Reset Values on Page 51 54 54 54 56 56 56 56 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE -- -- -- SPEN CSRC LCDIF LCDIE LCDIP RX9 TX9 RC2IF RC2IE RC2IP SREN TXEN AUSART Receive Register AUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave reception. DS39770B-page 262 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 19.0 10-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D) MODULE The ADCON0 register, shown in Register 19-1, controls the operation of the A/D module. The ADCON1 register, shown in Register 19-2, configures the functions of the port pins. The ADCON2 register, shown in Register 19-3, configures the A/D clock source, programmed acquisition time and justification. The Analog-to-Digital (A/D) converter module has 12 inputs for all PIC18F85J90 family devices. This module allows conversion of an analog input signal to a corresponding 10-bit digital number. The module has five registers: * * * * * A/D Result High Register (ADRESH) A/D Result Low Register (ADRESL) A/D Control Register 0 (ADCON0) A/D Control Register 1 (ADCON1) A/D Control Register 2 (ADCON2) REGISTER 19-1: R/W-0 ADCAL bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 ADCON0: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 0 U-0 -- R/W-0 CHS3 R/W-0 CHS2 R/W-0 CHS1 R/W-0 CHS0 R/W-0 GO/DONE R/W-0 ADON bit 0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown ADCAL: A/D Calibration bit 1 = Calibration is performed on next A/D conversion 0 = Normal A/D converter operation (no calibration is performed) Unimplemented: Read as `0' CHS3:CHS0: Analog Channel Select bits 0000 = Channel 00 (AN0) 0001 = Channel 01 (AN1) 0010 = Channel 02 (AN2) 0011 = Channel 03 (AN3) 0100 = Channel 04 (AN4) 0101 = Channel 05 (AN5) 0110 = Channel 06 (AN6) 0111 = Channel 07 (AN7) 1000 = Channel 08 (AN8) 1001 = Channel 09 (AN9) 1010 = Channel 10 (AN10) 1011 = Channel 11 (AN11) 11xx = Unused GO/DONE: A/D Conversion Status bit When ADON = 1: 1 = A/D conversion in progress 0 = A/D Idle ADON: A/D On bit 1 = A/D converter module is enabled 0 = A/D converter module is disabled bit 6 bit 5-2 bit 1 bit 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 263 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 19-2: U-0 -- bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7-6 bit 5 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown ADCON1: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 -- R/W-0 VCFG1 R/W-0 VCFG0 R/W-0 PCFG3 R/W-0 PCFG2 R/W-0 PCFG1 R/W-0 PCFG0 bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as `0' VCFG1: Voltage Reference Configuration bit (VREF- source) 1 = VREF- (AN2) 0 = AVSS VCFG0: Voltage Reference Configuration bit (VREF+ source) 1 = VREF+ (AN3) 0 = AVDD PCFG3:PCFG0: A/D Port Configuration Control bits: PCFG3: PCFG0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 AN11 AN10 AN9 A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D AN8 A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D AN7 A A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D AN6 A A A A A A A A A D D D D D D D AN5 A A A A A A A A A A D D D D D D AN4 A A A A A A A A A A A D D D D D AN3 A A A A A A A A A A A A D D D D AN2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A D D D AN1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D D AN0 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D bit 4 bit 3-0 A = Analog input D = Digital I/O DS39770B-page 264 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 19-3: R/W-0 ADFM bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown ADCON2: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 2 U-0 -- R/W-0 ACQT2 R/W-0 ACQT1 R/W-0 ACQT0 R/W-0 ADCS2 R/W-0 ADCS1 R/W-0 ADCS0 bit 0 ADFM: A/D Result Format Select bit 1 = Right justified 0 = Left justified Unimplemented: Read as `0' ACQT2:ACQT0: A/D Acquisition Time Select bits 111 = 20 TAD 110 = 16 TAD 101 = 12 TAD 100 = 8 TAD 011 = 6 TAD 010 = 4 TAD 001 = 2 TAD 000 = 0 TAD(1) ADCS2:ADCS0: A/D Conversion Clock Select bits 111 = FRC (clock derived from A/D RC oscillator)(1) 110 = FOSC/64 101 = FOSC/16 100 = FOSC/4 011 = FRC (clock derived from A/D RC oscillator)(1) 010 = FOSC/32 001 = FOSC/8 000 = FOSC/2 Note 1: If the A/D FRC clock source is selected, a delay of one TCY (instruction cycle) is added before the A/D clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed before starting a conversion. bit 6 bit 5-3 bit 2-0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 265 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY The analog reference voltage is software selectable to either the device's positive and negative supply voltage (AVDD and AVSS), or the voltage level on the RA3/AN3/VREF+ and RA2/AN2/VREF- pins. The A/D converter has a unique feature of being able to operate while the device is in Sleep mode. To operate in Sleep, the A/D conversion clock must be derived from the A/D's internal RC oscillator. The output of the sample and hold is the input into the converter, which generates the result via successive approximation. Each port pin associated with the A/D converter can be configured as an analog input or as a digital I/O. The ADRESH and ADRESL registers contain the result of the A/D conversion. When the A/D conversion is complete, the result is loaded into the ADRESH:ADRESL register pair, the GO/DONE bit (ADCON0<1>) is cleared and A/D Interrupt Flag bit, ADIF, is set. A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state. This forces the A/D module to be turned off and any conversion in progress is aborted. The value in the ADRESH:ADRESL register pair is not modified for a Power-on Reset. These registers will contain unknown data after a Power-on Reset. The block diagram of the A/D module is shown in Figure 19-1. FIGURE 19-1: A/D BLOCK DIAGRAM(1,2) CHS3:CHS0 1011 1010 1001 1000 0111 0110 0101 0100 VAIN 10-Bit Converter A/D (Input Voltage) 0011 0010 VCFG1:VCFG0 VDD Reference Voltage VREF+ VREFVSS Note 1: Channels AN15 through AN12 are not available on 64-pin devices. 2: I/O pins have diode protection to VDD and VSS. 0001 0000 AN11 AN10 AN9 AN8 AN7 AN6 AN5 AN4 AN3 AN2 AN1 AN0 DS39770B-page 266 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY After the A/D module has been configured as desired, the selected channel must be acquired before the conversion is started. The analog input channels must have their corresponding TRIS bits selected as an input. To determine acquisition time, see Section 19.1 "A/D Acquisition Requirements". After this acquisition time has elapsed, the A/D conversion can be started. An acquisition time can be programmed to occur between setting the GO/DONE bit and the actual start of the conversion. The following steps should be followed to do an A/D conversion: 1. Configure the A/D module: * Configure analog pins, voltage reference and digital I/O (ADCON1) * Select A/D input channel (ADCON0) * Select A/D acquisition time (ADCON2) * Select A/D conversion clock (ADCON2) * Turn on A/D module (ADCON0) Configure A/D interrupt (if desired): * Clear ADIF bit * Set ADIE bit * Set GIE bit 3. 4. 5. Wait the required acquisition time (if required). Start conversion: * Set GO/DONE bit (ADCON0<1>) Wait for A/D conversion to complete, by either: * Polling for the GO/DONE bit to be cleared OR 6. 7. * Waiting for the A/D interrupt Read A/D Result registers (ADRESH:ADRESL); clear ADIF bit, if required. For next conversion, go to step 1 or step 2, as required. The A/D conversion time per bit is defined as TAD. A minimum wait of 2 TAD is required before next acquisition starts. 2. FIGURE 19-2: ANALOG INPUT MODEL VDD VT = 0.6V RS ANx RIC 1k Sampling Switch SS RSS VAIN CPIN 5 pF VT = 0.6V ILEAKAGE 100 nA CHOLD = 25 pF VSS Legend: CPIN = Input Capacitance VT = Threshold Voltage ILEAKAGE = Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions = Interconnect Resistance RIC = Sampling Switch SS = Sample/Hold Capacitance (from DAC) CHOLD RSS = Sampling Switch Resistance 6V 5V VDD 4V 3V 2V 1 2 3 4 Sampling Switch (k) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 267 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 19.1 A/D Acquisition Requirements For the A/D converter to meet its specified accuracy, the charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to fully charge to the input channel voltage level. The analog input model is shown in Figure 19-2. The source impedance (RS) and the internal sampling switch (RSS) impedance directly affect the time required to charge the capacitor CHOLD. The sampling switch (RSS) impedance varies over the device voltage (VDD). The source impedance affects the offset voltage at the analog input (due to pin leakage current). The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 2.5 k. After the analog input channel is selected (changed), the channel must be sampled for at least the minimum acquisition time before starting a conversion. Note: When the conversion is started, the holding capacitor is disconnected from the input pin. To calculate the minimum acquisition time, Equation 19-1 may be used. This equation assumes that 1/2 LSb error is used (1024 steps for the A/D). The 1/2 LSb error is the maximum error allowed for the A/D to meet its specified resolution. Equation 19-3 shows the calculation of the minimum required acquisition time, TACQ. This calculation is based on the following application system assumptions: CHOLD Rs Conversion Error VDD Temperature = = = = 25 pF 2.5 k 1/2 LSb 3V Rss = 2 k 85C (system max.) EQUATION 19-1: TACQ = = ACQUISITION TIME Amplifier Settling Time + Holding Capacitor Charging Time + Temperature Coefficient TAMP + TC + TCOFF EQUATION 19-2: VHOLD or TC = = A/D MINIMUM CHARGING TIME (VREF - (VREF/2048)) * (1 - e(-TC/CHOLD(RIC + RSS + RS))) -(CHOLD)(RIC + RSS + RS) ln(1/2048) EQUATION 19-3: TACQ TAMP TCOFF = = = 0.2 s CALCULATING THE MINIMUM REQUIRED ACQUISITION TIME TAMP + TC + TCOFF (Temp - 25C)(0.02 s/C) (85C - 25C)(0.02 s/C) 1.2 s -(CHOLD)(RIC + RSS + RS) ln(1/2048) s -(25 pF) (1 k + 2 k + 2.5 k) ln(0.0004883) s 1.05 s 0.2 s + 1 s + 1.2 s 2.4 s Temperature coefficient is only required for temperatures > 25C. Below 25C, TCOFF = 0 ms. TC = TACQ = DS39770B-page 268 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 19.2 Selecting and Configuring Automatic Acquisition Time TABLE 19-1: TAD vs. DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCIES Maximum Device Frequency 2.86 MHz 5.71 MHz 11.43 MHz 22.86 MHz 40.0 MHz 40.0 MHz 1.00 MHz(1) AD Clock Source (TAD) Operation 2 TOSC 4 TOSC 8 TOSC 16 TOSC 32 TOSC 64 TOSC RC (2) The ADCON2 register allows the user to select an acquisition time that occurs each time the GO/DONE bit is set. When the GO/DONE bit is set, sampling is stopped and a conversion begins. The user is responsible for ensuring the required acquisition time has passed between selecting the desired input channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. This occurs when the ACQT2:ACQT0 bits (ADCON2<5:3>) remain in their Reset state (`000') and is compatible with devices that do not offer programmable acquisition times. If desired, the ACQT bits can be set to select a programmable acquisition time for the A/D module. When the GO/DONE bit is set, the A/D module continues to sample the input for the selected acquisition time, then automatically begins a conversion. Since the acquisition time is programmed, there may be no need to wait for an acquisition time between selecting a channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. In either case, when the conversion is completed, the GO/DONE bit is cleared, the ADIF flag is set and the A/D begins sampling the currently selected channel again. If an acquisition time is programmed, there is nothing to indicate if the acquisition time has ended or if the conversion has begun. ADCS2:ADCS0 000 100 001 101 010 110 x11 Note 1: The RC source has a typical TAD time of 4 s. 2: For device frequencies above 1 MHz, the device must be in Sleep mode for the entire conversion or the A/D accuracy may be out of specification. 19.4 Configuring Analog Port Pins The ADCON1, TRISA, TRISF and TRISH registers control the operation of the A/D port pins. The port pins needed as analog inputs must have their corresponding TRIS bits set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared (output), the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be converted. The A/D operation is independent of the state of the CHS3:CHS0 bits and the TRIS bits. Note 1: When reading the PORT register, all pins configured as analog input channels will read as cleared (a low level). Pins configured as digital inputs will convert an analog input. Analog levels on a digitally configured input will be accurately converted. 2: Analog levels on any pin defined as a digital input may cause the digital input buffer to consume current out of the device's specification limits. 19.3 Selecting the A/D Conversion Clock The A/D conversion time per bit is defined as TAD. The A/D conversion requires 11 TAD per 10-bit conversion. The source of the A/D conversion clock is software selectable. There are seven possible options for TAD: * * * * * * * 2 TOSC 4 TOSC 8 TOSC 16 TOSC 32 TOSC 64 TOSC Internal RC Oscillator For correct A/D conversions, the A/D conversion clock (TAD) must be as short as possible but greater than the minimum TAD (see parameter 130 in Table 25-25 for more information). Table 19-1 shows the resultant TAD times derived from the device operating frequencies and the A/D clock source selected. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 269 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 19.5 A/D Conversions 19.6 Use of the CCP2 Trigger Figure 19-3 shows the operation of the A/D converter after the GO/DONE bit has been set and the ACQT2:ACQT0 bits are cleared. A conversion is started after the following instruction to allow entry into Sleep mode before the conversion begins. Figure 19-4 shows the operation of the A/D converter after the GO/DONE bit has been set, the ACQT2:ACQT0 bits are set to `010' and selecting a 4 TAD acquisition time before the conversion starts. Clearing the GO/DONE bit during a conversion will abort the current conversion. The A/D Result register pair will NOT be updated with the partially completed A/D conversion sample. This means the ADRESH:ADRESL registers will continue to contain the value of the last completed conversion (or the last value written to the ADRESH:ADRESL registers). After the A/D conversion is completed or aborted, a 2 TAD wait is required before the next acquisition can be started. After this wait, acquisition on the selected channel is automatically started. Note: The GO/DONE bit should NOT be set in the same instruction that turns on the A/D. An A/D conversion can be started by the "Special Event Trigger" of the CCP2 module. This requires that the CCP2M3:CCP2M0 bits (CCP2CON<3:0>) be programmed as `1011' and that the A/D module is enabled (ADON bit is set). When the trigger occurs, the GO/DONE bit will be set, starting the A/D acquisition and conversion and the Timer1 (or Timer3) counter will be reset to zero. Timer1 (or Timer3) is reset to automatically repeat the A/D acquisition period with minimal software overhead (moving ADRESH/ADRESL to the desired location). The appropriate analog input channel must be selected and the minimum acquisition period is either timed by the user, or an appropriate TACQ time is selected before the Special Event Trigger sets the GO/DONE bit (starts a conversion). If the A/D module is not enabled (ADON is cleared), the Special Event Trigger will be ignored by the A/D module but will still reset the Timer1 (or Timer3) counter. FIGURE 19-3: A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT2:ACQT0 = 000, TACQ = 0) TCY - TAD TAD1 TAD2 TAD3 TAD4 TAD5 TAD6 TAD7 TAD8 TAD9 TAD10 TAD11 b4 b1 b0 b6 b7 b2 b9 b8 b3 b5 Conversion starts Holding capacitor is disconnected from analog input (typically 100 ns) Set GO/DONE bit Next Q4: ADRESH/ADRESL is loaded, GO/DONE bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input. FIGURE 19-4: A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT2:ACQT0 = 010, TACQ = 4 TAD) TACQT Cycles 1 2 3 4 1 2 b9 Automatic Acquisition Time 3 b8 4 b7 TAD Cycles 5 b6 6 b5 7 b4 8 b3 9 b2 10 b1 11 b0 Conversion starts (Holding capacitor is disconnected) Set GO/DONE bit (Holding capacitor continues acquiring input) Next Q4: ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO/DONE bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is reconnected to analog input. DS39770B-page 270 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 19.7 A/D Converter Calibration The A/D converter in the PIC18F85J90 family of devices includes a self-calibration feature which compensates for any offset generated within the module. The calibration process is automated and is initiated by setting the ADCAL bit (ADCON0<7>). The next time the GO/DONE bit is set, the module will perform a "dummy" conversion (that is, with reading none of the input channels) and store the resulting value internally to compensate for offset. Thus, subsequent offsets will be compensated. The calibration process assumes that the device is in a relatively steady-state operating condition. If A/D calibration is used, it should be performed after each device Reset or if there are other major changes in operating conditions. If the A/D is expected to operate while the device is in a power-managed mode, the ACQT2:ACQT0 and ADCS2:ADCS0 bits in ADCON2 should be updated in accordance with the power-managed mode clock that will be used. After the power-managed mode is entered (either of the power-managed Run modes), an A/D acquisition or conversion may be started. Once an acquisition or conversion is started, the device should continue to be clocked by the same power-managed mode clock source until the conversion has been completed. If desired, the device may be placed into the corresponding power-managed Idle mode during the conversion. If the power-managed mode clock frequency is less than 1 MHz, the A/D RC clock source should be selected. Operation in the Sleep mode requires the A/D RC clock to be selected. If bits ACQT2:ACQT0 are set to `000' and a conversion is started, the conversion will be delayed one instruction cycle to allow execution of the SLEEP instruction and entry to Sleep mode. The IDLEN and SCS bits in the OSCCON register must have already been cleared prior to starting the conversion. 19.8 Operation in Power-Managed Modes The selection of the automatic acquisition time and A/D conversion clock is determined in part by the clock source and frequency while in a power-managed mode. TABLE 19-2: Name INTCON PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 PIR3 PIE3 IPR3 ADRESH ADRESL ADCON0 ADCON1 ADCON2 CCP2CON PORTA TRISA PORTF TRISF SUMMARY OF A/D REGISTERS Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE RC1IF RC1IE RC1IP RC2IF RC2IE RC2IP Bit 4 INT0IE TX1IF TX1IE TX1IP TX2IF TX2IE TX2IP Bit 3 RBIE SSPIF SSPIE SSPIP -- -- -- Bit 2 TMR0IF -- -- -- CCP2IF CCP2IE CCP2IP Bit 1 INT0IF TMR2IF TMR2IE TMR2IP CCP1IF CCP1IE CCP1IP Bit 0 RBIF TMR1IF TMR1IE TMR1IP -- -- -- Reset Values on page 51 54 54 54 54 54 54 53 53 CHS3 VCFG0 ACQT1 DC2B0 RA4 TRISA4 RF4 TRISF4 CHS1 PCFG3 ACQT0 CCP2M3 RA3 TRISA3 RF3 TRISF3 CHS0 PCFG2 ADCS2 CCP2M2 RA2 TRISA2 RF2 TRISF2 GO/DONE PCFG1 ADCS1 CCP2M1 RA1 TRISA1 RF1 TRISF1 ADON PCFG0 ADCS0 CCP2M0 RA0 TRISA0 -- -- 53 53 53 55 55 54 54 54 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL -- -- -- -- -- -- ADIF ADIE ADIP LCDIF LCDIE LCDIP A/D Result Register High Byte A/D Result Register Low Byte ADCAL -- ADFM -- RA7(1) RF7 TRISF5 -- -- -- -- RA6(1) RF6 TRISF4 CHS3 VCFG1 ACQT2 DC2B1 RA5 TRISA5 RF5 TRISF5 TRISA7(1) TRISA6(1) Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used for A/D conversion. Note 1: RA6/RA7 and their associated latch and direction bits are configured as port pins only when the internal oscillator is selected as the default clock source (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are disabled and these bits read as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 271 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 272 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 20.0 COMPARATOR MODULE The analog comparator module contains two comparators that can be configured in a variety of ways. The inputs can be selected from the analog inputs multiplexed with pins RF1 through RF6, as well as the on-chip voltage reference (see Section 21.0 "Comparator Voltage Reference Module"). The digital outputs (normal or inverted) are available at the pin level and can also be read through the control register. The CMCON register (Register 20-1) selects the comparator input and output configuration. Block diagrams of the various comparator configurations are shown in Figure 20-1. REGISTER 20-1: R-0 C2OUT bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 CMCON: COMPARATOR MODULE CONTROL REGISTER R-0 R/W-0 C2INV R/W-0 C1INV R/W-0 CIS R/W-1 CM2 R/W-1 CM1 R/W-1 CM0 bit 0 C1OUT W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown C2OUT: Comparator 2 Output bit When C2INV = 0: 1 = C2 VIN+ > C2 VIN0 = C2 VIN+ < C2 VINWhen C2INV = 1: 1 = C2 VIN+ < C2 VIN0 = C2 VIN+ > C2 VINC1OUT: Comparator 1 Output bit When C1INV = 0: 1 = C1 VIN+ > C1 VIN0 = C1 VIN+ < C1 VINWhen C1INV = 1: 1 = C1 VIN+ < C1 VIN0 = C1 VIN+ > C1 VINC2INV: Comparator 2 Output Inversion bit 1 = C2 output inverted 0 = C2 output not inverted C1INV: Comparator 1 Output Inversion bit 1 = C1 output inverted 0 = C1 output not inverted CIS: Comparator Input Switch bit When CM2:CM0 = 110: 1 = C1 VIN- connects to RF5/AN10/CVREF C2 VIN- connects to RF3/AN8 0 = C1 VIN- connects to RF6/AN11 C2 VIN- connects to RF4/AN9 CM2:CM0: Comparator Mode bits Figure 20-1 shows the Comparator modes and the CM2:CM0 bit settings. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2-0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 273 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 20.1 Comparator Configuration There are eight modes of operation for the comparators, shown in Figure 20-1. Bits CM2:CM0 of the CMCON register are used to select these modes. The TRISF register controls the data direction of the comparator pins for each mode. If the Comparator mode is changed, the comparator output level may not be valid for the specified mode change delay shown in Section 25.0 "Electrical Characteristics". Note: Comparator interrupts should be disabled during a Comparator mode change; otherwise, a false interrupt may occur. FIGURE 20-1: COMPARATOR I/O OPERATING MODES Comparators Off (POR Default Value) CM2:CM0 = 111 Off (Read as `0') RF6/AN11/ D SEG24 RF5/AN10/ D CVREF/SEG23 RF4/AN9/ SEG22 RF3/AN8/ SEG21 D D VINVIN+ Comparator Outputs Disabled CM2:CM0 = 000 RF6/AN11/ A SEG24 RF5/AN10/ A CVREF/SEG23 RF4/AN9/ SEG22 RF3/AN8/ SEG21 A A VINVIN+ C1 C1 Off (Read as `0') VINVIN+ VINVIN+ C2 Off (Read as `0') C2 Off (Read as `0') Two Independent Comparators CM2:CM0 = 010 RF6/AN11/ A SEG24 RF5/AN10/ A CVREF/SEG23 RF4/AN9/ SEG22 RF3/AN8/ SEG21 A A VINVIN+ Two Independent Comparators with Outputs CM2:CM0 = 011 C1OUT VINRF6/AN11/ A SEG24 C1 VIN+ RF5/AN10/ A CVREF/SEG23 RF2/AN7/C1OUT*/SEG20 C1 C1OUT VINVIN+ C2 C2OUT RF4/AN9/ SEG22 RF3/AN8/ SEG21 A A VINVIN+ C2 C2OUT RF1/AN6/C2OUT*/SEG19 Two Common Reference Comparators CM2:CM0 = 100 RF6/AN11/ A SEG24 RF5/AN10/ A CVREF/SEG23 RF4/AN9/ SEG22 RF3/AN8/ SEG21 A D VINVIN+ Two Common Reference Comparators with Outputs CM2:CM0 = 101 C1OUT A RF6/AN11/ SEG24 A RF5/AN10/ CVREF/SEG23 VINVIN+ C1 C1 C1OUT VINVIN+ RF2/AN7/C1OUT*/ SEG20 C2 C2OUT RF4/AN9/ SEG22 RF3/AN8/ SEG21 A D VINVIN+ C2 C2OUT RF1/AN6/C2OUT*/SEG19 One Independent Comparator with Output CM2:CM0 = 001 RF6/AN11/ A SEG24 RF5/AN10/ A CVREF/SEG23 VINVIN+ Four Inputs Multiplexed to Two Comparators CM2:CM0 = 110 RF6/AN11/ A SEG24 RF5/AN10/ A CVREF/SEG23 RF4/AN9/ SEG22 RF3/AN8/ SEG21 A A CIS = 0 CIS = 1 VINVIN+ CIS = 0 CIS = 1 VINVIN+ C1 C1OUT C1 C1OUT RF2/AN7/C1OUT*/SEG20 RF4/AN9/ SEG22 RF3/AN8/ SEG21 D D VINVIN+ C2 C2OUT C2 Off (Read as `0') CVREF From VREF module A = Analog Input, port reads zeros always D = Digital Input CIS (CMCON<3>) is the Comparator Input Switch * Setting the TRISF<2:1> bits will disable the comparator outputs by configuring the pins as inputs. DS39770B-page 274 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 20.2 Comparator Operation 20.3.2 INTERNAL REFERENCE SIGNAL A single comparator is shown in Figure 20-2, along with the relationship between the analog input levels and the digital output. When the analog input at VIN+ is less than the analog input VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital low level. When the analog input at VIN+ is greater than the analog input VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital high level. The shaded areas of the output of the comparator in Figure 20-2 represent the uncertainty due to input offsets and response time. The comparator module also allows the selection of an internally generated voltage reference from the comparator voltage reference module. This module is described in more detail in Section 21.0 "Comparator Voltage Reference Module". The internal reference is only available in the mode where four inputs are multiplexed to two comparators (CM2:CM0 = 110). In this mode, the internal voltage reference is applied to the VIN+ pin of both comparators. 20.3 Comparator Reference Depending on the comparator operating mode, either an external or internal voltage reference may be used. The analog signal present at VIN- is compared to the signal at VIN+ and the digital output of the comparator is adjusted accordingly (Figure 20-2). 20.4 Comparator Response Time FIGURE 20-2: SINGLE COMPARATOR Response time is the minimum time, after selecting a new reference voltage or input source, before the comparator output has a valid level. If the internal reference is changed, the maximum delay of the internal voltage reference must be considered when using the comparator outputs. Otherwise, the maximum delay of the comparators should be used (see Section 25.0 "Electrical Characteristics"). VIN+ VIN- + - Output 20.5 Comparator Outputs VINVIN+ The comparator outputs are read through the CMCON register. These bits are read-only. The comparator outputs may also be directly output to the RF1 and RF2 I/O pins. When enabled, multiplexors in the output path of the RF1 and RF2 pins will switch and the output of each pin will be the unsynchronized output of the comparator. The uncertainty of each of the comparators is related to the input offset voltage and the response time given in the specifications. Figure 20-3 shows the comparator output block diagram. The TRISF bits will still function as an output enable/ disable for the RF1 and RF2 pins while in this mode. Output 20.3.1 EXTERNAL REFERENCE SIGNAL The polarity of the comparator outputs can be changed using the C2INV and C1INV bits (CMCON<5:4>). Note 1: When reading the PORT register, all pins configured as analog inputs will read as `0'. Pins configured as digital inputs will convert an analog input according to the Schmitt Trigger input specification. 2: Analog levels on any pin defined as a digital input may cause the input buffer to consume more current than is specified. When external voltage references are used, the comparator module can be configured to have the comparators operate from the same or different reference sources. However, threshold detector applications may require the same reference. The reference signal must be between VSS and VDD and can be applied to either pin of the comparator(s). (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 275 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 20-3: COMPARATOR OUTPUT BLOCK DIAGRAM MULTIPLEX Port pins + To RF1 or RF2 pin D CxINV EN Q Bus Data Read CMCON - D EN Reset Q Set CMIF bit From Other Comparator CL 20.6 Comparator Interrupts 20.7 The comparator interrupt flag is set whenever there is a change in the output value of either comparator. Software will need to maintain information about the status of the output bits, as read from CMCON<7:6>, to determine the actual change that occurred. The CMIF bit (PIR2<6>) is the Comparator Interrupt Flag. The CMIF bit must be reset by clearing it. Since it is also possible to write a `1' to this register, a simulated interrupt may be initiated. Both the CMIE bit (PIE2<6>) and the PEIE bit (INTCON<6>) must be set to enable the interrupt. In addition, the GIE bit (INTCON<7>) must also be set. If any of these bits are clear, the interrupt is not enabled, though the CMIF bit will still be set if an interrupt condition occurs. Note: If a change in the CMCON register (C1OUT or C2OUT) should occur when a read operation is being executed (start of the Q2 cycle), then the CMIF (PIR2<6>) interrupt flag may not get set. Comparator Operation During Sleep When a comparator is active and the device is placed in Sleep mode, the comparator remains active and the interrupt is functional, if enabled. This interrupt will wake-up the device from Sleep mode, when enabled. Each operational comparator will consume additional current, as shown in the comparator specifications. To minimize power consumption while in Sleep mode, turn off the comparators (CM2:CM0 = 111) before entering Sleep. If the device wakes up from Sleep, the contents of the CMCON register are not affected. 20.8 Effects of a Reset The user, in the Interrupt Service Routine, can clear the interrupt in the following manner: a) b) Any read or write of CMCON will end the mismatch condition. Clear flag bit CMIF. A device Reset forces the CMCON register to its Reset state, causing the comparator modules to be turned off (CM2:CM0 = 111). However, the input pins (RF3 through RF6) are configured as analog inputs by default on device Reset. The I/O configuration for these pins is determined by the setting of the PCFG3:PCFG0 bits (ADCON1<3:0>). Therefore, device current is minimized when analog inputs are present at Reset time. A mismatch condition will continue to set flag bit CMIF. Reading CMCON will end the mismatch condition and allow flag bit CMIF to be cleared. DS39770B-page 276 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 20.9 Analog Input Connection Considerations range by more than 0.6V in either direction, one of the diodes is forward biased and a latch-up condition may occur. A maximum source impedance of 10 k is recommended for the analog sources. Any external component connected to an analog input pin, such as a capacitor or a Zener diode, should have very little leakage current. A simplified circuit for an analog input is shown in Figure 20-4. Since the analog pins are connected to a digital output, they have reverse biased diodes to VDD and VSS. The analog input, therefore, must be between VSS and VDD. If the input voltage deviates from this FIGURE 20-4: COMPARATOR ANALOG INPUT MODEL VDD RS < 10k AIN VT = 0.6V RIC Comparator Input CPIN 5 pF VT = 0.6V ILEAKAGE 500 nA VA VSS Legend: CPIN VT ILEAKAGE RIC RS VA = = = = = = Input Capacitance Threshold Voltage Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions Interconnect Resistance Source Impedance Analog Voltage TABLE 20-1: Name INTCON PIR2 PIE2 IPR2 CMCON CVRCON PORTF LATF TRISF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR MODULE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0IE -- -- -- C2INV CVRR RF5 LATF5 TRISF5 Bit 4 INT0IE -- -- -- C1INV CVRSS RF4 LATF4 TRISF4 Bit 3 RBIE BCLIF BCLIE BCLIP CIS CVR3 RF3 LATF3 TRISF3 Bit 2 TMR0IF LVDIF LVDIE LVDIP CM2 CVR2 RF2 LATF2 TRISF2 Bit 1 INT0IF TMR3IF TMR3IE TMR3IP CM1 CVR1 RF1 LATF1 TRISF1 Bit 0 RBIF -- -- -- CM0 CVR0 -- -- -- Reset Values on page 51 54 54 54 53 53 54 54 54 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL OSCFIF OSCFIE OSCFIP C2OUT CVREN RF7 LATF7 TRISF7 CMIF CMIE CMIP C1OUT CVROE RF6 LATF6 TRISF6 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are unused by the comparator module. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 277 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 278 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 21.0 COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE MODULE The range to be used is selected by the CVRR bit (CVRCON<5>). The primary difference between the ranges is the size of the steps selected by the CVREF Selection bits (CVR3:CVR0), with one range offering finer resolution. The equations used to calculate the output of the comparator voltage reference are as follows: If CVRR = 1: CVREF = ((CVR3:CVR0)/24) x (CVRSRC) If CVRR = 0: CVREF = (CVRSRC/4) + ((CVR3:CVR0)/32) x (CVRSRC) The comparator reference supply voltage can come from either VDD and VSS, or the external VREF+ and VREF- that are multiplexed with RA2 and RA3. The voltage source is selected by the CVRSS bit (CVRCON<4>). The settling time of the comparator voltage reference must be considered when changing the CVREF output (see Table 25-3 in Section 25.0 "Electrical Characteristics"). The comparator voltage reference is a 16-tap resistor ladder network that provides a selectable reference voltage. Although its primary purpose is to provide a reference for the analog comparators, it may also be used independently of them. A block diagram of the module is shown in Figure 21-1. The resistor ladder is segmented to provide two ranges of CVREF values and has a power-down function to conserve power when the reference is not being used. The module's supply reference can be provided from either device VDD/VSS or an external voltage reference. 21.1 Configuring the Comparator Voltage Reference The comparator voltage reference module is controlled through the CVRCON register (Register 21-1). The comparator voltage reference provides two ranges of output voltage, each with 16 distinct levels. REGISTER 21-1: R/W-0 CVREN bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 CVRCON: COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 CVRR R/W-0 CVRSS R/W-0 CVR3 R/W-0 CVR2 R/W-0 CVR1 R/W-0 CVR0 bit 0 R/W-0 CVROE(1) W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown CVREN: Comparator Voltage Reference Enable bit 1 = CVREF circuit powered on 0 = CVREF circuit powered down CVROE: Comparator VREF Output Enable bit(1) 1 = CVREF voltage level is also output on the RF5/AN10/CVREF/SEG23 pin 0 = CVREF voltage is disconnected from the RF5/AN10/CVREF/SEG23 pin CVRR: Comparator VREF Range Selection bit 1 = 0 to 0.667 CVRSRC, with CVRSRC/24 step size (low range) 0 = 0.25 CVRSRC to 0.75 CVRSRC, with CVRSRC/32 step size (high range) CVRSS: Comparator VREF Source Selection bit 1 = Comparator reference source, CVRSRC = (VREF+) - (VREF-) 0 = Comparator reference source, CVRSRC = VDD - VSS CVR3:CVR0: Comparator VREF Value Selection bits (0 (CVR3:CVR0) 15) When CVRR = 1: CVREF = ((CVR3:CVR0)/24) * (CVRSRC) When CVRR = 0: CVREF = (CVRSRC/4) + ((CVR3:CVR0)/32) * (CVRSRC) CVROE overrides the TRISF<5> bit setting. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3-0 Note 1: (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 279 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 21-1: COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE BLOCK DIAGRAM VREF+ VDD CVRSS = 1 CVRSS = 0 8R R R R R 16 Steps CVR3:CVR0 CVREN 16-to-1 MUX CVREF R R R CVRR VREFCVRSS = 1 8R CVRSS = 0 21.2 Voltage Reference Accuracy/Error 21.4 Effects of a Reset The full range of voltage reference cannot be realized due to the construction of the module. The transistors on the top and bottom of the resistor ladder network (Figure 21-1) keep CVREF from approaching the reference source rails. The voltage reference is derived from the reference source; therefore, the CVREF output changes with fluctuations in that source. The tested absolute accuracy of the voltage reference can be found in Section 25.0 "Electrical Characteristics". A device Reset disables the voltage reference by clearing bit, CVREN (CVRCON<7>). This Reset also disconnects the reference from the RA2 pin by clearing bit, CVROE (CVRCON<6>) and selects the high-voltage range by clearing bit, CVRR (CVRCON<5>). The CVR value select bits are also cleared. 21.5 Connection Considerations 21.3 Operation During Sleep When the device wakes up from Sleep through an interrupt or a Watchdog Timer time-out, the contents of the CVRCON register are not affected. To minimize current consumption in Sleep mode, the voltage reference should be disabled. The voltage reference module operates independently of the comparator module. The output of the reference generator may be connected to the RF5 pin if the CVROE bit is set. Enabling the voltage reference output onto RA2 when it is configured as a digital input will increase current consumption. Connecting RF5 as a digital output with CVRSS enabled will also increase current consumption. The RF5 pin can be used as a simple D/A output with limited drive capability. Due to the limited current drive capability, a buffer must be used on the voltage reference output for external connections to VREF. Figure 21-2 shows an example buffering technique. DS39770B-page 280 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 21-2: COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE OUTPUT BUFFER EXAMPLE PIC18F85J90 CVREF Module R(1) Voltage Reference Output Impedance RF5 + - CVREF Output Note 1: R is dependent upon the Comparator Voltage Reference bits, CVRCON<5> and CVRCON<3:0>. TABLE 21-1: Name CVRCON CMCON TRISF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE Bit 7 CVREN C2OUT TRISF7 Bit 6 CVROE C1OUT TRISF6 Bit 5 CVRR C2INV TRISF5 Bit 4 CVRSS C1INV TRISF4 Bit 3 CVR3 CIS TRISF3 Bit 2 CVR2 CM2 TRISF2 Bit 1 CVR1 CM1 TRISF1 Bit 0 CVR0 CM0 -- Reset Values on page 53 53 54 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used with the comparator voltage reference. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 281 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 282 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 22.0 SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE CPU 22.1.1 CONSIDERATIONS FOR CONFIGURING THE PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DEVICES PIC18F85J90 family devices include several features intended to maximize reliability and minimize cost through elimination of external components. These are: * Oscillator Selection * Resets: - Power-on Reset (POR) - Power-up Timer (PWRT) - Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) - Brown-out Reset (BOR) * Interrupts * Watchdog Timer (WDT) * Fail-Safe Clock Monitor * Two-Speed Start-up * Code Protection * In-Circuit Serial Programming The oscillator can be configured for the application depending on frequency, power, accuracy and cost. All of the options are discussed in detail in Section 2.0 "Oscillator Configurations". A complete discussion of device Resets and interrupts is available in previous sections of this data sheet. In addition to their Power-up and Oscillator Start-up Timers provided for Resets, the PIC18F85J90 family family of devices have a configurable Watchdog Timer which is controlled in software. The inclusion of an internal RC oscillator also provides the additional benefits of a Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and Two-Speed Start-up. FSCM provides for background monitoring of the peripheral clock and automatic switchover in the event of its failure. Two-Speed Start-up enables code to be executed almost immediately on start-up, while the primary clock source completes its start-up delays. All of these features are enabled and configured by setting the appropriate Configuration register bits. Devices of the PIC18F85J90 family do not use persistent memory registers to store configuration information. The configuration bytes are implemented as volatile memory which means that configuration data must be programmed each time the device is powered up. Configuration data is stored in the four words at the top of the on-chip program memory space, known as the Flash Configuration Words. It is stored in program memory in the same order shown in Table 22-2, with CONFIG1L at the lowest address and CONFIG3H at the highest. The data is automatically loaded in the proper Configuration registers during device power-up. When creating applications for these devices, users should always specifically allocate the location of the Flash Configuration Word for configuration data. This is to make certain that program code is not stored in this address when the code is compiled. The volatile memory cells used for the Configuration bits always reset to `1' on Power-on Resets. For all other types of Reset events, the previously programmed values are maintained and used without reloading from program memory. The four Most Significant bits of CONFIG1H, CONFIG2H and CONFIG3H in program memory should also be `1111'. This makes these Configuration Words appear to be NOP instructions in the remote event that their locations are ever executed by accident. Since Configuration bits are not implemented in the corresponding locations, writing `1's to these locations has no effect on device operation. To prevent inadvertent configuration changes during code execution, all programmable Configuration bits are write-once. After a bit is initially programmed during a power cycle, it cannot be written to again. Changing a device configuration requires that power to the device be cycled. 22.1 Configuration Bits TABLE 22-1: The Configuration bits can be programmed (read as `0'), or left unprogrammed (read as `1'), to select various device configurations. These bits are mapped starting at program memory location 300000h. A complete list is shown in Table 22-2. A detailed explanation of the various bit functions is provided in Register 22-1 through Register 22-5. MAPPING OF THE FLASH CONFIGURATION WORDS TO THE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS Code Space Address Configuration Register Address Configuration Byte CONFIG1L XXXF8h 300000h CONFIG1H XXXF9h 300001h CONFIG2L XXXFAh 300002h CONFIG2H XXXFBh 300003h CONFIG3L XXXFCh 300004h CONFIG3H XXXFDh 300005h Legend: Unimplemented in PIC18F85J90 family devices. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 283 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 22-2: File Name 300000h 300001h 300002h 300003h 300005h CONFIG1L CONFIG1H CONFIG2L CONFIG2H CONFIG3H CONFIGURATION BITS AND DEVICE IDs Bit 7 DEBUG --(2) IESO --(2) --(2) DEV2 DEV10 Bit 6 XINST --(2) FCMEN --(2) --(2) DEV1 DEV9 Bit 5 STVREN --(2) -- --(2) --(2) DEV0 DEV8 Bit 4 -- --(2) -- --(2) --(2) REV4 DEV7 Bit 3 -- --(3) -- -- REV3 DEV6 Bit 2 -- CP0 FOSC2 -- REV2 DEV5 Bit 1 -- -- FOSC1 -- REV1 DEV4 Bit 0 WDTEN -- FOSC0 CCP2MX REV0 DEV3 Default/ Unprogrammed Value(1) 111- ---1 ---- 01-11-- -111 ---- 1111 ---- ---1 xxxx xxxx(4) 0000 10x1(4) WDTPS3 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0 3FFFFEh DEVID1 3FFFFFh DEVID2 Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: x = unknown, - = unimplemented. Shaded cells are unimplemented, read as `0'. Values reflect the unprogrammed state as received from the factory and following Power-on Resets. In all other Reset states, the configuration bytes maintain their previously programmed states. The value of these bits in program memory should always be `1'. This ensures that the location is executed as a NOP if it is accidentally executed. This bit should always be maintained as `0'. See Register 22-6 and Register 22-7 for DEVID values. These registers are read-only and cannot be programmed by the user. DS39770B-page 284 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 22-1: R/WO-1 DEBUG bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `1' = Bit is set `0' = Bit is cleared -n = Value when device is unprogrammed bit 7 CONFIG1L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300000h) R/WO-1 STVREN U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- R/WO-1 WDTEN bit 0 R/WO-1 XINST DEBUG: Background Debugger Enable bit 1 = Background debugger disabled; RB6 and RB7 configured as general purpose I/O pins 0 = Background debugger enabled; RB6 and RB7 are dedicated to In-Circuit Debug XINST: Extended Instruction Set Enable bit 1 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode enabled 0 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode disabled (Legacy mode) STVREN: Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset Enable bit 1 = Reset on stack overflow/underflow enabled 0 = Reset on stack overflow/underflow disabled Unimplemented: Read as `0' WDTEN: Watchdog Timer Enable bit 1 = WDT enabled 0 = WDT disabled (control is placed on SWDTEN bit) bit 6 bit 5 bit 4-1 bit 0 REGISTER 22-2: U-0 --(1) bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit CONFIG1H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300001h) U-0 --(1) U-0 --(1) U-0 --(1) U-0 --(2) R/WO-1 CP0 U-0 -- U-0 -- bit 0 WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `1' = Bit is set `0' = Bit is cleared -n = Value when device is unprogrammed bit 7-3 bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as `0' CP0: Code Protection bit 1 = Program memory is not code-protected 0 = Program memory is code-protected Unimplemented: Read as `0' bit 1-0 Note 1: 2: The value of these bits in program memory should always be `1'. This ensures that the location is executed as a NOP if it is accidentally executed. This bit should always be maintained as `0'. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 285 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 22-3: R/WO-1 IESO bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit -n = Value when device is unprogrammed bit 7 U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `1' = Bit is set `0' = Bit is cleared CONFIG2L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300002h) U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- R/WO-1 FOSC2 R/WO-1 FOSC1 R/WO-1 FOSC0 bit 0 R/WO-1 FCMEN IESO: Two-Speed Start-up (Internal/External Oscillator Switchover) Control bit 1 = Two-Speed Start-up enabled 0 = Two-Speed Start-up disabled FCMEN: Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Enable bit 1 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor enabled 0 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor disabled Unimplemented: Read as `0' FOSC2:FOSC0: Oscillator Selection bits 111 = OSC1/OSC2 as primary; EC oscillator with CLKO function and software controlled PLL (EC+PLL) 110 = OSC1/OSC2 as primary; EC oscillator with CLKO function (EC) 101 = OSC1/OSC2 as primary; HS oscillator with software controlled PLL (HS+PLL) 100 = OSC1/OSC2 as primary; HS oscillator (HS) 011 = INTOSC with CLKO as primary; port function on RA7; EC oscillator with CLKO function and software controlled PLL (EC+PLL) 010 = INTOSC with CLKO as primary; port function on RA7; EC oscillator with CLKO function 001 = INTOSC as primary with port function on RA6/RA7; HS oscillator with software controlled PLL (HS+PLL) 000 = INTOSC as primary with port function on RA6/RA7; HS oscillator (HS) bit 6 bit 5-3 bit 2-0 DS39770B-page 286 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 22-4: U-0 --(1) bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit CONFIG2H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300003h) U-0 --(1) U-0 --(1) U-0 --(1) R/WO-1 WDTPS3 R/WO-1 WDTPS2 R/WO-1 WDTPS1 R/WO-1 WDTPS0 bit 0 WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `1' = Bit is set `0' = Bit is cleared -n = Value when device is unprogrammed bit 7-4 bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as `0' WDTPS3:WDTPS0: Watchdog Timer Postscale Select bits 1111 = 1:32,768 1110 = 1:16,384 1101 = 1:8,192 1100 = 1:4,096 1011 = 1:2,048 1010 = 1:1,024 1001 = 1:512 1000 = 1:256 0111 = 1:128 0110 = 1:64 0101 = 1:32 0100 = 1:16 0011 = 1:8 0010 = 1:4 0001 = 1:2 0000 = 1:1 The value of these bits in program memory should always be `1'. This ensures that the location is executed as a NOP if it is accidentally executed. Note 1: REGISTER 22-5: U-0 --(1) bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit CONFIG3H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 3 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300005h) U-0 --(1) U-0 --(1) U-0 --(1) U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- R/WO-1 CCP2MX bit 0 WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `1' = Bit is set `0' = Bit is cleared -n = Value when device is unprogrammed bit 7-1 bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as `0' CCP2MX: CCP2 MUX bit 1 = CCP2 is multiplexed with RC1 0 = CCP2 is multiplexed with RE7 Note 1: The value of these bits in program memory should always be `1'. This ensures that the location is executed as a NOP if it is accidentally executed. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 287 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY REGISTER 22-6: R DEV2 bit 7 Legend: R = Read-only bit bit 7-5 DEV2:DEV0: Device ID bits 111 = PIC18F85J90 101 = PIC18F84J90 100 = PIC18F83J90 011 = PIC18F65J90 001 = PIC18F64J90 000 = PIC18F63J90 REV4:REV0: Revision ID bits These bits are used to indicate the device revision. DEVID1: DEVICE ID REGISTER 1 FOR PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DEVICES R R DEV0 R REV4 R REV3 R REV2 R REV1 R REV0 bit 0 DEV1 bit 4-0 REGISTER 22-7: R DEV10(1) bit 7 Legend: R = Read-only bit bit 7-0 DEVID2: DEVICE ID REGISTER 2 FOR PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DEVICES R R DEV8(1) R DEV7(1) R DEV6(1) R DEV5(1) R DEV4(1) R DEV3(1) bit 0 DEV9(1) DEV10:DEV3: Device ID bits(1) These bits are used with the DEV2:DEV0 bits in the Device ID Register 1 to identify the part number. 0011 1000 = PIC18F6XJ90/8XJ90 devices The values for DEV10:DEV3 may be shared with other device families. The specific device is always identified by using the entire DEV10:DEV0 bit sequence. Note 1: DS39770B-page 288 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 22.2 Watchdog Timer (WDT) For PIC18F85J90 family devices, the WDT is driven by the INTRC oscillator. When the WDT is enabled, the clock source is also enabled. The nominal WDT period is 4 ms and has the same stability as the INTRC oscillator. The 4 ms period of the WDT is multiplied by a 16-bit postscaler. Any output of the WDT postscaler is selected by a multiplexor, controlled by the WDTPS bits in Configuration Register 2H. Available periods range from 4 ms to 131.072 seconds (2.18 minutes). The WDT and postscaler are cleared whenever a SLEEP or CLRWDT instruction is executed, or a clock failure (primary or Timer1 oscillator) has occurred. Note 1: The CLRWDT and SLEEP instructions clear the WDT and postscaler counts when executed. 2: When a CLRWDT instruction is executed, the postscaler count will be cleared. 22.2.1 CONTROL REGISTER The WDTCON register (Register 22-8) is a readable and writable register. The SWDTEN bit enables or disables WDT operation. This allows software to override the WDTEN Configuration bit and enable the WDT only if it has been disabled by the Configuration bit. FIGURE 22-1: SWDTEN WDT BLOCK DIAGRAM Enable WDT INTRC Control Wake-up from Power-Managed Modes Programmable Postscaler 1:1 to 1:32,768 4 Reset WDT Reset WDT Counter INTRC Oscillator /128 CLRWDT All Device Resets WDTPS3:WDTPS0 Sleep WDT REGISTER 22-8: R/W-0 REGSLP(1) bit 7 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 WDTCON: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- U-0 -- R/W-0 SWDTEN(2) bit 0 W = Writable bit `1' = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as `0' `0' = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown REGSLP: Voltage Regulator Low-Power Operation Enable bit(1) 1 = On-chip regulator enters low-power operation when device enters Sleep mode 0 = On-chip regulator continues to operate normally in Sleep mode Unimplemented: Read as `0' SWDTEN: Software Controlled Watchdog Timer Enable bit(2) 1 = Watchdog Timer is on 0 = Watchdog Timer is off The REGSLP bit is automatically cleared when a Low-Voltage Detect condition occurs. This bit has no effect if the Configuration bit, WDTEN, is enabled. bit 6-1 bit 0 Note 1: 2: TABLE 22-3: Name RCON WDTCON SUMMARY OF WATCHDOG TIMER REGISTERS Bit 7 IPEN REGSLP Bit 6 -- -- Bit 5 -- -- Bit 4 RI -- Bit 3 TO -- Bit 2 PD -- Bit 1 POR -- Bit 0 BOR SWDTEN Reset Values on page 52 52 Legend: -- = unimplemented, read as `0'. Shaded cells are not used by the Watchdog Timer. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 289 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 22.3 On-Chip Voltage Regulator FIGURE 22-2: All of the PIC18F85J90 family devices power their core digital logic at a nominal 2.5V. For designs that are required to operate at a higher typical voltage, such as 3.3V, all devices in the PIC18F85J90 family incorporate an on-chip regulator that allows the device to run its core logic from VDD. The regulator is controlled by the ENVREG pin. Tying VDD to the pin enables the regulator, which in turn, provides power to the core from the other VDD pins. When the regulator is enabled, a low-ESR filter capacitor must be connected to the VDDCORE/VCAP pin (Figure 22-2). This helps to maintain the stability of the regulator. The recommended value for the filter capacitor is provided in Section 25.3 "DC Characteristics: PIC18F84J90 Family (Industrial)". If ENVREG is tied to VSS, the regulator is disabled. In this case, separate power for the core logic at a nominal 2.5V must be supplied to the device on the VDDCORE/VCAP pin to run the I/O pins at higher voltage levels, typically 3.3V. Alternatively, the VDDCORE/VCAP and VDD pins can be tied together to operate at a lower nominal voltage. Refer to Figure 22-2 for possible configurations. CONNECTIONS FOR THE ON-CHIP REGULATOR Regulator Enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD): 3.3V PIC18F85J90 VDD ENVREG VDDCORE/VCAP CF VSS Regulator Disabled (ENVREG tied to ground): 2.5V(1) 3.3V(1) PIC18F85J90 VDD ENVREG VDDCORE/VCAP VSS 22.3.1 VOLTAGE REGULATION AND LOW VOLTAGE DETECTION Regulator Disabled (VDD tied to VDDCORE): 2.5V(1) PIC18F85J90 VDD ENVREG VDDCORE/VCAP VSS When it is enabled, the on-chip regulator provides a constant voltage of 2.5V nominal to the digital core logic. The regulator can provide this level from a Vdd of about 2.5V, all the way up to the device's Vddmax. It does not have the capability to boost Vdd levels below 2.5V. In order to prevent "brown-out" conditions, when the voltage drops too low for the regulator, the regulator enters Tracking mode. In Tracking mode, the regulator output follows VDD, with a typical voltage drop of 100 mV. The on-chip regulator includes a simple Low-Voltage Detect (LVD) circuit. If Vdd drops too low to maintain approximately 2.45V on Vddcore, the circuit sets the Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Flag, LVDIF (PIR2<2>) and clears the REGSLP (WDTCON<7>) bit, if it was set. This can be used to generate an interrupt and put the application into a low-power operational mode, or trigger an orderly shutdown. Low-Voltage Detection is only available when the regulator is enabled. Note 1: These are typical operating voltages. Refer to Section 25.1 "DC Characteristics: Supply Voltage" for the full operating ranges of VDD and VDDCORE. DS39770B-page 290 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 22.3.2 ON-CHIP REGULATOR AND BOR When the on-chip regulator is enabled, PIC18F85J90 family devices also have a simple Brown-out Reset capability. If the voltage supplied to the regulator falls to a level that is inadequate to maintain a regulated output for full-speed operation, the regulator Reset circuitry will generate a Brown-out Reset. This event is captured by the BOR flag bit (RCON<0>). The operation of the BOR is described in more detail in Section 4.4 "Brown-out Reset (BOR)" and Section 4.4.1 "Detecting BOR". The REGSLP bit is automatically cleared by hardware when a Low-Voltage Detect condition occurs. The REGSLP bit can be set again in software, which would continue to keep the voltage regulator in Low-Power mode. This, however, is not recommended if any write operations to the Flash will be performed. 22.4 Two-Speed Start-up 22.3.3 POWER-UP REQUIREMENTS The on-chip regulator is designed to meet the power-up requirements for the device. If the application does not use the regulator, then strict power-up conditions must be adhered to. While powering up, VDDCORE must never exceed VDD by 0.3 volts. The Two-Speed Start-up feature helps to minimize the latency period, from oscillator start-up to code execution, by allowing the microcontroller to use the INTRC oscillator as a clock source until the primary clock source is available. It is enabled by setting the IESO Configuration bit. Two-Speed Start-up should be enabled only if the primary oscillator mode is HS or HSPLL (Crystal-Based) modes. Since the EC and ECPLL modes do not require an OST start-up delay, Two-Speed Start-up should be disabled. When enabled, Resets and wake-ups from Sleep mode cause the device to configure itself to run from the internal oscillator block as the clock source, following the time-out of the Power-up Timer after a Power-on Reset is enabled. This allows almost immediate code execution while the primary oscillator starts and the OST is running. Once the OST times out, the device automatically switches to PRI_RUN mode. In all other power-managed modes, Two-Speed Start-up is not used. The device will be clocked by the currently selected clock source until the primary clock source becomes available. The setting of the IESO bit is ignored. 22.3.4 OPERATION IN SLEEP MODE When enabled, the on-chip regulator always consumes a small incremental amount of current over IDD. This includes when the device is in Sleep mode, even though the core digital logic does not require power. To provide additional savings in applications where power resources are critical, the regulator can be configured to automatically disable itself whenever the device goes into Sleep mode. This feature is controlled by the REGSLP bit (WDTCON<7>). Setting this bit disables the regulator in Sleep mode, and reduces its current consumption to a minimum. Substantial Sleep mode power savings can be obtained by setting the REGSLP bit, but device wake-up time will increase in order to ensure the regulator has enough time to stabilize. FIGURE 22-3: TIMING TRANSITION FOR TWO-SPEED START-UP (INTRC TO HSPLL) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 INTRC OSC1 TOST(1) PLL Clock Output TPLL(1) 1 2 n-1 n Clock Transition CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC PC + 2 OSTS bit Set PC + 4 PC + 6 Wake from Interrupt Event Note 1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 291 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 22.4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR USING TWO-SPEED START-UP While using the INTRC oscillator in Two-Speed Start-up, the device still obeys the normal command sequences for entering power-managed modes, including serial SLEEP instructions (refer to Section 3.1.4 "Multiple Sleep Commands"). In practice, this means that user code can change the SCS1:SCS0 bit settings or issue SLEEP instructions before the OST times out. This would allow an application to briefly wake-up, perform routine "housekeeping" tasks and return to Sleep before the device starts to operate from the primary oscillator. User code can also check if the primary clock source is currently providing the device clocking by checking the status of the OSTS bit (OSCCON<3>). If the bit is set, the primary oscillator is providing the clock. Otherwise, the internal oscillator block is providing the clock during wake-up from Reset or Sleep mode. Clock failure is tested for on the falling edge of the sample clock. If a sample clock falling edge occurs while CM is still set, a clock failure has been detected (Figure 22-5). This causes the following: * the FSCM generates an oscillator fail interrupt by setting bit, OSCFIF (PIR2<7>); * the device clock source is switched to the internal oscillator block (OSCCON is not updated to show the current clock source - this is the fail-safe condition); and * the WDT is reset. During switchover, the postscaler frequency from the internal oscillator block may not be sufficiently stable for timing sensitive applications. In these cases, it may be desirable to select another clock configuration and enter an alternate power-managed mode. This can be done to attempt a partial recovery or execute a controlled shutdown. See Section 3.1.4 "Multiple Sleep Commands" and Section 22.4.1 "Special Considerations for Using Two-Speed Start-up" for more details. The FSCM will detect failures of the primary or secondary clock sources only. If the internal oscillator block fails, no failure would be detected, nor would any action be possible. 22.5 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the microcontroller to continue operation in the event of an external oscillator failure by automatically switching the device clock to the internal oscillator block. The FSCM function is enabled by setting the FCMEN Configuration bit. When FSCM is enabled, the INTRC oscillator runs at all times to monitor clocks to peripherals and provides a backup clock in the event of a clock failure. Clock monitoring (shown in Figure 22-4) is accomplished by creating a sample clock signal which is the INTRC output divided by 64. This allows ample time between FSCM sample clocks for a peripheral clock edge to occur. The peripheral device clock and the sample clock are presented as inputs to the Clock Monitor latch (CM). The CM is set on the falling edge of the device clock source but cleared on the rising edge of the sample clock. 22.5.1 FSCM AND THE WATCHDOG TIMER Both the FSCM and the WDT are clocked by the INTRC oscillator. Since the WDT operates with a separate divider and counter, disabling the WDT has no effect on the operation of the INTRC oscillator when the FSCM is enabled. As already noted, the clock source is switched to the INTRC clock when a clock failure is detected; this may mean a substantial change in the speed of code execution. If the WDT is enabled with a small prescale value, a decrease in clock speed allows a WDT time-out to occur and a subsequent device Reset. For this reason, Fail-Safe Clock Monitor events also reset the WDT and postscaler, allowing it to start timing from when execution speed was changed and decreasing the likelihood of an erroneous time-out. If the interrupt is disabled, subsequent interrupts while in Idle mode will cause the CPU to begin executing instructions while being clocked by the INTRC source. FIGURE 22-4: FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM Clock Monitor Latch (CM) (edge-triggered) Peripheral Clock S Q INTRC Source (32 s) / 64 488 Hz (2.048 ms) C Q Clock Failure Detected DS39770B-page 292 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 22-5: Sample Clock Device Clock Output CM Output (Q) Failure Detected OSCFIF Oscillator Failure FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM CM Test Note: CM Test CM Test The device clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in this example have been chosen for clarity. 22.5.2 EXITING FAIL-SAFE OPERATION 22.5.4 POR OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP The fail-safe condition is terminated by either a device Reset or by entering a power-managed mode. On Reset, the controller starts the primary clock source specified in Configuration Register 2H (with any required start-up delays that are required for the oscillator mode, such as OST or PLL timer). The INTRC oscillator provides the device clock until the primary clock source becomes ready (similar to a Two-Speed Start-up). The clock source is then switched to the primary clock (indicated by the OSTS bit in the OSCCON register becoming set). The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor then resumes monitoring the peripheral clock. The primary clock source may never become ready during start-up. In this case, operation is clocked by the INTOSC multiplexor. The OSCCON register will remain in its Reset state until a power-managed mode is entered. The FSCM is designed to detect oscillator failure at any point after the device has exited Power-on Reset (POR) or low-power Sleep mode. When the primary device clock is either EC or INTRC mode, monitoring can begin immediately following these events. For HS or HSPLL modes, the situation is somewhat different. Since the oscillator may require a start-up time considerably longer than the FSCM sample clock time, a false clock failure may be detected. To prevent this, the internal oscillator block is automatically configured as the device clock and functions until the primary clock is stable (the OST and PLL timers have timed out). This is identical to Two-Speed Start-up mode. Once the primary clock is stable, the INTRC returns to its role as the FSCM source. Note: The same logic that prevents false oscillator failure interrupts on POR, or wake from Sleep, will also prevent the detection of the oscillator's failure to start at all following these events. This can be avoided by monitoring the OSTS bit and using a timing routine to determine if the oscillator is taking too long to start. Even so, no oscillator failure interrupt will be flagged. 22.5.3 FSCM INTERRUPTS IN POWER-MANAGED MODES By entering a power-managed mode, the clock multiplexor selects the clock source selected by the OSCCON register. Fail-Safe Clock Monitoring of the power-managed clock source resumes in the power-managed mode. If an oscillator failure occurs during power-managed operation, the subsequent events depend on whether or not the oscillator failure interrupt is enabled. If enabled (OSCFIF = 1), code execution will be clocked by the INTRC multiplexor. An automatic transition back to the failed clock source will not occur. As noted in Section 22.4.1 "Special Considerations for Using Two-Speed Start-up", it is also possible to select another clock configuration and enter an alternate power-managed mode while waiting for the primary clock to become stable. When the new power-managed mode is selected, the primary clock is disabled. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 293 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 22.6 Program Verification and Code Protection 22.7 In-Circuit Serial Programming PIC18F85J90 family microcontrollers can be serially programmed while in the end application circuit. This is simply done with two lines for clock and data and three other lines for power, ground and the programming voltage. This allows customers to manufacture boards with unprogrammed devices and then program the microcontroller just before shipping the product. This also allows the most recent firmware or a custom firmware to be programmed. For all devices in the PIC18F85J90 family of devices, the on-chip program memory space is treated as a single block. Code protection for this block is controlled by one Configuration bit, CP0. This bit inhibits external reads and writes to the program memory space. It has no direct effect in normal execution mode. 22.6.1 CONFIGURATION REGISTER PROTECTION The Configuration registers are protected against untoward changes or reads in two ways. The primary protection is the write-once feature of the Configuration bits which prevents reconfiguration once the bit has been programmed during a power cycle. To safeguard against unpredictable events, Configuration bit changes resulting from individual cell-level disruptions (such as ESD events) will cause a parity error and trigger a device Reset. The data for the Configuration registers is derived from the Flash Configuration Words in program memory. When the CP0 bit set, the source data for device configuration is also protected as a consequence. 22.8 In-Circuit Debugger When the DEBUG Configuration bit is programmed to a `0', the In-Circuit Debugger functionality is enabled. This function allows simple debugging functions when used with MPLAB(R) IDE. When the microcontroller has this feature enabled, some resources are not available for general use. Table 22-4 shows which resources are required by the background debugger. TABLE 22-4: I/O pins: Stack: DEBUGGER RESOURCES RB6, RB7 2 levels 512 bytes 10 bytes Program Memory: Data Memory: DS39770B-page 294 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 23.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY The literal instructions may use some of the following operands: * A literal value to be loaded into a file register (specified by `k') * The desired FSR register to load the literal value into (specified by `f') * No operand required (specified by `--') The control instructions may use some of the following operands: * A program memory address (specified by `n') * The mode of the CALL or RETURN instructions (specified by `s') * The mode of the table read and table write instructions (specified by `m') * No operand required (specified by `--') All instructions are a single word, except for four double-word instructions. These instructions were made double-word to contain the required information in 32 bits. In the second word, the 4 MSbs are `1's. If this second word is executed as an instruction (by itself), it will execute as a NOP. All single-word instructions are executed in a single instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the program counter is changed as a result of the instruction. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction cycles with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed as a NOP. The double-word instructions execute in two instruction cycles. One instruction cycle consists of four oscillator periods. Thus, for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, the normal instruction execution time is 1 s. If a conditional test is true, or the program counter is changed as a result of an instruction, the instruction execution time is 2 s. Two-word branch instructions (if true) would take 3 s. Figure 23-1 shows the general formats that the instructions can have. All examples use the convention `nnh' to represent a hexadecimal number. The Instruction Set Summary, shown in Table 23-2, lists the standard instructions recognized by the Microchip MPASMTM Assembler. Section 23.1.1 "Standard Instruction Set" provides a description of each instruction. The PIC18F85J90 family of devices incorporate the standard set of 75 PIC18 core instructions, as well as an extended set of 8 new instructions for the optimization of code that is recursive or that utilizes a software stack. The extended set is discussed later in this section. 23.1 Standard Instruction Set The standard PIC18 instruction set adds many enhancements to the previous PIC(R) MCU instruction sets, while maintaining an easy migration from these PIC MCU instruction sets. Most instructions are a single program memory word (16 bits), but there are four instructions that require two program memory locations. Each single-word instruction is a 16-bit word divided into an opcode, which specifies the instruction type and one or more operands, which further specify the operation of the instruction. The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped into four basic categories: * * * * Byte-oriented operations Bit-oriented operations Literal operations Control operations The PIC18 instruction set summary in Table 23-2 lists byte-oriented, bit-oriented, literal and control operations. Table 23-1 shows the opcode field descriptions. Most byte-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. 2. 3. The file register (specified by `f') The destination of the result (specified by `d') The accessed memory (specified by `a') The file register designator `f' specifies which file register is to be used by the instruction. The destination designator `d' specifies where the result of the operation is to be placed. If `d' is zero, the result is placed in the WREG register. If `d' is one, the result is placed in the file register specified in the instruction. All bit-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. 2. 3. The file register (specified by `f') The bit in the file register (specified by `b') The accessed memory (specified by `a') The bit field designator `b' selects the number of the bit affected by the operation, while the file register designator `f' represents the number of the file in which the bit is located. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 295 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 23-1: Field a OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Description RAM access bit: a = 0: RAM location in Access RAM (BSR register is ignored) a = 1: RAM bank is specified by BSR register Bit address within an 8-bit file register (0 to 7). Bank Select Register. Used to select the current RAM bank. ALU Status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative. Destination select bit: d = 0: store result in WREG d = 1: store result in file register f Destination: either the WREG register or the specified register file location. 8-bit Register file address (00h to FFh), or 2-bit FSR designator (0h to 3h). 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the source address. 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the destination address. Global Interrupt Enable bit. Literal field, constant data or label (may be either an 8-bit, 12-bit or a 20-bit value). Label name. The mode of the TBLPTR register for the table read and table write instructions. Only used with table read and table write instructions: No Change to register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) Post-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) Post-Decrement register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) Pre-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) The relative address (2's complement number) for relative branch instructions or the direct address for Call/Branch and Return instructions. Program Counter. Program Counter Low Byte. Program Counter High Byte. Program Counter High Byte Latch. Program Counter Upper Byte Latch. Power-Down bit. Product of Multiply High Byte. Product of Multiply Low Byte. Fast Call/Return mode select bit: s = 0: do not update into/from shadow registers s = 1: certain registers loaded into/from shadow registers (Fast mode) 21-bit Table Pointer (points to a Program Memory location). 8-bit Table Latch. Time-out bit. Top-of-Stack. Unused or Unchanged. Watchdog Timer. Working register (accumulator). Don't care (`0' or `1'). The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for compatibility with all Microchip software tools. 7-bit offset value for Indirect Addressing of register files (source). 7-bit offset value for Indirect Addressing of register files (destination). bbb BSR C, DC, Z, OV, N d dest f fs fd GIE k label mm * *+ *+* n PC PCL PCH PCLATH PCLATU PD PRODH PRODL s TBLPTR TABLAT TO TOS u WDT WREG x zs zd { } [text] (text) [expr] Optional argument. Indicates an Indexed Address. The contents of text. Specifies bit n of the register indicated by the pointer expr. Assigned to. Register bit field. In the set of. User-defined term (font is Courier). DS39770B-page 296 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 23-1: GENERAL FORMAT FOR INSTRUCTIONS Byte-oriented file register operations 15 OPCODE 10 d 9 87 a f (FILE #) 0 ADDWF MYREG, W, B Example Instruction d = 0 for result destination to be WREG register d = 1 for result destination to be file register (f) a = 0 to force Access Bank a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address Byte to Byte move operations (2-word) 15 15 1111 12 11 f (Source FILE #) 0 f (Destination FILE #) 12 11 0 MOVFF MYREG1, MYREG2 OPCODE f = 12-bit file register address Bit-oriented file register operations 15 12 11 98 7 f (FILE #) 0 BSF MYREG, bit, B OPCODE b (BIT #) a b = 3-bit position of bit in file register (f) a = 0 to force Access Bank a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address Literal operations 15 OPCODE k = 8-bit immediate value Control operations CALL, GOTO and Branch operations 15 OPCODE 15 1111 12 11 n<19:8> (literal) 87 n<7:0> (literal) 0 0 GOTO Label 8 7 k (literal) 0 MOVLW 7Fh n = 20-bit immediate value 15 OPCODE 15 1111 S = Fast bit 15 OPCODE 15 OPCODE 87 n<7:0> (literal) 11 10 n<10:0> (literal) 0 BC MYFUNC 0 BRA MYFUNC 12 11 n<19:8> (literal) 87 S n<7:0> (literal) 0 0 CALL MYFUNC (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 297 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 23-2: Mnemonic, Operands PIC18F85J90 FAMILY INSTRUCTION SET 16-bit Instruction Word Description Cycles MSb LSb Status Affected Notes BYTE-ORIENTED OPERATIONS ADDWF ADDWFC ANDWF CLRF COMF CPFSEQ CPFSGT CPFSLT DECF DECFSZ DCFSNZ INCF INCFSZ INFSNZ IORWF MOVF MOVFF MOVWF MULWF NEGF RLCF RLNCF RRCF RRNCF SETF SUBFWB SUBWF SUBWFB SWAPF TSTFSZ XORWF Note 1: f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a f, a f, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a fs, fd f, a f, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a Add WREG and f Add WREG and Carry bit to f AND WREG with f Clear f Complement f Compare f with WREG, skip = Compare f with WREG, skip > Compare f with WREG, skip < Decrement f Decrement f, Skip if 0 Decrement f, Skip if Not 0 Increment f Increment f, Skip if 0 Increment f, Skip if Not 0 Inclusive OR WREG with f Move f Move fs (source) to 1st word fd (destination) 2nd word Move WREG to f Multiply WREG with f Negate f Rotate Left f through Carry Rotate Left f (No Carry) Rotate Right f through Carry Rotate Right f (No Carry) Set f Subtract f from WREG with borrow Subtract WREG from f Subtract WREG from f with borrow Swap nibbles in f Test f, skip if 0 Exclusive OR WREG with f 1 1 1 1 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0010 0010 0001 0110 0001 0110 0110 0110 0000 0010 0100 0010 0011 0100 0001 0101 1100 1111 0110 0000 0110 0011 0100 0011 0100 0110 0101 01da 00da 01da 101a 11da 001a 010a 000a 01da 11da 11da 10da 11da 10da 00da 00da ffff ffff 111a 001a 110a 01da 01da 00da 00da 100a 01da ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N Z Z, N None None None C, DC, Z, OV, N None None C, DC, Z, OV, N None None Z, N Z, N None 1, 2 1, 2 1,2 2 1, 2 4 4 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 4 1, 2 1, 2 1 None None 1, 2 C, DC, Z, OV, N C, Z, N 1, 2 Z, N C, Z, N Z, N None 1, 2 C, DC, Z, OV, N 0101 11da 0101 10da ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2 ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N ffff None ffff None ffff Z, N 4 1, 2 1 0011 10da 1 (2 or 3) 0110 011a 1 0001 10da 2: 3: 4: When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is `1' for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a `0'. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and, where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16-bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. DS39770B-page 298 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 23-2: Mnemonic, Operands PIC18F85J90 FAMILY INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED) 16-bit Instruction Word Description Cycles MSb LSb Status Affected Notes BIT-ORIENTED OPERATIONS BCF BSF BTFSC BTFSS BTG BC BN BNC BNN BNOV BNZ BOV BRA BZ CALL CLRWDT DAW GOTO NOP NOP POP PUSH RCALL RESET RETFIE RETLW RETURN SLEEP Note 1: f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a n n n n n n n n n n, s -- -- n -- -- -- -- n s k s -- Bit Clear f Bit Set f Bit Test f, Skip if Clear Bit Test f, Skip if Set Bit Toggle f Branch if Carry Branch if Negative Branch if Not Carry Branch if Not Negative Branch if Not Overflow Branch if Not Zero Branch if Overflow Branch Unconditionally Branch if Zero Call subroutine 1st word 2nd word Clear Watchdog Timer Decimal Adjust WREG Go to address 1st word 2nd word No Operation No Operation Pop top of return stack (TOS) Push top of return stack (TOS) Relative Call Software device Reset Return from interrupt enable Return with literal in WREG Return from Subroutine Go into Standby mode 1 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 2 1 (2) 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1001 1000 1011 1010 0111 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1101 1110 1110 1111 0000 0000 1110 1111 0000 1111 0000 0000 1101 0000 0000 bbba bbba bbba bbba bbba 0010 0110 0011 0111 0101 0001 0100 0nnn 0000 110s kkkk 0000 0000 1111 kkkk 0000 xxxx 0000 0000 1nnn 0000 0000 ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn kkkk kkkk 0000 0000 kkkk kkkk 0000 xxxx 0000 0000 nnnn 1111 0001 kkkk 0001 0000 ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn kkkk kkkk 0100 0111 kkkk kkkk 0000 xxxx 0110 0101 nnnn 1111 000s None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None TO, PD C None 1, 2 1, 2 3, 4 3, 4 1, 2 CONTROL OPERATIONS 0000 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 None None None None None All GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL kkkk None 001s None 0011 TO, PD 4 2: 3: 4: When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is `1' for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a `0'. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and, where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16-bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 299 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 23-2: Mnemonic, Operands LITERAL OPERATIONS ADDLW ANDLW IORLW LFSR MOVLB MOVLW MULLW RETLW SUBLW XORLW TBLRD* TBLRD*+ TBLRD*TBLRD+* TBLWT* TBLWT*+ TBLWT*TBLWT+* Note 1: k k k f, k k k k k k k Add literal and WREG AND literal with WREG Inclusive OR literal with WREG Move literal (12-bit) 2nd word to FSR(f) 1st word Move literal to BSR<3:0> Move literal to WREG Multiply literal with WREG Return with literal in WREG Subtract WREG from literal Exclusive OR literal with WREG 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 0000 0000 0000 1110 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1011 1001 1110 0000 0001 1110 1101 1100 1000 1010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 kkkk kkkk kkkk 00ff kkkk 0000 kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N Z, N None None None None None C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N None None None None None None None None PIC18F85J90 FAMILY INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED) 16-bit Instruction Word Description Cycles MSb LSb Status Affected Notes DATA MEMORY PROGRAM MEMORY OPERATIONS Table Read 2 Table Read with post-increment Table Read with post-decrement Table Read with pre-increment Table Write 2 Table Write with post-increment Table Write with post-decrement Table Write with pre-increment 2: 3: 4: When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is `1' for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a `0'. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and, where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16-bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. DS39770B-page 300 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 23.1.1 STANDARD INSTRUCTION SET ADDLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: ADD Literal to W ADDLW 0 k 255 (W) + k W N, OV, C, DC, Z 0000 1111 kkkk kkkk k ADDWF Syntax: Operands: ADD W to f ADDWF 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (W) + (f) dest N, OV, C, DC, Z 0010 01da ffff ffff f {,d {,a}} Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: The contents of W are added to the 8-bit literal `k' and the result is placed in W. 1 1 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Add W to register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Q2 Read literal `k' ADDLW Q3 Process Data 15h Q4 Write to W Example: Before Instruction W = 10h After Instruction W= 25h Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' ADDWF 17h 0C2h 0D9h 0C2h Q3 Process Data REG, 0, 0 Q4 Write to destination Example: Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = Note: All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s). (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 301 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY ADDWFC Syntax: Operands: ADD W and Carry bit to f ADDWFC 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (W) + (f) + (C) dest N,OV, C, DC, Z 0010 00da ffff ffff f {,d {,a}} ANDLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read literal `k' ANDLW A3h 03h Q3 Process Data 05Fh Q4 Write to W AND Literal with W ANDLW 0 k 255 (W) .AND. k W N, Z 0000 1011 kkkk kkkk k Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: The contents of W are ANDed with the 8-bit literal `k'. The result is placed in W. 1 1 Add W, the Carry flag and data memory location `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed in data memory location `f'. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Example: Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' ADDWFC 1 02h 4Dh 0 02h 50h Q3 Process Data REG, 0, 1 Q4 Write to destination Example: Before Instruction Carry bit = REG = W = After Instruction Carry bit = REG = W = DS39770B-page 302 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY ANDWF Syntax: Operands: AND W with f ANDWF 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (W) .AND. (f) dest N, Z 0001 01da ffff ffff f {,d {,a}} BC Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Branch if Carry BC n -128 n 127 if Carry bit is `1', (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1110 0010 nnnn nnnn Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: The contents of W are ANDed with register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Decode No operation If No Jump: Q2 Read register `f' ANDWF 17h C2h 02h C2h Q3 Process Data REG, 0, 0 Q4 Write to destination Q1 Decode If the Carry bit is '1', then the program will branch. The 2's complement number `2n' is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. 1 1(2) Q2 Read literal `n' No operation Q2 Read literal `n' HERE = = = = = Q3 Process Data No operation Q3 Process Data BC 5 Q4 Write to PC No operation Q4 No operation Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Example: Example: Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Carry PC If Carry PC address (HERE) 1; address (HERE + 12) 0; address (HERE + 2) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 303 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY BCF Syntax: Operands: Bit Clear f BCF f, b {,a} BN Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: bbba ffff ffff Description: Branch if Negative BN n 0 f 255 0b7 a [0,1] 0 f None 1001 -128 n 127 if Negative bit is `1', (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1110 0110 nnnn nnnn Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Bit `b' in register `f' is cleared. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. If the Negative bit is `1', then the program will branch. The 2's complement number `2n' is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Decode 1 1(2) Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' BCF Q3 Process Data FLAG_REG, Q4 Write register `f' 7, 0 Q2 Read literal `n' No operation Q2 Read literal `n' HERE = = = = = Q3 Process Data No operation Q3 Process Data BN Jump Q4 Write to PC No operation Q4 No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Decode Example: Before Instruction FLAG_REG = C7h After Instruction FLAG_REG = 47h Example: Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Negative PC If Negative PC address (HERE) 1; address (Jump) 0; address (HERE + 2) DS39770B-page 304 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY BNC Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Branch if Not Carry BNC n BNN Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: 0011 nnnn nnnn Encoding: Description: Branch if Not Negative BNN n -128 n 127 if Carry bit is `0', (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1110 -128 n 127 if Negative bit is `0', (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1110 0111 nnnn nnnn If the Carry bit is `0', then the program will branch. The 2's complement number `2n' is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. If the Negative bit is `0', then the program will branch. The 2's complement number `2n' is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Decode No operation If No Jump: Q1 Decode 1 1(2) Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q2 Q3 Process Data No operation Q3 Process Data BNC Jump Q4 Write to PC No operation Q4 No operation Q1 Decode No operation If No Jump: Q2 Q1 Decode 1 1(2) Q2 Read literal `n' No operation Q2 Read literal `n' HERE = = = = = Q3 Process Data No operation Q3 Process Data BNN Jump Q4 Write to PC No operation Q4 No operation Read literal `n' No operation Read literal `n' HERE = = = = = Example: Example: Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Carry PC If Carry PC address (HERE) 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Negative PC If Negative PC address (HERE) 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 305 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY BNOV Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Branch if Not Overflow BNOV n BNZ Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: 0101 nnnn nnnn Encoding: Description: Branch if Not Zero BNZ n -128 n 127 if Overflow bit is `0', (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1110 -128 n 127 if Zero bit is `0', (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1110 0001 nnnn nnnn If the Overflow bit is `0', then the program will branch. The 2's complement number `2n' is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. If the Zero bit is `0', then the program will branch. The 2's complement number `2n' is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Decode No operation If No Jump: Q1 Decode 1 1(2) Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q2 Q3 Process Data No operation Q3 Process Data BNOV Jump address (HERE) 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) Q4 Write to PC No operation Q4 No operation Q1 Decode No operation If No Jump: Q2 Q1 Decode 1 1(2) Q2 Read literal `n' No operation Q2 Read literal `n' HERE = = = = = Q3 Process Data No operation Q3 Process Data BNZ Jump Q4 Write to PC No operation Q4 No operation Read literal `n' No operation Read literal `n' HERE = = = = = Example: Example: Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Overflow PC If Overflow PC Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Zero PC If Zero PC address (HERE) 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) DS39770B-page 306 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY BRA Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Unconditional Branch BRA n BSF Syntax: Operands: Bit Set f BSF f, b {,a} -1024 n 1023 (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1101 0nnn nnnn nnnn 0 f 255 0b7 a [0,1] 1 f None 1000 bbba ffff ffff Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Add the 2's complement number `2n' to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. 1 2 Bit `b' in register `f' is set. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode No operation Q2 Read literal `n' No operation Q3 Process Data No operation Q4 Write to PC No operation Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: 1 1 Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' BSF = = Q3 Process Data Q4 Write register `f' Example: HERE = = BRA Jump Before Instruction PC After Instruction PC address (HERE) address (Jump) Example: FLAG_REG, 7, 1 0Ah 8Ah Before Instruction FLAG_REG After Instruction FLAG_REG (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 307 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY BTFSC Syntax: Operands: Bit Test File, Skip if Clear BTFSC f, b {,a} 0 f 255 0b7 a [0,1] skip if (f) = 0 None 1011 bbba ffff ffff BTFSS Syntax: Operands: Bit Test File, Skip if Set BTFSS f, b {,a} 0 f 255 0b<7 a [0,1] skip if (f) = 1 None 1010 bbba ffff ffff Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: If bit `b' in register `f' is `0', then the next instruction is skipped. If bit `b' is `0', then the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. If bit `b' in register `f' is `1', then the next instruction is skipped. If bit `b' is `1', then the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: 1 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Words: Cycles: 1 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q3 Process Data Q3 No operation Q3 No operation No operation BTFSS : : Q4 No operation Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode If skip: Q1 No operation Q1 No operation No operation Example: Q2 No operation Q2 No operation No operation HERE FALSE TRUE = = = = = Q3 No operation Q3 No operation No operation BTFSC : : Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation Q2 Read register `f' Q3 Process Data Q4 No operation Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode If skip: Q1 No operation Q1 No operation No operation Example: Q2 No operation Q2 No operation No operation HERE FALSE TRUE = = = = = Q2 Read register `f' If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: FLAG, 1, 0 FLAG, 1, 0 Before Instruction PC After Instruction If FLAG<1> PC If FLAG<1> PC address (HERE) 0; address (TRUE) 1; address (FALSE) Before Instruction PC After Instruction If FLAG<1> PC If FLAG<1> PC address (HERE) 0; address (FALSE) 1; address (TRUE) DS39770B-page 308 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY BTG Syntax: Operands: Bit Toggle f BTG f, b {,a} 0 f 255 0b<7 a [0,1] (f) f None 0111 bbba ffff ffff BOV Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Branch if Overflow BOV n -128 n 127 if Overflow bit is `1', (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1110 0100 nnnn nnnn Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Bit `b' in data memory location `f' is inverted. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. If the Overflow bit is `1', then the program will branch. The 2's complement number `2n' is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Decode No operation If No Jump: Q1 Decode 1 1(2) Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' BTG Q3 Process Data PORTC, 4, 0 Example: Q4 Write register `f' Q2 Read literal `n' No operation Q2 Read literal `n' HERE = = = = = Q3 Process Data No operation Q3 Process Data BOV Jump Q4 Write to PC No operation Q4 No operation Example: Before Instruction: PORTC = 0111 0101 [75h] After Instruction: PORTC = 0110 0101 [65h] Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Overflow PC If Overflow PC address (HERE) 1; address (Jump) 0; address (HERE + 2) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 309 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY BZ Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Branch if Zero BZ n CALL Syntax: Operands: Operation: Subroutine Call CALL k {,s} 0 k 1048575 s [0,1] (PC) + 4 TOS, k PC<20:1>; if s = 1 (W) WS, (STATUS) STATUSS, (BSR) BSRS None 1110 1111 110s k19kkk k7kkk kkkk kkkk0 kkkk8 -128 n 127 if Zero bit is `1', (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1110 0000 nnnn nnnn If the Zero bit is `1', then the program will branch. The 2's complement number `2n' is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Status Affected: Encoding: 1st word (k<7:0>) 2nd word(k<19:8>) Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Decode No operation If No Jump: Q1 Decode 1 1(2) Q2 Read literal `n' No operation Q2 Read literal `n' HERE = = = = = Q3 Process Data No operation Q3 Process Data BZ Jump Q4 Write to PC No operation Q4 No operation Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Subroutine call of entire 2-Mbyte memory range. First, return address (PC+ 4) is pushed onto the return stack. If `s' = 1, the W, STATUS and BSR registers are also pushed into their respective shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS. If `s' = 0, no update occurs (default). Then, the 20-bit value `k' is loaded into PC<20:1>. CALL is a two-cycle instruction. 2 2 Q2 Read literal `k'<7:0>, No operation HERE Q3 Push PC to stack No operation CALL Q4 Read literal 'k'<19:8>, Write to PC No operation Example: Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Zero PC If Zero PC No operation Example: address (HERE) 1; address (Jump) 0; address (HERE + 2) THERE,1 Before Instruction PC = After Instruction PC = TOS = WS = BSRS = STATUSS = address (HERE) address (THERE) address (HERE + 4) W BSR STATUS DS39770B-page 310 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY CLRF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Clear f CLRF f {,a} CLRWDT Syntax: Operands: Operation: Clear Watchdog Timer CLRWDT None 000h WDT, 000h WDT postscaler, 1 TO, 1 PD TO, PD 0000 0000 0000 0100 0 f 255 a [0,1] 000h f, 1Z Z 0110 101a ffff ffff Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Clears the contents of the specified register. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. CLRWDT instruction resets the Watchdog Timer. It also resets the postscaler of the WDT. Status bits, TO and PD, are set. 1 1 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 No operation CLRWDT = = = = = ? Q3 Process Data Q4 No operation Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' CLRF = = 5Ah 00h Q3 Process Data FLAG_REG,1 Q4 Write register `f' Example: Before Instruction WDT Counter After Instruction WDT Counter WDT Postscaler TO PD Example: 00h 0 1 1 Before Instruction FLAG_REG After Instruction FLAG_REG (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 311 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY COMF Syntax: Operands: Complement f COMF f {,d {,a}} CPFSEQ Syntax: Operands: Operation: Compare f with W, Skip if f = W CPFSEQ 0 f 255 a [0,1] (f) - (W), skip if (f) = (W) (unsigned comparison) None 0110 001a ffff ffff Compares the contents of data memory location `f' to the contents of W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If `f' = W, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: 1 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q2 Read register `f' Q3 Process Data Q4 No operation Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation f {,a} 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] f dest N, Z 0001 11da ffff ffff Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: The contents of register `f' are complemented. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' COMF 13h 13h ECh Q3 Process Data REG, 0, 0 Q4 Write to destination Example: Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = W = Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation No No No operation operation operation Example: HERE NEQUAL EQUAL = = = = = = CPFSEQ REG, 0 : : HERE ? ? W; Address (EQUAL) W; Address (NEQUAL) Before Instruction PC Address W REG After Instruction If REG PC If REG PC DS39770B-page 312 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY CPFSGT Syntax: Operands: Operation: Compare f with W, Skip if f > W CPFSGT 0 f 255 a [0,1] (f) - (W), skip if (f) > (W) (unsigned comparison) None 0110 010a ffff ffff Compares the contents of data memory location `f' to the contents of the W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If the contents of `f' are greater than the contents of WREG, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: 1 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q3 Process Data Q4 No operation Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation Words: Cycles: f {,a} CPFSLT Syntax: Operands: Operation: Compare f with W, Skip if f < W CPFSLT 0 f 255 a [0,1] (f) - (W), skip if (f) < (W) (unsigned comparison) None 0110 000a ffff ffff f {,a} Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Compares the contents of data memory location `f' to the contents of W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If the contents of `f' are less than the contents of W, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). 1 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode If skip: Q1 No operation Q1 No operation No operation Example: Q2 No operation Q2 No operation No operation HERE NLESS LESS = = < = = Q3 No operation Q3 No operation No operation Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation Q2 Read register `f' Q3 Process Data Q4 No operation Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode If skip: Q2 Read register `f' If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation No No No operation operation operation Example: HERE NGREATER GREATER = = > = = CPFSLT REG, 1 : : Address (HERE) ? W; Address (LESS) W; Address (NLESS) CPFSGT REG, 0 : : Before Instruction PC W After Instruction If REG PC If REG PC Address (HERE) ? W; Address (GREATER) W; Address (NGREATER) Before Instruction PC W After Instruction If REG PC If REG PC (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 313 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DAW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Decimal Adjust W Register DAW None If [W<3:0> > 9] or [DC = 1], then (W<3:0>) + 6 W<3:0>; else (W<3:0>) W<3:0> If [W<7:4> > 9] or [C = 1], then (W<7:4>) + 6 W<7:4>; C = 1; else (W<7:4>) W<7:4> Status Affected: Encoding: Description: C 0000 0000 0000 0111 DECF Syntax: Operands: Decrement f DECF f {,d {,a}} 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f) - 1 dest C, DC, N, OV, Z 0000 01da ffff ffff Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Decrement register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. DAW adjusts the eight-bit value in W, resulting from the earlier addition of two variables (each in packed BCD format) and produces a correct packed BCD result. 1 1 Words: Q2 Read register W DAW A5h 0 0 05h 1 0 Q3 Process Data Q4 Write W Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' DECF 01h 0 00h 1 Q3 Process Data CNT, 1, 0 Q4 Write to destination Example 1: Before Instruction W = C = DC = After Instruction W = C = DC = Example 2: Before Instruction W = C = DC = After Instruction W = C = DC = Example: Before Instruction CNT = Z = After Instruction CNT = Z = CEh 0 0 34h 1 0 DS39770B-page 314 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY DECFSZ Syntax: Operands: Decrement f, Skip if 0 DECFSZ f {,d {,a}} 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f) - 1 dest, skip if result = 0 None 0010 11da ffff ffff DCFSNZ Syntax: Operands: Decrement f, Skip if Not 0 DCFSNZ 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f) - 1 dest, skip if result 0 None 0100 11da ffff ffff f {,d {,a}} Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: The contents of register `f' are decremented. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f' (default). If the result is `0', the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. The contents of register `f' are decremented. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f' (default). If the result is not `0', the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: 1 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' Q2 No operation Q2 No operation No operation HERE CONTINUE Q3 Process Data Q3 No operation Q3 No operation No operation DECFSZ GOTO Q4 Write to destination Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation CNT, 1, 1 LOOP If skip: Q1 No operation Q1 No operation No operation Example: Words: Cycles: 1 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q3 Process Data Q3 No operation Q3 No operation No operation DCFSNZ : : = = = = = ? TEMP - 1, 0; Address (ZERO) 0; Address (NZERO) Q4 Write to destination Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 If skip: Q1 No operation Q1 No operation No operation Example: Read register `f' Q2 No operation Q2 No operation No operation HERE ZERO NZERO If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: TEMP, 1, 0 Before Instruction PC = After Instruction CNT = If CNT = PC = If CNT PC = Address (HERE) CNT - 1 0; Address (CONTINUE) 0; Address (HERE + 2) Before Instruction TEMP After Instruction TEMP If TEMP PC If TEMP PC (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 315 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY GOTO Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: 1st word (k<7:0>) 2nd word(k<19:8>) Description: Unconditional Branch GOTO k 0 k 1048575 k PC<20:1> None 1110 1111 1111 k19kkk k7kkk kkkk kkkk0 kkkk8 Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: INCF Syntax: Operands: Increment f INCF f {,d {,a}} 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f) + 1 dest C, DC, N, OV, Z 0010 10da ffff ffff GOTO allows an unconditional branch anywhere within entire 2-Mbyte memory range. The 20-bit value `k' is loaded into PC<20:1>. GOTO is always a two-cycle instruction. 2 2 The contents of register `f' are incremented. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read literal `k'<7:0>, No operation Q3 No operation No operation Q4 Read literal `k'<19:8>, Write to PC No operation Words: Cycles: No operation Example: 1 1 Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' INCF FFh 0 ? ? 00h 1 1 1 Q3 Process Data CNT, 1, 0 Q4 Write to destination GOTO THERE Q Cycle Activity: After Instruction PC = Address (THERE) Example: Before Instruction CNT = Z = C = DC = After Instruction CNT = Z = C = DC = DS39770B-page 316 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY INCFSZ Syntax: Operands: Increment f, Skip if 0 INCFSZ 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f) + 1 dest, skip if result = 0 None 0011 11da ffff ffff f {,d {,a}} INFSNZ Syntax: Operands: Increment f, Skip if Not 0 INFSNZ 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f) + 1 dest, skip if result 0 None 0100 10da ffff ffff The contents of register `f' are incremented. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f' (default). If the result is not `0', the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q2 Read register `f' Q2 No operation Q2 No operation No operation HERE NZERO ZERO Q3 Process Data Q3 No operation Q3 No operation No operation INCFSZ : : Q4 Write to destination If skip: Q1 No operation Q1 No operation No operation Example: Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation CNT, 1, 0 Q1 No operation Q1 No operation No operation Example: Q2 No operation Q2 No operation No operation HERE ZERO NZERO Q3 No operation Q3 No operation No operation INFSNZ Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to destination 1 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. f {,d {,a}} Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: The contents of register `f' are incremented. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f'. (default) If the result is `0', the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: 1 1(2) Note: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode If skip: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction PC = After Instruction CNT = If CNT = PC = If CNT PC = Address (HERE) CNT + 1 0; Address (ZERO) 0; Address (NZERO) Before Instruction PC = After Instruction REG = If REG PC = If REG = PC = Address (HERE) REG + 1 0; Address (NZERO) 0; Address (ZERO) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 317 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY IORLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Inclusive OR Literal with W IORLW k 0 k 255 (W) .OR. k W N, Z 0000 1001 kkkk kkkk Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: IORWF Syntax: Operands: Inclusive OR W with f IORWF f {,d {,a}} 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (W) .OR. (f) dest N, Z 0001 00da ffff ffff The contents of W are ORed with the eight-bit literal `k'. The result is placed in W. 1 1 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Inclusive OR W with register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Q2 Read literal `k' IORLW 9Ah BFh Q3 Process Data 35h Q4 Write to W Example: Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' IORWF 13h 91h 13h 93h Q3 Process Data RESULT, 0, 1 Q4 Write to destination Example: Before Instruction RESULT = W = After Instruction RESULT = W = DS39770B-page 318 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY LFSR Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read literal `k' MSB Q3 Process Data Q4 Write literal `k' MSB to FSRfH Write literal `k' to FSRfL Load FSR LFSR f, k 0f2 0 k 4095 k FSRf None 1110 1111 1110 0000 00ff k7kkk k11kkk kkkk Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: MOVF Syntax: Operands: Move f MOVF f {,d {,a}} 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] f dest N, Z 0101 00da ffff ffff The 12-bit literal `k' is loaded into the file select register pointed to by `f'. 2 2 The contents of register `f' are moved to a destination dependent upon the status of `d'. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f' (default). Location `f' can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Decode Read literal `k' LSB Process Data Example: After Instruction FSR2H FSR2L LFSR 2, 3ABh = = 03h ABh Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' MOVF = = = = Q3 Process Data REG, 0, 0 22h FFh 22h 22h Q4 Write W Example: Before Instruction REG W After Instruction REG W (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 319 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY MOVFF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (destin.) Description: Move f to f MOVFF fs,fd 0 fs 4095 0 fd 4095 (fs) fd None 1100 1111 ffff ffff ffff ffff ffffs ffffd MOVLB Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Move Literal to Low Nibble in BSR MOVLW k 0 k 255 k BSR None 0000 0001 kkkk kkkk The contents of source register `fs' are moved to destination register `fd'. Location of source `fs' can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data space (000h to FFFh) and location of destination `fd' can also be anywhere from 000h to FFFh. Either source or destination can be W (a useful special situation). MOVFF is particularly useful for transferring a data memory location to a peripheral register (such as the transmit buffer or an I/O port). The MOVFF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register The eight-bit literal `k' is loaded into the Bank Select Register (BSR). The value of BSR<7:4> always remains `0' regardless of the value of k7:k4. 1 1 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read literal `k' MOVLB 02h 05h Q3 Process Data 5 Q4 Write literal `k' to BSR Example: Before Instruction BSR Register = After Instruction BSR Register = Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 2 2 Q2 Read register `f' (src) No operation No dummy read Q3 Process Data No operation Q4 No operation Write register `f' (dest) Decode Example: MOVFF = = = = REG1, REG2 33h 11h 33h 33h Before Instruction REG1 REG2 After Instruction REG1 REG2 DS39770B-page 320 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY MOVLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read literal `k' MOVLW 5Ah Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' MOVWF 4Fh FFh 4Fh 4Fh Q3 Process Data REG, 0 Q4 Write register `f' Q3 Process Data 5Ah Q4 Write to W Move Literal to W MOVLW k 0 k 255 kW None 0000 1110 kkkk kkkk Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: MOVWF Syntax: Operands: Move W to f MOVWF 0 f 255 a [0,1] (W) f None 0110 111a ffff ffff f {,a} The eight-bit literal `k' is loaded into W. 1 1 Move data from W to register `f'. Location `f' can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. 1 1 Example: After Instruction W = Example: Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 321 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY MULLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Multiply Literal with W MULLW k MULWF Syntax: Operands: Operation: 1101 kkkk kkkk Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Multiply W with f MULWF 0 f 255 a [0,1] (W) x (f) PRODH:PRODL None 0000 001a ffff ffff f {,a} 0 k 255 (W) x k PRODH:PRODL None 0000 An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the 8-bit literal `k'. The 16-bit result is placed in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. W is unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. Note that neither Overflow nor Carry is possible in this operation. A Zero result is possible but not detected. An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the register file location `f'. The 16-bit result is stored in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. Both W and `f' are unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. Note that neither Overflow nor Carry is possible in this operation. A Zero result is possible but not detected. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read literal `k' Q3 Process Data Q4 Write registers PRODH: PRODL Example: Before Instruction W PRODH PRODL After Instruction W PRODH PRODL If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: 1 1 Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' Q3 Process Data Q4 Write registers PRODH: PRODL MULLW = = = = = = 0C4h E2h ? ? E2h ADh 08h Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Example: Before Instruction W REG PRODH PRODL After Instruction W REG PRODH PRODL MULWF = = = = = = = = REG, 1 C4h B5h ? ? C4h B5h 8Ah 94h DS39770B-page 322 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NEGF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Negate f NEGF f {,a} NOP Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: ffff ffff Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 No operation Q3 No operation Q4 No operation 110a No Operation NOP None No operation None 0000 1111 0000 xxxx 0000 xxxx 0000 xxxx 0 f 255 a [0,1] (f) + 1 f N, OV, C, DC, Z 0110 Location `f' is negated using two's complement. The result is placed in the data memory location `f'. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. No operation. 1 1 Example: None. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' NEGF Q3 Process Data REG, 1 Q4 Write register `f' Example: Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = 0011 1010 [3Ah] 1100 0110 [C6h] (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 323 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY POP Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Pop Top of Return Stack POP None (TOS) bit bucket None 0000 0000 0000 0110 PUSH Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Push Top of Return Stack PUSH None (PC + 2) TOS None 0000 0000 0000 0101 The TOS value is pulled off the return stack and is discarded. The TOS value then becomes the previous value that was pushed onto the return stack. This instruction is provided to enable the user to properly manage the return stack to incorporate a software stack. 1 1 The PC + 2 is pushed onto the top of the return stack. The previous TOS value is pushed down on the stack. This instruction allows implementing a software stack by modifying TOS and then pushing it onto the return stack. 1 1 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 PUSH PC + 2 onto return stack PUSH = = Q3 No operation Q4 No operation Q2 No operation POP GOTO Q3 POP TOS value Q4 No operation Decode Example: Example: NEW = = 0031A2h 014332h Before Instruction TOS Stack (1 level down) After Instruction TOS PC Before Instruction TOS PC After Instruction PC TOS Stack (1 level down) 345Ah 0124h = = 014332h NEW = = = 0126h 0126h 345Ah DS39770B-page 324 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY RCALL Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Relative Call RCALL n RESET Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: 1nnn nnnn nnnn Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Start reset RESET Reset Value Reset Value Q3 No operation Q4 No operation Reset RESET None Reset all registers and flags that are affected by a MCLR Reset. All 0000 0000 1111 1111 -1024 n 1023 (PC) + 2 TOS, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC None 1101 Subroutine call with a jump up to 1K from the current location. First, return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the stack. Then, add the 2's complement number `2n' to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. 1 2 This instruction provides a way to execute a MCLR Reset in software. 1 1 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Example: Q2 Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to PC After Instruction Registers = Flags* = Read literal `n' PUSH PC to stack No operation Example: No operation HERE No operation RCALL Jump No operation Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction PC = Address (Jump) TOS = Address (HERE + 2) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 325 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY RETFIE Syntax: Operands: Operation: Return from Interrupt RETFIE {s} s [0,1] (TOS) PC, 1 GIE/GIEH or PEIE/GIEL; if s = 1 (WS) W, (STATUSS) STATUS, (BSRS) BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL. 0000 0000 0001 000s RETLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Return Literal to W RETLW k 0 k 255 k W, (TOS) PC, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged None 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Return from interrupt. Stack is popped and Top-of-Stack (TOS) is loaded into the PC. Interrupts are enabled by setting either the high or low priority global interrupt enable bit. If `s' = 1, the contents of the shadow registers WS, STATUSS and BSRS are loaded into their corresponding registers W, STATUS and BSR. If `s' = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). 1 2 W is loaded with the eight-bit literal `k'. The program counter is loaded from the top of the stack (the return address). The high address latch (PCLATH) remains unchanged. 1 2 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read literal `k' No operation Q3 Process Data No operation Q4 POP PC from stack, write to W No operation Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode No operation Example: Q2 Q3 No operation Q4 POP PC from stack Set GIEH or GIEL No operation No operation Example: No operation RETFIE 1 No operation No operation After Interrupt PC W BSR STATUS GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL = = = = = TOS WS BSRS STATUSS 1 CALL TABLE ; ; ; ; : TABLE ADDWF PCL ; RETLW k0 ; RETLW k1 ; : : RETLW kn ; Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = W contains table offset value W now has table value W = offset Begin table End of table 07h value of kn DS39770B-page 326 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY RETURN Syntax: Operands: Operation: Return from Subroutine RETURN {s} s [0,1] (TOS) PC; if s = 1 (WS) W, (STATUSS) STATUS, (BSRS) BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged None 0000 0000 0001 001s RLCF Syntax: Operands: Rotate Left f through Carry RLCF f {,d {,a}} 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Return from subroutine. The stack is popped and the top of the stack (TOS) is loaded into the program counter. If `s'= 1, the contents of the shadow registers WS, STATUSS and BSRS are loaded into their corresponding registers W, STATUS and BSR. If `s' = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). 1 2 The contents of register `f' are rotated one bit to the left through the Carry flag. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. C register f Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode No operation Q2 No operation No operation Q3 Process Data No operation Q4 POP PC from stack No operation Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: 1 1 Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' RLCF Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to destination Example: RETURN After Instruction: PC = TOS Example: Before Instruction REG = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = REG, 0, 0 1110 0110 0 1110 0110 1100 1100 1 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 327 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY RLNCF Syntax: Operands: Rotate Left f (No Carry) RLNCF 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Operation: The contents of register `f' are rotated one bit to the left. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. register f The contents of register `f' are rotated one bit to the right through the Carry flag. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. C register f Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Words: Q2 Read register `f' RLNCF Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to destination Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 1 1 Q3 Process Data REG, 0, 0 Q4 Write to destination Example: Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = REG, 1, 0 Example: Read register `f' RRCF 1010 1011 0101 0111 Before Instruction REG = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = 1110 0110 0 1110 0110 0111 0011 0 DS39770B-page 328 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY RRNCF Syntax: Operands: Rotate Right f (No Carry) RRNCF f {,d {,a}} SETF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: ffff Description: Set f SETF f {,a} 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f 0 f 255 a [0,1] FFh f None 0110 100a ffff ffff Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: The contents of the specified register are set to FFh. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. The contents of register `f' are rotated one bit to the right. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank will be selected, overriding the BSR value. If `a' is `1', then the bank will be selected as per the BSR value (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. register f Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' SETF = = 5Ah FFh Q3 Process Data REG,1 Q4 Write register `f' Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' RRNCF Q3 Process Data REG, 1, 0 Q4 Write to destination Example: Before Instruction REG After Instruction REG Example 1: Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = Example 2: 1101 0111 1110 1011 REG, 0, 0 RRNCF Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = ? 1101 0111 1110 1011 1101 0111 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 329 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY SLEEP Syntax: Operands: Operation: Enter Sleep Mode SLEEP None 00h WDT, 0 WDT postscaler, 1 TO, 0 PD TO, PD 0000 0000 0000 0011 SUBFWB Syntax: Operands: Subtract f from W with Borrow SUBFWB 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (W) - (f) - (C) dest N, OV, C, DC, Z 0101 01da ffff ffff f {,d {,a}} Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: The Power-Down status bit (PD) is cleared. The Time-out status bit (TO) is set. The Watchdog Timer and its postscaler are cleared. The processor is put into Sleep mode with the oscillator stopped. Subtract register `f' and Carry flag (borrow) from W (2's complement method). If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 No operation SLEEP Q3 Process Data Q4 Go to Sleep Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Example: Before Instruction TO = ? ? PD = 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to destination After Instruction 1 TO = PD = 0 If WDT causes wake-up, this bit is cleared. SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 Example 1: Before Instruction REG = 3 W = 2 C = 1 After Instruction REG = FF W = 2 C = 0 Z = 0 N = 1 ; result is negative SUBFWB REG, 0, 0 Example 2: Before Instruction REG = 2 W = 5 C = 1 After Instruction REG = 2 W = 3 C = 1 Z = 0 N = 0 ; result is positive SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 Example 3: Before Instruction REG = 1 W = 2 C = 0 After Instruction REG = 0 W = 2 C = 1 Z = 1 ; result is zero N = 0 DS39770B-page 330 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY SUBLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Example 1: Before Instruction W = C = After Instruction W = C = Z = N = Example 2: Before Instruction W = C = After Instruction W = C = Z = N = Example 3: Before Instruction W = C = After Instruction W = C = Z = N = Q2 Read literal `k' SUBLW 01h ? 01h 1 0 0 SUBLW 02h ? 00h 1 1 0 SUBLW 03h ? FFh 0 0 1 ; (2's complement) ; result is negative Q3 Process Data 02h Q4 Write to W Subtract W from Literal SUBLW k 0 k 255 k - (W) W N, OV, C, DC, Z 0000 1000 kkkk kkkk Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: SUBWF Syntax: Operands: Subtract W from f SUBWF 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f) - (W) dest N, OV, C, DC, Z 0101 11da ffff ffff f {,d {,a}} W is subtracted from the eight-bit literal `k'. The result is placed in W. 1 1 Subtract W from register `f' (2's complement method). If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. ; result is positive Words: Cycles: 02h Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Example 1: 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' SUBWF 3 2 ? 1 2 1 0 0 SUBWF 2 2 ? 2 0 1 1 0 SUBWF 1 2 ? FFh ;(2's complement) 2 0 ; result is negative 0 1 Q3 Process Data REG, 1, 0 Q4 Write to destination ; result is zero 02h Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 2: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 3: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = ; result is positive REG, 0, 0 ; result is zero REG, 1, 0 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 331 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY SUBWFB Syntax: Operands: Subtract W from f with Borrow SUBWFB 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f) - (W) - (C) dest N, OV, C, DC, Z 0101 10da ffff ffff Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Subtract W and the Carry flag (borrow) from register `f' (2's complement method). If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Example 1: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 2: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 3: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W C Z N = = = = 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' SUBWFB 19h 0Dh 1 0Ch 0Dh 1 0 0 Q3 Process Data REG, 1, 0 (0001 1001) (0000 1101) Example: Q4 Write to destination Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' SWAPF 53h 35h Q3 Process Data REG, 1, 0 Q4 Write to destination f {,d {,a}} SWAPF Syntax: Operands: Swap f SWAPF f {,d {,a}} 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (f<3:0>) dest<7:4>, (f<7:4>) dest<3:0> None 0011 10da ffff ffff Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Operation: The upper and lower nibbles of register `f' are exchanged. If `d' is `0', the result is placed in W. If `d' is `1', the result is placed in register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. 1 1 (0000 1011) (0000 1101) ; result is positive Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = SUBWFB REG, 0, 0 1Bh 1Ah 0 1Bh 00h 1 1 0 SUBWFB 03h 0Eh 1 F5h 0Eh 0 0 1 (0001 1011) (0001 1010) (0001 1011) ; result is zero REG, 1, 0 (0000 0011) (0000 1101) (1111 0100) ; [2's comp] (0000 1101) ; result is negative DS39770B-page 332 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TBLRD Syntax: Operands: Operation: Table Read TBLRD ( *; *+; *-; +*) None if TBLRD *, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) TABLAT; TBLPTR - No Change if TBLRD *+, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) TABLAT; (TBLPTR) + 1 TBLPTR if TBLRD *-, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) TABLAT; (TBLPTR) - 1 TBLPTR if TBLRD +*, (TBLPTR) + 1 TBLPTR; (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) TABLAT TBLRD Example 1: Table Read (Continued) TBLRD *+ ; = = = = = +* ; = = = = = = AAh 01A357h 12h 34h 34h 01A358h 55h 00A356h 34h 34h 00A357h Before Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR MEMORY(00A356h) After Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR Example 2: TBLRD Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 10nn nn=0 * =1 *+ =2 *=3 +* Before Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR MEMORY(01A357h) MEMORY(01A358h) After Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR Description: This instruction is used to read the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). To address the program memory, a pointer called Table Pointer (TBLPTR) is used. The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-Mbyte address range. TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLRD instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: * no change * post-increment * post-decrement * pre-increment Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode No operation 1 2 Q2 No operation No operation (Read Program Memory) Q3 No operation No operation Q4 No operation No operation (Write TABLAT) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 333 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TBLWT Syntax: Operands: Operation: Table Write TBLWT ( *; *+; *-; +*) None if TBLWT*, (TABLAT) Holding Register; TBLPTR - No Change if TBLWT*+, (TABLAT) Holding Register; (TBLPTR) + 1 TBLPTR if TBLWT*-, (TABLAT) Holding Register; (TBLPTR) - 1 TBLPTR if TBLWT+*, (TBLPTR) + 1 TBLPTR; (TABLAT) Holding Register None 0000 0000 0000 11nn nn=0 * =1 *+ =2 *=3 +* TBLWT Example 1: Table Write (Continued) TBLWT *+; Before Instruction TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A356h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = FFh After Instructions (table write completion) TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A357h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = 55h Example 2: TBLWT +*; Status Affected: Encoding: Description: This instruction uses the 3 LSBs of TBLPTR to determine which of the 8 holding registers the TABLAT is written to. The holding registers are used to program the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). (Refer to Section 5.0 "Memory Organization" for additional details on programming Flash memory.) The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-Mbyte address range. The LSb of the TBLPTR selects which byte of the program memory location to access. TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLWT instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: * * * * no change post-increment post-decrement pre-increment Before Instruction TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Ah HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = FFh After Instruction (table write completion) TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Bh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = 34h Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: 1 2 Q1 Decode Q2 Q3 Q4 No No No operation operation operation No No No No operation operation operation operation (Read (Write to TABLAT) Holding Register) DS39770B-page 334 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TSTFSZ Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Test f, Skip if 0 TSTFSZ f {,a} 0 f 255 a [0,1] skip if f = 0 None 0110 011a ffff ffff XORLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Exclusive OR Literal with W XORLW k 0 k 255 (W) .XOR. k W N, Z 0000 1010 kkkk kkkk If `f' = 0, the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed, making this a two-cycle instruction. If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. The contents of W are XORed with the 8-bit literal `k'. The result is placed in W. 1 1 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read literal `k' XORLW B5h 1Ah Q3 Process Data 0AFh Q4 Write to W Example: Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = Words: Cycles: 1 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' Q2 No operation Q2 No operation No operation HERE NZERO ZERO = = = = Q3 Process Data Q3 No operation Q3 No operation No operation TSTFSZ : : Q4 No operation Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation Q Cycle Activity: If skip: Q1 No operation Q1 No operation No operation Example: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: CNT, 1 Before Instruction PC After Instruction If CNT PC If CNT PC Address (HERE) 00h, Address (ZERO) 00h, Address (NZERO) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 335 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY XORWF Syntax: Operands: Exclusive OR W with f XORWF 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] (W) .XOR. (f) dest N, Z 0001 10da ffff ffff f {,d {,a}} Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Exclusive OR the contents of W with register `f'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in the register `f' (default). If `a' is `0', the Access Bank is selected. If `a' is `1', the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If `a' is `0' and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 23.2.3 "Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode" for details. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read register `f' XORWF AFh B5h 1Ah B5h Q3 Process Data REG, 1, 0 Q4 Write to destination Example: Before Instruction REG = W = After Instruction REG = W = DS39770B-page 336 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 23.2 Extended Instruction Set In addition to the standard 75 instructions of the PIC18 instruction set, the PIC18F85J90 family family of devices also provide an optional extension to the core CPU functionality. The added features include eight additional instructions that augment Indirect and Indexed Addressing operations and the implementation of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing for many of the standard PIC18 instructions. The additional features of the extended instruction set are enabled by default on unprogrammed devices. Users must properly set or clear the XINST Configuration bit during programming to enable or disable these features. The instructions in the extended set can all be classified as literal operations, which either manipulate the File Select Registers, or use them for Indexed Addressing. Two of the instructions, ADDFSR and SUBFSR, each have an additional special instantiation for using FSR2. These versions (ADDULNK and SUBULNK) allow for automatic return after execution. The extended instructions are specifically implemented to optimize re-entrant program code (that is, code that is recursive or that uses a software stack) written in high-level languages, particularly C. Among other things, they allow users working in high-level languages to perform certain operations on data structures more efficiently. These include: * Dynamic allocation and deallocation of software stack space when entering and leaving subroutines * Function Pointer invocation * Software Stack Pointer manipulation * Manipulation of variables located in a software stack A summary of the instructions in the extended instruction set is provided in Table 23-3. Detailed descriptions are provided in Section 23.2.2 "Extended Instruction Set". The opcode field descriptions in Table 23-1 (page 296) apply to both the standard and extended PIC18 instruction sets. Note: The instruction set extension and the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode were designed for optimizing applications written in C; the user may likely never use these instructions directly in assembler. The syntax for these commands is provided as a reference for users who may be reviewing code that has been generated by a compiler. 23.2.1 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SYNTAX Most of the extended instructions use indexed arguments, using one of the File Select Registers and some offset to specify a source or destination register. When an argument for an instruction serves as part of Indexed Addressing, it is enclosed in square brackets ("[ ]"). This is done to indicate that the argument is used as an index or offset. The MPASMTM Assembler will flag an error if it determines that an index or offset value is not bracketed. When the extended instruction set is enabled, brackets are also used to indicate index arguments in byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions. This is in addition to other changes in their syntax. For more details, see Section 23.2.3.1 "Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands". Note: In the past, square brackets have been used to denote optional arguments in the PIC18 and earlier instruction sets. In this text and going forward, optional arguments are denoted by braces ("{ }"). TABLE 23-3: Mnemonic, Operands ADDFSR ADDULNK CALLW MOVSF MOVSS PUSHL SUBFSR SUBULNK f, k k EXTENSIONS TO THE PIC18 INSTRUCTION SET 16-Bit Instruction Word Description Add literal to FSR Add literal to FSR2 and return Call subroutine using WREG Move zs (source) to 1st word fd (destination) 2nd word Move zs (source) to 1st word zd (destination) 2nd word Store literal at FSR2, decrement FSR2 Subtract literal from FSR Subtract literal from FSR2 and return Cycles MSb 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1110 1110 0000 1110 1111 1110 1111 1110 1110 1110 1000 1000 0000 1011 ffff 1011 xxxx 1010 1001 1001 ffkk 11kk 0001 0zzz ffff 1zzz xzzz kkkk ffkk 11kk LSb kkkk kkkk 0100 zzzz ffff zzzz zzzz kkkk kkkk kkkk Status Affected None None None None None None None None zs, fd zs, zd k f, k k (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 337 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 23.2.2 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ADDFSR Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Add Literal to FSR ADDFSR f, k 0 k 63 f [ 0, 1, 2 ] FSR(f) + k FSR(f) None 1110 1000 ffkk kkkk The 6-bit literal `k' is added to the contents of the FSR specified by `f'. 1 1 Q2 Read literal `k' Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to FSR ADDULNK Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Add Literal to FSR2 and Return ADDULNK k 0 k 63 FSR2 + k FSR2, (TOS) PC None 1110 1000 11kk kkkk The 6-bit literal `k' is added to the contents of FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. This may be thought of as a special case of the ADDFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary `11'); it operates only on FSR2. Example: ADDFSR 2, 23h Words: 03FFh 0422h Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode No Operation Before Instruction FSR2 = After Instruction FSR2 = 1 2 Q2 Read literal `k' No Operation Q3 Process Data No Operation Q4 Write to FSR No Operation Example: ADDULNK 23h 03FFh 0100h 0422h (TOS) Before Instruction FSR2 = PC = After Instruction FSR2 = PC = Note: All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s). DS39770B-page 338 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY CALLW Syntax: Operands: Operation: Subroutine Call Using WREG CALLW None (PC + 2) TOS, (W) PCL, (PCLATH) PCH, (PCLATU) PCU None 0000 0000 0001 0100 MOVSF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (destin.) Description: Move Indexed to f MOVSF [zs], fd 0 zs 127 0 fd 4095 ((FSR2) + zs) fd None 1110 1111 1011 ffff 0zzz ffff zzzzs ffffd Status Affected: Encoding: Description First, the return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the return stack. Next, the contents of W are written to PCL; the existing value is discarded. Then, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are latched into PCH and PCU, respectively. The second cycle is executed as a NOP instruction while the new next instruction is fetched. Unlike CALL, there is no option to update W, STATUS or BSR. The contents of the source register are moved to destination register `fd'. The actual address of the source register is determined by adding the 7-bit literal offset `zs', in the first word, to the value of FSR2. The address of the destination register is specified by the 12-bit literal `fd' in the second word. Both addresses can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data space (000h to FFFh). The MOVSF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. If the resultant source address points to an Indirect Addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode No operation 1 2 Q2 Read WREG No operation Q3 Push PC to stack No operation Q4 No operation No operation Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 2 2 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read source reg Write register `f' (dest) Example: HERE CALLW Decode Determine Determine source addr source addr No operation No dummy read No operation Before Instruction PC = PCLATH = PCLATU = W = After Instruction PC = TOS = PCLATH = PCLATU = W = address (HERE) 10h 00h 06h 001006h address (HERE + 2) 10h 00h 06h Example: MOVSF = = = = = = [05h], REG2 80h 33h 11h 80h 33h 33h Before Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h REG2 After Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h REG2 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 339 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY MOVSS Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (dest.) Description Move Indexed to Indexed MOVSS [zs], [zd] 0 zs 127 0 zd 127 ((FSR2) + zs) ((FSR2) + zd) None 1110 1111 1011 xxxx 1zzz xzzz zzzzs zzzzd PUSHL Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2 PUSHL k 0 k 255 k (FSR2), FSR2 - 1 FSR2 None 1111 1010 kkkk kkkk The contents of the source register are moved to the destination register. The addresses of the source and destination registers are determined by adding the 7-bit literal offsets, `zs' or `zd', respectively, to the value of FSR2. Both registers can be located anywhere in the 4096-byte data memory space (000h to FFFh). The MOVSS instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. If the resultant source address points to an Indirect Addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. If the resultant destination address points to an Indirect Addressing register, the instruction will execute as a NOP. The 8-bit literal `k' is written to the data memory address specified by FSR2. FSR2 is decremented by 1 after the operation. This instruction allows users to push values onto a software stack. Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read `k' Q3 Process data Q4 Write to destination Example: PUSHL 08h = = 01ECh 00h Before Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L Memory (01ECh) After Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L Memory (01ECh) Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Decode 2 2 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read source reg Write to dest reg = = 01EBh 08h Determine Determine source addr source addr Determine dest addr Determine dest addr Example: MOVSS [05h], [06h] = = = = = = 80h 33h 11h 80h 33h 33h Before Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h Contents of 86h After Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h Contents of 86h DS39770B-page 340 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY SUBFSR Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Subtract Literal from FSR SUBFSR f, k 0 k 63 f [ 0, 1, 2 ] FSRf - k FSRf None 1110 1001 ffkk kkkk The 6-bit literal `k' is subtracted from the contents of the FSR specified by `f'. 1 1 Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to destination Words: Example: Before Instruction FSR2 = After Instruction FSR2 = SUBFSR 2, 23h 03FFh 03DCh No Operation Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' No Operation Q3 Process Data No Operation Q4 Write to destination No Operation Status Affected: Encoding: Description: SUBULNK Syntax: Operands: Operation: Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return SUBULNK k 0 k 63 FSR2 - k FSR2, (TOS) PC None 1110 1001 11kk kkkk The 6-bit literal `k' is subtracted from the contents of the FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. This may be thought of as a special case of the SUBFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary `11'); it operates only on FSR2. 1 2 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Example: Before Instruction FSR2 = PC = After Instruction FSR2 = PC = SUBULNK 23h 03FFh 0100h 03DCh (TOS) (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 341 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 23.2.3 BYTE-ORIENTED AND BIT-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Enabling the PIC18 instruction set extension may cause legacy applications to behave erratically or fail entirely. 23.2.3.1 Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands Note: In addition to eight new commands in the extended set, enabling the extended instruction set also enables Indexed Literal Offset Addressing (Section 5.6.1 "Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset"). This has a significant impact on the way that many commands of the standard PIC18 instruction set are interpreted. When the extended set is disabled, addresses embedded in opcodes are treated as literal memory locations: either as a location in the Access Bank (a = 0) or in a GPR bank designated by the BSR (a = 1). When the extended instruction set is enabled and a = 0, however, a file register argument of 5Fh or less is interpreted as an offset from the pointer value in FSR2 and not as a literal address. For practical purposes, this means that all instructions that use the Access RAM bit as an argument - that is, all byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost half of the core PIC18 instructions - may behave differently when the extended instruction set is enabled. When the content of FSR2 is 00h, the boundaries of the Access RAM are essentially remapped to their original values. This may be useful in creating backward-compatible code. If this technique is used, it may be necessary to save the value of FSR2 and restore it when moving back and forth between C and assembly routines in order to preserve the Stack Pointer. Users must also keep in mind the syntax requirements of the extended instruction set (see Section 23.2.3.1 "Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands"). Although the Indexed Literal Offset mode can be very useful for dynamic stack and pointer manipulation, it can also be very annoying if a simple arithmetic operation is carried out on the wrong register. Users who are accustomed to the PIC18 programming must keep in mind that, when the extended instruction set is enabled, register addresses of 5Fh or less are used for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing. Representative examples of typical byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode are provided on the following page to show how execution is affected. The operand conditions shown in the examples are applicable to all instructions of these types. When the extended instruction set is enabled, the file register argument `f' in the standard byte-oriented and bit-oriented commands is replaced with the literal offset value `k'. As already noted, this occurs only when `f' is less than or equal to 5Fh. When an offset value is used, it must be indicated by square brackets ("[ ]"). As with the extended instructions, the use of brackets indicates to the compiler that the value is to be interpreted as an index or an offset. Omitting the brackets, or using a value greater than 5Fh within the brackets, will generate an error in the MPASM Assembler. If the index argument is properly bracketed for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing, the Access RAM argument is never specified; it will automatically be assumed to be `0'. This is in contrast to standard operation (extended instruction set disabled), when `a' is set on the basis of the target address. Declaring the Access RAM bit in this mode will also generate an error in the MPASM Assembler. The destination argument `d' functions as before. In the latest versions of the MPASM Assembler, language support for the extended instruction set must be explicitly invoked. This is done with either the command line option, /y, or the PE directive in the source listing. 23.2.4 CONSIDERATIONS WHEN ENABLING THE EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET It is important to note that the extensions to the instruction set may not be beneficial to all users. In particular, users who are not writing code that uses a software stack may not benefit from using the extensions to the instruction set. Additionally, the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode may create issues with legacy applications written to the PIC18 assembler. This is because instructions in the legacy code may attempt to address registers in the Access Bank below 5Fh. Since these addresses are interpreted as literal offsets to FSR2 when the instruction set extension is enabled, the application may read or write to the wrong data addresses. When porting an application to the PIC18F85J90 family family, it is very important to consider the type of code. A large, re-entrant application that is written in C and would benefit from efficient compilation will do well when using the instruction set extensions. Legacy applications that heavily use the Access Bank will most likely not benefit from using the extended instruction set. DS39770B-page 342 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY ADDWF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: ADD W to Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) ADDWF 0 k 95 d [0,1] (W) + ((FSR2) + k) dest N, OV, C, DC, Z 0010 01d0 kkkk kkkk [k] {,d} BSF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register `f' BSF = = = Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to destination Bit Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) BSF [k], b 0 f 95 0b7 1 ((FSR2) + k) None 1000 bbb0 kkkk kkkk The contents of W are added to the contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value `k'. If `d' is `0', the result is stored in W. If `d' is `1', the result is stored back in register `f' (default). Bit `b' of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value `k', is set. 1 1 Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 1 1 Q2 Read `k' Q3 Process Data [OFST] ,0 = = = = = = 17h 2Ch 0A00h 20h 37h 20h SETF Syntax: Operands: Operation: Q4 Write to destination Example: [FLAG_OFST], 7 0Ah 0A00h 55h Example: ADDWF Before Instruction W OFST FSR2 Contents of 0A2Ch After Instruction W Contents of 0A2Ch Before Instruction FLAG_OFST FSR2 Contents of 0A0Ah After Instruction Contents of 0A0Ah = D5h Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) SETF [k] 0 k 95 FFh ((FSR2) + k) None 0110 1000 kkkk kkkk Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode The contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by `k', are set to FFh. 1 1 Q2 Read `k' Q3 Process Data [OFST] 2Ch 0A00h 00h Q4 Write register Example: SETF = = = Before Instruction OFST FSR2 Contents of 0A2Ch After Instruction Contents of 0A2Ch = FFh (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 343 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 23.2.5 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS WITH MICROCHIP MPLAB(R) IDE TOOLS To develop software for the extended instruction set, the user must enable support for the instructions and the Indexed Addressing mode in their language tool(s). Depending on the environment being used, this may be done in several ways: * A menu option or dialog box within the environment that allows the user to configure the language tool and its settings for the project * A command line option * A directive in the source code These options vary between different compilers, assemblers and development environments. Users are encouraged to review the documentation accompanying their development systems for the appropriate information. The latest versions of Microchip's software tools have been designed to fully support the extended instruction set for the PIC18F85J90 family family. This includes the MPLAB C18 C Compiler, MPASM assembly language and MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE). When selecting a target device for software development, MPLAB IDE will automatically set default Configuration bits for that device. The default setting for the XINST Configuration bit is `0', disabling the extended instruction set and Indexed Literal Offset Addressing. For proper execution of applications developed to take advantage of the extended instruction set, XINST must be set during programming. DS39770B-page 344 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 24.0 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT 24.1 The PIC(R) microcontrollers are supported with a full range of hardware and software development tools: * Integrated Development Environment - MPLAB(R) IDE Software * Assemblers/Compilers/Linkers - MPASMTM Assembler - MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers - MPLINKTM Object Linker/ MPLIBTM Object Librarian - MPLAB ASM30 Assembler/Linker/Library * Simulators - MPLAB SIM Software Simulator * Emulators - MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator - MPLAB REAL ICETM In-Circuit Emulator * In-Circuit Debugger - MPLAB ICD 2 * Device Programmers - PICSTART(R) Plus Development Programmer - MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer - PICkitTM 2 Development Programmer * Low-Cost Demonstration and Development Boards and Evaluation Kits MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software development previously unseen in the 8/16-bit microcontroller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows(R) operating system-based application that contains: * A single graphical interface to all debugging tools - Simulator - Programmer (sold separately) - Emulator (sold separately) - In-Circuit Debugger (sold separately) * A full-featured editor with color-coded context * A multiple project manager * Customizable data windows with direct edit of contents * High-level source code debugging * Visual device initializer for easy register initialization * Mouse over variable inspection * Drag and drop variables from source to watch windows * Extensive on-line help * Integration of select third party tools, such as HI-TECH Software C Compilers and IAR C Compilers The MPLAB IDE allows you to: * Edit your source files (either assembly or C) * One touch assemble (or compile) and download to PIC MCU emulator and simulator tools (automatically updates all project information) * Debug using: - Source files (assembly or C) - Mixed assembly and C - Machine code MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a single development paradigm, from the cost-effective simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning curve when upgrading to tools with increased flexibility and power. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 345 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 24.2 MPASM Assembler 24.5 The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal macro assembler for all PIC MCUs. The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel(R) standard HEX files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines and generated machine code and COFF files for debugging. The MPASM Assembler features include: * Integration into MPLAB IDE projects * User-defined macros to streamline assembly code * Conditional assembly for multi-purpose source files * Directives that allow complete control over the assembly process MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker and Librarian MPLAB ASM30 Assembler produces relocatable machine code from symbolic assembly language for dsPIC30F devices. MPLAB C30 C Compiler uses the assembler to produce its object file. The assembler generates relocatable object files that can then be archived or linked with other relocatable object files and archives to create an executable file. Notable features of the assembler include: * * * * * * Support for the entire dsPIC30F instruction set Support for fixed-point and floating-point data Command line interface Rich directive set Flexible macro language MPLAB IDE compatibility 24.6 24.3 MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers MPLAB SIM Software Simulator The MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 Code Development Systems are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip's PIC18 and PIC24 families of microcontrollers and the dsPIC30 and dsPIC33 family of digital signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful integration capabilities, superior code optimization and ease of use not found with other compilers. For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE debugger. The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator allows code development in a PC-hosted environment by simulating the PIC MCUs and dsPIC(R) DSCs on an instruction level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from a comprehensive stimulus controller. Registers can be logged to files for further run-time analysis. The trace buffer and logic analyzer display extend the power of the simulator to record and track program execution, actions on I/O, most peripherals and internal registers. The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator fully supports symbolic debugging using the MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers, and the MPASM and MPLAB ASM30 Assemblers. The software simulator offers the flexibility to develop and debug code outside of the hardware laboratory environment, making it an excellent, economical software development tool. 24.4 MPLINK Object Linker/ MPLIB Object Librarian The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable objects created by the MPASM Assembler and the MPLAB C18 C Compiler. It can link relocatable objects from precompiled libraries, using directives from a linker script. The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and modification of library files of precompiled code. When a routine from a library is called from a source file, only the modules that contain that routine will be linked in with the application. This allows large libraries to be used efficiently in many different applications. The object linker/library features include: * Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many smaller files * Enhanced code maintainability by grouping related modules together * Flexible creation of libraries with easy module listing, replacement, deletion and extraction DS39770B-page 346 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 24.7 MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance In-Circuit Emulator 24.9 MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger Microchip's In-Circuit Debugger, MPLAB ICD 2, is a powerful, low-cost, run-time development tool, connecting to the host PC via an RS-232 or high-speed USB interface. This tool is based on the Flash PIC MCUs and can be used to develop for these and other PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs. The MPLAB ICD 2 utilizes the in-circuit debugging capability built into the Flash devices. This feature, along with Microchip's In-Circuit Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM) protocol, offers costeffective, in-circuit Flash debugging from the graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment. This enables a designer to develop and debug source code by setting breakpoints, single stepping and watching variables, and CPU status and peripheral registers. Running at full speed enables testing hardware and applications in real time. MPLAB ICD 2 also serves as a development programmer for selected PIC devices. The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is intended to provide the product development engineer with a complete microcontroller design tool set for PIC microcontrollers. Software control of the MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is advanced by the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment, which allows editing, building, downloading and source debugging from a single environment. The MPLAB ICE 2000 is a full-featured emulator system with enhanced trace, trigger and data monitoring features. Interchangeable processor modules allow the system to be easily reconfigured for emulation of different processors. The architecture of the MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator allows expansion to support new PIC microcontrollers. The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator system has been designed as a real-time emulation system with advanced features that are typically found on more expensive development tools. The PC platform and Microsoft(R) Windows(R) 32-bit operating system were chosen to best make these features available in a simple, unified application. 24.10 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal, CE compliant device programmer with programmable voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display (128 x 64) for menus and error messages and a modular, detachable socket assembly to support various package types. The ICSPTM cable assembly is included as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program PIC devices without a PC connection. It can also set code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3 connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable. The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and optimized algorithms for quick programming of large memory devices and incorporates an SD/MMC card for file storage and secure data applications. 24.8 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System is Microchip's next generation high-speed emulator for Microchip Flash DSC(R) and MCU devices. It debugs and programs PIC(R) and dsPIC(R) Flash microcontrollers with the easy-to-use, powerful graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE), included with each kit. The MPLAB REAL ICE probe is connected to the design engineer's PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with either a connector compatible with the popular MPLAB ICD 2 system (RJ11) or with the new high speed, noise tolerant, lowvoltage differential signal (LVDS) interconnection (CAT5). MPLAB REAL ICE is field upgradeable through future firmware downloads in MPLAB IDE. In upcoming releases of MPLAB IDE, new devices will be supported, and new features will be added, such as software breakpoints and assembly code trace. MPLAB REAL ICE offers significant advantages over competitive emulators including low-cost, full-speed emulation, real-time variable watches, trace analysis, complex breakpoints, a ruggedized probe interface and long (up to three meters) interconnection cables. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 347 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 24.11 PICSTART Plus Development Programmer The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is an easy-to-use, low-cost, prototype programmer. It connects to the PC via a COM (RS-232) port. MPLAB Integrated Development Environment software makes using the programmer simple and efficient. The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer supports most PIC devices in DIP packages up to 40 pins. Larger pin count devices, such as the PIC16C92X and PIC17C76X, may be supported with an adapter socket. The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is CE compliant. 24.13 Demonstration, Development and Evaluation Boards A wide variety of demonstration, development and evaluation boards for various PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs allows quick application development on fully functional systems. Most boards include prototyping areas for adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware and source code for examination and modification. The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs, temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232 interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional EEPROM memory. The demonstration and development boards can be used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom circuits and for learning about various microcontroller applications. In addition to the PICDEMTM and dsPICDEMTM demonstration/development board series of circuits, Microchip has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software for analog filter design, KEELOQ(R) security ICs, CAN, IrDA(R), PowerSmart(R) battery management, SEEVAL(R) evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate sensing, plus many more. Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com) and the latest "Product Selector Guide" (DS00148) for the complete list of demonstration, development and evaluation kits. 24.12 PICkit 2 Development Programmer The PICkitTM 2 Development Programmer is a low-cost programmer and selected Flash device debugger with an easy-to-use interface for programming many of Microchip's baseline, mid-range and PIC18F families of Flash memory microcontrollers. The PICkit 2 Starter Kit includes a prototyping development board, twelve sequential lessons, software and HI-TECH's PICCTM Lite C compiler, and is designed to help get up to speed quickly using PIC(R) microcontrollers. The kit provides everything needed to program, evaluate and develop applications using Microchip's powerful, mid-range Flash memory family of microcontrollers. DS39770B-page 348 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Absolute Maximum Ratings() Ambient temperature under bias.............................................................................................................-40C to +100C Storage temperature .............................................................................................................................. -65C to +150C Voltage on any digital only I/O pin or MCLR with respect to VSS (except VDD) ........................................... -0.3V to 6.0V Voltage on any combined digital and analog pin with respect to VSS (except VDD and MCLR)...... -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V) Voltage on VDDCORE with respect to VSS................................................................................................... -0.3V to 2.75V Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS ........................................................................................................... -0.3V to 3.6V Total power dissipation (Note 1) ...............................................................................................................................1.0W Maximum current out of VSS pin ...........................................................................................................................300 mA Maximum current into VDD pin ..............................................................................................................................250 mA Maximum output current sunk by PORTA<7:6> and any PORTB and PORTC I/O pins.........................................25 mA Maximum output current sunk by any PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ I/O pins ..........................................................8 mA Maximum output current sunk by PORTA<5:0> and any PORTF, PORTG and PORTH I/O pins ............................2 mA Maximum output current sourced by PORTA<7:6> and any PORTB and PORTC I/O pins ...................................25 mA Maximum output current sourced by any PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ I/O pins .....................................................8 mA Maximum output current sourced by PORTA<5:0> and any PORTF, PORTG and PORTH I/O pins .......................2 mA Maximum current sunk by all ports combined.......................................................................................................200 mA Note 1: Power dissipation is calculated as follows: Pdis = VDD x {IDD - IOH} + {(VDD - VOH) x IOH} + (VOL x IOL) NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 349 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-1: PIC18F85J90 FAMILY VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY GRAPH, REGULATOR ENABLED (INDUSTRIAL)(1) 4.0V 3.6V 3.5V 3.0V 2.5V 2.35V 2.0V PIC18F6XJ90/8XJ90 Voltage (VDD) 0 8 MHz Frequency 40 MHz Note 1: When the on-chip regulator is enabled, its BOR circuit will automatically trigger a device Reset before VDD reaches a level at which full-speed operation is not possible. FIGURE 25-2: PIC18F85J90 FAMILY VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY GRAPH, REGULATOR DISABLED (INDUSTRIAL)(1,2) 3.00V 2.75V Voltage (VDDCORE) 2.50V 2.25V 2.00V PIC18F6XJ90/8XJ90 2.35V 2.7V 8 MHz Frequency 40 MHz Note 1: 2: For frequencies between 4 MHz and 40 MHz, FMAX = (51.42 MHz/V) * (VDDCORE - 2V) + 4 MHz. When the on-chip voltage regulator is disabled, VDD and VDDCORE must be maintained so that VDDCORE VDD 3.6V. DS39770B-page 350 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.1 DC Characteristics: Supply Voltage PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Characteristic Supply Voltage Min VDDCORE 2.0 2.0 VDD - 0.3 1.5 -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 3.6 3.6 2.70 VDD + 0.3 VSS + 0.3 -- 0.7 Units V V V V V V V See Section 4.3 "Power-on Reset (POR)" for details Conditions ENVREG tied to VSS ENVREG tied to VDD ENVREG tied to VSS PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param Symbol No. D001 VDD D001B VDDCORE External Supply for Microcontroller Core D001C AVDD D001D AVSS D002 D003 VDR VPOR Analog Supply Voltage RAM Data Retention Voltage(1) VDD Start Voltage to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal Brown-out Reset Voltage Analog Ground Potential VSS - 0.3 D004 SVDD 0.05 -- -- V/ms See Section 4.3 "Power-on Reset (POR)" for details V D005 Note 1: VBOR -- 1.8 -- This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered in Sleep mode, or during a device Reset, without losing RAM data. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 351 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Typ Max Units Conditions PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param No. Device Power-Down Current (IPD)(1) All devices 0.2 0.1 2.4 All devices 0.5 0.1 2.7 All devices 2.7 3.5 6.7 Note 1: 0.9 0.9 5 0.9 0.9 5 6 6 12 A A A A A A A A A -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C VDD = 3.3V (Sleep mode)(5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V (Sleep mode)(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V (Sleep mode)(4) 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10C to +70C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD). Resistor ladder current is not included. Connecting an actual display will increase the current consumption depending on the size of the LCD. DS39770B-page 352 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Typ Max Units Conditions PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param No. Device Supply Current (IDD)(2) All devices 6.5 7 9.5 16 16 20 18 18 24 100 100 110 750 750 840 850 850 910 900 900 990 1.45 1.45 1.6 1.63 1.63 1.75 1.86 1.86 1.94 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 4 MHz (INTOSC_RUN mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 1 MHz (INTOSC_RUN mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 31 kHz (INTRC_RUN mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) All devices 10 10.5 12.5 All devices 41 52 71 All devices 359 387 407 All devices 438 470 491 All devices 486 526 564 All devices 0.76 0.84 0.9 All devices 1.1 1.18 1.24 All devices 1.25 1.29 1.37 Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10C to +70C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD). Resistor ladder current is not included. Connecting an actual display will increase the current consumption depending on the size of the LCD. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 353 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Typ Max Units Conditions PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param No. Device Supply Current (IDD)(2) All devices 2.4 2.5 4.8 8 8 12 9 9 14 82 82 97 570 570 590 610 610 650 710 710 790 760 760 800 850 850 900 950 950 1000 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 4 MHz (INTOSC_IDLE mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 1 MHz (INTOSC_IDLE mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 31 kHz (INTRC_IDLE mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) All devices 3.2 3.2 6 All devices 62 42 59 All devices 251 264 272 All devices 284 284 293 All devices 295 323 392 All devices 368 362 370 All devices 400 410 418 All devices 460 462 486 Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10C to +70C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD). Resistor ladder current is not included. Connecting an actual display will increase the current consumption depending on the size of the LCD. DS39770B-page 354 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Typ Max Units Conditions PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param No. Device Supply Current (IDD)(2) All devices 165 180 200 490 490 490 670 670 670 850 850 850 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 14 14 13 18 18 16 A A A A A A A A A mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 40 MHZ (PRI_RUN mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 4 MHz (PRI_RUN mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 1 MHZ (PRI_RUN mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) All devices 256 260 280 All devices 460 456 482 All devices 0.632 0.681 0.738 All devices 0.912 1.04 1.04 All devices 1.32 1.32 1.41 All devices 7.47 5.81 6.32 All devices 8.84 8.66 7.97 Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10C to +70C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD). Resistor ladder current is not included. Connecting an actual display will increase the current consumption depending on the size of the LCD. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 355 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Typ Max Units Conditions PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param No. Device Supply Current (IDD)(2) All devices 2.8 3.02 3.01 3.8 3.8 4.5 5.4 5.6 5.6 6.7 6.5 6.5 8.5 8.5 7.5 11.6 11.6 10.5 mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C VDD = 3.3V (5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) FOSC = 4 MHZ, 16 MHz internal (PRI_RUN mode, HSPLL oscillator) FOSC = 4 MHZ, 16 MHz internal (PRI_RUN mode, HSPLL oscillator) FOSC = 4 MHZ, 16 MHz internal (PRI_RUN mode, HSPLL oscillator) FOSC = 10 MHZ, 40 MHz internal (PRI_RUN mode, HSPLL oscillator) FOSC = 10 MHZ, 40 MHz internal (PRI_RUN mode, HSPLL oscillator) All devices 4.5 4.8 4.54 VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) All devices 5.72 5.55 5.3 VDD = 3.3V(5) All devices 7.4 7.23 6.55 VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) All devices 9.74 9.43 8.89 Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10C to +70C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD). Resistor ladder current is not included. Connecting an actual display will increase the current consumption depending on the size of the LCD. DS39770B-page 356 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Typ Max Units Conditions PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param No. Device Supply Current (IDD)(2) All devices 50 51 54 120 120 130 480 300 270 550 500 460 850 850 800 950 950 900 1.3 1.2 1.2 8 8 9 10 10 11 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 40 MHz (PRI_IDLE mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 4 MHz (PRI_IDLE mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 1 MHz (PRI_IDLE mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) All devices 223 133 110 All devices 307 254 194 All devices 307 200 202 All devices 483 318 343 All devices 524 474 468 All devices 2.38 2.04 2.52 All devices 3.02 2.99 4.23 Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10C to +70C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD). Resistor ladder current is not included. Connecting an actual display will increase the current consumption depending on the size of the LCD. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 357 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Typ Max Units Conditions PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param No. Device Supply Current (IDD)(2) All devices 10.5 13.4 17.6 22 28 40 30 35 50 120 150 190 15 20 26 17 24 30 115 145 185 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 32 kHz(3) (SEC_IDLE mode, Timer1 as clock) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 32 kHz(3) (SEC_RUN mode, Timer1 as clock) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) All devices 13.2 16.2 20.7 All devices 39 58 75 All devices 5.7 8.9 12.8 All devices 6.6 9.7 13.7 All devices 39 52.8 72.7 Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10C to +70C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD). Resistor ladder current is not included. Connecting an actual display will increase the current consumption depending on the size of the LCD. DS39770B-page 358 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Typ Max Units Conditions PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param No. D022 (IWDT) Device Module Differential Currents (IWDT, ILCD, IOSCB, IAD) Watchdog Timer 1.6 4 A 1.7 1.6 2.5 2.5 2.3 3.8 2.6 2.4 -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C +25C +25C +25C +25C +25C +25C -40C +25C +85C -40C +25C +85C -40C 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 5 5 7 25 25 40 12.5 12.5 18.5 12.5 12.5 18.5 12.5 12.5 18.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.0V VDD = 2.5V VDD = 3.0V VDD = 2.0V VDD = 2.5V VDD = 3.0V VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) D024 (ILCD) LCD Module 2(6,7) 2.7(6,7) 3.5 (6,7) Resistive Ladder CPEN = 0; CKSEL<1:0> = 00; CS<1:0> = 10; 16(7) 17(7) 24(7) D025 (IOSCB) Timer1 Oscillator 6.6 7.9 11.5 7.2 8.1 11.9 7 9 11 1 1 1 Note 1: Charge Pump BIAS<2:0> = 111; CPEN = 1; CKSEL<1:0> = 11; 32 kHz on Timer1(3) 32 kHz on Timer1(3) D026 (IAD) A/D Converter +25C +85C -40C to +85C -40C to +85C -40C to +85C VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) VDD = 3.3V(5) 32 kHz on Timer1(3) A/D on, not converting 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10C to +70C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD). Resistor ladder current is not included. Connecting an actual display will increase the current consumption depending on the size of the LCD. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 359 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.3 DC Characteristics:PIC18F84J90 Family (Industrial) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Characteristic Input Low Voltage All I/O ports: D030 D031 D032 D033 D033A D034 VIH D040 D041 with TTL buffer with Schmitt Trigger buffer MCLR OSC1 OSC1 T13CKI Input High Voltage I/O ports with analog functions: with TTL buffer with Schmitt Trigger buffer Digital-only I/O ports: with TTL buffer with Schmitt Trigger buffer D042 D043 D043A D044 IIL D060 D061 D063 IPU D070 Note 1: DC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. VIL Min Max Units Conditions VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS 0.15 VDD 0.2 VDD 0.2 VDD 0.3 VDD 0.2 VDD 0.3 V V V V V V HS, HSPLL modes EC, ECPLL modes 0.25 VDD + 0.8V 0.8 VDD 0.25 VDD + 0.8V 2.0 0.8 VDD 0.8 VDD 0.7 VDD 0.8 VDD 1.6 -- -- -- 30 VDD VDD 5.5 5.5 5.5 VDD VDD VDD VDD 1 1 5 240 V V V V V V V V V A A A A VDD < 3.3V VDD < 3.3V 3.3V VDD 3.6V MCLR OSC1 OSC1 T13CKI Input Leakage Current(1) I/O ports MCLR OSC1 Weak Pull-up Current PORTB weak pull-up current IPURB HS, HSPLL modes EC, ECPLL modes VSS VPIN VDD, Pin at high-impedance Vss VPIN VDD Vss VPIN VDD VDD = 3.3V, VPIN = VSS Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. DS39770B-page 360 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.3 DC Characteristics:PIC18F84J90 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Characteristic Output Low Voltage I/O ports: PORTA, PORTF, PORTG, PORTH PORTD, PORTE, PORTJ PORTB, PORTC D083 VOH D090 OSC2/CLKO (EC, ECPLL modes) Output High Voltage(1) I/O ports: PORTA, PORTF, PORTG, PORTH PORTD, PORTE, PORTJ PORTB, PORTC D092 OSC2/CLKO (INTOSC, EC, ECPLL modes) Capacitive Loading Specs on Output Pins D100(4) COSC2 OSC2 pin -- 15 pF In HS mode when external clock is used to drive OSC1 To meet the AC Timing Specifications I2CTM Specification 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 -- -- -- -- V V V V V IOH = -2 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40C to +85C IOH = -2 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40C to +85C IOH = -2 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40C to +85C IOH = -1 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40C to +85C -- -- -- -- 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 V V V V IOL = 2 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40C to +85C IOL = 3.4 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40C to +85C IOL = 3.4 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40C to +85C IOL = 1.6 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40C to +85C Min Max Units Conditions DC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. VOL D080 D101 D102 Note 1: CIO CB All I/O pins and OSC2 SCLx, SDAx -- -- 50 400 pF pF Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 361 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 25-1: MEMORY PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Characteristic Program Flash Memory D130 D131 EP VPR Cell Endurance VDD for Read VDD for Self-Timed Write Self-Timed Write Cycle Time 1K VMIN VMIN -- 20 -- -- 10K -- -- 2.8 -- 3 -- -- 3.6 3.6 -- -- 7 1 E/W -40C to +85C V V ms Year Provided no other specifications are violated mA Per one physical word address VMIN = Minimum operating voltage VMIN = Minimum operating voltage Min Typ Max Units Conditions DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Sym D132B VPEW D133A TIW D134 D135 D1xxx TRETD Characteristic Retention IDDP TWE Supply Current during Programming Writes per Erase Cycle Data in "Typ" column is at 3.3V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. DS39770B-page 362 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 25-2: COMPARATOR SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: 3.0V VDD 3.6V, -40C TA +85C (unless otherwise stated) Param No. D300 D301 D302 300 301 * Note 1: Sym VIOFF VICM CMRR TRESP TMC2OV Characteristics Input Offset Voltage Input Common Mode Voltage* Common Mode Rejection Ratio* Response Time(1)* Comparator Mode Change to Output Valid* Min -- 0 55 -- -- Typ 5.0 -- -- 150 -- Max 10 AVDD - 1.5 -- 400 10 Units mV V dB ns s Comments These parameters are characterized but not tested. Response time measured with one comparator input at (AVDD - 1.5)/2, while the other input transitions from VSS to VDD. TABLE 25-3: VOLTAGE REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: 3.0V VDD 3.6V, -40C TA +85C (unless otherwise stated) Param No. D310 D311 D312 310 Note 1: Sym VRES VRAA VRUR TSET Characteristics Resolution Absolute Accuracy Unit Resistor Value (R) Settling Time(1) Min VDD/24 -- -- -- Typ -- -- 2k -- Max VDD/32 1/2 -- 10 Units LSb LSb s Comments Settling time measured while CVRR = 1 and CVR3:CVR0 transitions from `0000' to `1111'. TABLE 25-4: INTERNAL VOLTAGE REGULATOR SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: -40C TA +85C (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym Characteristics Min -- 4.7 Typ 2.5 10 Max -- -- Units V F Capacitor must be low ESR Comments VRGOUT Regulator Output Voltage* CEFC * External Filter Capacitor Value* These parameters are characterized but not tested. Parameter numbers not yet assigned for these specifications. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 363 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 25-5: INTERNAL LCD VOLTAGE REGULATOR SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: 2.0V VDD 3.6V, -40C TA +85C (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym CFLY VBIAS Characteristics Fly Back Capacitor VPK-PK between LCDBIAS0 & LCDBIAS3 Min 0.47 Typ 4.7 3.40 3.27 3.14 3.01 2.88 2.75 2.62 2.49 3.6 Max Units F V V V V V V V V Comments Capacitor must be low ESR BIAS2:BIAS0 = 111 BIAS2:BIAS0 = 110 BIAS2:BIAS0 = 101 BIAS2:BIAS0 = 100 BIAS2:BIAS0 = 011 BIAS2:BIAS0 = 010 BIAS2:BIAS0 = 001 BIAS2:BIAS0 = 000 DS39770B-page 364 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.4 25.4.1 AC (Timing) Characteristics TIMING PARAMETER SYMBOLOGY The timing parameter symbols have been created following one of the following formats: 1. TppS2ppS 2. TppS T F Frequency Lowercase letters (pp) and their meanings: pp cc CCP1 ck CLKO cs CS di SDI do SDO dt Data in io I/O port mc MCLR Uppercase letters and their meanings: S F Fall H High I Invalid (High-impedance) L Low I2C only AA output access BUF Bus free TCC:ST (I2C specifications only) CC HD Hold ST DAT DATA input hold STA Start condition 3. TCC:ST 4. Ts T (I2C specifications only) (I2C specifications only) Time osc rd rw sc ss t0 t1 wr OSC1 RD RD or WR SCK SS T0CKI T13CKI WR P R V Z High Low Period Rise Valid High-impedance High Low SU STO Setup Stop condition (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 365 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.4.2 TIMING CONDITIONS The temperature and voltages specified in Table 25-6 apply to all timing specifications unless otherwise noted. Figure 25-3 specifies the load conditions for the timing specifications. TABLE 25-6: TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS - AC Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Operating voltage VDD range as described in Section 25.1 and Section 25.3. AC CHARACTERISTICS FIGURE 25-3: LOAD CONDITIONS FOR DEVICE TIMING SPECIFICATIONS Load Condition 1 VDD/2 Load Condition 2 RL Pin VSS CL Pin VSS CL RL = 464 CL = 50 pF CL = 15 pF for all pins except OSC2/CLKO/RA6 and including D and E outputs as ports for OSC2/CLKO/RA6 DS39770B-page 366 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 25.4.3 TIMING DIAGRAMS AND SPECIFICATIONS EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 FIGURE 25-4: OSC1 1 2 3 3 4 4 CLKO TABLE 25-7: Param. No. 1A 1 2 3 4 Note 1: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS Characteristic External CLKI Frequency(1) Oscillator Frequency (1) Symbol FOSC TOSC TCY TOSL, TOSH TOSR, TOSF Min DC DC 25 25 100 10 -- Max 40 40 -- 250 -- -- 7.5 Units MHz MHz ns ns ns ns ns Conditions ECPLL Oscillator mode HSPLL Oscillator mode EC Oscillator mode HS Oscillator mode TCY = 4/FOSC, Industrial EC Oscillator mode EC Oscillator mode External CLKI Period(1) Oscillator Period(1) Instruction Cycle Time(1) External Clock in (OSC1) High or Low Time External Clock in (OSC1) Rise or Fall Time Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period for all configurations except PLL. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at "min." values with an external clock applied to the OSC1/CLKI pin. When an external clock input is used, the "max." cycle time limit is "DC" (no clock) for all devices. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 367 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 25-8: Param No. F10 F11 F12 F13 Sym PLL CLOCK TIMING SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 2.15V TO 3.6V) Characteristic Min 4 16 -- -2 Typ -- -- -- -- Max 10 40 2 +2 Units Conditions FOSC Oscillator Frequency Range FSYS On-Chip VCO System Frequency trc CLK PLL Start-up Time (Lock Time) CLKO Stability (Jitter) MHz HS mode only MHz HS mode only ms % Data in "Typ" column is at 3.3V, 25C, unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. TABLE 25-9: INTERNAL RC ACCURACY (INTOSC AND INTRC SOURCES) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40C TA +85C for industrial Min Typ Max Units Conditions PIC18F85J90 Family (Industrial) Param No. Device INTOSC Accuracy @ Freq = 8 MHz, 4 MHz, 2 MHz, 1 MHz, 500 kHz, 250 kHz, 125 kHz, 31 kHz(1) All Devices -2 -5 -10 INTRC Accuracy @ Freq = 31 kHz(1) All Devices Note 1: 26.562 -- 35.938 kHz -40C to +85C VDD = 2.0-3.3V The accuracy specification of the 31 kHz clock is determined by which source is providing it at a given time. When INTSRC (OSCTUNE<7>) is `1', use the INTOSC accuracy specification. When INTSRC is `0', use the INTRC accuracy specification. +/-1 -- +/-1 2 5 10 % % % +25C -10C to +85C -40C to +85C VDD = 2.7-3.3V VDD = 2.0-3.3V VDD = 2.0-3.3V DS39770B-page 368 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-5: CLKO AND I/O TIMING Q4 OSC1 10 CLKO 13 14 I/O pin (Input) 17 I/O pin (Output) Old Value 20, 21 Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. 15 New Value 19 18 12 16 11 Q1 Q2 Q3 TABLE 25-10: CLKO AND I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS Param No. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Symbol Characteristic Min -- -- -- -- -- 0.25 TCY + 25 0 -- 100 0 -- -- TCY TCY Typ 75 75 15 15 -- -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 200 200 30 30 0.5 TCY + 20 -- -- 150 -- -- 6 5 -- -- Units Conditions ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) TOSH2CKL OSC1 to CLKO TOSH2CKH OSC1 to CLKO TCKR TCKF CLKO Rise Time CLKO Fall Time TCKL2IOV CLKO to Port Out Valid TIOV2CKH Port In Valid before CLKO TCKH2IOI TOSH2IOI Port In Hold after CLKO OSC1 (Q2 cycle) to Port Input Invalid (I/O in hold time) TOSH2IOV OSC1 (Q1 cycle) to Port Out Valid TIOV2OSH Port Input Valid to OSC1 (I/O in setup time) TIOR TIOF TINP TRBP Port Output Rise Time Port Output Fall Time INT pin High or Low Time RB7:RB4 Change INT High or Low Time These parameters are asynchronous events not related to any internal clock edges. Note 1: Measurements are taken in EC mode, where CLKO output is 4 x TOSC. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 369 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-6: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND POWER-UP TIMER TIMING VDD MCLR Internal POR PWRT Time-out Oscillator Time-out Internal Reset Watchdog Timer Reset 34 I/O pins Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. 33 32 30 31 34 TABLE 25-11: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER AND BROWN-OUT RESET REQUIREMENTS Param. Symbol No. 30 31 32 33 34 38 TMCL TWDT TOST TPWRT TIOZ TCSD Characteristic MCLR Pulse Width (low) Watchdog Timer Time-out Period (no postscaler) Oscillation Start-up Timer Period Power-up Timer Period I/O High-Impedance from MCLR Low or Watchdog Timer Reset CPU Start-up Time Min 2 TCY 3.4 1024 TOSC 45.8 -- -- Typ 10 TCY 4.0 -- 65.5 2 10 200 Max -- 4.6 1024 TOSC 85.2 -- -- ms -- ms s s s Voltage Regulator enabled and put to sleep TOSC = OSC1 period Units Conditions (Note 1) 39 TIOBST Time for INTOSC to Stabilize -- 1 -- s Note 1: To ensure device Reset, MCLR must be low for at least 2 TCY or 400 s, whichever is lower. DS39770B-page 370 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-7: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMINGS T0CKI 40 41 42 T1OSO/T13CKI 45 46 47 TMR0 or TMR1 Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. 48 TABLE 25-12: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK REQUIREMENTS Param No. 40 41 42 Symbol TT0H TT0L TT0P Characteristic T0CKI High Pulse Width T0CKI Low Pulse Width T0CKI Period No prescaler With prescaler No prescaler With prescaler No prescaler With prescaler Min 0.5 TCY + 20 10 0.5 TCY + 20 10 TCY + 10 Greater of: 20 ns or (TCY + 40)/N 0.5 TCY + 20 10 30 0.5 TCY + 5 10 30 Greater of: 20 ns or (TCY + 40)/N 60 DC 2 TOSC Max -- -- -- -- -- -- Units ns ns ns ns ns ns N = prescale value (1, 2, 4,..., 256) Conditions 45 TT1H T13CKI High Synchronous, no prescaler Time Synchronous, with prescaler Asynchronous T13CKI Low Synchronous, no prescaler Time Synchronous, with prescaler Asynchronous T13CKI Input Synchronous Period Asynchronous -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ns ns ns ns ns ns ns N = prescale value (1, 2, 4, 8) 46 TT1L 47 TT1P -- 50 7 TOSC ns kHz -- FT1 48 T13CKI Oscillator Input Frequency Range TCKE2TMRI Delay from External T13CKI Clock Edge to Timer Increment (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 371 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-8: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM TIMINGS (CCP1, CCP2 MODULES) CCPx (Capture Mode) 50 52 51 CCPx (Compare or PWM Mode) 53 54 Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. TABLE 25-13: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM REQUIREMENTS (CCP1, CCP2 MODULES) Param Symbol No. 50 51 52 53 54 TCCL TCCH TCCP TCCR TCCF Characteristic CCPx Input Low No prescaler Time With prescaler CCPx Input High Time No prescaler With prescaler Min 0.5 TCY + 20 10 0.5 TCY + 20 10 3 TCY + 40 N -- -- Max -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 Units ns ns ns ns ns ns ns N = prescale value (1, 4 or 16) Conditions CCPx Input Period CCPx Output Fall Time CCPx Output Fall Time DS39770B-page 372 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-9: SS 70 SCK (CKP = 0) 71 72 78 SCK (CKP = 1) 79 78 79 EXAMPLE SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 0) 80 SDO MSb 75, 76 SDI MSb In 74 73 Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. bit 6 - - - - 1 bit 6 - - - - - - 1 LSb LSb In TABLE 25-14: EXAMPLE SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE, CKE = 0) Param No. 70 71 71A 72 72A 73 73A 74 75 76 78 79 80 Note 1: 2: TDIV2SCH, TDIV2SCL TB2B TSCH2DIL, TSCL2DIL TDOR TDOF TSCR TSCF TSCL Symbol TSSL2SCH, TSSL2SCL TSCH Characteristic SS to SCK or SCK Input SCK Input High Time (Slave mode) SCK Input Low Time (Slave mode) Continuous Single Byte Continuous Single Byte Min TCY 1.25 TCY + 30 40 1.25 TCY + 30 40 100 1.5 TCY + 40 100 -- -- -- -- -- Max Units -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 25 25 50 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 1) Conditions Setup Time of SDI Data Input to SCK Edge Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the 1st Clock Edge of Byte 2 Hold Time of SDI Data Input to SCK Edge SDO Data Output Rise Time SDO Data Output Fall Time SCK Output Rise Time (Master mode) SCK Output Fall Time (Master mode) TSCH2DOV, SDO Data Output Valid after SCK Edge TSCL2DOV Requires the use of Parameter #73A. Only if Parameter #71A and #72A are used. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 373 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-10: SS 81 SCK (CKP = 0) 71 73 SCK (CKP = 1) 80 78 72 79 EXAMPLE SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 1) SDO MSb 75, 76 bit 6 - - - - - - 1 LSb SDI MSb In 74 bit 6 - - - - 1 LSb In Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. TABLE 25-15: EXAMPLE SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE, CKE = 1) Param. No. 71 71A 72 72A 73 73A 74 75 76 78 79 80 81 Note 1: 2: TDIV2SCH, TDIV2SCL TB2B TSCH2DIL, TSCL2DIL TDOR TDOF TSCR TSCF TSCL Symbol TSCH Characteristic SCK Input High Time (Slave mode) SCK Input Low Time (Slave mode) Continuous Single Byte Continuous Single Byte Min 1.25 TCY + 30 40 1.25 TCY + 30 40 100 1.5 TCY + 40 100 -- -- -- -- -- TCY Max Units -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 25 25 50 -- ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 1) Conditions Setup Time of SDI Data Input to SCK Edge Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the 1st Clock Edge of Byte 2 Hold Time of SDI Data Input to SCK Edge SDO Data Output Rise Time SDO Data Output Fall Time SCK Output Rise Time (Master mode) SCK Output Fall Time (Master mode) TSCH2DOV, SDO Data Output Valid after SCK Edge TSCL2DOV TDOV2SCH, SDO Data Output Setup to SCK Edge TDOV2SCL Requires the use of Parameter #73A. Only if Parameter #71A and #72A are used. DS39770B-page 374 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-11: SS 70 SCK (CKP = 0) 71 72 83 EXAMPLE SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 0) 78 79 SCK (CKP = 1) 80 SDO MSb 75, 76 SDI MSb In 74 73 Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. bit 6 - - - - 1 LSb In 79 bit 6 - - - - - - 1 78 LSb 77 TABLE 25-16: EXAMPLE SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE TIMING, CKE = 0) Param No. 70 70A 71 71A 72 72A 73 73A 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 83 Note 1: 2: TSCL SCK Input Low Time (Slave mode) Symbol Characteristic Min 3 TCY 3 TCY Continuous Single Byte Continuous Single Byte 1.25 TCY + 30 40 1.25 TCY + 30 40 100 Max Units Conditions -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50 25 25 50 -- ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 1) TSSL2SCH, SS to SCK or SCK Input TSSL2SCL TSSL2WB SS to write to SSPBUF TSCH SCK Input High Time (Slave mode) TDIV2SCH, Setup Time of SDI Data Input to SCK Edge TDIV2SCL TB2B TSCH2DIL, Hold Time of SDI Data Input to SCK Edge TSCL2DIL TDOR TDOF TSCR TSCF SDO Data Output Rise Time SDO Data Output Fall Time SCK Output Rise Time (Master mode) SCK Output Fall Time (Master mode) Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the First Clock Edge of Byte 2 1.5 TCY + 40 100 -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1.5 TCY + 40 TSSH2DOZ SS to SDO Output High-impedance TSCH2DOV, SDO Data Output Valid after SCK Edge TSCL2DOV TSCH2SSH, SS after SCK Edge TSCL2SSH Requires the use of Parameter #73A. Only if Parameter #71A and #72A are used. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 375 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-12: SS EXAMPLE SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 1) 82 SCK (CKP = 0) 70 83 71 72 SCK (CKP = 1) 80 SDO MSb 75, 76 bit 6 - - - - - - 1 LSb 77 SDI MSb In 74 bit 6 - - - - 1 LSb In Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. TABLE 25-17: EXAMPLE SPI SLAVE MODE REQUIREMENTS (CKE = 1) Param No. 70 70A 71 71A 72 72A 73A 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 82 83 TB2B TSCL Symbol Characteristic Min 3 TCY 3 TCY Continuous Single Byte Continuous Single Byte 1.25 TCY + 30 40 1.25 TCY + 30 40 100 -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- 1.5 TCY + 40 Max Units Conditions -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 25 25 50 25 25 50 50 -- ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 1) TSSL2SCH, SS to SCK or SCK Input TSSL2SCL TSSL2WB TSCH SS to write to SSPBUF SCK Input High Time (Slave mode) SCK Input Low Time (Slave mode) Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the First Clock Edge of Byte 2 1.5 TCY + 40 TSCH2DIL, Hold Time of SDI Data Input to SCK Edge TSCL2DIL TDOR TDOF TSCR TSCF SDO Data Output Rise Time SDO Data Output Fall Time SCK Output Rise Time (Master mode) SCK Output Fall Time (Master mode) TSSH2DOZ SS to SDO Output High-Impedance TSCH2DOV, SDO Data Output Valid after SCK Edge TSCL2DOV TSSL2DOV SDO Data Output Valid after SS Edge TSCH2SSH, SS after SCK Edge TSCL2SSH Requires the use of Parameter #73A. Only if Parameter #71A and #72A are used. Note 1: 2: DS39770B-page 376 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-13: I2CTM BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING SCL 91 90 92 93 SDA Start Condition Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. Stop Condition TABLE 25-18: I2CTM BUS START/STOP BITS REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE) Param. Symbol No. 90 91 92 93 TSU:STA THD:STA TSU:STO Characteristic Start Condition Setup Time Start Condition Hold Time Stop Condition Setup Time THD:STO Stop Condition Hold Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode Min 4700 600 4000 600 4700 600 4000 600 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ns ns ns Units ns Conditions Only relevant for Repeated Start condition After this period, the first clock pulse is generated (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 377 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-14: I2CTM BUS DATA TIMING 103 100 101 90 91 102 SCL 106 107 92 SDA In 110 109 109 SDA Out Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. DS39770B-page 378 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 25-19: I2CTM BUS DATA REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE) Param. No. 100 Symbol THIGH Characteristic Clock High Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode MSSP Module 101 TLOW Clock Low Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode MSSP Module 102 TR SDA and SCL Rise Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 103 TF SDA and SCL Fall Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 90 91 106 107 92 109 110 D102 Note 1: 2: TSU:STA THD:STA THD:DAT TSU:DAT TSU:STO TAA TBUF CB Start Condition Setup Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode Start Condition Hold Time Data Input Hold Time Data Input Setup Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode Stop Condition Setup Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode Output Valid from Clock Bus Free Time Bus Capacitive Loading 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode Min 4.0 0.6 1.5 TCY 4.7 1.3 1.5 TCY -- 20 + 0.1 CB -- 20 + 0.1 CB 4.7 0.6 4.0 0.6 0 0 250 100 4.7 0.6 -- -- 4.7 1.3 -- Max -- -- -- -- -- -- 1000 300 300 300 -- -- -- -- -- 0.9 -- -- -- -- 3500 -- -- -- 400 ns ns ns ns s s s s ns s ns ns s s ns ns s s pF Time the bus must be free before a new transmission can start (Note 1) (Note 2) CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF Only relevant for Repeated Start condition After this period, the first clock pulse is generated CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF s s Units s s Conditions As a transmitter, the device must provide this internal minimum delay time to bridge the undefined region (min. 300 ns) of the falling edge of SCL to avoid unintended generation of Start or Stop conditions. A Fast mode I2CTM bus device can be used in a Standard mode I2C bus system, but the requirement, TSU:DAT 250 ns, must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line, TR max. + TSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard mode I2C bus specification), before the SCL line is released. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 379 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-15: MSSP I2CTM BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING WAVEFORMS SCL 91 90 92 93 SDA Start Condition Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. Stop Condition TABLE 25-20: MSSP I2CTM BUS START/STOP BITS REQUIREMENTS Param. Symbol No. 90 TSU:STA Characteristic Start Condition Setup Time 91 THD:STA Start Condition Hold Time 92 TSU:STO Stop Condition Setup Time 93 THD:STO Stop Condition Hold Time Note 1: 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) Min 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ns ns ns Units ns Conditions Only relevant for Repeated Start condition After this period, the first clock pulse is generated Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2CTM pins. FIGURE 25-16: MSSP I2CTM BUS DATA TIMING 103 100 101 90 106 102 SCL 91 107 92 SDA In 109 109 110 SDA Out Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. DS39770B-page 380 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 25-21: MSSP I2CTM BUS DATA REQUIREMENTS Param. Symbol No. 100 THIGH Characteristic Clock High Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 101 TLOW Clock Low Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode 102 TR SDA and SCL Rise Time (1) Min 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) -- 20 + 0.1 CB -- -- 20 + 0.1 CB -- 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 0 0 TBD 250 100 TBD 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) -- -- -- 4.7 1.3 TBD -- Max -- -- -- -- -- -- 1000 300 300 300 300 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.9 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3500 1000 -- -- -- -- 400 Units ms ms ms ms ms ms ns ns ns ns ns ns ms ms ms ms ms ms ns ms ns ns ns ns ms ms ms ns ns ns ms ms ms pF Conditions 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode (1) CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF 103 TF SDA and SCL Fall Time CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF 90 TSU:STA Start Condition Setup Time Only relevant for Repeated Start condition 91 THD:STA Start Condition Hold Time After this period, the first clock pulse is generated 106 THD:DAT Data Input Hold Time 107 TSU:DAT Data Input Setup Time (Note 2) 92 TSU:STO Stop Condition Setup Time 109 TAA Output Valid from Clock 110 TBUF Bus Free Time 100 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) Time the bus must be free before a new transmission can start D102 CB Bus Capacitive Loading Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2CTM pins. 2: A Fast mode I2C bus device can be used in a Standard mode I2C bus system, but parameter #107 250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line, parameter #102 + parameter #107 = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (for 100 kHz mode), before the SCL line is released. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 381 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-17: TXx/CKx pin RXx/DTx pin 120 Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. EUSART/AUSART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING 121 121 122 TABLE 25-22: EUSART/AUSART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION REQUIREMENTS Param No. 120 121 122 Symbol Characteristic Min Max Units Conditions TCKH2DTV SYNC XMIT (MASTER and SLAVE) Clock High to Data Out Valid TCKRF TDTRF Clock Out Rise Time and Fall Time (Master mode) Data Out Rise Time and Fall Time -- -- -- 40 20 20 ns ns ns FIGURE 25-18: TXx/CKx pin RXx/DTx pin EUSART/AUSART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING 125 126 Note: Refer to Figure 25-3 for load conditions. TABLE 25-23: EUSART/AUSART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE REQUIREMENTS Param. No. 125 126 Symbol Characteristic Min Max Units Conditions TDTV2CKL SYNC RCV (MASTER and SLAVE) Data Hold before CKx (DTx hold time) TCKL2DTL Data Hold after CKx (DTx hold time) 10 15 -- -- ns ns DS39770B-page 382 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY TABLE 25-24: A/D CONVERTER CHARACTERISTICS: PIC18F85J90 FAMILY (INDUSTRIAL) Param Symbol No. A01 A03 A04 A06 A07 A10 A20 A21 A22 A25 A30 A50 NR EIL EDL EOFF EGN -- VREF VREFH VREFL VAIN ZAIN IREF Characteristic Resolution Integral Linearity Error Differential Linearity Error Offset Error Gain Error Monotonicity Reference Voltage Range (VREFH - VREFL) Reference Voltage High Reference Voltage Low Analog Input Voltage Recommended Impedance of Analog Voltage Source VREF Input Current(2) 2.0 3 VSS VSS - 0.3V VREFL -- -- -- Min -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- Guaranteed(1) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- VREFH VDD - 3.0V VREFH 2.5 5 150 Max 10 <1 <1 <3 <3 Units bits LSb VREF 3.0V LSb VREF 3.0V LSb VREF 3.0V LSb VREF 3.0V -- V V V V V k A A During VAIN acquisition. During A/D conversion cycle. VSS VAIN VDD < 3.0V VDD 3.0V Conditions VREF Note 1: 2: The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage and has no missing codes. VREFH current is from RA3/AN3/VREF+ pin or VDD, whichever is selected as the VREFH source. VREFL current is from RA2/AN2/VREF- pin or VSS, whichever is selected as the VREFL source. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 383 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY FIGURE 25-19: A/D CONVERSION TIMING BSF ADCON0, GO (Note 2) Q4 130 A/D CLK 132 131 A/D DATA 9 8 7 ... ... 2 1 0 ADRES OLD_DATA NEW_DATA ADIF GO SAMPLING STOPPED DONE TCY (Note 1) SAMPLE Note 1: 2: If the A/D clock source is selected as RC, a time of TCY is added before the A/D clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed. This is a minimal RC delay (typically 100 ns), which also disconnects the holding capacitor from the analog input. TABLE 25-25: A/D CONVERSION REQUIREMENTS Param Symbol No. 130 131 132 135 TBD TAD TCNV TACQ TSWC TDIS Characteristic A/D Clock Period Conversion Time (not including acquisition time)(2) Acquisition Time(3) Switching Time from Convert Sample Discharge Time Min 0.7 TBD 11 1.4 -- 0.2 Max 25.0(1) 1 12 -- (Note 4) -- s Units s s TAD s -40C to +85C Conditions TOSC based, VREF 3.0V A/D RC mode Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: TBD = To Be Determined The time of the A/D clock period is dependent on the device frequency and the TAD clock divider. ADRES registers may be read on the following TCY cycle. The time for the holding capacitor to acquire the "New" input voltage when the voltage changes full scale after the conversion (VDD to VSS or VSS to VDD). The source impedance (RS) on the input channels is 50. On the following cycle of the device clock. DS39770B-page 384 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 385 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 26.0 DC AND AC CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHS AND TABLES Graphs and tables are not available at this time. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 387 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 388 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 27.0 27.1 PACKAGING INFORMATION Package Marking Information 64-Lead TQFP Example XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 18F65J90 -I/PT e3 0610017 80-Lead TQFP Example XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN PIC18F85J90 -I/PT e3 0610017 Legend: XX...X Y YY WW NNN e3 * Customer-specific information Year code (last digit of calendar year) Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year) Week code (week of January 1 is week `01') Alphanumeric traceability code Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn) This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 ) can be found on the outer packaging for this package. Note: In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available characters for customer-specific information. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 389 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 27.2 Package Details The following sections give the technical details of the packages. 64-Lead Plastic Thin Quad Flatpack (PT) - 10x10x1 mm Body, 2.00 mm Footprint [TQFP] Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging D D1 E e E1 N b NOTE 1 123 NOTE 2 A c A2 L A1 L1 Units Dimension Limits Number of Leads Lead Pitch Overall Height Molded Package Thickness Standoff Foot Length Footprint Foot Angle Overall Width Overall Length Molded Package Width Molded Package Length Lead Thickness Lead Width Mold Draft Angle Top Mold Draft Angle Bottom N e A A2 A1 L L1 E D E1 D1 c b 0.09 0.17 11 11 0 - 0.95 0.05 0.45 MIN MILLIMETERS NOM 64 0.50 BSC - 1.00 - 0.60 1.00 REF 3.5 12.00 BSC 12.00 BSC 10.00 BSC 10.00 BSC - 0.22 12 12 0.20 0.27 13 13 7 1.20 1.05 0.15 0.75 MAX Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. Chamfers at corners are optional; size may vary. 3. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed 0.25 mm per side. 4. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ASME Y14.5M. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only. Microchip Technology Drawing C04-085B DS39770B-page 390 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY 80-Lead Plastic Thin Quad Flatpack (PT) - 12x12x1 mm Body, 2.00 mm Footprint [TQFP] Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging D D1 E e E1 b N 12 3 NOTE 2 NOTE 1 c A L A1 A2 L1 Units Dimension Limits Number of Leads Lead Pitch Overall Height Molded Package Thickness Standoff Foot Length Footprint Foot Angle Overall Width Overall Length Molded Package Width Molded Package Length Lead Thickness Lead Width Mold Draft Angle Top Mold Draft Angle Bottom N e A A2 A1 L L1 E D E1 D1 c b 0.09 0.17 11 11 0 - 0.95 0.05 0.45 MIN MILLIMETERS NOM 80 0.50 BSC - 1.00 - 0.60 1.00 REF 3.5 14.00 BSC 14.00 BSC 12.00 BSC 12.00 BSC - 0.22 12 12 0.20 0.27 13 13 7 1.20 1.05 0.15 0.75 MAX Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. Chamfers at corners are optional; size may vary. 3. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed 0.25 mm per side. 4. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ASME Y14.5M. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only. Microchip Technology Drawing C04-092B (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 391 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 392 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY APPENDIX A: REVISION HISTORY APPENDIX B: Revision A (July 2006) Original data sheet for PIC18F85J90 family devices. MIGRATION BETWEEN HIGH-END DEVICE FAMILIES Revision B (March 2007) Updated power-down and supply-current electrical characteristics and package details illustrations. Devices in the PIC18F85J90 and PIC18F8490 families are very similar in their functions and feature sets. However, there are some potentially important differences which should be considered when migrating an application across device families to achieve a new design goal. These are summarized in Table B-1. The areas of difference, which could be a major impact on migration, are discussed in greater detail later in this section. TABLE B-1: NOTABLE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN PIC18F8490 AND PIC18F85J90 FAMILIES PIC18F85J90 Family 40 MHz @ 2.15V 2.0V-3.6V, Dual Voltage Requirement Low 32 Kbytes 10,000 Write/Erase Cycles (typical) 20 Years (minimum) 43.8 s/byte (2.8 ms/64-byte block) PORTB and PORTC Only 5.5V on Digital Only Pins 67 192 4 Modes Implemented; Includes Voltage Boost PORTB, PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ Available on USARTs, SPI and CCP Output Pins Limited Primary Options (EC, HS, PLL); Flexible Internal Oscillator (INTOSC and INTRC) Low Voltage, Key Sequence Single Block, All or Nothing Stored in Last 4 Words of Program Memory space 200 s (typical) 10 s (typical) with Voltage Regulator Disabled Always on Use Self-Programming Simple BOR with Voltage Regulator Integrated with Voltage Regulator 12 Self-Calibration Feature Not available PIC18F8490 Family 40 MHz @ 4.2V 2.0V-5.5V Lower 16 Kbytes 100,000 Write/Erase Cycles (typical) 40 Years (minimum) 15.6 s/byte (1 ms/64-byte block) All Ports VDD on All I/O Pins 66 192 1 Mode Not Available PORTB Not Available More Primary Options (EC, HS, XT, LP, RC, PLL); Flexible Internal Oscillator (INTOSC and INTRC) VPP and LVP Multiple Code Protection Blocks Stored in Configuration Space, Starting at 300000h 10 s (typical) Configurable Not Available Separate Programmable BOR Separate Programmable Module 12 Software Look-up Table Available Characteristic Operating Frequency Supply Voltage Operating Current Program Memory Size (maximum) Program Memory Endurance Program Memory Retention Programming Time (Normalized) I/O Sink/Source at 25 mA Input Voltage Tolerance on I/O Pins I/O LCD Outputs (maximum pixels, segments x commons) LCD Bias Generation LCD Voltage Regulator Pull-ups Open-Drain Output Option Oscillator Options Programming Entry Code Protection Configuration Words Start-up Time from Sleep Power-up Timer Data EEPROM BOR LVD A/D Channels A/D Calibration In-Circuit Emulation (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 393 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY B.1 Power Requirement Differences The most significant difference between the PIC18F85J90 and PIC18F8490 device families is the power requirements. PIC18F85J90 family devices are designed on a smaller process. This results in lower maximum voltage and higher leakage current. The operating voltage range for PIC18F85J90 devices is 2.0V to 3.6V. In addition, these devices have split power requirements: one for the core logic and one for the I/O. One of the VDD pins is separated for the core logic supply (VDDCORE). This pin has specific voltage and capacitor requirements as described in Section 25.0 "Electrical Characteristics". * Additional LCD Function Pins: The PIC18F85J90 family of devices adds 3 additional LCD function pins in comparison to the PIC18F8490 family. The additional pins are associated with LCD bias generation: - LCDBIAS0 (RG0) - VLCAP1 (RG2) - VLCPA2 (RG3) * Segment Assignments: Eight of the LCD segment functions have been relocated to different I/O pins than in PIC18F8490 devices. These segments are listed in Table B-2. * Other Considerations: In all LCD applications, the connections of PIC18F85J90 devices to external components for LCD bias generation are different than PIC18F8490 devices. The addition of the LCDBIAS0 output requires that this pin be included in bias component configurations. A more complete discussion is provided in Section 15.3 "LCD Bias Generation". The simultaneous use of the external Timer1 oscillator and Segment 32 is not allowed in PIC18F85J90 devices, since these functions are shared on the same pin. B.2 Oscillator Differences PIC18F8490 and PIC18F85J90 family devices share a similar range of oscillator options. The major difference is that PIC18F85J90 family devices support a smaller number of primary (external) oscillator options, namely HS and EC Oscillator modes. While both device families have an internal PLL that can be used with the primary oscillators, the PLL for the PIC18F85J90 family is not enabled as a device configuration option. Instead, it must be enabled in software. The clocking differences should be considered when making a conversion between the PIC18F8490 and PIC18F85J90 device families. TABLE B-2: LCD Segment SEG16 SEG17 SEG18 SEG27 SEG28 SEG29 SEG30 SEG32 Note: ASSIGNMENTS OF MOVED LCD SEGMENTS PIC18F8490 RA2 RA3 RF0 RG3 RG2 RG0 RG0 RJ0 PIC18F85J90 RC4 RC3 RA1 RC6 RC7 RB5 RB0 RC1 B.3 LCD Module When converting an LCD application between the PIC18F85J90 and the PIC18F8490 families, the following things must be considered: * Available Segments: The module for PIC18F65J90 devices supports 33 segments, as opposed to 32 segments in PIC18F6490 devices. (The 80-pin devices of both families support 48 segments. All devices support 4 commons.) * Bias Generation: The PIC18F85J90 version of the module also incorporates its own independent voltage regulator, which supports 4 circuit configurations for bias generation, voltage boost to support displays that operate above device VDD and software contrast control. Refer to the pinout diagrams for pin locations of I/O ports. DS39770B-page 394 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY B.4 Pin Differences B.5 Other Peripherals Besides the LCD pinout differences already described, there are other differences in the pinouts between the PIC18F85J90 and the PIC18F8490 families: * Input voltage tolerance * Output current capabilities * Available I/O Pins on the PIC18F85J90 that have digital only input capability will tolerate voltages up to 5.5V, and are thus, tolerant to voltages above VDD. Table 9-1 in Section 9.1 "I/O Port Pin Capabilities" contains the complete list. In addition to input differences, there are output differences as well. PIC18F85J90 devices have three classes of pin output current capability: high, medium and low. Not all I/O pins can source or sink equal levels of current. Only PORTB and PORTC support the 25 mA source/sink capability that is supported by all output pins on the PIC18F8490. Table 9-1 in Section 9.1 "I/O Port Pin Capabilities" contains the complete list of output capabilities. Finally, the pins associated with the CCP, EUSART/AUSART and SPI peripherals can be configured by the user as open-drain outputs. This allows for simpler interfacing with external devices operating at higher voltages. This capability is not directly equivalent to any feature on the PIC18F8490 family. There are also differences in the implementation of some ports on PIC18F85J90 devices. While the total number of general purpose I/O pins are very similar (67 vs. 66), the implementation of individual pins has notable differences: * The MCLR pin is dedicated only to MCLR and cannot be configured as an input (RG5) as it can on PIC18F8490 devices. * RF0 does not exist on PIC18F85J90 devices. * RE0, RE1 and RE3 are implemented on PIC18F85J90 devices, but not PIC18F8490 devices. All of these pin differences (including power pin differences) should be accounted for when making a conversion between PIC18F8490 and PIC18F85J90 devices. Peripherals must also be considered when making a conversion between the PIC18F85J90 and the PIC18F8490 families: * A/D Converter: The converter for PIC18F85J90 devices require a calibration step prior to normal operation. * Data EEPROM: PIC18F85J90 devices do not have this module but offer self-programming capability. * BOR: PIC18F85J90 devices do not have a programmable BOR. Simple brown-out capability is provided through the use of the internal voltage regulator. * LVD: PIC18F85J90 devices do not have this module. A limited, fixed setpoint capability is provided through the use of the internal voltage regulator. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 395 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY NOTES: DS39770B-page 396 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY INDEX A A/D ................................................................................... 263 A/D Converter Interrupt, Configuring ....................... 267 Acquisition Requirements ........................................ 268 ADCAL Bit ................................................................ 271 ADCON0 Register .................................................... 263 ADCON1 Register .................................................... 263 ADCON2 Register .................................................... 263 ADRESH Register ............................................ 263, 266 ADRESL Register .................................................... 263 Analog Port Pins, Configuring .................................. 269 Associated Registers ............................................... 271 Automatic Acquisition Time ...................................... 269 Calibration ................................................................ 271 Configuring the Module ............................................ 267 Conversion Clock (TAD) ........................................... 269 Conversion Requirements ....................................... 385 Conversion Status (GO/DONE Bit) .......................... 266 Conversions ............................................................. 270 Converter Characteristics ........................................ 384 Operation in Power-Managed Modes ...................... 271 Special Event Trigger (CCP) .................................... 270 Use of the CCP2 Trigger .......................................... 270 Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................. 349 AC (Timing) Characteristics ............................................. 366 Load Conditions for Device Timing Specifications ... 367 Parameter Symbology ............................................. 366 Temperature and Voltage Specifications ................. 367 Timing Conditions .................................................... 367 ACKSTAT ........................................................................ 219 ACKSTAT Status Flag ..................................................... 219 ADCAL Bit ........................................................................ 271 ADCON0 Register ............................................................ 263 GO/DONE Bit ........................................................... 266 ADCON1 Register ............................................................ 263 ADCON2 Register ............................................................ 263 ADDFSR .......................................................................... 338 ADDLW ............................................................................ 301 Addressable Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (AUSART). See AUSART. ADDULNK ........................................................................ 338 ADDWF ............................................................................ 301 ADDWFC ......................................................................... 302 ADRESH Register ............................................................ 263 ADRESL Register .................................................... 263, 266 Analog-to-Digital Converter. See A/D. ANDLW ............................................................................ 302 ANDWF ............................................................................ 303 Assembler MPASM Assembler .................................................. 346 AUSART Asynchronous Mode ................................................ 254 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 257 Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 255 Receiver .......................................................... 256 Setting up 9-Bit Mode with Address Detect ..... 256 Transmitter ...................................................... 254 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) ................................... 252 Associated Registers ....................................... 252 Baud Rate Error, Calculating ........................... 252 Baud Rates, Asynchronous Modes ................. 253 High Baud Rate Select (BRGH Bit) ................. 252 Operation in Power-Managed Modes .............. 252 Sampling ......................................................... 252 Synchronous Master Mode ...................................... 258 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 260 Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 259 Reception ........................................................ 260 Transmission ................................................... 258 Synchronous Slave Mode ........................................ 261 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 262 Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 261 Reception ........................................................ 262 Transmission ................................................... 261 Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break Character ......................... 242 B Baud Rate Generator ...................................................... 215 BC .................................................................................... 303 BCF ................................................................................. 304 BF .................................................................................... 219 BF Status Flag ................................................................. 219 Bias Generation (LCD) Charge Pump Design Considerations ..................... 167 Block Diagrams A/D ........................................................................... 266 Analog Input Model .................................................. 267 AUSART Receive .................................................... 256 AUSART Transmit ................................................... 254 Baud Rate Generator .............................................. 215 Capture Mode Operation ......................................... 150 Comparator Analog Input Model .............................. 277 Comparator I/O Operating Modes ........................... 274 Comparator Output .................................................. 276 Comparator Voltage Reference ............................... 280 Comparator Voltage Reference Output Buffer Example 281 Compare Mode Operation ....................................... 151 Connections for On-Chip Voltage Regulator ........... 290 Device Clock .............................................................. 29 EUSART Receive .................................................... 240 EUSART Transmit ................................................... 238 External Power-on Reset Circuit (Slow VDD Power-up) 47 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ........................................... 292 Generic I/O Port Operation ...................................... 109 Interrupt Logic ............................................................ 94 LCD Clock Generation ............................................. 162 LCD Driver Module .................................................. 157 LCD Regulator Connections (M0 and M1) .............. 164 MSSP (I2C Master Mode) ........................................ 213 MSSP (I2C Mode) .................................................... 194 MSSP (SPI Mode) ................................................... 185 On-Chip Reset Circuit ................................................ 45 PIC18F6XJ90 ............................................................ 10 PIC18F8XJ90 ............................................................ 11 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 397 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY PLL ............................................................................. 34 PWM Operation (Simplified) .................................... 153 Reads from Flash Program Memory .......................... 85 Resistor Ladder Configurations for M2 .................... 165 Resistor Ladder Configurations for M3 .................... 166 Single Comparator ................................................... 275 Table Read Operation ................................................ 81 Table Write Operation ................................................ 82 Table Writes to Flash Program Memory .................... 87 Timer0 in 16-Bit Mode .............................................. 132 Timer0 in 8-Bit Mode ................................................ 132 Timer1 (16-Bit Read/Write Mode) ............................ 136 Timer1 (8-Bit Mode) ................................................. 136 Timer2 ...................................................................... 142 Timer3 (16-Bit Read/Write Mode) ............................ 144 Timer3 (8-Bit Mode) ................................................. 144 Watchdog Timer ....................................................... 289 BN .................................................................................... 304 BNC .................................................................................. 305 BNN .................................................................................. 305 BNOV ............................................................................... 306 BNZ .................................................................................. 306 BOR. See Brown-out Reset. BOV .................................................................................. 309 BRA .................................................................................. 307 Break Character (12-Bit) Transmit and Receive .............. 243 BRG. See Baud Rate Generator. BRGH Bit TXSTA1 Register ..................................................... 233 TXSTA2 Register ..................................................... 252 Brown-out Reset (BOR) ..................................................... 47 and On-Chip Voltage Regulator ............................... 291 Detecting .................................................................... 47 BSF .................................................................................. 307 BTFSC ............................................................................. 308 BTFSS .............................................................................. 308 BTG .................................................................................. 309 BZ ..................................................................................... 310 CLRWDT ......................................................................... 311 Code Examples 16 x 16 Signed Multiply Routine ................................ 92 16 x 16 Unsigned Multiply Routine ............................ 92 8 x 8 Signed Multiply Routine .................................... 91 8 x 8 Unsigned Multiply Routine ................................ 91 Changing Between Capture Prescalers ................... 150 Computed GOTO Using an Offset Value ................... 61 Erasing a Flash Program Memory Row ..................... 86 Fast Register Stack ................................................... 61 How to Clear RAM (Bank 1) Using Indirect Addressing 74 Implementing a Real-Time Clock Using a Timer1 Interrupt Service ..................................................... 139 Initializing PORTA .................................................... 110 Initializing PORTB .................................................... 112 Initializing PORTC ................................................... 115 Initializing PORTD ................................................... 118 Initializing PORTE .................................................... 120 Initializing PORTF .................................................... 122 Initializing PORTG ................................................... 125 Initializing PORTH ................................................... 127 Initializing PORTJ .................................................... 129 Loading the SSPBUF (SSPSR) Register ................. 188 Reading a Flash Program Memory Word .................. 85 Saving STATUS, WREG and BSR Registers in RAM ... 108 Writing to Flash Program Memory ............................. 88 Code Protection ............................................................... 283 COMF .............................................................................. 312 Comparator ...................................................................... 273 Analog Input Connection Considerations ................ 277 Associated Registers ............................................... 277 Configuration ........................................................... 274 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 276 Interrupts ................................................................. 276 Operation ................................................................. 275 Operation During Sleep ........................................... 276 Outputs .................................................................... 275 Reference ................................................................ 275 External Signal ................................................ 275 Internal Signal .................................................. 275 Response Time ........................................................ 275 Comparator Specifications ............................................... 364 Comparator Voltage Reference ....................................... 279 Accuracy and Error .................................................. 280 Associated Registers ............................................... 281 Configuring .............................................................. 279 Connection Considerations ...................................... 280 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 280 Operation During Sleep ........................................... 280 Compare (CCP Module) .................................................. 151 Associated Registers ............................................... 152 CCP Pin Configuration ............................................. 151 CCPR2 Register ...................................................... 151 Software Interrupt .................................................... 151 Special Event Trigger .............................. 145, 151, 270 Timer1/Timer3 Mode Selection ................................ 151 Computed GOTO ............................................................... 61 Configuration Bits ............................................................ 283 Configuration Register Protection .................................... 294 C C Compilers MPLAB C18 ............................................................. 346 MPLAB C30 ............................................................. 346 Calibration (A/D Converter) .............................................. 271 CALL ................................................................................ 310 CALLW ............................................................................. 339 Capture (CCP Module) ..................................................... 150 Associated Registers ............................................... 152 CCP Pin Configuration ............................................. 150 CCPR2H:CCPR2L Registers ................................... 150 Software Interrupt .................................................... 150 Timer1/Timer3 Mode Selection ................................ 150 Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) ........................................ 147 Capture Mode. See Capture. CCP Mode and Timer Resources ............................ 148 CCPRxH Register .................................................... 148 CCPRxL Register ..................................................... 148 Compare Mode. See Compare. Configuration ............................................................ 148 Interaction of CCP1 and CCP2 for Timer Resources .... 149 Interconnect Configurations ..................................... 148 Clock Sources .................................................................... 31 Default System Clock on Reset ................................. 32 Selection Using OSCCON Register ........................... 32 CLRF ................................................................................ 311 DS39770B-page 398 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY Core Features Easy Migration ............................................................. 7 Extended Instruction Set .............................................. 7 Memory Options ........................................................... 7 nanoWatt Technology .................................................. 7 Oscillator Options and Features .................................. 7 CPFSEQ .......................................................................... 312 CPFSGT .......................................................................... 313 CPFSLT ........................................................................... 313 Crystal Oscillator/Ceramic Resonator ................................ 33 Customer Change Notification Service ............................ 407 Customer Notification Service .......................................... 407 Customer Support ............................................................ 407 Errata ................................................................................... 5 EUSART Asynchronous Mode ................................................ 238 12-Bit Break Transmit and Receive ................. 243 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 241 Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 239 Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break ......................... 242 Receiver .......................................................... 240 Setting up 9-Bit Mode with Address Detect ..... 240 Transmitter ...................................................... 238 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) ................................... 233 Associated Registers ....................................... 233 Auto-Baud Rate Detect .................................... 236 Baud Rate Error, Calculating ........................... 233 Baud Rates, Asynchronous Modes ................. 234 High Baud Rate Select (BRGH Bit) ................. 233 Operation in Power-Managed Modes .............. 233 Sampling ......................................................... 233 Synchronous Master Mode ...................................... 244 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 246 Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 245 Reception ........................................................ 246 Transmission ................................................... 244 Synchronous Slave Mode ........................................ 247 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 248 Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 247 Reception ........................................................ 248 Transmission ................................................... 247 Extended Instruction Set ADDFSR .................................................................. 338 ADDULNK ............................................................... 338 CALLW .................................................................... 339 MOVSF .................................................................... 339 MOVSS .................................................................... 340 PUSHL ..................................................................... 340 SUBFSR .................................................................. 341 SUBULNK ................................................................ 341 External Oscillator Modes .................................................. 33 EC Modes .................................................................. 34 HS Modes .................................................................. 33 D Data Addressing Modes ..................................................... 74 Comparing Addressing Modes with the Extended Instruction Set Enabled ......................................... 78 Direct .......................................................................... 74 Indexed Literal Offset ................................................. 77 BSR ................................................................... 79 Instructions Affected .......................................... 77 Mapping Access Bank ....................................... 79 Indirect ....................................................................... 74 Inherent and Literal .................................................... 74 Data Memory ..................................................................... 64 Access Bank .............................................................. 67 Bank Select Register (BSR) ....................................... 64 Extended Instruction Set ............................................ 77 General Purpose Registers ........................................ 67 Memory Maps PIC18FX3J90/X4J90 Devices ........................... 65 PIC18FX5J90 Devices ....................................... 66 Special Function Registers ................................ 68 Special Function Registers ........................................ 68 DAW ................................................................................. 314 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables .................................................. 387 DC Characteristics ........................................................... 361 Power-Down and Supply Current ............................ 352 Supply Voltage ......................................................... 351 DCFSNZ .......................................................................... 315 DECF ............................................................................... 314 DECFSZ ........................................................................... 315 Default System Clock ......................................................... 32 Details on Individual Family Members ................................. 8 Development Support ...................................................... 345 Device Overview .................................................................. 7 Features (64-Pin Devices) ........................................... 9 Features (80-Pin Devices) ........................................... 9 Direct Addressing ............................................................... 75 F Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ........................................... 283, 292 Exiting Fail-Safe Operation ...................................... 293 Interrupts in Power-Managed Modes ...................... 293 POR or Wake-up from Sleep ................................... 293 WDT During Oscillator Failure ................................. 292 Fast Register Stack ........................................................... 61 Firmware Instructions ...................................................... 295 Flash Configuration Words .............................................. 283 Flash Program Memory ..................................................... 81 Associated Registers ................................................. 89 Control Registers ....................................................... 82 EECON1 and EECON2 ..................................... 82 TABLAT (Table Latch) Register ........................ 84 TBLPTR (Table Pointer) Register ...................... 84 Erase Sequence ........................................................ 86 Erasing ...................................................................... 86 Operation During Code-Protect ................................. 89 Reading ..................................................................... 85 Table Pointer Boundaries Based on Operation ....................... 84 Table Pointer Boundaries .......................................... 84 Table Reads and Table Writes .................................. 81 Write Sequence ......................................................... 87 Writing ....................................................................... 87 E Effect on Standard PIC18 Instructions ............................. 342 Effects of Power-Managed Modes on Various Clock Sources 36 Electrical Characteristics .................................................. 349 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART). See EUSART. ENVREG Pin .................................................................... 290 Equations A/D Acquisition Time ................................................ 268 A/D Minimum Charging Time ................................... 268 Calculating the Minimum Required Acquisition Time ..... 268 LCD Static and Dynamic Current ............................. 167 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 399 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY Unexpected Termination .................................... 89 Write Verify ........................................................ 89 FSCM. See Fail-Safe Clock Monitor. INFSNZ ............................................................................ 317 Initialization Conditions for all Registers ...................... 51-53 Instruction Cycle ................................................................ 62 Clocking Scheme ....................................................... 62 Flow/Pipelining ........................................................... 62 Instruction Set .................................................................. 295 ADDLW .................................................................... 301 ADDWF .................................................................... 301 ADDWF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) .................... 343 ADDWFC ................................................................. 302 ANDLW .................................................................... 302 ANDWF .................................................................... 303 BC ............................................................................ 303 BCF ......................................................................... 304 BN ............................................................................ 304 BNC ......................................................................... 305 BNN ......................................................................... 305 BNOV ...................................................................... 306 BNZ ......................................................................... 306 BOV ......................................................................... 309 BRA ......................................................................... 307 BSF .......................................................................... 307 BSF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) .......................... 343 BTFSC ..................................................................... 308 BTFSS ..................................................................... 308 BTG ......................................................................... 309 BZ ............................................................................ 310 CALL ........................................................................ 310 CLRF ....................................................................... 311 CLRWDT ................................................................. 311 COMF ...................................................................... 312 CPFSEQ .................................................................. 312 CPFSGT .................................................................. 313 CPFSLT ................................................................... 313 DAW ........................................................................ 314 DCFSNZ .................................................................. 315 DECF ....................................................................... 314 DECFSZ .................................................................. 315 Extended Instructions .............................................. 337 Considerations when Enabling ........................ 342 Syntax .............................................................. 337 Use with MPLAB IDE Tools ............................. 344 General Format ........................................................ 297 GOTO ...................................................................... 316 INCF ........................................................................ 316 INCFSZ .................................................................... 317 INFSNZ .................................................................... 317 IORLW ..................................................................... 318 IORWF ..................................................................... 318 LFSR ....................................................................... 319 MOVF ...................................................................... 319 MOVFF .................................................................... 320 MOVLB .................................................................... 320 MOVLW ................................................................... 321 MOVWF ................................................................... 321 MULLW .................................................................... 322 MULWF .................................................................... 322 NEGF ....................................................................... 323 NOP ......................................................................... 323 Opcode Field Descriptions ....................................... 296 POP ......................................................................... 324 PUSH ....................................................................... 324 RCALL ..................................................................... 325 RESET ..................................................................... 325 RETFIE .................................................................... 326 G GOTO ............................................................................... 316 H Hardware Multiplier ............................................................ 91 Introduction ................................................................ 91 Operation ................................................................... 91 Performance Comparison .......................................... 91 I I/O Ports ........................................................................... 109 Input Voltage Considerations ................................... 109 Open-Drain Outputs ................................................. 110 Output Pin Drive ....................................................... 109 Pin Capabilities ........................................................ 109 Pull-up Configuration ............................................... 110 I2C Mode (MSSP) ............................................................ 194 Acknowledge Sequence Timing ............................... 222 Associated Registers ............................................... 228 Baud Rate Generator ............................................... 215 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition .................. 226 During a Stop Condition ................................... 227 Clock Arbitration ....................................................... 216 Clock Stretching ....................................................... 208 10-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) ............. 208 10-Bit Slave Transmit Mode ............................. 208 7-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) ............... 208 7-Bit Slave Transmit Mode ............................... 208 Clock Synchronization and the CKP Bit ................... 209 Effects of a Reset ..................................................... 223 General Call Address Support ................................. 212 I2C Clock Rate w/BRG ............................................. 215 Master Mode ............................................................ 213 Baud Rate Generator ....................................... 215 Operation ......................................................... 214 Reception ......................................................... 219 Repeated Start Condition Timing ..................... 218 Start Condition Timing ..................................... 217 Transmission .................................................... 219 Multi-Master Communication, Bus Collision and Arbitration ................................................................... 223 Multi-Master Mode ................................................... 223 Operation ................................................................. 199 Read/Write Bit Information (R/W Bit) ............... 199, 201 Registers .................................................................. 194 Serial Clock (SCK/SCL) ........................................... 201 Slave Mode .............................................................. 199 Addressing ....................................................... 199 Addressing Masking ......................................... 200 Reception ......................................................... 201 Transmission .................................................... 201 Sleep Operation ....................................................... 223 Stop Condition Timing .............................................. 222 INCF ................................................................................. 316 INCFSZ ............................................................................ 317 In-Circuit Debugger .......................................................... 294 In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) ...................... 283, 294 Indexed Literal Offset Addressing and Standard PIC18 Instructions ............................. 342 Indexed Literal Offset Mode ............................................. 342 Indirect Addressing ............................................................ 75 DS39770B-page 400 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY RETLW .................................................................... 326 RETURN .................................................................. 327 RLCF ........................................................................ 327 RLNCF ..................................................................... 328 RRCF ....................................................................... 328 RRNCF .................................................................... 329 SETF ........................................................................ 329 SETF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) ........................ 343 SLEEP ..................................................................... 330 Standard Instructions ............................................... 295 SUBFWB .................................................................. 330 SUBLW .................................................................... 331 SUBWF .................................................................... 331 SUBWFB .................................................................. 332 SWAPF .................................................................... 332 TBLRD ..................................................................... 333 TBLWT ..................................................................... 334 TSTFSZ ................................................................... 335 XORLW .................................................................... 335 XORWF .................................................................... 336 INTCON Register RBIF Bit .................................................................... 112 INTCON Registers ............................................................. 95 Inter-Integrated Circuit. See I2C Mode. Internal Oscillator Block ..................................................... 35 Adjustment ................................................................. 35 INTOSC Frequency Drift ............................................ 35 INTOSC Output Frequency ........................................ 35 OSC1, OSC2 Pin Configuration ................................. 35 Internal RC Oscillator Use with WDT .......................................................... 289 Internal Voltage Regulator Specifications ........................ 364 Internet Address ............................................................... 407 Interrupt Sources ............................................................. 283 A/D Conversion Complete ....................................... 267 Capture Complete (CCP) ......................................... 150 Compare Complete (CCP) ....................................... 151 Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB4) .............................. 112 TMR0 Overflow ........................................................ 133 TMR1 Overflow ........................................................ 135 TMR2 to PR2 Match (PWM) .................................... 153 TMR3 Overflow ................................................ 143, 145 Interrupts ............................................................................ 93 During, Context Saving ............................................ 108 INTx Pin ................................................................... 108 PORTB, Interrupt-on-Change .................................. 108 TMR0 ....................................................................... 108 Interrupts, Flag Bits Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB4) Flag (RBIF Bit) ..... 112 INTOSC, INTRC. See Internal Oscillator Block. IORLW ............................................................................. 318 IORWF ............................................................................. 318 IPR Registers ................................................................... 104 Configuring the Module ........................................... 182 Frame Frequency .................................................... 168 Interrupts ................................................................. 180 LCDCON Register ................................................... 158 LCDDATA Register ................................................. 158 LCDPS Register ...................................................... 158 LCDREG Register ................................................... 158 LCDSE Register ...................................................... 158 Multiplex Types ........................................................ 167 Operation During Sleep ........................................... 181 Pixel Control ............................................................ 167 Segment Enables .................................................... 167 Waveform Generation ............................................. 168 LCD Driver ........................................................................... 8 LCDCON Register ........................................................... 158 LCDDATA Register .......................................................... 158 LCDPS Register .............................................................. 158 LCDREG Register ........................................................... 158 LCDSE Register .............................................................. 158 LFSR ............................................................................... 319 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Driver ................................. 157 Low-Voltage Detection ..................................................... 290 M Master Clear (MCLR) ......................................................... 47 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP). See MSSP. Memory Organization ........................................................ 57 Data Memory ............................................................. 64 Program Memory ....................................................... 57 Memory Programming Requirements .............................. 363 Microchip Internet Web Site ............................................. 407 MOVF .............................................................................. 319 MOVFF ............................................................................ 320 MOVLB ............................................................................ 320 MOVLW ........................................................................... 321 MOVSF ............................................................................ 339 MOVSS ............................................................................ 340 MOVWF ........................................................................... 321 MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker, Librarian .................. 346 MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger .................................. 347 MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance Universal In-Circuit Emulator ........................................................................ 347 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software . 345 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer ................................... 347 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System ............... 347 MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ............... 346 MSSP ACK Pulse ....................................................... 199, 201 Control Registers (general) ..................................... 185 Module Overview ..................................................... 185 SPI Master/Slave Connection .................................. 189 SSPBUF Register .................................................... 190 SSPSR Register ...................................................... 190 MULLW ............................................................................ 322 MULWF ............................................................................ 322 L LCD Associated Registers ............................................... 183 Bias Generation ....................................................... 163 Bias Configurations .......................................... 164 M0 and M1 ............................................... 164 M2 ............................................................ 165 M3 ............................................................ 166 Bias Types ....................................................... 163 LCD Voltage Regulator .................................... 163 Charge Pump ................................................... 164, 167 Clock Source Selection ............................................ 162 N NEGF ............................................................................... 323 NOP ................................................................................. 323 Notable Differences Between PIC18F8490 and PIC18F85J90 Families ................................................................... 393 LCD Module ............................................................. 394 Oscillator Options .................................................... 394 Other Peripherals .................................................... 395 Pin Differences ........................................................ 395 Power Requirements ............................................... 394 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 401 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY O Oscillator Configuration ...................................................... 29 EC .............................................................................. 29 ECPLL ........................................................................ 29 HS .............................................................................. 29 HSPLL ........................................................................ 29 Internal Oscillator Block ............................................. 35 INTOSC ..................................................................... 29 INTRC ........................................................................ 29 Oscillator Selection .......................................................... 283 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ......................................... 36 Oscillator Switching ............................................................ 31 Oscillator Transitions .......................................................... 32 Oscillator, Timer1 ..................................................... 135, 145 Oscillator, Timer3 ............................................................. 143 RE4/COM1 .......................................................... 16, 23 RE5/COM2 .......................................................... 16, 23 RE6/COM3 .......................................................... 16, 23 RE7/CCP2/SEG31 ............................................... 16, 23 RF1/AN6/C2OUT/SEG19 .................................... 17, 24 RF2/AN7/C1OUT/SEG20 .................................... 17, 24 RF3/AN8/SEG21 ................................................. 17, 24 RF4/AN9/SEG22 ................................................. 17, 24 RF5/AN10/CVREF/SEG23 .................................... 17, 24 RF6/AN11/SEG24 ............................................... 17, 24 RF7/AN5/SS/SEG25 ............................................ 17, 24 RG0/LCDBIAS0 ................................................... 18, 25 RG1/TX2/CK2 ...................................................... 18, 25 RG2/RX2/DT2/VLCAP1 ......................................... 18, 25 RG3/VLCAP2 ........................................................ 18, 25 RG4/SEG26 ......................................................... 18, 25 RH0/SEG47 ............................................................... 26 RH1/SEG46 ............................................................... 26 RH2/SEG45 ............................................................... 26 RH3/SEG44 ............................................................... 26 RH4/SEG40 ............................................................... 26 RH5/SEG41 ............................................................... 26 RH6/SEG42 ............................................................... 26 RH7/SEG43 ............................................................... 26 RJ0 ............................................................................ 27 RJ1/SEG33 ................................................................ 27 RJ2/SEG34 ................................................................ 27 RJ3/SEG35 ................................................................ 27 RJ4/SEG39 ................................................................ 27 RJ5/SEG38 ................................................................ 27 RJ6/SEG37 ................................................................ 27 RJ7/SEG36 ................................................................ 27 VDD ............................................................................ 27 VDD ............................................................................ 18 VDDCORE/VCAP ..................................................... 18, 27 VSS ............................................................................ 27 VSS ............................................................................ 18 Pinout I/O Descriptions PIC18F6XJ90 ............................................................ 12 PIC18F8XJ90 ............................................................ 19 PIR Registers ..................................................................... 98 PLL .................................................................................... 34 ECPLL Oscillator Mode ............................................. 34 HSPLL Oscillator Mode ............................................. 34 POP ................................................................................. 324 POR. See Power-on Reset. PORTA Associated Registers ............................................... 111 LATA Register ......................................................... 110 PORTA Register ...................................................... 110 TRISA Register ........................................................ 110 PORTB Associated Registers ............................................... 114 LATB Register ......................................................... 112 PORTB Register ...................................................... 112 RB7:RB4 Interrupt-on-Change Flag (RBIF Bit) ........ 112 TRISB Register ........................................................ 112 PORTC Associated Registers ............................................... 117 LATC Register ......................................................... 115 PORTC Register ...................................................... 115 RC3/SCK/SCL Pin ................................................... 201 TRISC Register ........................................................ 115 P Packaging ........................................................................ 389 Details ...................................................................... 390 Marking .................................................................... 389 PICSTART Plus Development Programmer .................... 348 PIE Registers ................................................................... 101 Pin Functions AVDD .......................................................................... 27 AVDD .......................................................................... 18 AVSS .......................................................................... 27 AVSS .......................................................................... 18 ENVREG .............................................................. 18, 27 LCDBIAS3 ............................................................ 16, 23 MCLR ................................................................... 12, 19 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 .................................................. 12, 19 OSC2/CLKO/RA6 ................................................ 12, 19 RA0/AN0 .............................................................. 12, 19 RA1/AN1/SEG18 ................................................. 12, 19 RA2/AN2/VREF- .................................................... 12, 19 RA3/AN3/VREF+ ................................................... 12, 19 RA4/T0CKI/SEG14 .............................................. 12, 19 RA5/AN4/SEG15 ................................................. 12, 19 RB0/INT0/SEG30 ................................................. 13, 20 RB1/INT1/SEG8 ................................................... 13, 20 RB2/INT2/SEG9 ................................................... 13, 20 RB3/INT3/SEG10 ................................................. 13, 20 RB4/KBI0/SEG11 ................................................. 13, 20 RB5/KBI1/SEG29 ................................................. 13, 20 RB6/KBI2/PGC .................................................... 13, 20 RB7/KBI3/PGD .................................................... 13, 20 RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI ........................................... 14, 21 RC1/T1OSI/CCP2/SEG32 ................................... 14, 21 RC2/CCP1/SEG13 ............................................... 14, 21 RC3/SCK/SCL/SEG17 ......................................... 14, 21 RC4/SDI/SDA/SEG16 .......................................... 14, 21 RC5/SDO/SEG12 ................................................ 14, 21 RC6/TX1/CK1/SEG27 .......................................... 14, 21 RC7/RX1/DT1/SEG28 ......................................... 14, 21 RD0/SEG0 ........................................................... 15, 22 RD0/SEG1 ........................................................... 15, 22 RD2/SEG2 ........................................................... 15, 22 RD3/SEG3 ........................................................... 15, 22 RD4/SEG4 ........................................................... 15, 22 RD5/SEG5 ........................................................... 15, 22 RD6/SEG6 ........................................................... 15, 22 RD7/SEG7 ........................................................... 15, 22 RE0/LCDBIAS1 .................................................... 16, 23 RE1/LCDBIAS2 .................................................... 16, 23 RE3/COM0 ........................................................... 16, 23 DS39770B-page 402 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY PORTD Associated Registers ............................................... 119 LATD Register ......................................................... 118 PORTD Register ...................................................... 118 TRISD Register ........................................................ 118 PORTE Associated Registers ............................................... 121 LATE Register .......................................................... 120 PORTE Register ...................................................... 120 TRISE Register ........................................................ 120 PORTF Associated Registers ............................................... 124 LATF Register .......................................................... 122 PORTF Register ...................................................... 122 TRISF Register ........................................................ 122 PORTG Associated Registers ............................................... 126 LATG Register ......................................................... 125 PORTG Register ...................................................... 125 TRISG Register ........................................................ 125 PORTH Associated Registers ............................................... 128 LATH Register ......................................................... 127 PORTH Register ...................................................... 127 TRISH Register ........................................................ 127 PORTJ Associated Registers ............................................... 130 LATJ Register .......................................................... 129 PORTJ Register ....................................................... 129 TRISJ Register ......................................................... 129 Power-Managed Modes ..................................................... 37 and SPI Operation ................................................... 193 Clock Sources ............................................................ 37 Clock Transitions and Status Indicators ..................... 38 Entering ...................................................................... 37 Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes .................................... 43 By Interrupt ........................................................ 43 By Reset ............................................................ 43 By WDT Time-out .............................................. 43 Without an Oscillator Start-up Delay .................. 43 Idle Modes ................................................................. 41 PRI_IDLE ........................................................... 42 RC_IDLE ............................................................ 43 SEC_IDLE ......................................................... 42 Multiple Sleep Commands ......................................... 38 Run Modes ................................................................. 38 PRI_RUN ........................................................... 38 RC_RUN ............................................................ 40 SEC_RUN .......................................................... 38 Selecting .................................................................... 37 Sleep Mode ................................................................ 41 Summary (table) ........................................................ 37 Power-on Reset (POR) ...................................................... 47 Power-up Delays ................................................................ 36 Power-up Timer (PWRT) ............................................. 36, 48 Time-out Sequence .................................................... 48 Prescaler, Capture ........................................................... 150 Prescaler, Timer0 ............................................................. 133 Prescaler, Timer2 ............................................................. 154 PRI_IDLE Mode ................................................................. 42 PRI_RUN Mode ................................................................. 38 Program Counter ............................................................... 59 PCL, PCH and PCU Registers ................................... 59 PCLATH and PCLATU Registers .............................. 59 Program Memory Extended Instruction Set ........................................... 76 Flash Configuration Words ........................................ 58 Hard Memory Vectors ................................................ 58 Instructions ................................................................ 63 Two-Word .......................................................... 63 Interrupt Vector .......................................................... 58 Look-up Tables .......................................................... 61 Memory Maps ............................................................ 57 Hard Vectors and Configuration Words ............. 58 Reset Vector .............................................................. 58 Program Verification and Code Protection ...................... 294 Programming, Device Instructions ................................... 295 Pulse-Width Modulation. See PWM (CCP Module). PUSH ............................................................................... 324 PUSH and POP Instructions .............................................. 60 PUSHL ............................................................................. 340 PWM (CCP Module) Associated Registers ............................................... 155 Duty Cycle ............................................................... 154 Example Frequencies/Resolutions .......................... 154 Period ...................................................................... 153 Setup for PWM Operation ....................................... 155 TMR2 to PR2 Match ................................................ 153 Q Q Clock ............................................................................ 154 R RAM. See Data Memory. RC_IDLE Mode .................................................................. 43 RC_RUN Mode .................................................................. 40 RCALL ............................................................................. 325 RCON Register Bit Status During Initialization .................................... 50 Reader Response ............................................................ 408 Register File ....................................................................... 67 Register File Summary ................................................ 69-72 Registers ADCON0 (A/D Control 0) ......................................... 263 ADCON1 (A/D Control 1) ......................................... 264 ADCON2 (A/D Control 2) ......................................... 265 BAUDCON1 (Baud Rate Control 1) ......................... 232 CCPxCON (CCPx Control) ...................................... 147 CMCON (Comparator Control) ................................ 273 CONFIG1H (Configuration 1 High) .......................... 285 CONFIG1L (Configuration 1 Low) ........................... 285 CONFIG2H (Configuration 2 High) .......................... 287 CONFIG2L (Configuration 2 Low) ........................... 286 CONFIG3H (Configuration 3 High) .......................... 287 CVRCON (Comparator Voltage Reference Control) 279 DEVID1 (Device ID Register 1) ............................... 288 DEVID2 (Device ID Register 2) ............................... 288 EECON1 (EEPROM Control 1) ................................. 83 INTCON (Interrupt Control) ....................................... 95 INTCON2 (Interrupt Control 2) .................................. 96 INTCON3 (Interrupt Control 3) .................................. 97 IPR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 1) ....................... 104 IPR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 2) ....................... 105 IPR3 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 3) ....................... 106 LCDCON (LCD Control) .......................................... 158 LCDDATAx (LCD Data) ........................................... 161 LCDPS (LCD Phase) ............................................... 159 LCDREG (LCD Voltage Regulator Control) ............. 163 LCDSEx (LCD Segment Enable) ............................. 160 OSCCON (Oscillator Control) .................................... 30 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 403 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY OSCTUNE (Oscillator Tuning) ................................... 31 PIE1 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 1) ........................ 101 PIE2 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 2) ........................ 102 PIE3 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 3) ........................ 103 PIR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) 1) ............. 98 PIR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) 2) ............. 99 PIR3 (Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) 3) ........... 100 RCON (Reset Control) ....................................... 46, 107 RCSTA1 (EUSART Receive Status and Control) .... 231 RCSTA2 (AUSART Receive Status and Control) .... 251 SSPCON1 (MSSP Control 1, I2C Mode) ................. 196 SSPCON1 (MSSP Control 1, SPI Mode) ................. 187 SSPCON2 (MSSP Control 2, I2C Master Mode) ..... 197 SSPCON2 (MSSP Control 2, I2C Slave Mode) ....... 198 SSPSTAT (MSSP Status, I2C Mode) ....................... 195 SSPSTAT (MSSP Status, SPI Mode) ...................... 186 STATUS ..................................................................... 73 STKPTR (Stack Pointer) ............................................ 60 T0CON (Timer0 Control) .......................................... 131 T1CON (Timer1 Control) .......................................... 135 T2CON (Timer2 Control) .......................................... 141 T3CON (Timer3 Control) .......................................... 143 TXSTA1 (EUSART Transmit Status and Control) .... 230 TXSTA2 (AUSART Transmit Status and Control) .... 250 WDTCON (Watchdog Timer Control) ....................... 289 RESET ............................................................................. 325 Reset .................................................................................. 45 Brown-out Reset (BOR) ............................................. 45 MCLR Reset, During Power-Managed Modes ........... 45 MCLR Reset, Normal Operation ................................ 45 Power-on Reset (POR) .............................................. 45 RESET Instruction ..................................................... 45 Stack Full Reset ......................................................... 45 Stack Underflow Reset .............................................. 45 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset ................................... 45 Resets .............................................................................. 283 Brown-out Reset (BOR) ........................................... 283 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ............................... 283 Power-on Reset (POR) ............................................ 283 Power-up Timer (PWRT) ......................................... 283 RETFIE ............................................................................ 326 RETLW ............................................................................. 326 RETURN .......................................................................... 327 Return Address Stack ........................................................ 59 Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) ........................................ 60 RLCF ................................................................................ 327 RLNCF ............................................................................. 328 RRCF ............................................................................... 328 RRNCF ............................................................................. 329 Special Event Trigger. See Compare (CCP Module). Special Features of the CPU ........................................... 283 SPI Mode (MSSP) Associated Registers ............................................... 193 Bus Mode Compatibility ........................................... 193 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 193 Enabling SPI I/O ...................................................... 189 Master Mode ............................................................ 190 Master/Slave Connection ......................................... 189 Operation ................................................................. 188 Operation in Power-Managed Modes ...................... 193 Serial Clock .............................................................. 185 Serial Data In ........................................................... 185 Serial Data Out ........................................................ 185 Slave Mode .............................................................. 191 Slave Select ............................................................. 185 Slave Select Synchronization .................................. 191 SPI Clock ................................................................. 190 Typical Connection .................................................. 189 SS .................................................................................... 185 SSPOV ............................................................................ 219 SSPOV Status Flag ......................................................... 219 SSPSTAT Register R/W Bit ............................................................ 199, 201 Stack Full/Underflow Resets .............................................. 61 SUBFSR .......................................................................... 341 SUBFWB ......................................................................... 330 SUBLW ............................................................................ 331 SUBULNK ........................................................................ 341 SUBWF ............................................................................ 331 SUBWFB ......................................................................... 332 SWAPF ............................................................................ 332 T Table Pointer Operations (table) ........................................ 84 Table Reads/Table Writes ................................................. 61 TBLRD ............................................................................. 333 TBLWT ............................................................................. 334 Timer0 .............................................................................. 131 Associated Registers ............................................... 133 Clock Source Select (T0CS Bit) ............................... 132 Operation ................................................................. 132 Overflow Interrupt .................................................... 133 Prescaler ................................................................. 133 Switching Assignment ..................................... 133 Prescaler Assignment (PSA Bit) .............................. 133 Prescaler Select (T0PS2:T0PS0 Bits) ..................... 133 Prescaler. See Prescaler, Timer0. Reads and Writes in 16-Bit Mode ............................ 132 Source Edge Select (T0SE Bit) ............................... 132 Timer1 .............................................................................. 135 16-Bit Read/Write Mode .......................................... 137 Associated Registers ............................................... 139 Interrupt ................................................................... 138 Operation ................................................................. 136 Oscillator .......................................................... 135, 137 Layout Considerations ..................................... 138 Oscillator, as Secondary Clock .................................. 31 Overflow Interrupt .................................................... 135 Resetting, Using the CCP Special Event Trigger .... 138 TMR1H Register ...................................................... 135 TMR1L Register ....................................................... 135 Use as a Clock Source ............................................ 137 Use as a Real-Time Clock ....................................... 138 S SCK .................................................................................. 185 SDI ................................................................................... 185 SDO ................................................................................. 185 SEC_IDLE Mode ................................................................ 42 SEC_RUN Mode ................................................................ 38 Serial Clock, SCK ............................................................. 185 Serial Data In (SDI) .......................................................... 185 Serial Data Out (SDO) ..................................................... 185 Serial Peripheral Interface. See SPI Mode. SETF ................................................................................ 329 Slave Select (SS) ............................................................. 185 SLEEP .............................................................................. 330 Sleep OSC1 and OSC2 Pin States ...................................... 36 Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM) .................................... 346 DS39770B-page 404 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY Timer2 .............................................................................. 141 Associated Registers ............................................... 142 Interrupt .................................................................... 142 Operation ................................................................. 141 Output ...................................................................... 142 PR2 Register ............................................................ 153 TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt .................................. 153 Timer3 .............................................................................. 143 16-Bit Read/Write Mode ........................................... 145 Associated Registers ............................................... 145 Operation ................................................................. 144 Oscillator .......................................................... 143, 145 Overflow Interrupt ............................................ 143, 145 Special Event Trigger (CCP) .................................... 145 TMR3H Register ...................................................... 143 TMR3L Register ....................................................... 143 Timing Diagrams A/D Conversion ........................................................ 385 Acknowledge Sequence .......................................... 222 Asynchronous Reception ................................. 241, 257 Asynchronous Transmission ............................ 239, 255 Asynchronous Transmission (Back to Back) ... 239, 255 Automatic Baud Rate Calculation ............................ 237 Auto-Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Normal Operation 242 Auto-Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Sleep ................... 242 Baud Rate Generator with Clock Arbitration ............ 216 BRG Overflow Sequence ......................................... 237 BRG Reset Due to SDA Arbitration During Start Condition ................................................................... 225 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition (Case 1) ...................................................................... 226 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition (Case 2) ...................................................................... 226 Bus Collision During a Start Condition (SCL = 0) .... 225 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 1) ...... 227 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 2) ...... 227 Bus Collision During Start Condition (SDA Only) ..... 224 Bus Collision for Transmit and Acknowledge ........... 223 Capture/Compare/PWM ........................................... 373 CLKO and I/O .......................................................... 370 Clock Synchronization ............................................. 209 Clock/Instruction Cycle .............................................. 62 EUSART/AUSART Synchronous Receive (Master/ Slave) ............................................................... 383 EUSART/AUSART Synchronous Transmission (Master/ Slave) ............................................................... 383 Example SPI Master Mode (CKE = 0) ..................... 374 Example SPI Master Mode (CKE = 1) ..................... 375 Example SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ....................... 376 Example SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ....................... 377 External Clock (All Modes Except PLL) ................... 368 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ............................................ 293 First Start Bit Timing ................................................ 217 I2C Bus Data ............................................................ 379 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits ............................................. 378 I2C Master Mode (7 or 10-Bit Transmission) ........... 220 I2C Master Mode (7-Bit Reception) .......................... 221 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Reception, SEN = 0) .......... 205 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Reception, SEN = 0, ADMSK = 01001) .............................................................. 206 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Reception, SEN = 1) .......... 211 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Transmission) ..................... 207 I2C Slave Mode (7-bit Reception, SEN = 0) ............. 202 I2C Slave Mode (7-bit Reception, SEN = 0, ADMSK = 01011) .............................................................. 203 I2C Slave Mode (7-Bit Reception, SEN = 1) ............ 210 I2C Slave Mode (7-Bit Transmission) ...................... 204 I2C Slave Mode General Call Address Sequence (7 or 10-Bit Address Mode) ...................................... 212 I2C Stop Condition Receive or Transmit Mode ........ 222 LCD Interrupt in Quarter Duty Cycle Drive .............. 180 LCD Sleep Entry/Exit When SLPEN = 1 or CS1:CS0 = 00 ......................................................................... 181 MSSP I2C Bus Data ................................................ 381 MSSP I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits ................................. 381 PWM Output ............................................................ 153 Repeated Start Condition ........................................ 218 Reset, Watchdog Timer (WDT), Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) and Power-up Timer (PWRT) ............... 371 Send Break Character Sequence ............................ 243 Slave Synchronization ............................................. 191 Slow Rise Time (MCLR Tied to VDD, VDD Rise > TPWRT) ........................................................................... 49 SPI Mode (Master Mode) ........................................ 190 SPI Mode (Slave Mode, CKE = 0) ........................... 192 SPI Mode (Slave Mode, CKE = 1) ........................... 192 Synchronous Reception (Master Mode, SREN) ..... 246, 260 Synchronous Transmission ............................. 244, 258 Synchronous Transmission (Through TXEN) .. 245, 259 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 1 ..................................................... 48 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 2 ..................................................... 49 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Tied to VDD, VDD Rise Tpwrt) ................................................. 48 Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock .......................... 372 Transition for Entry to Idle Mode ............................... 42 Transition for Entry to SEC_RUN Mode .................... 39 Transition for Entry to Sleep Mode ............................ 41 Transition for Two-Speed Start-up (INTRC to HSPLL) .. 291 Transition for Wake From Idle to Run Mode .............. 42 Transition for Wake from Sleep (HSPLL) .................. 41 Transition From RC_RUN Mode to PRI_RUN Mode . 40 Transition From SEC_RUN Mode to PRI_RUN Mode (HSPLL) ............................................................. 39 Transition to RC_RUN Mode ..................................... 40 Type-A in 1/2 MUX, 1/2 Bias Drive .......................... 170 Type-A in 1/2 MUX, 1/3 Bias Drive .......................... 172 Type-A in 1/3 MUX, 1/2 Bias Drive .......................... 174 Type-A in 1/3 MUX, 1/3 Bias Drive .......................... 176 Type-A in 1/4 MUX, 1/3 Bias Drive .......................... 178 Type-A/Type-B in Static Drive ................................. 169 Type-B in 1/2 MUX, 1/2 Bias Drive .......................... 171 Type-B in 1/2 MUX, 1/3 Bias Drive .......................... 173 Type-B in 1/3 MUX, 1/2 Bias Drive .......................... 175 Type-B in 1/3 MUX, 1/3 Bias Drive .......................... 177 Type-B in 1/4 MUX, 1/3 Bias Drive .......................... 179 (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 405 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY Timing Diagrams and Specifications Capture/Compare/PWM Requirements ................... 373 CLKO and I/O Requirements ................................... 370 EUSART/AUSART Synchronous Receive Requirements .......................................................................... 383 EUSART/AUSART Synchronous Transmission Requirements ............................................................... 383 Example SPI Mode Requirements (Master Mode, CKE = 0) ...................................................................... 374 Example SPI Mode Requirements (Master Mode, CKE = 1) ...................................................................... 375 Example SPI Mode Requirements (Slave Mode, CKE = 0) ...................................................................... 376 Example SPI Slave Mode Requirements (CKE = 1) 377 External Clock Requirements .................................. 368 I2C Bus Data Requirements (Slave Mode) .............. 380 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits Requirements (Slave Mode) ..... 378 Internal RC Accuracy ............................................... 369 MSSP I2C Bus Data Requirements ......................... 382 MSSP I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits Requirements .......... 381 PLL Clock ................................................................. 369 Reset, Watchdog Timer, Oscillator Start-up Timer, Power-up Timer and Brown-out Reset Requirements .. 371 Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock Requirements ... 372 Top-of-Stack Access .......................................................... 59 TSTFSZ ............................................................................ 335 Two-Speed Start-up ................................................. 283, 291 Two-Word Instructions Example Cases .......................................................... 63 W Watchdog Timer (WDT) ........................................... 283, 289 Associated Registers ............................................... 289 Control Register ....................................................... 289 During Oscillator Failure .......................................... 292 Programming Considerations .................................. 289 WCOL ...................................................... 217, 218, 219, 222 WCOL Status Flag ................................... 217, 218, 219, 222 WWW Address ................................................................ 407 WWW, On-Line Support ...................................................... 5 X XORLW ............................................................................ 335 XORWF ........................................................................... 336 V VDDCORE/VCAP Pin ........................................................... 290 Voltage Reference Specifications .................................... 364 Voltage Regulator (On-Chip) ............................................ 290 Brown-out Reset (BOR) ........................................... 291 Low-Voltage Detection (LVD) .................................. 290 Operation in Sleep Mode ......................................... 291 Power-up Requirements .......................................... 291 DS39770B-page 406 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means to make files and information easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information: * Product Support - Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user's guides and hardware support documents, latest software releases and archived software * General Technical Support - Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip consultant program member listing * Business of Microchip - Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives CUSTOMER SUPPORT Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels: * * * * Distributor or Representative Local Sales Office Field Application Engineer (FAE) Technical Support Customers should contact their distributor, representative or field application engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document. Technical support is available through the web site at: http://support.microchip.com CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION SERVICE Microchip's customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest. To register, access the Microchip web site at www.microchip.com, click on Customer Change Notification and follow the registration instructions. (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 407 PIC18F85J90 FAMILY READER RESPONSE It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150. Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document. To: RE: Technical Publications Manager Reader Response Total Pages Sent ________ From: Name Company Address City / State / ZIP / Country Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________ Application (optional): Would you like a reply? Y N Literature Number: DS39770B FAX: (______) _________ - _________ Device: PIC18F85J90 Family Questions: 1. What are the best features of this document? 2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs? 3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why? 4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject? 5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness? 6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)? 7. How would you improve this document? DS39770B-page 408 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F85J90 FAMILY PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office. PART NO. Device X Temperature Range /XX Package XXX Pattern Examples: a) b) Device PIC18F63J90/64J90/65J90(1), PIC18F83J90/84J90/85J90(1), PIC18F63J90/64J90/65J90T(2), PIC18F83J90/84J90/85J90T(2) PIC18F85J90-I/PT 301 = Industrial temp., TQFP package, QTP pattern #301. PIC18F63J90T-I/PT = Tape and reel, Industrial temp., TQFP package. Temperature Range I = -40C to +85C (Industrial) Package PT = TQFP (Thin Quad Flatpack) Pattern QTP, SQTP, Code or Special Requirements (blank otherwise) Note 1: F 2: T = Standard Voltage Range = in tape and reel (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39770B-page 409 WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE AMERICAS Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://support.microchip.com Web Address: www.microchip.com Atlanta Duluth, GA Tel: 678-957-9614 Fax: 678-957-1455 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Kokomo Kokomo, IN Tel: 765-864-8360 Fax: 765-864-8387 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 Santa Clara Santa Clara, CA Tel: 408-961-6444 Fax: 408-961-6445 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509 ASIA/PACIFIC Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Habour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 Fax: 86-28-8665-7889 China - Fuzhou Tel: 86-591-8750-3506 Fax: 86-591-8750-3521 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 China - Shunde Tel: 86-757-2839-5507 Fax: 86-757-2839-5571 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7250 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 ASIA/PACIFIC India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-4182-8400 Fax: 91-80-4182-8422 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-4160-8631 Fax: 91-11-4160-8632 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 Japan - Yokohama Tel: 81-45-471- 6166 Fax: 81-45-471-6122 Korea - Gumi Tel: 82-54-473-4301 Fax: 82-54-473-4302 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-646-8870 Fax: 60-4-646-5086 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-572-9526 Fax: 886-3-572-6459 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-536-4818 Fax: 886-7-536-4803 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2500-6610 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350 EUROPE Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-39 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 12/08/06 DS39770B-page 410 Preliminary (c) 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. |
Price & Availability of PIC18F85J9084J9083J90
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |